specifications - bidnet

SPECIFICATIONS

Project Manual

Volume 2 of 2

City of New Orleans

Criminal Evidence

Processing Complex

July 15, 2019

DOCUMENT 00003

1

City of New Orleans

Criminal Evidence Processing Complex

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

00003 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00005 PROJECT DIRECTORY

00007 SEALS/STAMP PAGES

DIVISION 0 – STANDARD PROJECTS Provided by City of New Orleans Capital Projects Administration

00110 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00300 FORM OF PROPOSAL

00500 SAMPLE AGREEMENT FORM

00600 BOND AND CERTIFICATES

00720 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

00730 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR FEMA CONTRACTS

00740 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR HUD CONTRACTS (PASSTHROUGH)

00750 SECTION 3 PROJECT PLAN

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010 SUMMARY OF WORK

01026 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

01035 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

01038 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

01050 PROJECT CONTROLS (SURVEYING)

01200 PROJECT MEETINGS

01230 ALTERNATES

01300 SUBMITTALS

01310 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS

01322 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

01580 PROJECT SIGN

01630 SUBSTITUTIONS PROCEDURES

01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT

01710 CLEANING

01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUTION

DOCUMENT 00003

2

02050 DEMOLITION

02100 SITE PREPARATION

02140 DEWATERING AND DRAINAGE

02200 EARTHWORK

02230 GRANULAR MATERIALS

02270 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

02311 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

02356 HIGH STRAIN DYNAMIC PILE TESTING

02361 TERMITE CONTROL

02365 PRESTRESSED, PRECAST CONCRETE PILES

02495 GEOTECHNICAL INSTRUMENTATION

02515 CONCRETE WALKWAYS

02577 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

02578 PERMEABLE ARTICULATING CONCRETE BLOCK

02580 PAVING STRIPING AND MARKING

02605 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

02616 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

02622 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) GRAVITY PIPE

02640 VALVES, HYDRANTS AND APPURTENANCES

02826 ORNAMENTAL METAL FENCES AND GATES

02900 LANDSCAPING FOR REFERENCE ONLY

02901 PLANTING SOILS FOR REFERENCE ONLY

02902 LANDSCAPING MAINTENANCE FOR REFERENCE ONLY

02931 LOAMING AND SODDING

DIVISION 3 -CONCRETE

03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK

03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE03301 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL

03301 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL

03313 LIGHTWEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE

03350 CONCRETE FINISHES

03450 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE

03553 POLISHED CONCRETE TOPPING

03600 GROUT

03740 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING CONCRETE

03800 CONCRETE ELECTRICAL RACEWAY ENCASEMENT

DIVISION 4 -MASONRY

04200 UNIT MASONRY

DIVISION 5 -METALS

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05310 STEEL FLOOR DECK

05311 STEEL ROOF DECK

DOCUMENT 00003

3

05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

05510 METAL STAIRS

05730 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS

06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY

06160 SHEATHING

06200 FINISH CARPENTRY

06401 FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELING

06610 SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07115 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

07140 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

07160 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

07190 WATER REPELLANTS

07210 BUILDING INSULATION

07421 INSULATED CORE METAL WALL PANELS

07430 COMPOSITE METAL PANEL SYSTEM

07520 SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES

07811 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

07850 FIRESTOPPING

07901 CAULKING AND JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS

08110 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08200 WOOD DOORS

08311 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

08330 COILING COUNTER DOORS

08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS

08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

08710 DOOR HARDWARE

08800 GLAZING

08830 MIRRORS

08911 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

DIVISION 9 -FINISHES

09111 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

09250 GYPSUM BOARD

09265 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFTWALL ASSEMBLIES

DOCUMENT 00003

4

09310 TILE

09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

09680 CARPET TILE

09720 WALLCOVERINGS

09900 PAINTING

09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

09967 INTUMESCENT PAINTS

09973 DRY ERASE COATINGS

DIVISION 10 ¬SPECIALTIES

10140 SIGNAGE

10155 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

10200 LOUVERS

10240 METAL ARCHITECTURAL MESH

10265 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION

10350 FLAGPOLE

10441 DEDICATION PLAQUE

10500 METAL LOCKERS

10511 METAL EVIDENCE LOCKERS

10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

10673 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING TRACK

10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

VOLUME 2

DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT

11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT

11400 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT

11451 APPLIANCES

11500 BALLISTIC RECOVERY SYSTEM

11610 LABORATORY FUME HOODS AND RELATED PRODUCTS

DIVISION 12 -FURNISHINGS

12240 ROLLER WINDOW SHADES

12360 LABORATORY CASEWORK

12480 ENTRANCE FLOOR MAT

DIVISION 13 ¬SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13100 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

13110 BULLET RESISTANT PARTITIONS AND EQUIPMENT

DOCUMENT 00003

5

DIVISION 13 ¬SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Continued)

13730 ACCESS CONTROL

13731 BURGLARY/ACCESS CONTROL/CCTV INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM

13732 VIDEO SECURITY SURVEILLANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

13852 DIGITAL ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

13911 IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

13915 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION PIPING

13921 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

13930 WET-PIPE FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

13935 DRY-PIPE FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

13974 FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES

13976 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

DIVISION 14 -CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14210 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

14450 VEHICLE LIFTS

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

15056 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT

15057 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

15058 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

15061 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

15062 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

15068 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

15071 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

15076 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

15077 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

15085 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

15086 DUCT INSULATION

15088 HVAC PIPING INSULATION

15091 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

15092 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

15093 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

15096 ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

15097 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

15098 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

15111 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

15112 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

15126 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

15127 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

DOCUMENT 00003

6

15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

15155 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

15160 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

15165 STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

15179 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

15181 HYDRONIC PIPING

15185 HYDRONIC PUMPS

15188 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEM

15412 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

15416 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

15417 COMMERCIAL URINALS

15421 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

15422 COMMERCIAL SINKS

15423 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

15426 DRINKING FOUNTAINS

15441 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

15485 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

15629 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS

15725 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

15815 METAL DUCTS

15820 DUCT ACCESSORIES

15840 AIR TERMINAL UNITS

15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

15900 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

15940 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16050 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING

16062 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

16073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

16091 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

16120 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

16130 RACEWAYS AND BOXES

16139 CABLE TRAYS

16140 WIRING DEVICES

16231 PACKED ENGINE GENERATORS

16264 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

16289 SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

DOCUMENT 00003

7

16410 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

16415 TRANSFER SWITCHES

16420 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

16442 PANELBOARDS

16461 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

16491 FUSES

16511 INTERIOR LIGHTING

16521 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

16711 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

16717 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

16721 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

APPENDIX A

GEOTECHNICAL DATA (FOR INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY)

APPENDIX B

Green Infrastructure SPECIAL PROVISIONS

GI 0100 GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE DEFINITION OF TERMS

GI 0124 GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

GI 0126 SITE ACTIVITY PLAN FOR PROJECTS CONTAINING GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

GI 0200 EARTHWORK FOR GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

GI 0204 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL FOR STORMWATER MANAGEMENT

FACILITIES

GI 0206 GEOSYNTHETICS FOR GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

GI 0605 PERMEABLE ARTICULATING CONCRETE BLOCK

GI 0703 DOMED DRAIN INLETS FOR GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

GI 0704 UNDERDRAINS FOR GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

GI 0708 MODULAR SUSPENDED PAVEMENT SYSTEMS

GI 0718 TREE AND VEGETATION PROTECTION FOR GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

GI 0720 GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE ESTABLISHMENT

GI 1003 AGGREGATES FOR GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

GI 1005 BIORETENTION SOILS FOR GREEN INFRASTRUCTURE

REFERENCE

CITY OF NEW ORLEANS, DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR STREET PAVING, 2015 EDITION – NOT INCLUDED

CITY OF NEW ORLEANS, DEPARTMENT OF PARKS AND PARKWAYS SPECIFICATIONS –

NOT INCLUDED

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Loading Dock EquipmentCriminal Evidence Processing Complex 11160 - 1

SECTION 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Dock Bumpers at Vehicle Inspection Bays & Loading Dock.

2. Dock Leveler at Loading Dock

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete” for concrete work for recessed loading dock equipment.

2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for loading dock platform edge.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Operating Range: Maximum amount of travel above and below the loading dock level.

B. Working Range: Recommended amount of travel above and below the loading dock level for which loading and unloading operations can take place.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For dock bumpers and dock leveler

B. Shop Drawings: For loading dock equipment. Include details and attachments to other work.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with loading dock equipment by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from steel plate complying with ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 55 (380).

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold formed.

D. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.



E. Wood: DOC PS 20 dimension lumber, select structural grade, kiln dried.

F. Pressure-Treated Wood: DOC PS 20 dimension lumber, select structural grade, kiln dried, and pressure treated with waterborne preservatives to comply with AWPA C2.

2.02 DOCK BUMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.

1. Chalfant Dock Equipment.

2. Durable Corporation.

3. Ellis Industries, Inc.

4. Pawling Corporation; Architectural Products Division.

5. Pioneer Loading Dock Equipment.

6. SPX Dock Products - Kelley.

B. Laminated-Tread Dock Bumper: Fabricated from multiple, uniformly thick plies cut from fabric-reinforced rubber tires. Laminate plies under pressure on not less than two 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter, steel supporting rods that are welded at one end to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, structural-steel end angle and secured with a nut and angle at the other end. Fabricate angles with predrilled anchor holes and sized to provide not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of tread plies extending beyond the face of closure angles.

1. Thickness: 4-1/2 inches (114 mm).

2. Vertical Style: 8 inches (203 mm) wide by 20 inches (508 mm) high.

2.03 STEEL FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize components as indicated to comply with the following:

1. ASTM A 123/A 123M for iron and steel loading dock equipment.

B. Galvanized-Steel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat in manufacturer's standard color.

2.04 DOCK LEVELER

A. Basis of Design: Rite-Hite Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler Model 2554

1. Available service rangesa. Vertical range

1) Above dock level: 3”2) Below dock level: 3”



2. Dynamically Rated Load Capacities – 3 mph & 10% grade or less a. 20K = 10,000 lbs.

3. Widtha. 66 in

4. Lip projection beyond bumper facea. 12” standard

2.05 OPERATION

A. Steps for operation of mechanical RHE

B. Remove handle from storage position in bumper

C. Insert handle into riser socket on RHE

D. Pull back on handle until lip is approximately horizontal. Force to actuate varies from 35 lbs. to 65 lbs. depending on model (longer, higher capacity models require more force to actuate). Handle position need not be lower than average operator’s hip height (approximately 30”). Total arc travel of handle is approximately 60 degrees.

E. Push forward on handle until lip extends and rests on truck bed.

2.06 STRUCTURAL REPLACEMENT

A. lip-deck section can be replaced without any grinding, burning, welding, etc.

2.07 DOCK LEVEL BUMPERS

A. 16” projection

B. 12” x 13” face

C. Bumper located on each side of RHE

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of loading dock equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate size and location of loading dock equipment indicated to be attached to or recessed into concrete or masonry, and furnish anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their installation.



3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Dock Bumpers: Attach dock bumpers to face of loading dock in a manner that complies with requirements indicated for spacing, arrangement, and position relative to top of platform and anchorage.

1. Welded Attachment: Plug-weld anchor holes in contact with steel inserts and fillet weld at other locations or:

2. Bolted Attachment: Attach dock bumpers to preset anchor bolts embedded in concrete or to cast-in-place inserts or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles. If preset anchor bolts, cast-in-place inserts, or threaded studs welded to embedded-steel plates or angles are not provided, attach dock bumpers by drilling and anchoring with expansion anchors and bolts.

END OF SECTION

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Refrigeration Equipment

Criminal Evidence Processing Complex 11400 - 1

SECTION 11400

REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Walk-in refrigeration equipment.

2. Alternate 1: Walk-in Refrigeration Freezer Combo Unit

B. Owner-Furnished Equipment: Where indicated, Owner will furnish equipment for installation

by Contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01230 Alternates

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate foodservice equipment layout and installation with other work, including layout and

installation of lighting fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components.

B. Coordinate locations and requirements of utility service connections.

C. Coordinate sizes, locations, and requirements of the following:

1. Overhead equipment supports.

2. Equipment bases.

3. Insulated floors.

4. Floor areas with positive slopes to drains.

5. Floor sinks and drains serving foodservice equipment.

6. Roof curbs, equipment supports, and penetrations.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's model number.

2. Accessories and components that will be included for Project.

3. Clearance requirements for access and maintenance.

4. Utility service connections for water, drainage, power, and fuel; include roughing-in

dimensions.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in

dimensions, fabrication details, utility service requirements, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each factory-applied color finish required, in manufacturer's

standard sizes.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: For lab facilities.

1. Indicate locations of refrigeration and freezer equipment and connections to utilities.

2. Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings.

3. Include plans and elevations; clearance requirements for equipment access and

maintenance; details of equipment supports; and utility service characteristics.

4. Include details of seismic bracing for equipment.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For foodservice equipment to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 01730 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:

a. For each refrigeration and freezer equipment items, include the following:

1) Designation indicated on Drawings.

2) Manufacturer's name and model number.

3) List of factory-authorized service agencies including addresses and

telephone numbers.

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with refrigeration and

freezer equipment by field measurements before fabrication. Indicate measurements on

Coordination Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace compressors that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failure includes, but is not limited to, inability to maintain set temperature.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL Classification

Mark certifying compliance with applicable NSF standards.

B. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are

evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable safety

standards, and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following:

1. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

2. NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."

3. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

4. NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations."

2.2 WALK-IN REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT

A. Walk-in Refrigeration Unit Base Bid:

1. Basis of Design: Basis of Design Master-Bilt

a. Manufacturer Rep Velkey & Associates 908 Highway 15 North - New Albany,

MS 38652

b. Phone: (662) 534-9061 - Toll Free: (800) 647-1284

2. Description: (1) 13' 6" long, 11' 7" wide, 8' 6" high, Master-Bilt 4" Urethane Foam Walk-

In, NSF Construction, FM Spec Tested Per ASTM E84-03. Cooler 35F. With Floor.

Floor Reinforced with 3/4'' Exterior Grade Plywood With (1) 36" Wide Interior Floor

Ramp.

a. Refrigeration Unit Model Number DLC36098ZZ/860567/01

1) 36" x 78" LH Hinged, Medium Temp, ColdSeal Max Door With ., Combo

Light Switch/Thermometer, 14 Watt LED Light Fixture, (2) K-1248 Spring-

Loaded Cam-Lift Hinges, K-091C Handle/Strike/Release, K-1094 Door

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Closer, Heavy-duty 10 Ga St/St Threshold, Int Ramp Threshold.Wall and

Ceiling Panels: Interlocking insulating panels.Floors: Insulated floor panels.

b. Temperature Monitoring System: Electronic monitoring and remote audible alarm

system that warns when temperatures register 10 deg F (6 deg C) above or below

set temperature.

c. Closure Panels and Trim: Include closure panels and trim.

d. Electrical Service: Equip unit for connection to service indicated on Drawings.

3. Finishes:

a. Exposed Exterior Finish: 22 Ga. Smooth Stainless Steel

b. Interior Finish: 22 Ga. Smooth Stainless Steel

c. Closure Panels and Trim: Matched to exposed exterior finish of panels.

d. Interior Floor and ramp: 16 Ga. Stainless Steel

4. Refrigeration Systems Remote system with preassembled condensing unit and evaporator

assemblies.

a. Exterior Condensing Units: Include winter control, crankcase heater, and enclosed

weatherproof housing.

5.

1) Model Number: MHMD012AC 1.25HP Cond Unit 208-230/60/3 R-

448A/R-449A, Hood & LAK, Medium Temp 35F., 10957 BTUH System

Capacity. With Mounted Timer. With Hermetic Compressor. Sized for 100

F. Temperature at Condenser. 38" (L) 27" (W) 18" (H) Base: M2 @ 240#.

MCA: 19, MOP: 20, RLA: 5, LRA: 36. Connections - Liquid: 0.375",

Suction: 0.875".

2) Model Number: E1MD0136A-TA Evap 115/60/1 Low Profile R-448A/R-

449A, Air Defrost , Medium Temp 35F., 13600 BTUH Evaporator

Capacity. 44" (L) 16" (W) 17" (H) @ 58#. Fan Amps: 1.6.

3) Model Number: MBWR030 4 Year Extended Compressor Warranty, 1.5-

3HP

B. Walk-in Refrigeration Freezer Combo Unit Alternate 1:

1. Basis of Design: Basis of Design Master-Bilt

a. Manufacturer Rep Velkey & Associates 908 Highway 15 North - New Albany,

MS 38652

b. Phone: (662) 534-9061 - Toll Free: (800) 647-1284

2. Description: (1) 27' 10 1/2" long, 11' 7" wide, 8' 6" high, Master-Bilt 4" Urethane Foam

Walk-In, NSF Construction, FM Spec Tested Per ASTM E84-03. Cooler/Freezer

Combination (2 compartments); Freezer -10F. With Floor, Cooler 35F. With Floor. Floor

Reinforced with 3/4'' Exterior Grade Plywood, With (1) 36" Wide Interior Floor Ramp.

a. Refrigeration Unit Model Number DLC36098ZZ/860564/02

1) 36" x 78" LH Hinged, Medium Temp, ColdSeal Max Door With ., Combo

Light Switch/Thermometer, 14 Watt LED Light Fixture, (2) K-1248 Spring-

Loaded Cam-Lift Hinges, K-091C Handle/Strike/Release, K-1094 Door

Closer, Heavy-duty 10 Ga St/St Threshold, Int Ramp Threshold.

b. Freezer Unit Model Number DLF36094ZZ/860564/01

1) 36" x 78" LH Hinged, Low Temp, ColdSeal Max Door With ., 3'' Pressure

Relief Port, Combo Light Switch/Thermometer, 14 Watt LED Light Fixture,

(2) K-1248 Spring-Loaded Cam-Lift Hinges, K-091C

Handle/Strike/Release, K-1094 Door Closer, Heavy-duty 10 Ga St/St

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Threshold.Wall and Ceiling Panels: Interlocking insulating panels.Floors:

Insulated floor panels.

c. Temperature Monitoring System: Electronic monitoring and remote audible alarm

system that warns when temperatures register 10 deg F (6 deg C) above or below

set temperature.

d. Closure Panels and Trim: Include closure panels and trim.

e. Electrical Service: Equip unit for connection to service indicated on Drawings.

3. Finishes:

a. Exposed Exterior Finish: 22 Ga. Smooth Stainless Steel

b. Interior Finish: 22 Ga. Smooth Stainless Steel

c. Closure Panels and Trim: Matched to exposed exterior finish of panels.

d. Interior Floor and ramp: 16 Ga. Stainless Steel

4. Refrigeration Systems Remote system with preassembled condensing unit and evaporator

assemblies.

a. Exterior Condensing Units: Include winter control, crankcase heater, and enclosed

weatherproof housing.

1) Model Number: ( 1 ) MSLD050AC 5HP Cond Unit 208-230/60/3 R-

448A/R-449A, Hood & LAK Scroll Compressor, Low Temp -10F., 14812

BTUH System Capacity. With Mounted Timer. Sized for 100 F.

Temperature at Condenser. 30" (L) 31" (W) 26" (H) Base: M3 @ 250#.


Suction: 0.875".

2) Model Number: ( 1 ) MHMD012AC 1.25HP Cond Unit 208-230/60/3 R-

448A/R-449A, Hood & LAK, Medium Temp 35F., 10957 BTUH System

Capacity. With Mounted Timer. With Hermetic Compressor. Sized for 100

F. Temperature at Condenser. 38" (L) 27" (W) 18" (H) Base: M2 @ 240#.


Suction: 0.875".

3) Model Number: ( 1 ) E1LD0166B-TE Evap 208-230/60/1 Low Profile

R-448A/R-449A, Elec Defrost , Low Temp -10F., 16600 BTUH Evaporator

Capacity. 60" (L) 16" (W) 17" (H) @ 85#. Fan Amps: 1.5, Defrost Amps:

14.3.

4) Model Number: ( 1 ) E1MD0136A-TA Evap 115/60/1 Low Profile R-

448A/R-449A, Air Defrost , Medium Temp 35F., 13600 BTUH Evaporator

Capacity. 44" (L) 16" (W) 17" (H) @ 58#. Fan Amps: 1.6.

5) Model Number: ( 1 ) MBWR050S 4 Year Extended Compressor

Warranty, 3.5-5HPS

6) Model Number: ( 1 ) MBWR030 4 Year Extended Compressor Warranty,

1.5-3HP

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Installation Accessories, General: NSF certified for end-use application indicated.

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; silicone. Type S (single component), Grade NS

(nonsag), Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic) related to exposure, and Use M, G, A, or O as

applicable to joint substrates indicated.

1. Public Health and Safety Requirements:

a. Sealant is certified for compliance with NSF standards for end-use application

indicated.

b. Washed and cured sealant complies with the FDA's regulations for use in areas that

come in contact with food.

2. Cylindrical Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C, closed-cell polyethylene, in

diameter greater than joint width.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Stainless-Steel Finishes:

1. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

2. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross

scratches.

a. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

b. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

B. Powder-Coat Finishes: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply

manufacturer's standard, baked-polymer, thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin

manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Connect equipment to utilities.

2. Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines through

equipment to make final connections.

B. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required.

1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler.

C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with manufacturer's

written installation instructions and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Install closure-trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant.

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Install joint sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous joint

backing unless otherwise indicated. Produce airtight, watertight, vermin-proof, sanitary joints.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition.

C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain foodservice equipment.

END OF SECTION

©2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



This page is blank.


City of New Orleans AppliancesCriminal Evidence Processing Complex 11451- 1

SECTION 11451APPLIANCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General: Provide Kitchen Appliances in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Section includes:

1. ADA Refrigerator/freezer.

2. ADA Dishwasher installed under 34” counter height.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 6 Section "Architectural Woodwork".

B. Division 15 Sections for water distribution piping connections.

C. Division 15 Sections for drainage and vent piping connections.

D. Division 16 Sections for services and connections.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Furnish submittals simultaneously with submittals for adjacent casework, specified in Division 6 “Architectural Woodwork”.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature, specifications and installation instructions describing the general properties of each appliance to be used in the Work.

C. Shop Drawings and Appliance Schedule: Submit shop drawings for the layout of the Work. Prepare plans and elevations at not less than 1/4-inch = 1-ft. scale.

D. Closeout Submittals: Submit for Owner’s documentation.

1. Warranties.

2. Maintenance Data.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for product's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Where appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Protect architectural woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage. Cover and keep covered with non-staining protective wrapping.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each appliance is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.02 BREAK ROOM APPLIANCES

A. ADA Refrigerator/Freezer:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: “GZS22DSJSS” 21.9 Cu. Ft. Counter-Depth Side-By-Side Refrigerator with Dispenser; GE.

2. Key Features:a. 70-inches tall.b. Integrated shelf support system – Provides strong, flexible support.c. Adjustable slide-out, spill-proof glass shelves - Raised edges help contain spills and make

clean up quick and easy.d. Adjustable Clear Look door bins - Hold gallon containers with ease and free up valuable

shelf space.e. Quick Ice setting - Create ice up to 50% faster than normal settings.f. Turbo Cool setting - Drops interior temperature to maintain freshness after frequent

openings.



g. ADA Compliant

3. Plumbing Requirements: Water supply and cut-off.a. Refer to Division 15 Sections and Drawings specific plumbing requirements.

4. Power Requirements: 120 Volt, 60Hhz, 15 Amp.a. Refer to Division 16 Sections and Drawings for specific electrical requirements

B. ADA Dishwasher:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: “GLDT696DSS” Built-In Dishwasher with Hidden Controls; GE.

2. Key Features:a. Bright annealed stainless steel interior, stainless steel tub and door liner.b. Control Type: Fully Integrated Electronic, top controls, 3 Touchpads.c. Dishwasher Control Features: Start/Reset Pad, 1 "Clean" Light, 1 "Sanitized", Light

Cycle Progress Indicators, 2 Digit Display Cycle Countdown.d. Wash System: 5-Level Towerless.e. Wash System Features: Dual Pumps and Motors, Automatic Temperature Control,

Automatic Temperature Sensing Drain Hose.f. Sensor: Clean Sensor.g. Wash Arms: 3-Direct Feed, Lower, Middle, Upper.h. Water Filtration System: 2-Stage Self-Cleaning Filtratrion with Extra Fine Filter.i. Dispenser: Rinse Aid with Indicator and Adjustment.j. Dishwasher Cycles: Heavy Wash, Normal Wash, Light Wash, Glasses Sanitize (NSF

Certified), Rinse Only.k. ADA-compliant - Dishwasher design allows for simple operation and easy access.l. Dishwasher Options: Delay Start 1-24 Hr.m. Rack Features: 1 piece molded Silverware Basket with 1 cell cover, Ball-Tipped Tines, 2

Plastic Utility Shelves with Stem Safe.n. Dishwasher Drying Features: Multi-Wattage Calrod Heater.o. Can be installed under 34” counter

3. Plumbing Requirements: Water supply and cut-off.a. Refer to Division 15 Sections and Drawings specific plumbing requirements.

4. Power Requirements: 120 Volt, 60Hhz, 9.1 Amp.a. Refer to Division 16 Sections and Drawings for specific electrical requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install the work of this Section, including components and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the Work. If there is a conflict between the requirements listed below and the construction drawings, this discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the architect.



3.02 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions under which the Work would be performed. Coordinate breakroom appliances with millwork and counter surface as well as electrical and water connections. Remedy conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

END OF SECTION

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Ballistic Recovery System

Criminal Evidence Processing Complex 11500- 1

SECTION 11500

BALLISTIC RECOVERY SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. General: Furnish and install one bullet recovery system for use in forensic examinations as shown

in the drawings and specifications. System must fit into the location provided without alteration to

architectural design. System will enable the recovery of projectiles fired from an assortment of

firearms with a maximum kinetic energy equivalent to a .338 win.mag. Cartridge. System will fully

contain water under all firing conditions. The system must be proof-tested to 13,000 ft-lbs. (50

bmg) before leaving the manufacturer. System construction will maximize safety of personnel and

minimize damage to the recovered projectile. Self-contained design will incorporate all necessary

components on a single, transportable structure. These components will include, but not be limited

to: one-piece shooting tank; water filtration; automatic lid operation; solid-state underwater

lighting; integral vacuum recovery of projectiles; and optionally, brass catcher; remote firing stand;

air spring suspension of the tank; hepa air filtration. Contractor will be required to demonstrate a

fully operational system prior to shipment. Further contractor requirements include on-site training,

5-yr. Tank warranty and two-year parts and labor warranty.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Division 15 Sections for water distribution piping connections.

B. Division 15 Sections for drainage and vent piping connections.

C. Division 16 Sections for services and connections.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature, specifications and installation instructions

describing the equipment to be used in the Work.

B. Shop Drawings and Schedule: Submit shop drawings for the layout of the Work. Prepare plans

and elevations at not less than 1/4-inch = 1-ft. scale indicating equipment layout, dimensions,

clearances, and location and size of services.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit for Owner’s documentation.

1. Warranties.

2. Operations and Maintenance Data.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. A written warranty covering performance, as well as defects in materials and workmanship will be

required. Bullet recovery vessel will be warranted against leaks for a period of 5 years, and that

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



any required repairs will be made without expense to customer. All other components will be

warranted against manufacturing defects for a period of 2 years.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and

regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary

approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for

installation and maintenance of unit required for this Project.

C. Product: system must be a regularly manufactured item by the vendor, with at least four prior law

enforcement installations. References, literature/brochures, and photographs must accompany

submittal. Proposal must address each of the requirements contained herein. Vendor must

demonstrate history of performance and financial responsibility. Provide list of five similar

projects.


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Protect during transit, delivery, storage and handling

to prevent damage. Cover and keep covered with non-staining protective wrapping.

B. Delivery/acceptance: System will be delivered complete within pledge date after receipt of order.

System will be ready for acceptance testing at the vendor’s facility within that time frame. Vendor

will deliver the system to customer’s facility.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: The Ballistic Recovery System is based on a system by Cyber

National Inc . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a

comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. The following items are to be constructed of type 304 or 316 stainless steel:

1. Bullet recovery tank and lid, lid hinges, air filter housing, all weldments and reinforcements to

the tank, all screws, bolts, nuts and washers used by the vendor in the construction of the

system. Nylok nuts are required where vibration and shock are present in mechanical fittings.

Underwater lighting housing will be constructed of stainless.

B. All plumbing and piping are to be constructed of stainless steel. The initial piping fittings at the

tank must be stainless steel due to the strength requirements imposed by shock.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. The use of galvanized piping or fittings is prohibited. The joining or abutment of dissimilar metals

that would provide conditions for galvanic corrosion is prohibited. Brass to stainless is allowed.

D. Platform walkway will be constructed of aluminum checker decking. Handrails will be constructed

of anodized aluminum tubing.

2.01 FABRICATION

A. The bullet recovery tank shall be a one-piece welded design having minimum overall interior

dimensions of 101 inches length, 28 inches width, and 57.5 inches height tank bottom, target end

and all remaining sides shall be a minimum of 1/4" stainless steel. The sides and bottom of the tank

will be welded as follows: tig welded inside and out, followed by mig welding inside and out,

yielding a total of four independent welds on all tank abutments. Interior and exterior sides will be

given a finish grade of 2b (satin). Inside and outside bottom will be free of scale and clean, but

otherwise unfinished.

B. Tank lid will be at least 11 gauge s-s, cross-folded diagonally for added rigidity, and finished with a

grade 2b. Lid will be raised and lowered by using a pneumatic, hydraulic, or motorized mechanical

means. Lid actuation should be smooth, quiet and crisp, and speed of opening or closing should be

user adjustable. The lid construction should be such that water or condensation does not drain

outside the tank when operated. Water must not be ejected or leaked from the system, including the

lid and shooting port during firing of any cartridge up to the system’s maximum rating, i.e. 338 win

mag. A simple means of disconnecting the actuator/s and manually raising the lid should be

incorporated.

C. Shooting port will be a 6" sch. 40 s-s tube, angled such that the centerline of the tube extends to the

abutment of the tank bottom and target end. Length of the tube will be sufficient to prevent a fired

projectile from leaving the tank, regardless of the firearm shooting angle. The shooting tube

extending into the tank will remain above the intended waterline of the tank, which is 48". The tube

will include a ‘v’ notched nylon or similar block to rest the barrel of the firearm under test.

D. Tank bracing will consist of no less than 3" x 1/4” s-s angle around the exterior at heights of 20",

40", and 57.5" (top edge).

E. A surface skimmer will be employed opposite the shooting port and plumbed in a manner to enable

floating debris to be rapidly cleared, thus providing an unobstructed view of the bottom.

F. Except for water inlet, vacuum wand and air duct, no other interior plumbing or piping will be

allowed. The entire floor of the tank will be unobstructed, visible and accessible to the operator.

Inlet and outlet ports for water and drain must be constructed in such a fashion as to prevent bullets

from entering or becoming trapped in the exterior piping.

G. The entire interior floor will be covered with a 1/8" white hdpe mat. The mat is secured with

removable stainless steel angle sufficient to insure the mat will not lift. No adhesive or sealant is

used. The mat is easily removed and replaced.

H. A shooting platform of suitable height will be incorporated into the structure. The platform will

allow a minimum of 48" distance between the shooting port and the rear handrails. A 24" walkway

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



of the same height will traverse the entire length of the tank. Platform surface will be constructed of

1/8" aluminum checker decking. An accessory tray for firearms and ammunition will be provided.

I. Two tiers of anodized aluminum tube handrails will enclose the entire platform and walkway.

J. Entire structure, including all operating systems, will be mounted on a single, portable platform, the

footprint not to exceed 16 feet in length and approximately 5 feet wide.

2.02 INTERIOR LIGHTING

A. The interior of the tank will be illuminated with a minimum of 100 watts equivalent solid-state

(led) lighting. The interior lighting circuit must be driven from a low voltage transformer intended

for underwater lighting, ul rated, and powered from a ground-fault interrupter circuit breaker.

B. The lamp will be mounted below the water line in a water-tight housing of s-s. The lamp and

housing must be able to withstand the shock imposed by firing without damaging the watertight

integrity of the housing.

C. The lamp must be conveniently replaceable without draining the tank.

2.03 BULLET RECOVERY

A. Bullets will be easily and quickly recovered from the bottom of the tank. An integrated vacuum

system and wand attachment will be utilized, with the capability of gathering a minimum of twelve

44 magnum, 180 grain projectiles in a single batch.

B. After gathering, the projectiles and their accompanying fragments will be discharged into a mesh

stainless steel basket using a simple operator control. Recovery procedure will enable the operator

to access the entire bottom area of the tank from the walkway. The vacuum system will have the

additional capability of cleaning the tank using the wand and a supplied cleaning accessory.

2.04 PLUMBING/PIPING

A. Isolation valves will be appropriately provided and will be of bronze with stainless wetted parts.

B. If the tank is to be free-floating, all plumbing and electrical to the tank must be provided with

flexible connections.

C. Supply water connection is 3/4" fpt at city pressure.

2.05 WATER FILTRATION

A. A commercial grade custom stainless steel water pump and high performance cartridge filter will be

provided. Pump will be continuous-duty rated to at least 10gpm capacity with sufficient pressure to

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



establish a visible surface flow from front to rear of tank. Pump must be protected by a loss of

pressure switch with a delay-on-make time delay to enable a restart in the event of loss of prime.

2.06 AIR FILTRATION

A. A high-pressure blower capable of evacuating the tank air volume within10 seconds will be

provided. Blower must be capable of pulling air from around the shooter and into the tank without

exposing the shooter to airborne lead and particulates.

B. The exhaust system shall be circuited as follows: room air is drawn into the tank through the

shooting port, exhausted from the tank through a plenum, into the filter box, into the intake side of

the blower, and discharged to room atmosphere. The circuiting must prevent the infiltration of

water into the filter cabinet resulting from high-energy blasts.

C. The filter housing may be stainless steel, (see materials) and constructed in a manner that prevents

the bypassing of air-borne lead particles into the atmosphere. Filter elements will consist of a 30%

pre-filter and a laboratory-certified 99.97% hepa filter.

2.07 ELECTRICAL/CONTROLS

A. A single power source shall be utilized, 115 vac, 40 amps single phase. Customer will provide a

wall-mounted disconnect for same. The operation of the water pump, air blower, interior light, and

the raise/lower lid functions shall be remotely controlled from the shooting platform. The

enclosures for the remote box and the main control panel will be constructed of stainless or

aluminum, and the enclosures and user switches will be nema 12 rated. A ‘sonalert’ type audible

warning device must be activated when the lid is commanded to the down position. When the air

blower is engaged, the water pump will be interlocked so as to simultaneously disengage.

B. If the tank is to be isolated from the frame by suspension on air springs, suitable grounding of the

tank to the frame, and from the frame to earth ground will be ensured. Power for all electrical

components must be provided through vendor-supplied gfi breakers. All plumbing and electrical to

the tank must be provided with flexible connections.

C. All electrical work performed will conform to the latest edition of the national electrical code.

2.08 ACCESSORIES TO BE PROVIDED:

A. Brass catcher

1. Catches ejected brass from semi-automatic handguns or rifles.

B. Accessory tray

1. 12" x 36" padded tray for holding firearms, ammunition and evidence. May be mounted at any

location along top handrail.

C. Remote firing stand

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Must capture and hold firearm rigidly in position, enabling the operator to fire a suspected

faulty weapon from a safe distance. Fully-adjustable fixture will mount on the tank structure

and self-align with the shooting port centerline. Must accommodate handguns and long guns

with or without magazines.

D. Air spring isolation

1. Four independently inflatable air springs, 2000 lbs. Capacity each, to enable the containment

vessel to “free-float”. Isolates the vessel from the building structure, minimizing the shock

transmitted when firing.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install the work of this Section, including components and accessories

in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are

shown or specified, and where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure

satisfactory performance of the Work. If there is a conflict between the requirements listed below

and the construction drawings, this discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the architect.

3.01 DELIVERY/ACCEPTANCE

A. System will be delivered complete within pledge date after receipt of order. System will be ready

for acceptance testing at the vendor’s facility within that time frame. Vendor will deliver the system

to customer’s facility.

B. Testing will include live firing by designated firearms examiner

C. Vendor will notify the assigned representative of customer two weeks prior to planned shipping

date. Upon acceptance, vendor will be authorized to ship the system to customer’s facility.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. It is the contractor’s responsibility to off load the equipment from the delivery trailer and place it

within the facility. Coordination to complete the installation is the responsibility of the contractor

and the supplier.

B. Contractor is to provide stubs for drain, water supply and electrical, all within 10 ft. Of the system’s

position. Full coordination of the procurement and installation of the system will be the

responsibility of the contractor including make all electrical and plumbing connections to the

system, and provide start-up services to make the system completely operational.

C. Provide on-site instruction in the proper operation and maintenance of the system. Provide

schematics, operating and maintenance manual.

D. Include acceptance testing prior to delivery of the system, shipping to the job site, start-up, on-site

instruction for operation and maintenance of the system, and all electrical, piping drawings,

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



operation and maintenance manuals, and documentation sufficient to install and maintain the

system.

3.03 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions under which

the Work would be performed.

B. Protect system from construction dust and debris until time to turn over to building owner.

END OF SECTION

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



This page is blank.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Laboratory Fume Hoods and Related Products


SECTION 11610 – LABORATORY FUME HOODS AND RELATED PRODUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Bench-top High-Performance Laboratory Fume Hoods.

2. Service fixtures (ie. water, gas, etc.) and electrical service fittings in fume hoods.

3. Piping and wiring within service fittings, light fixtures, switches, and other electrical

devices.

4. Fume hood base support.

5. Work Surfaces within fume hoods.

6. Laboratory sinks and cup sinks in fume hoods.

7. Filler panels and ceiling enclosures for fume hoods.


1. Section : Furnish and installation of plumbing utilities and final connections to

fume hoods.

2. Section : Furnishing and installation of exhaust duct work and equipment, and

final connection of hoods.

3. Section : Furnishing and installation of electrical utilities and final connections

to hoods.

1.02 SCOPE AND CLASSIFICATION

A. This specification covers the requirements for the purchase of bench mounted laboratory fume

hoods for use with remote exhaust blower systems.

B. Bench-mounted laboratory fume hoods in 4, 5, 6 and 8-foot widths, internal depth of 27.2" and

external depth of 37.7" is required.

C. This specification sets the intent for quality, performance and appearance.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. The laboratory hoods must conform to the following regulations and standards.

1. SEFA 1-2010, Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association , Recommended Practices

for Laboratory Fume Hoods

2. SEFA 8-2010, Recommended Practices for Laboratory Grade Metal Casework, 8.0

Cabinet Surface Finish Tests

3. NFPA 45-2011, National Fire Protection Association, Fire Protection for Laboratories

Using Chemicals

4. ASTM E84-09C, ANSI 2.5, NFPA 255, UL 723, UBC 8-1 (42-1), Standard Test method

for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

5. ASHRAE 110-95, American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning

Engineers, Method of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. ANSI/AIHA Z9.5-2011, American Industrial Hygiene Association, Laboratory

Ventilation

7. OSHA, Federal Register 29 CFR Part 1910, Occupational Safety & Health

Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational exposures to hazardous

chemicals in laboratories.

B. The laboratory fume hoods must carry the ETL listed mark for the following.

1. UL 61010-1 (formerly 3101-1), Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Electrical Equipment for

Laboratory Use

2. CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1, Canadian Standards Association, Safety Requirements for

Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use

3. UL 1805, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard for Laboratory Hoods and Cabinets

C. 230 volt model fume hoods must carry the CE conformity marking as required by the Council

of European Communities.


A. General Design Requirements (See Part 2 for details)

1. Fume hoods shall function as ventilated, enclosed workspaces, designed to capture,

contain and exhaust fumes, vapors and particulate matter produced or generated within the

enclosure.

2. Fume hood shall be factory designed to function as a by-pass fume hood or as a variable

air volume fume hood without modification.

3. Structure and Materials of construction

a. Hoods are of double-wall construction

b. Powder-coated, cold rolled steel exterior

c. Galvanized steel support members

d. Sheet molded composite panel internal liner

4. Baffles

a. Perforated primary baffle designed to pull air in horizontal streams to minimize the

air roll pattern associated with traditional fume hoods.

b. Baffle slot pattern designed to optimize face velocity profile.

c. A secondary baffle is located behind the primary perforated baffle to counteract

upward air streams that produce roll.

d. Moving or adjustable baffles are not acceptable

5. Sash

a. Maximum opening is 28".

b. Unobstructed viewing height is 37.5".

c. Hood incorporates a perforated sash handle to bleed air into the hood chamber

directing fume concentrations away from the user's breathing zone.

6. Airfoil:

a. Hoods are provided with an air foil across the bottom of the sash area to allow

airflow into the hood regardless of user's position.

7. Hoods are provided with an upper dilution air supply for by-pass air to bathe the sash

interior and upper interior and to provide 5-10% of the hood's air volume requirements.

8. Besides the exhaust blower, no additional blowers are required for specified containment.

9. Access for maintenance is from both the front, interior, and exterior sides of the hood.

10. Services:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Furnishing and delivering all service outlets, accessory fittings, electrical

receptacles and switches, as listed in these specifications, equipment schedules or

as shown on drawings.

b. Plumbing fittings mounted on the fume hood superstructures shall be pre-plumbed

per section 2.03.

c. Final plumbing and electrical connections are the responsibility of those

contractors fulfilling requirements of Divisions [15 and 16].

d. All electrical services are pre-wired to a single point internal junction box at the

top right of the hood.

11. Hoods without service fixtures pass through a 38" opening without disassembly.

B. Containment

1. The purpose of this section is to set a standard of performance for the bidder’s laboratory

fume hood before award of contract, and may not necessarily represent the operating

conditions of the hoods after installation. Before or after award of contract, owners may

require representative witness to said testing at their option, with failure to meet passing

criteria as grounds for rejection of the bidder. Test data shall be provided at no cost to the

owner.

2. Evaluation of manufacturer’s standard product shall take place in manufacturer’s test

facility meeting the following criteria.

a. Lab to be located at manufacturer’s place of business for the testing of bench-

mounted laboratory hoods in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 110.

b. Room shall accommodate hoods up to 16’ wide, while maintaining sufficient area

so that a minimum of 15 feet of clear space is available in front of and 5’ on both

sides of hoods for viewing tests.

c. The facility's ventilation system shall have adequate heating and air conditioning

so that room air temperatures can be maintained within the desired ranges.

d. One hundred percent non-recirculated air to be both carbon and HEPA filtered to

ensure removal of contaminants that could interfere with containment testing

before entering the lab.

e. Make-up air to the test room shall be ceiling-supplied through any combination of

multiple diffusers to either minimize adverse airflow, or increase it depending on

test objectives.

f. Exhaust volumes shall be computer controlled and measured via AMCA calibrated

orifices and flow station at each exhaust trunk.

g. Room pressurization must be digitally monitored, and variable depending on test

objectives.

h. All equipment must be properly calibrated.

i. Qualified personnel familiar with the laboratory and its operation shall be available

to perform the test.

j. Include the following instrumentation and test equipment:

1) Properly calibrated hot wire thermal anemometer capable of measuring air

velocities from 10 to 600 ft/minute; correlate with computer data acquisition

format to provide simultaneous readings at all points.

2) Theatrical smoke generator or other source of high volume smoke.

3) Smoke tubes or other source of localized smoke.

4) Leakmeter with traceable calibration, calibrated just before test, to indicated

concentration of sulfur hexafluoride.

5) Tracer gas: Sulfur hexafluoride supplied from a cylinder with two stage

regulator.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6) Adjustable mannequin, 5' 0' to 5'8" in height, with reasonable human

proportions, clothed in a smock

7) Inclined manometer with graduations no greater than 0.2 inch of water.

8) Ejector system: Tracer gas ejector built to specific ASHRAE-110

requirements.

9) Critical orifice: Sized to provide tracer gas at four or eight liters per minute

at an upstream pressure sufficient to maintain release rate.

10) Data acquisition software to include HoodPro™ and LabMeasurePro™

from Exposure Control Technologies, Inc.

3. Hood shall be tested to ASHRAE 110 modified test method as detailed below.

4. Some fume hoods may use face velocity controls, motorized baffles, integral auxiliary

make up, or supply fans. Because all of these devices are subject to failure, containment

testing shall show both operational containment and product containment with these

systems off.

5. Fume hood sashes shall be placed in their full open position, at least 28” from the work

surface, unless noted otherwise.

6. Ambient Temperature: 68 to 74 degrees F

7. Average Face Velocity: Face velocity average shall be 40 and 50fpm, as noted below in

subsection 8.d, parts 1 and 2 respectively, plus or minus 5%.

a. An imaginary grid is formed comprised of equal 12” by 12” squares, or smaller,

across the face opening of the laboratory hood. Airflow velocity readings are

taken at the intersections of these grids with calibrated hot wire anemometer over a

twenty second period of time. Probes shall communicate readings to a computer

data acquisition package, which will provide an average of each reading over the

one-minute period and also an overall average upon completion of data acquisition.

Face velocity shall be determined by averaging readings at the hood face.

b. Average face velocity must be achieved without exceeding the CFM noted in part

C.

8. Tracer Gas Detection: Hood shall achieve a rating of 4.0AM0.00 maximum average and

4.0AM0.01 maximum spike (unless specifically otherwise noted), wherein:

a. 4.0 = tracer gas release in liters/minute, AM = as manufactured, 0.01 = tracer gas

in parts per million (PPM)

b. With the ejector body 6" from the rear of the sash plane, the test shall be conducted

for each ejector position noted.

1) Left position with ejector 12" from the left interior wall.

2) Center position with ejector equidistant from the sidewalls.

3) Right position with ejector 12" from the right interior wall.

c. Install mannequin positioned in front of the hood, centered on the ejector.

d. Detector probes shall be placed 3” in front of the sash plane. The test shall be

conducted for each detector probe position and corresponding face velocity.

1) Detector probe in the region of the nose and mouth of the mannequin.

Test with average face velocity of 40 fpm.

2) With the mannequin height reduced 4”, place detector probe in the chest of

the mannequin, and even with the height of the ejector. Test with average

face velocity of 50 fpm.

e. Open tracer gas valve, and collect readings with a computer data acquisition

package, which is capable of monitoring and visually recording a minimum of one

reading per second for a minimal five minute time period for each position.

f. The single control rating of the fume hood shall be the results of the test position

yielding the highest average levels of tracer gas in any of the six

mannequin/ejector configurations.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



g. With the ejector and mannequin in the center position, detector probe in the region

of the nose and mouth of the mannequin, average face velocity of 40 fpm, tracer

gas released, and concentration recorded, open and close the sash in a smooth

motion. Test to be repeated three times, with peak values of 0.01 PPM or less.

h. With the mannequin removed, the periphery of the hood is traversed by the probe

at 1” in front of the hood opening at a rate of 3 inches per second. The hood shall

have a maximum perimeter reading of 0.01 PPM or less.

9. Flow Visualization:

a. Test the operation of the lower air bypass airflow opening and hood periphery by

introducing light smoke under the air foil, and around the perimeter of the sash

opening. If any smoke that enters the hood reverses directions and escapes from

any of these locations, the hood fails this portion of the test and receives no rating.

b. Introduce smoke along both walls and the hood floor in a line parallel to the hood

face and 6 inches (152 mm) back into the hood. Define air movement toward the

face of the hood as reverse airflow and define lack of movement as dead air space.

All smoke should be carried to the back of the hood and out.

c. Introduce a large volume of smoke at the work surface in the center of the hood,

and 6” inside the plane of the sash. The smoke shall not get entrained in an interior

vortex, and shall clear in a single pass.

10. All data on the above, including instrumentation and equipment, and test conditions shall

be provided on a report, including the average face velocities, and a separate graph-type

performance curve on all tracer gas tests for all required fume hood widths. Performance

test data for a 6’ representative hood shall be conducted by an independent testing agency

and by a specific individual certified to perform such tests by the National Environmental

Balancing Bureau (NEBB).

C. Efficiencies

1. The fume hood shall maintain constant volumetric rate (+/- 5 CFM) and static pressure

losses (+/- 0.01” H2O) across all sash positions. Without any modifications, the hood

shall also maintain a sufficiently restricted by-pass for use with a variable air volume

(VAV) system.

2. The fume hood shall demonstrate a minimization of the volumetric rate of air (CFM)

requirement at any given face velocity. Required CFM to achieve desired face velocity

shall not exceed that which is noted in the chart below.

3. The fume hood shall demonstrate a minimization of static pressure loss (inches of H2O) at

any given CFM. Static pressure loss at desired face velocity, and corresponding CFM,

shall not exceed that which is noted in the chart below.

*There is not a

written standard that

would suggest a

design face velocity

below 60 fpm. This

data is for

informational

purposes only.

4' Hood 5' Hood 6' Hood 8' Hood

100 705, 0.26" 930, 0.32" 1150, 0.41" 1600, 0.29"

80 565, 0.17" 745, 0.20" 920, 0.25" 1280, 0.19"

60 425, 0.09" 560, 0.12" 690, 0.15" 960, 0.10"

50* 350, 0.06" 465, 0.08" 575, 0.10" 800, 0.07"

40* 280, 0.04" 370, 0.05" 460, 0.07" 640, 0.05"

4' Hood 5' Hood 6' Hood 8' Hood

100 440, 0.10" 580, 0.12" 720, 0.16" 1000, 0.11"

80 350, 0.06" 465, 0.08" 575, 0.10" 800, 0.07"

60 265, 0.04" 350, 0.05" 430, 0.06" 600, 0.04"

Face Velocity (fpm)

Sash at 18" open

Face Velocity (fpm)

Sash at 28" open

Airflow Volumetric Rate (CFM) @

Static Pressure (inches of water)

Airflow Volumetric Rate (CFM) @

Static Pressure (inches of water)

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Noise Criterion: The hood shall have a Noise Criterion (NC) rating of less than 50; measured

36” in front of the hood with full open sash, at 100 fpm face velocity. NC is a factor of sound

pressure level (dB) and frequency.

E. Illumination: Shall be a minimum average of 80 foot-candles inside the work area. Work area

is defined as the area inside the lined portion of the fume hood, from the face of baffle to sash

plane, from interior left to interior right, and from the work surface to a height of 28 inches.

F. Materials of Construction: Interior and Exterior materials of construction and finishes shall meet

the requirements in Part 2 of this specification.


A. Fume hoods shall be designed, including comprehensive engineering analysis, by a qualified,

licensed Professional Engineer.

B. Manufacturer’s Qualifications

1. ISO 9001 Certified manufacturing plant and processes.

2. Ten installations of equal or larger size and requirements. Provide contact at each.

3. Only hood manufacturers who have had fume hoods as a principal product for 50 years

are considered.

C. Fume hoods shall be Made in America

1. 95% or more of raw material and component suppliers shall be United States based.

2. Stainless and cold rolled steel used in manufacturing shall be sourced from United States

steel mills.

3. Final product must be fabricated and assembled within the United States of America.

4. Owner reserves the right to evaluate Made in America claims for compliance with the

Bureau of Consumer Protection.

D. Supply all equipment in accordance with this specification. Offering a product differing in

materials, construction, or performance from this specification requires written approval

obtained seven days or more before the proposal deadline.

E. The owner/architect reserves the right to reject qualified or alternate proposals and to award

based on product value where such action assures the owner greater integrity of product.

F. Manufacturer's warranty against defects in material or workmanship on its fume hoods will be

for 1 year from date of installation or 2 years from date of purchase, whichever is sooner, and

includes replacement of parts (except lamps) and labor.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals

1. Laboratory hood specification sheets and product manuals shall be submitted by the hood

manufacturer upon request, and include safe and proper operation and maintenance

information.

2. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Indicate details for anchoring fume hoods to permanent building construction

including locations of blocking and other supports.

b. Indicate locations and types of service fittings together with associated service

supply connection required.

c. Indicate duct connections, electrical connections, and locations of access panels.

d. Include roughing-in information for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical

connections.

e. Provide face opening, volumetric rates, and static pressure drop data.

3. Submit a document detailing the information supplied on the Hood Safety Practices Label

to verify compliance to specifications.

B. Informational Submittals

1. Product Test Reports: Showing compliance with specified performance requirements,

including NEBB representative test report as defined previously.

2. Independent validation:

a. Written verification that the laboratory fume hoods carry the ETL listed mark for

the following.

1) UL 61010-1 (formerly 3101-1), Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Electrical

Equipment for Laboratory Use

2) CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 61010-1, Canadian Standards Association, Safety

Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control and

Laboratory Use

3) UL 1805, Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard for Laboratory Hoods

and Cabinets

b. Written verification that 230 volt model fume hoods carry the CE conformity

marking as required by the Council of European Communities.

c. Written verification from an outside testing agency confirming coating compliance

to SEFA 8-2010, Recommended Practices for Laboratory Grade Metal Casework,

8.0 Cabinet Surface Finish Tests

3. Documentation of ISO 9001 Certified manufacturing plant and processes.

4. List of five installations (of equal or larger size and requirements) is available upon

request. Provide contact at each.

5. Declaration of Made in America. Owner reserves the right to evaluate Made in America

claims for compliance with the Bureau of Consumer Protection.

C. Material Submittals

1. Samples for Verification: of the hood exterior wall material, interior liner and baffle

material, epoxy work surface material, and color selection chips are available from the

hood manufacturer upon request.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of

polyethylene film or another suitable material.

B. Schedule delivery of equipment so that spaces are sufficiently complete that equipment can be

installed immediately following delivery.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fume hoods until building is enclosed, wet

work and utility roughing-in are complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining

temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction

period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Labconco Corporation, 8811 Prospect Avenue, Kansas City,

Missouri 64132

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Labconco Protector XStream

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Hood Interior Liner and Baffle

1. Liner material must comply with UL 1805, and be listed within NRTL test report as proof

of compliance.

2. General Material Properties

a. Nonflammable, corrosion and chemical-resistant

b. Sheet molded homogenous polyester panels

c. Minimum thickness is 3/16"

d. Smooth, white finish

3. Mechanical Properties

a. Tensile Strength: 7,500 PSI (51.7 Mpa)

b. Tensile Modulus: 1.7 x 10^6 PSI (11,700 Mpa)

c. Flexural Strength: 21,000 PSI (145 Mpa)

d. Flexural Strength at 130 degrees C: 12,900 PSI (89 Mpa)

e. Compressive Strength: 32,500 PSI (224 Mpa)

f. IZOD Impact Strength (Notched): 8.4 Ft Lb/in (4.5 J/cm)

4. Flame and Smoke Characteristics

a. Flame retardant, self-extinguishing, with a flame spread rating of 25 or less in

accordance with ASTM-E84

b. Oxygen Index: 35%

c. Smoke Density: 115

5. Physical Properties

a. Water Absorption: 0.4%

b. Specific Gravity: 4.81

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



c. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: 2 In/in/ degree C x 10^-5

d. Thermal Conductivity: 1.9 BTU/Hr/Ft^2/In/degree F

6. Chemical Resistance

a. Splash and Spill Resistance:

1) Suspend sample panel in a vertical plane

2) Apply five drops of each reagent listed with an eyedropper

3) Apply liquid reagents at top of panel and allow to flow down full panel

height

b. Fume Resistance:

1) Place 25 milliliters of reagent into 100 milliliters beakers and position panel

over beaker tops in the proper sequence. Ensure beaker pouring lip permits

air to enter the interior atmosphere.

2) After 24 hours remove panel, flush with water, clean with detergent, rinse,

wipe dry and evaluate

c. Evaluation ratings: Change in surface finish and function shall be described by the

following numerical ratings

1) No Effect: No change in color or gloss

2) Excellent: Slight detectable change in color or gloss, but no change to the

function or life of the work surface material

3) Good: Clearly discernible change in color or gloss, but no significant

impairment of function or life

4) Fair: Objectionable change in appearance due to surface discoloration or

etch, possibly resulting in deterioration of function over an extended period

5) Failure: Pitting, cratering or erosion of work surface material; obvious and

significant deterioration

d. Required minimum results for each reagent (Reagent: Fume Resistance Rating,

Splash and Spill Resistance Rating)

1) Hydrochloric Acid (37%): 2,1

2) Sulfuric Acid (33%): 2,1



5) Formic Acid (90%): 2,1

6) Nitric Acid (20%): 2,2



9) Hydrofluoric Acid (48%): 2,2

10) Phosphoric Acid (85%): 1,1

11) Chromic Acid (60%): 1,4

12) Acetic Acid (98%): 1,1

13) Ammonium Hydroxide (20%): 1,1

14) Sodium Hydroxide (10%): 1,1



17) Sodium Hydroxide Flake: 1,-

18) Sodium Sulfide: 1,1

19) Zinc Chloride: 2,1

20) Tincture of Iodine: 3,3

21) Silver Nitrate: 2,1

22) Methyl Alcohol: 1,1

23) Ethyl Alcohol: 1,1

24) Butyl Alcohol: 1,1

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



25) Benzene: 1,1

26) Xylene: 1,1

27) Toluene: 1,1

28) Gasoline: 1,1

29) Dichloro Acetic Acid: 2,2

30) Dimethyl Formanide: 2,2

31) Ethyl Acetate: 1,1

32) Amyl Acetate: 1,1

33) Acetone: 1,1

34) Chloroform: 1,1

35) Carbon Tetrachloride: 1,1

36) Phenol: 2,2

37) Cresol: 1,1

38) Formaldehyde: 1,1

39) Trichloroethylene: 1,1

40) Ethyl Ether: 1,1

41) Furfural: 1,3

42) Methylene Chloride: 1,1

43) Mono Chloro Benzene: 1,1

44) Dioxane: 1,1

45) Methyl Ethyl Ketone: 1,1

46) Acid Dichromate: 1,2

47) Hydrogen Peroxide: 1,1

48) Napthalene: 1,1

B. Sheet Steel

1. Side panels and access panels 20-gauge (or heavier) sheet steel.

2. Hood corner posts are 16-gauge sheet steel.

3. Ceiling enclosure panels are 18 gauge sheet steel.

4. Cold-rolled, commercial steel (CS) sheet, complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

C. Chemical Resistant Finish

1. General: Prepare, treat, and finish welded assemblies after welding. Prepare, treat, and

finish components that are to be assembled with mechanical fasteners before assembling.

2. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance

levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Third party validation required.

3. Powder-coat process required. Paint processes that release Volatile Organic Compounds

(VOC) are not acceptable

4. Color for Fume Hood Finish:

a. Glacier White

b. As selected by architect from Manufacturer’s full range

D. Safety Glass

1. Tempered

a. Clarity and temper test to be as specified in latest edition of Glass Tempering

Association, Engineering Standards Manual, Section 8.1.

b. Surface and interior visible quality to be as specified per ASTM C 1036, Standard

Specification for Flat Glass, Table 4, Quality level Q3.

2. Laminated The primary standard for fume hood sash construction is UL1805. Either

laminated or tempered is acceptable per this standard. However, laminated glass will

break under a lower stress than tempered. Typically, tempered glass can handle a 5 times

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



greater point load than laminated without breakage. If broken, laminated glass may stay

together better than tempered because of the inner layer. However, an explosion violent

enough to break the inner layer will show laminated glass as more dangerous than

tempered. Recommend tempered safety glass exclusively, or list laminated and tempered

as equals.

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Superstructure:

1. Self-supporting, rigid structural assembly, to support inner wall consisting of fume hood

liner and outer wall of sheet metal exterior.

2. Fabricated from galvanized steel.

3. Space shall accommodate fume hood wiring and plumbing components for service

fixtures.

4. Access to fixture valves concealed in wall provided by exterior removable access panels,

gasket access panels on the inside liner walls, or through removable access panels on the

front posts.

B. Exterior

1. Fabricate from steel sheet with component parts screwed together.

2. Apply chemical-resistant finish to interior and exterior surfaces of component parts before

assembly.

3. Interchangeable side panels shall lift off without the use of tools to allow access to

plumbing lines, service fittings, electrical wiring, counterbalance sash weights, and light

fixtures. Exposed fasteners or hardware, and Velcro type fasteners, are not acceptable.

4. Corner posts

a. Pre-punched and plugged to accommodate up to 4 service fixtures per side

b. All services are accessible from the front of the hood.

c. Aerodynamic shape

d. Accommodate two electrical duplexes per side.

e. Right hand corner post includes electrical switches and pre-cut for Airflow monitor

installation.

f. Un-used penetrations shall be plugged.

5. Top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic shape to ensure smooth, even

flow of air into fume hood.

6. Panel above header shall be removable without the use of tools to allow access to

mechanical connection, electrical wiring, counterbalance sash weights, and light fixtures.

Exposed fasteners or hardware, and Velcro type fasteners, are not acceptable.

C. Dimensions

1. Overall exterior dimensions are as follows:

a. 4 foot nominal width: 48” w x 59” h x 37.7” d

2. Overall interior dimensions are as follows:

a. 4 foot nominal width: 38.1” w x 48” h x 27.2” d

D. Hood Liner

1. Adhere interior liner components to superstructure.

2. Stainless steel fasteners shall be used on the interior ceiling for structural integrity.

3. Fasteners exposed to chemical environment are not acceptable.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Punch fume hood lining side panels to receive four service fittings, for use with remote

controls, per side. Provide removable plug buttons for holes not used for indicated

fittings.

5. Each side wall shall include an oval interior access panel to provide access to the side wall

of the fume hood for plumbing service access. Access panel material shall be that of the

liner, and gasketed to form a vapor proof seal.

E. Hood Baffle

1. Baffle system shall be designed to optimize the face velocity profile, and to capture a

wide range of gaseous densities without adjustment or moving components.

2. Include a two-baffle system.

a. Primary baffle: Shall provide a continuous horizontal slot at the work surface.

Baffle panels shall have multiple horizontal slots, with a chamfered entry. Slot

pattern shall be proven to optimize face velocity profile, and direct air in a non-

turbulent/laminar flow stream from the hood face into the baffle in a single pass.

b. Secondary baffle: located between the primary baffle and the back wall of the

hood, neutralizes any upward air streams and reduce air stream roll.

3. The baffle system shall be constructed with the same material as the fume hood liner.

4. The baffles shall be removable for cleaning. The primary baffles shall be two pieces to

allow removal without the use of tools.

5. Exposed components to be non-metallic. Metal components exposed to chemical

environment are not acceptable.

6. Moving parts or adjustment of any kind is not acceptable.

F. Exhaust Connection

1. 316 stainless steel with Chemical-Resistant Finish

2. 12.81" ID to accommodate any 12” nominal duct without the need for a transition adapter.

4, 5, and 6-foot hoods have one exhaust connection, and 8-foot hoods have two exhaust

connections. Additional components required to accommodate 12” nominal mechanical

system are not acceptable.

3. Ducting shall go inside the duct collar to ensure condensate travels into the hood and

evaporates. Duct collars that allow duct connection over the collar are not acceptable.

G. Airfoil

1. Cold Rolled Steel or 316 stainless steel with Chemical-Resistant Finish.

2. Airfoil shall have an aerodynamic radius to sweep the air into the hood with minimal

turbulence. Airfoil directs airflow across work top to remove heavier-than-air gases.

3. Must have 5 rows of perforations to allow the air to bypass underneath and through the

foil and sweep across the work surface to prevent any back flow of fumes escaping from

the front of the hood opening. This airflow continues even if blocked by the presence of

the operator.

4. Foil must extend back under the sash to prevent closure of the lower by-pass opening

when the sash is in the fully closed position, directly on top of the airfoil.

H. Sash Assembly

1. Glass: Fully tempered safety glass or glaze with laminated safety glass with unobstructed,

side-to-side view of fume hood interior and service fixture connections.

2. Dimensions: The full sash opening height is 28", the total unobstructed viewing height is

37.5" measured from the work surface.

3. Sash Tracks: Steel with Chemical Resistant Finish. Shall include bump stops for opening

and closing.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Sash Handle: extruded aluminum with Chemical Resistant Finish. Sash handle includes a

perforated air passage directly atop the handle to bleed air into the hood chamber and

direct chemical fumes away from the user's breathing zone. The handle is ergonomic in

design and is easy to grasp when operating

5. Sash guides: Corrosion resistant extruded poly-vinyl chloride.

6. Sash System

a. Vertical Sash (Cable and Pulley)

1) Hoods have a single vertical sash counterbalanced by a single weight.

2) Sash and weight to be connected via aircraft cable meeting MIL-W-83420

Military Specification.

3) Rear pulleys shall be connected via timing shaft to prevent sash tilting and

permit one finger operation at any point along full width sash handle.

Maximum 7 pounds pull required to raise or lower sash throughout its full

length of travel.

4) Design system to hold sash at any position without creep and to prevent sash

drop in the event of cable failure.

5) Include a defeatable, and automatically resetting sash stop positioned for an

18” sash height.

I. Electrical Components

1. Lighting

a. Provide UL Listed, high-efficiency, quick-start, T8 fluorescent lighting systems,

including bulbs.

1) 4 Foot Hoods - 2 each, 3-foot 25-watt fluorescent lamps

b. Vapor-Proof: all electrical components shall be outside of the contaminated air

space. Lighting shall be located behind a laminated safety glass shield, sealed to

the top of the hood liner.

c. The fluorescent light assemblies shall be serviceable from outside the fume hood

cavity, without the use of tools.

d. Light switch to be included on the lower right corner post, at heights compliant

with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

2. Blower Switch

a. Hoods shall be provided without a blower switch, as they will share a single

mechanical system with other hoods.

3. Electrical Receptacles

a. The hoods shall accommodate up to four (two per corner post) electrical

receptacles as indicted in schedule or drawings. Options to include:

1) 115 volt, 60 Hz, three-wire polarized and grounded electrical duplex

2) 115 volt, 60 Hz, three-wire polarized and grounded electrical duplex, with

Ground Fault Circuit Interruption (GFCI)

3) 230volt, 60 Hz, three-wire polarized and grounded electrical duplex

b. Receptacles shall be individually wired to field wiring box, and each rated at 20

Amperes.

c. Cover plates shall be acid resistant thermoplastic.

4. Wiring

a. Every electrical component shall be individually wired to a single point internal

field wiring box (including individual duplexes/receptacles).

b. Field wiring box to be 7” x 4” x 2.5”, grounded, and have (12) 7/8” diameter

knock out penetrations.

c. Final wiring and circuit dedication is to be by others.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Each receptacle circuit shall accommodate being wired to a dedicated building

circuit rated at 20A, or the receptacles ganged together on a building circuit with

the total load not exceeding 20 Amperes.

5. Fume hood to have third party validation of compliance to UL 1805 and UL 61010-1 by a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL)

J. Upper Dilution Air Supply

1. Located behind and above the sash to introduce between 5 and 10% of the required hood

air volume, and maintain sufficient exhaust air volume through hood to adequately dilute

hazardous fumes regardless of sash position.

2. This device bathes the sash interior above the work area to eliminate chemical fumes

along the sash plane near the operator's critical breathing zone.

3. Shall act as a by-pass opening controlled by sash position. If on a constant volume

mechanical system, the hood shall not have a change in static pressure or exhaust volume

across all sash positions.

4. Shall offer a significant restriction to the by-pass opening to allow the use of a VAV

mechanical system without modification to the by-pass opening.

K. Hood Safety Practices Label: Corrosion resistant plate attached to the left corner post of the

fume hood with the following Hood Safety Practices:

1. For use with substances that produce hazardous levels of airborne chemicals: gas, fumes,

vapors, dust

2. Do not put your head in the hood.

3. Minimize drafts and sudden movements in front of the hood.

4. Work a minimum of six inches inside the hood.

5. Elevate equipment above the work surface.

6. Keep sill and baffle unobstructed.

7. Do not use the hood for storage.

8. Adjust the sash to smallest opening possible when in use.

9. Close sash when unattended.

10. Do not remove any of the hood components.

11. Do not place flammable solvents near heat, flame or sparks.

12. Do not evaporate large amounts of flammable liquids.

13. Wipe up spills immediately.

14. Routinely validate airflow.

15. If the ventilation system malfunctions, or airflow alarm indicates unsafe condition, close

sash and discontinue hood operation immediately-call for help.

16. Do not use with Biohazards and Perchloric Acid

L. Fume Hood Accessories

1. Service Fixtures: Color-coded hose nozzle outlets and valves mounted inside the fume

hood and controlled from the exterior with color-coded index handles

a. The hoods are equipped without service fixtures or will be provided with a total of

up to 8 service fixtures as indicated in schedule.

b. Hose connectors located inside the fume hood cavity are chemically-resistant,

glass-filled polypropylene with 6 serrations.

c. Service lines shall be factory installed from valve to outlet

1) Copper tubing unless otherwise noted

2) Brass service lines for gas

3) Stainless steel service lines for Deionized Water

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4) Connections shall be made with quick-connect compression fittings on the

inlet and outlet of the valve body, soldered and brazed connections not

easily disassembled are not acceptable.

5) Inlet tubing not included

d. Valves

1) Extruded brass valve and rotating seat, TFE-coated silicone bronze stem and

TFE packing.

2) Fixture handles are plastic and color coded as well as labeled for the

designated type of service.

3) Fixtures are rated at maximum pressure of 200 psi.

4) Coefficient of flow for the valve, Cv=0.43.

5) Valves are front loaded, located on the fume hood corner post for remote

use, and include:

a) Hot and cold tap water (flow rate 3.5 GPM or 13.25 LPM at 67 psi at

full open

b) Natural gas (theoretical flow rate of 71CFM at 100 psi, provides 1095

BTU/Sec at a density of .667 Lbs/CU. FT.)

c) Air (theoretical flow rate of 59 CFM at 100psi)

d) Vacuum (theoretical flow rate of 6 CFM at 10 psi)

e) Nitrogen

f) Argon

g) Steam

h) Oxygen (include oxygen compatible lubricant)

i) Deionized/Distilled water (Nickel plated and stainless steel

components)

2. Tissue Screen: Provide epoxy-coated, stainless-steel screen at bottom baffle opening to

prevent paper from being drawn into the exhaust plenum behind baffles.

3. Rear Finish Panel: Shall be the same materials and coating as the hood exterior.

4. Ceiling Enclosure Panels:

a. Provide filler panels matching fume hood exterior to enclose space above fume

hoods at front and sides of fume hoods and extending from tops of fume hoods to

ceiling.

b. Exposed fasteners are not acceptable.

c. Height adjustment to be within the following ranges as specified in the schedule.

1) 18.6 – 24.4”

5. Distillation Grid: Include stainless steel rods, connectors, and factory drilled liner.

6. Fire Suppression System: An ABC dry powder fire suppression system, with 165 degree

Fahrenheit fusible link, shall be factory supplied and prepped, and field installed through

the ceiling of the fume hood.

7. Face Velocity Monitor/Alarm

a. Digital Airflow Monitor

1) Provide audible and visual alarm in the event of an unsafe face velocity.

2) Alarm must sit flush with the fume hood corner post.

3) Based on a thermally compensated thermistor in the alarm module, and air

passing through a separate airstream into the hood interior.

4) Velocity shall be displayed digitally on the user facing LCD in fpm or m/s.

5) LED lights display red for alarm, yellow for caution, and green for normal

operation.

6) Must include external alarm and night setback functions.

7) Alarm mute shall be accessible from the front of the monitor; visual alarm

must remain activated until alarm condition is corrected.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



8) UL Listed electrical components

9) Calibration shall be through a menu driven step by step procedure.

10) Calibration is the responsibility of the owner, following a complete

balancing of the mechanical system, and concurrently with As-Installed

testing.

b. Audio/Visual Airflow Monitor

1) Provide audible and visual alarm in the event of an unsafe face velocity.

2) Alarm must sit flush with the fume hood corner post.

3) Based on a thermally compensated thermistor in the alarm module, and air

passing through a separate airstream into the hood interior.

4) LED lights display red for alarm and green for normal operation.

5) Must include external alarm and night setback functions.

6) Alarm mute shall be accessible from the front of the monitor; visual alarm

must remain activated until alarm condition is corrected.

7) UL Listed electrical components

8) Calibration shall be through a front located potentiometer.

9) Calibration is the responsibility of the owner, following a complete

balancing of the mechanical system, and concurrently with As-Installed

testing.

c. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Prepared

1) Fume hoods shall come factory prepared with the proper cutouts and

brackets to field mount specified, TSI Model FHC50-01, or equal, VAV

controller and sash position sensor.

M. Work Surface

1. 1.25” thick, molded from solid modified epoxy resin, with smooth, non-specular, black

finish.

2. One inch radius front edge for optimal fume hood performance.

3. 3/8” dished area to match the fume hood interior work space and form a water tight pan

for spill containment.

4. Include a 2.5” diameter hole on each side for service pass-through and piping. Hole to be

covered by hood superstructure upon installation.

5. Include two 1.5” diameter penetrations to accommodate base cabinet venting. Holes to be

located outside of dished area and under the fume hood baffles. Include plugs.

6. Physical Properties:

a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi.

b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi.

c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.

d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.

e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F.

f. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

N. Supporting Base Cabinets

1. Base cabinets shall be in depths of 22", widths, quantities, and types called out in the

equipment schedule or drawings, and meet the requirements of this specification.

2. Construction requirements for all cabinets

a. Exterior construction is 18 gauge (or heavier) cold rolled sheet steel with Chemical

Resistant Finish.

b. Hinges are 10 gauge (or heavier) plate with self-clinching pilot pin. Knuckle,

bullet, or piano type hinges are not accepted.

c. The rear panel will feature a 12" x 8" removable plumbing access panel.

d. Units 24" wide or less have only one door.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. Each cabinet includes four leveling feet.

f. Capable of supporting up to 800 pounds.

g. A 14" filler panel is required to increases the cabinet depth to 36".

3. Standard Storage

a. Overall exterior dimensions:

1) 48" 48" w x 22" d x 35.5"-36.75"

b. Flush pull handles are ABS, low gloss black.

4. Acid Storage


1) 48" 48" w x 22" d x 35.5"-36.75"

b. Completely lined with a polyethylene corrosion resistant liner. The liner is 3/16"

thick, with a vacuum formed PVC liner pan at the bottom to contain spills. Each

door has a 3/16" sheet polyethylene liner.

c. The cabinet is labeled: "ACID".

d. Flush pull handles are ABS, low gloss black.

e. Each cabinet is vented into the fume hood with a 1-1/2" vent pipe. It should

provide a positive airflow directly into the fume hood exhaust system.

f. Supply an epoxy coated steel shelf with PVC liner pan if indicated in the schedule.

g. Acid cabinets with louvers are not acceptable

5. Solvent Storage


1) 48" 48" w x 22" d x 35.5"-36.75"

b. Solvent storage cabinets are specifically designed for the storage of flammable and

combustible liquids.

c. Solvent Storage Cabinet must be compliant with NFPA 30 “Flammability and

Combustible Liquids Code.”

d. Cabinets 30" wide and greater shall be tested and approved by Factory Mutual to

meet Factory Mutual Approval Standard 6050.

e. The bottoms, top, sides, and doors are fabricated of 18 gauge steel and are all

double panel construction with a 1-1/2" air space between panels.

f. All joints are welded or screwed to provide a rigid enclosure. A 2" deep liquid

tight pan that covers the entire bottom of the cabinet is furnished to contain liquid

leaks and spills.

g. A full-depth, 18 gauge steel, adjustable shelf is also provided. Shelves are sealed

leak tight.

h. Two diametrically opposed flame arrestor vents with spark screens are provided in

the back of the cabinet, as well as a grounding screw.

i. The cabinet has an interior finish same as the exterior.

j. The cabinet is labeled: "FLAMMABLE - KEEP FIRE AWAY".

k. The right hand door shall have a three point latching device.

l. Door handles include a key lock. Solvent storage handles are locking lever handles

with bright chrome finish.

m. If noted on the schedule, self-closing/self-latching models shall be provided with a

fusible-link feature to ensure the doors will close if the temperature outside the

cabinet exceeds 165 degrees Fahrenheit. The doors are synchronized so that both

doors will fully close.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fume hoods.

B. Coordinate with other trades for the proper and correct installation of plumbing and electrical

rough-in and for rough opening dimensions required for the installation of the hood.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fume hoods according to shop drawings and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims, and securely anchor to

building and adjacent laboratory casework.

C. Securely attach access panels, but provide for easy removal and secure reattachment. Where

fume hoods abut other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with

fasteners concealed where practical.

D. Neighboring splash blocks shall not be attached directly to the hood.

E. Install according to standards required by authority having jurisdiction.

F. Sequence installations to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner.

G. Touch up minor damaged surfaces caused by installation. Replace damaged components as

directed by Architect.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. NFPA 45 requires that fume hoods be field tested when installed.

B. Field test installed fume hoods according to ASHRAE 110 to verify compliance with

performance requirements.

1. Adjust fume hoods, hood exhaust fans, building's HVAC system, and make other

corrections until tested hoods perform as specified in fume hood schedule.

2. After making corrections, retest fume hoods that failed to perform as specified.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust moving parts for smooth, near silent, accurate sash operation with one hand. Adjust

sashes for uniform contact of rubber bumpers. Verify that counterbalances operate without

interference.

B. Clean finished surfaces, including both sides of glass; touch up as required; and remove or

refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.

C. Clean adjacent construction and surfaces that may have been soiled in the course of installation

of work in this section.

D. Provide all necessary protective measures to prevent exposure of equipment and surfaces from

exposure to other construction activity.

E. Advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of material and installed

equipment and casework from damage by work of other trades.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Roller Window Shades


SECTION 12240

ROLLER SHADES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Sunscreen roller shades.

B. Room darkening and sunscreen double roller shades.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and

accessories.

B. Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for

installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

C. Section 09250 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for

installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories.

D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electric service for motor controls.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM G 21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials

to Fungi.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. NFPA 701 - Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles, features,

finishes and operating instructions.

3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

4. Mounting details and installation methods.

5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building

management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable..

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational

clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work.

1. Prepare shop drawings on Autocad format using base sheets provided electronically by the

Architect.

D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated

on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details.

E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and

aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and

patterns.

F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components,

unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and

aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces.

G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning

materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Obtain roller shades through one source from a single

manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products

comparable to those specified in this section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of

ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701 small and large-scale vertical burn.

Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.

D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested

as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing.

E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642,

ATCC 9644, ATCC9645.

F. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up (manual shades only) of one roller shade assembly for evaluation

of mounting, appearance and accessories.

1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect.

3. Mockup may be incorporated into finish work.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-

test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations

indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and wet and dirty

finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and ambient temperature and humidity

conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify

dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate

measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation

hardware throughout the entire operating range.

C. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Roller Shade Hardware and Chain Warranty: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-

five year limited warranty.

B. Standard Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard twenty-five year warranty.

C. Ecoveil Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard ten year warranty.

D. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating

five year warranty.

E. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including

scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas.

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Mecho, Inc., which is located at: 42-03 35th St.; Long Island

City, NY 11101; Tel: 718-729-2020; Fax: 718-729-2941;

Email:[email protected]; Web:www.mechoshade.com

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01630.

C. Alternates#1: Refer to Alternate #1 Fourth Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan sheets for extent and

configuration of additional shades.

2.02 ROLLER SHADE TYPE AND SHADECLOTH

A. Manually Operated Shades:

1. Mounting: Recess mounted with ceiling pocket and fascia.

ThroopCA

Snapshot

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Configuration: Single solar shadecloth.

B. Motorized Operated Shades:

1. Basis of Design: Urbanshade Double Bracket System

2. Configuration: Double solar and blackout shadecloth.

a. One manual solar shade and one motorized blackout shade.

3. Solar Shadecloths:

a. Fabric: ThermoVeil 0900, 0-1 percent visually translucent extra-dense linear

weave pattern.

b. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

4. Blackout Shadecloths:

a. Fabric: Classic Blackout 0700, Vinyl coated fabric blackout material same color

reverse side (for exterior).

2.03 SHADE BAND

A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket,

shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open

hem pockets are not acceptable.

1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams (including

welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and

weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem

pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar, for all shades within one room.

2. Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment:

a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to

support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch

(39.37 mm) in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches (64.77 mm) for

motorize shades are not acceptable.

b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive / brake mechanism.

c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band

shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" "snap-off" spline mounting,

without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets.

d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or

rivets.

e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive,

adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable.

2.04 SHADE FABRLCATION

A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless

specifically indicated otherwise.

B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed

trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to

roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



per 8 feet (2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as

follows:

1. Hembar: Exposed hembar.

2. Hembar: Exposed blackout hembar with polybond seal for blackout shades.

C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of

the shadebands. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height (W:H) ratios

shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible

for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth

within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as

required.

D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to

meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect.

Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height,

or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure

proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded

multi-width shadebands.

E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed

manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use

and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands.

F. Blackout shadebands, to be used with side channels, shall have horizontally mounted, roll-

formed stainless steel or tempered-steel battens not more than 3 feet (115 mm) on center

extending fully into the side channels. Battens shall be concealed in a integrally-colored fabric

to match the inside and outside colors of the shadeband, in accordance with manufacturer's

published standards for spacing and requirements.

1. Battens shall be roll formed of stainless steel or tempered steel and concave to match the

contour of the roller tube.

2. Batten pockets shall be self-colored fabric front and back RF welded into the shadecloth. A

self-color opaque liner shall be provided front and back to eliminate any see through of the

batten pocket that shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) high and be totally opaque. A

see-through moire effect, which occurs with multiple layers of transparent fabrics, shall not

be acceptable.

2.05 COMPONENTS

A. Access and Material Requirements:

1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets

without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to

be removed.

2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands

without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade

hardware. Styrene based plastics, and /or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be

acceptable.

B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets:

1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front,

rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for

future change.

2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or

reverse roll, which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind.

3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll

fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring

exposed fasteners of any kind.

4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-

banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria.

Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band.

5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be

capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side

of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset.

6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction

fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable

7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch (3.18 mm) thick plated steel or

heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade.

8. Drive Bracket / Brake Assembly:

a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all Mecho

(formerly MechoShade) accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia,

room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded

shades.

b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8

inch (9.525 mm) steel pin.

c. The brake shall be an over-running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent

during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of

50 lbs. (22 kg) in the stopped position.

d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the

brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated

brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non-jerky operation in raising and lowering

the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require

externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable.

e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully

independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled

without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments.

f. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg) minimum

breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.06 ACCESSORLES

A. Roller Shade Pocket: For recessed mounting in acoustical tile, or drywall ceilings as indicated

on the Drawings.

1. Provide either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, sized to accommodate

roller shades, with exposed extruded aluminum closure mount, tile support and removable

closure panel to provide access to shades.

a. Provide "Vented Pocket" such that there will be a minimum of four 1 inch (25.4 mm)

diameter holes per foot allowing the solar gain to flow above the ceiling line.

B. Fascia:

1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets

without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners.

2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece.

3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets, shade roller and fabric on the tube.

4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade

brackets.

5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable.

C. Room Darkening Channels:

1. Side Channels, ElectroShade: Extruded aluminum with polybond edge seals and SnapLoc-

mounting brackets and with concealed fastening. Exposed fastening is not acceptable.

Units 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) wide by 1-3/16 inches (30.1 mm) deep; two-band center

channels 5 inches (127 mm) wide by 1-3/16 inches (30.1 mm) deep. The 2-5/8-inch (66.6

mm) double-center channels may be installed at center-support positions of multi-band-

shade ElectroShades. MechoShade side channels 2-5/8 inches (66.6 mm) may be used as

center supports for ElectroShades. Also provide for use with manually operated room

darkening MechoShades over 8 feet (2438 mm) in height.

2. Sill Channels: Extruded aluminum with polybond edge seals and SnapLoc-mounting

brackets and with concealed fastening. Exposed fastening is not acceptable.

3. Channel Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

4. Channel Color: Custom color.

2.07 MOTORIZED ROLLER SHADE OPERATORS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled motorized shade operation systems designed for lifting

shades of type, size, weight, construction, use, and operation frequency indicated. Provide

operation systems of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories

suitable for Project conditions and recommended by shade manufacturer, complete with electric

motors and factory-pre-wired motor controls, remote-control stations, power disconnect

switches, enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, and accessories required for

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



reliable operation without malfunction. Include wiring from motor controls to motors.

Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with the building

electrical system.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6 with NFPA

70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

D. Electric Motors: UL-approved or -recognized, asynchronous, totally enclosed, insulated,

capacitor-start motors, complying with NEMA MG I, with thermal overload protection, brake,

permanently lubricated bearings, and limit switches; sized by shade manufacturer to start and

operate size and weight of shade considering service factor or considering Project's service

conditions without exceeding nameplate ratings.

1. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Motor Characteristics: Coordinate voltage rating with electrical service.

3. Motor Mounting: Within manufacturer's standard roller enclosure.

E. Remote Controls: Electric controls with NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for recessed or flush

mounting. Provide the following devices for remote-control activation of shades:

1. Control Stations: Room control grouping of shade with “up and down” positions for

blackout shades.

F. Finish: All exposed metal components: To be selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s

standards.

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best

result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written

instructions, and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm) to interior face of

glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware.

ThroopCA

Snapshot

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or

malfunction throughout entire operational range.

C. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller

shade systems.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



This page is blank.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Laboratory Casework


SECTION 12360

LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and design and deliver

laboratory casework for the Project as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. The work includes:

1. Wood laboratory casework

2. Utility-space framing at backs of base cabinets and between backs of base cabinets

3. Filler and closure panels

4. Laboratory countertops

5. Mobile Stainless Worktables

6. Shelves.

7. Laboratory sinks

8. Laboratory accessories.

9. Water, laboratory gas, and electrical service fittings.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Wood blocking for anchoring laboratory casework is included in Section 06100.

B. Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing for reinforcements in metal-framed partitions for anchoring

laboratory casework is included in Section 05400.

C. Fume hoods, including base cabinets and countertops under fume hoods are included in Section

11610.

D. Installing service fittings specified in this Section, including connecting service utilities are

included in Divisions 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300 the following:

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

2. Shop Drawings: For laboratory casework. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and

attachments to other work.

a. Indicate locations of hardware and keying of locks.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. Indicate locations and types of service fittings.

c. Indicate locations of blocking and reinforcements required for installing laboratory

casework.

d. Include details of utility spaces showing supports for conduits and piping.

e. Include details of support framing system.

f. Include details of exposed conduits, if required, for service fittings.

g. Indicate locations of and clearances from adjacent walls, doors, windows, other

building components, and other laboratory equipment.

h. Include coordinated dimensions for laboratory equipment specified in other Sections.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-applied finishes and other materials requiring color

selection.

C. Samples: For each type of cabinet finish and each type of countertop material indicated, in

manufacturer's standard sizes.

D. Samples: Unless otherwise directed, approved full-size Samples may become part of the

completed Work, if in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial Completion. Notify

Engineer of their exact locations. If not incorporated into the Work, retain acceptable full-size

Samples at Project site and remove when directed by Engineer.

1. One of each type of hardware item specified.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For laboratory casework indicated to comply with seismic

performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.

G. Product Test Reports for Casework: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory casework with requirements of

specified product standard.

H. Product Test Reports for Countertop Surface Material: Based on evaluation of comprehensive

tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance of laboratory countertop

surface materials with requirements specified for chemical and physical resistance.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Hardboard Association

1. AHA A135.4 - Basic Hardboard

B. ASTM International

1. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

2. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass

C. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. ASCE/SEI 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

D. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association

1. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware

2. BHMA A156.11 - Cabinet Locks

E. FM Approvals

F. Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association

1. HPVA HP-1-2000: Hardwood and Decorative Plywood

G. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

1. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage

(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

2. IEEE C62.45 - Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to

Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits

H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association

1. NEMA WD 1- General Requirements for Wiring Devices

2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements

I. NFPA

1. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code

2. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

J. Scientific Equipment & Furniture Association

1. SEFA 2.3 – Installations

2. SEFA 8 - Casework Recommended Practice

K. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1. UL 20 - Standard for Safety General-Use Snap Switches

2. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

3. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters

L. AWI

1. Architectural Woodwork Casework Details

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Architectural Woodwork Institute

M. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology

1. DOC PS 1 - U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood

N. Where reference is made to one of the above or other referenced standards, the revisions in

effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.05 DEFINITIONS

A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.

B. Exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including

bottoms of cabinets more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above floor, and visible surfaces in open

cabinets or behind glass doors.

1. Ends of cabinets, including those installed directly against walls or other cabinets, are

defined as "exposed."

2. Ends of cabinets indicated to be installed directly against and completely concealed by

walls or other cabinets are defined as "concealed."

C. Semi-exposed Surfaces of Casework: Surfaces behind opaque doors, such as cabinet interiors,

shelves, and dividers; interiors and sides of drawers; and interior faces of doors. Tops of

cabinets 78 inches (1980 mm) or more above floor are defined as "semi-exposed."

D. Concealed Surfaces of Casework: Include sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other surfaces

not usually visible after installation.

E. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of veneers in

combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard core, joined with

adhesive and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.


A. System Structural Performance: Laboratory casework and support framing system shall

withstand the effects of the following gravity loads and stresses without permanent deformation,

excessive deflection, or binding of drawers and doors:

1. Support Framing System: 600 lb./ft. (900 kg/m)

2. Suspended Base Cabinets (Internal Load): 160 lb./ft. (240 kg/m)

3. Work Surfaces (Including Tops of Suspended Base Cabinets): 160 lb./ft. (240 kg/m) .

4. Wall Cabinets (Upper Cabinets): 160 lb./ft. (240 kg/m)

5. Shelves: 40 lb./sq. ft. (200 kg/sq. m).

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Delegated Design: Design laboratory casework, including comprehensive engineering analysis

by a qualified professional engineer, using seismic performance requirements and design

criteria indicated.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that produces casework of types

indicated for this Project that has been tested for compliance with SEFA 8.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain laboratory casework from single source from single manufacturer

who has been engaged in successful production for a period of not less than five years.

1. Obtain countertops, sinks, accessories and service fittings from casework manufacturer.

C. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes and configurations of laboratory casework by

referencing designated manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' laboratory

casework of similar sizes and similar door and drawer configurations and complying with the

Specifications may be considered.

D. Casework Product Standard: Comply with SEFA 8, "Laboratory Furniture - Casework,

Shelving and Tables - Recommended Practices."

E. Flammable Liquid Storage: Where cabinets are indicated for solvent or flammable liquid

storage, provide units that are listed and labeled as complying with requirements in NFPA 30 by

a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction

F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

G. Keying Conference: coordinate keying with owner and incorporate in final shop drawing

submission

H. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site


A. Protect finished surfaces during handling and installation with protective covering of

polyethylene film or other suitable material.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install laboratory casework until building is

enclosed, utility roughing-in and wet work are complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system

is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the

remainder of the construction period.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of framing and reinforcements for support of laboratory

casework.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Coordinate installation of laboratory casework with installation of fume hoods and other

laboratory equipment.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of metal laboratory casework provided.

Include fillers, primers, paints, and other materials necessary to perform permanent repairs to

damaged laboratory casework finish.

B. Furnish complete touchup kit for each type and color of wood laboratory casework provided.

Include scratch fillers, stains, finishes, and other materials necessary to perform permanent

repairs to damaged laboratory casework finish.

C. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cabinet Mounting Clips and Related Hardware: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount

installed, but no fewer than 20 of each type.

2. Modular Countertop Units: One extra units of each length and material installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 WOOD CABINET AND TABLE MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Maximum Moisture Content for Lumber: 7 percent for hardwood and 12 percent for

softwood.

2. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, either veneer core or particleboard core, unless

otherwise indicated.

3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

4. Hardboard: AHA A135.4, Class 1 Tempered.

5. Edge banding for Wood-Veneered Construction: Minimum 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, solid

wood of same species as face veneer

a. Colors: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

B. Exposed Materials:

1. General: Provide materials that are selected and arranged for compatible grain and color.

Do not use materials adjacent to one another that are noticeably dissimilar in color, grain,

figure, or natural character markings.

2. Wood Species: White birch

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Plywood: Hardwood plywood with face veneer of species indicated, selected for

compatible color and grain. Grade A exposed faces at least 1/50 inch (0.5 mm) thick, and

Grade J crossbands. Provide backs of same species as faces.

a. Face Veneer Cut: Plain sliced

4. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated and selected for grain and color

compatible with exposed hardwood plywood.

C. Semi-exposed Materials:

1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects, of any

species similar in color and grain to exposed solid wood.

2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood of any species similar in color and grain to faces and Grade

J crossbands. Provide backs of same species as faces.

3. Provide solid wood or hardwood plywood for semi-exposed surfaces unless otherwise

indicated.

4. Metal for Steel Drawer Pans: Cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet complying with ASTM A

1008/A 1008M; matte finish; suitable for exposed applications.

D. Concealed Materials:

1. Solid Wood: Any species, with no defects affecting strength or utility.

2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood. Provide backs of same species as faces.

3. Particleboard.

4. MDF.

5. Hardboard.

2.02 AUXILIARY CABINET MATERIALS

A. Acid Storage-Cabinet Lining: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, glass-fiber cement board complying

with ASTM C 1186

B. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear float glass complying with ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,

Quality-Q3; not less than 3.0 mm thick.

C. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT,

Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick.

D. Glass for Glazed Doors: Clear laminated tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1172, Kind

LT, Condition A, Type I, Class I, Quality-Q3; with two lites not less than 3.0 mm thick and

with clear, polyvinyl butyral interlayer.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Frameless Glass Doors: Clear tempered glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT,

Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality-Q3; not less than 5.0 mm thick; with exposed edges

seamed before tempering.

2.03 COUNTERTOP TABLE TOP SHELF AND SINK MATERIALS

A. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified epoxy-resin formulation with smooth, non-specular finish.

1. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

a. Durcon Company (The).

b. Epoxyn Products.

c. Laboratory Tops, Inc.

d. Prime industries, Inc.

e. Or equal.

2. Physical Properties:

a. Flexural Strength: Not less than 10,000 psi (70 MPa).

b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2,000,000 psi (1400 MPa).

c. Hardness (Rockwell M): Not less than 100.

d. Water Absorption (24 Hours): Not more than 0.02 percent.

e. Heat Distortion Point: Not less than 260 deg F (127 deg C).

3. Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following ratings when tested with

indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3, Test Procedure 3.4.5:

a. No Effect: Acetic acid (98 percent), acetone, ammonium hydroxide (28 percent),

benzene, carbon tetrachloride, dimethyl formamide, ethyl acetate, ethyl alcohol, ethyl

ether, methyl alcohol, nitric acid (70 percent), phenol, sulfuric acid (60 percent), and

toluene.

b. Slight Effect: Chromic acid (60 percent) and sodium hydroxide (50 percent).

4. Color: Black.

5. Locations: Rooms A417 (ALT 1), A418 (ALT 1), and A509 , A519, A523

B. Stainless-Steel Countertops: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.062-inch (1.59-

mm) nominal thickness, with No. 4 satin finish.

1. Extend top down 1 inch (25 mm) at edges with a 1/2-inch (13-mm) return flange under

frame. Apply heavy coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to undersurface.

2. Form backsplash coved to and integral with top surface.

3. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops containing sinks; pitch two

ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving.

4. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of countertops at sinks, where indicated;

pitch two ways to sink to provide drainage without channeling or grooving.

5. Punch holes for service fittings at factory.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Reinforce underside of countertop with channels or use thicker metal sheet where

necessary to insure rigidity without deflection.

7. Weld shop-made joints.

8. Where field-made joints are required, provide hairline butt-joints mechanically bolted

through continuous channels welded to underside at edges of joined ends. Keep field

jointing to a minimum.

9. Where stainless-steel sinks or cup sinks occur in stainless-steel countertops, factory weld

into one integral unit.

10. After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and polish as needed to produce

uniform, directionally textured finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches.

Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.

C. Stainless-Steel Shelves: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm)

nominal thickness, with No. 4 satin finish. Weld shop-made joints. Fold down front edge 3/4

inch (19 mm); fold up back edge 3 inches (75 mm). Provide integral stiffening brackets, formed

by folding up ends 3/4 inch (19 mm) and welding to upturned back edgeAfter fabricating, grind

welds smooth and polish as needed to produce uniform, directionally textured finish with no

evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded

foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.

D. Stainless-Steel Sinks: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm)

nominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inch (16-mm)

radius. Slope sink bottoms to outlet. Provide double-wall construction for sink partitions with

top edge rounded to at least 1/2-inch (13-mm) diameter. Provide continuous butt-welded joints.

After fabricating and welding, grind surfaces smooth and polish as needed to produce uniform

finish with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces;

remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.

1. Punch holes for fittings at factory.

2. Provide with stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces.

3. Provide with integral rims except where located in stainless-steel countertops.

4. Apply 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick coating of heat-resistant, sound-deadening mastic to

undersink surfaces.

E. Cup Sinks: Stainless steel, 3-by-6-inch (75-by-150-mm) oval

1. Provide with stainless-steel strainers and integral tailpieces.

F. Troughs: Stainless steel. Pitch to drains not less than 1/8 inch/foot (10 mm/m). Except where

troughs empty into sinks, provide NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) outlets with strainers and tailpieces.

1. Stainless-Steel Troughs: Made from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-

mm) nominal thickness. Fabricate with corners rounded and coved to at least 5/8-inch (16-

mm) radius. Provide continuous butt-welded joints. After fabricating and welding, grind

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



surfaces smooth and polish as needed to produce uniform finish with no evidence of welds

and free of cross scratches. Passivate and rinse surfaces; remove embedded foreign matter

and leave surfaces clean. Provide stainless-steel strainers and tailpieces.

G. Locations: All laboratory counters not listed in Section 2.03, paragraph A item 5 above.

2.04 WOOD CABINETS AND TABLES

A. Manufacturers: Provide products by one of the following:

1. Advanced Lab Concepts, Inc.

2. Fisher Hamilton L.L.C.

3. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation; Laboratory Products Group.

4. Laboratory Design & Supply.

5. Sheldon Laboratory Systems.

6. South Texas Woodmill, Inc.

7. Or equal.

B. Design: Lipped overlay with radiused edges.

1. Provide1/8-inch (3.2-mm) reveals between doors and drawers that are adjacent.

C. Grain Direction:

1. Vertical on both doors and drawer fronts, with continuous vertical matching.

2. Vertical on doors, horizontal on drawer fronts.

3. Lengthwise on face frame members.

4. Vertical on end panels.

5. Side to side on bottoms and tops of units.

6. Vertical on knee-space panels.

7. Horizontal on aprons and table frames.

D. Veneer Matching:

1. None required; select and arrange veneers for compatible grain and color.

2. Provide veneers for each cabinet from a single flitch, book and running matched

a. Provide continuous matching of adjacent drawer fronts within each cabinet.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Provide veneers for each elevation from a single flitch, book and running matched

a. Provide continuous matching of adjacent drawer fronts within each cabinet and end

matching between drawer fronts of adjacent cabinets.

E. Construction: Provide wood-faced laboratory casework of the following minimum

construction:

1. Bottoms of Base Cabinets and Tall Cabinets: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick hardwood

plywood.

2. Tops and Bottoms of Wall Cabinets and Tops of Tall Cabinets: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick

veneer-core hardwood plywood.

3. Ends of Cabinets: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick hardwood plywood.

4. Shelves: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick veneer-core hardwood plywood.

5. Base Cabinet Top Frames: 3/4-by-2-inch (19-by-50-mm) solid wood with mortise and

tenon or doweled connections, glued and pinned or screwed.

6. Base Cabinet Stretchers: 3/4-by-4-1/2-inch (19-by-114-mm) panel product strips or solid

wood boards at front and back of cabinet, glued and pinned or screwed.

7. Base Cabinet Subtops: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick panel product glued and pinned or

screwed.

8. Backs of Cabinets: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, hardwood plywood where exposed, 1/2-

inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, hardwood plywood dadoed into sides, bottoms, and tops where not

exposed.

9. Drawer Fronts: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) thick, hardwood plywood or solid hardwood.

10. Drawer Sides and Backs: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, solid hardwood or hardwood

plywood, with glued dovetail or multiple-dowel joints.

11. Drawer Bottoms: 1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, veneer-core hardwood plywood glued and

dadoed into front, back, and sides of drawers. Use 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick material for

drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide.

12. Drawer Bodies: Steel drawer pans formed from 0.036-inch- (0.91-mm-) thick metal,

metallic phosphate treated, and finished with manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked-enamel

finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat with a minimum dry film

thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat and 2 mils (0.05 mm) for system.

13. Doors 48 Inches (1200 mm) High or Less: 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick, with particleboard or

MDF cores, solid hardwood stiles and rails, and hardwood face veneers and crossbands.

14. Doors More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) High: 1-1/16 inches (27 mm) thick, with

honeycomb cores, solid hardwood stiles and rails, and hardwood face veneers and

crossbands.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



15. Doors More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) High: 1-1/8 inches (29 mm) thick, with

particleboard cores and hardwood face veneers and crossbands.

16. Stiles and Rails of Glazed Doors 48 Inches (1200 mm) High or Less: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-)

thick, solid hardwood.

17. Stiles and Rails of Glazed Doors More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) High: 1-1/16-inch- (27-

mm-) thick, solid wood with hardwood face veneers.

F. Tables: Solid hardwood legs, not less than 2 inches (50 mm) square with solid hardwood

stretchers as needed to comply with product standard. Bolt stretchers to legs and cross-

stretchers, and bolt legs to table aprons. Provide leveling device at bottom of each leg.

1. Leg Shoes: Black vinyl or rubber, open-bottom, slip-on type.

G. Mobile Worktable: Type 304 stainless steel work surface, bottom H- frame, and legs.

1. Size: 30" x 60" heavy-duty work table features 1 5/8" diameter legs

2. 5" poly swivel casters (two with brakes).

H. Utility-Space Framing: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard steel framing units

consisting of 2 steel slotted channels complying with MFMA-4, not less than 1-5/8 inches (41

mm) square by 0.105-inch (2.66-mm) nominal thickness, and connected at top and bottom by

U-shaped brackets made from 1-1/4-by-1/4-inch (32-by-6-mm) steel flat bars. Framing units

may be made by welding specified channel material into rectangular frames instead of using U-

shaped brackets.

I. Filler and Closure Panels: Provide where indicated and as needed to close spaces between

cabinets and walls, ceilings, and indicated equipment. Fabricate from same material and with

same finish as adjacent exposed cabinet surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide utility-space closure panels at spaces between base cabinets where utility space

would otherwise be exposed, including spaces below countertops.

2. Provide closure panels at ends of utility spaces where utility space would otherwise be

exposed.

3. Provide knee-space panels (modesty panels) at spaces between base cabinets, where

indicated. Fabricate from same material and with same finish as exposed cabinet backs.

2.05 LABORATORY CASEWORK SYSTEM


1. Fisher Hamilton L.L.C.

2. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation; Laboratory Product Group.

3. Or equal.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Provide casework manufacturer's standard integrated system that includes support framing,

suspended modular cabinets, filler and closure panels, wall panels, countertops, and fittings

needed to assemble system. System includes hardware and fasteners for securing support

framing to permanent construction.

1. Cabinet Construction: Wood.

2. Cabinets can be removed and reinstalled without use of special tools for relocation within

system.

3. Base cabinets can be removed without providing temporary support for, or removing,

countertops.

4. Sinks are supported independent of base cabinets.

5. Support framing has provision for fastening pipe supports at utility space in not more than

1-inch (25-mm) increments.

6. System includes filler and closure panels to close spaces between support framing,

cabinets, shelves, countertops, floors, and walls unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate

panels from same material and with same finish as metal cabinets and with hemmed or

flanged edges.

C. Support Framing: Casework manufacturer's standard system consisting of vertical supports and

connecting braces and rails as follows:

1. Cabinets, shelves, and countertops are supported from vertical supports except where floor-

supported base cabinets are indicated. Vertical positioning of supported cabinets, shelves,

and countertops can be varied in 1-inch (25-mm) increments through full height of

supports.

2. Vertical supports rest on adjustable leveling bases and are secured to floor with metal clips

fastened to floor.

3. Vertical supports are installed with braces and rails connecting them to each other and to

permanent building walls to create a stable, rigid structure with framed utility spaces where

indicated.

4. Vertical supports are braced at floor with cantilevered horizontal leg members where

indicated.

D. Under-cabinet Task-Light Fixtures: Single-tube fluorescent fixtures with switch and heavy-

duty cord and plug.

1. Finish: Baked enamel.

2. Diffusers: Virgin acrylic with high resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging,

heat, and UV radiation.

3. Ballast Sound Rating: A.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Countertops: Provide in modular lengths indicated, without seams.

2.06 WOOD FINISH

A. Preparation: Sand lumber and plywood before assembling. Sand edges of doors, drawer fronts,

and molded shapes with profile-edge sander. Sand after assembling for uniform smoothness at

least equivalent to that produced by 220-grit sanding and without machine marks, cross sanding,

or other surface blemishes.

B. Staining: Remove fibers and dust and apply stain to exposed and semi-exposed surfaces as

necessary to match approved Samples. Apply stain in a manner that will produce a consistent

appearance. Apply wash-coat sealer before applying stain to closed-grain wood species.

1. Stain Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Chemical-Resistant Finish: Apply laboratory casework manufacturer's standard three-coat,

chemical-resistant, transparent finish. Sand and wipe clean between coats. Topcoat(s) may be

omitted on concealed surfaces.

1. Chemical and Physical Resistance of Finish System: Finish complies with acceptance

levels of cabinet surface finish tests in SEFA 8. Acceptance level for chemical spot test

shall be no more than four Level 3 conditions.

2.07 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, commercial-quality, heavy-duty

hardware complying with requirements indicated for each type.

B. Hinges for Wood Cabinets: Frameless concealed hinges (European type) complying with

BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, 135degrees of opening, self-closing.

C. Sliding Door Pulls: Stainless-steel recessed flush pulls.

1. Design and Size: Round, 3/4-inch (19-mm) diameter by 3/16 inch (5 mm) deep

D. Pulls: Recessed aluminum pulls. Provide 2 pulls for drawers more than 24 inches (600 mm)

wide.

E. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catches. Provide 2 catches on doors more than 48 inches

(1200 mm) high.

F. Drawer Slides: Side mounted, epoxy-coated steel, self-closing; designed to prevent rebound

when drawers are closed; complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.

1. Provide Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24 inches

(600 mm) wide.

2. Provide Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches (600

mm) wide.

3. Standard Duty (Grade 1): Full extension type, with polymer rollers.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Full-overtravel-extension, ball-

bearing type.

G. Label Holders: Stainless steel; sized to receive standard label cards approximately 1 by 2

inches (25 by 50 mm), attached with screws or rivets. Provide on all drawers.

H. Locks for Metal Cabinets: Cam or half-mortise type with 5-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-

plated finish; complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281, E07111, or E07021.

1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys.

2. Provide on all drawers and doors.

3. Keying: Key locks alike within each room; key each room separately each lock separately

4. Master Key System: Key all locks to be operable by master key.

I. Locks for Wood Cabinets: Cam type with 5-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish;

complying with BHMA A156.11, Type E07281

1. Provide a minimum of two keys per lock and two master keys.

2. Provide on all drawers and doors.

3. Keying: Key each lock separately.

4. Master Key System: Key all locks to be operable by master key.

J. Sliding-Door Hardware Sets: Laboratory casework manufacturer's standard, to suit type and

size of sliding-door units.

K. Adjustable Shelf Supports for Wood Cabinets: Powder-coated steel shelf rests complying with

BHMA A156.9, Type B04013.

L. Adjustable Shelf Supports for Wood Cabinets: Mortise-type, powder-coated steel standards and

shelf rests complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04071 and B04091.

M. Adjustable Wall Shelf Supports: Surface-type steel standards and steel shelf brackets, with

epoxy powder-coated finish, complying with BHMA A156.9, Types B04102 and B04112.

2.08 COUNTERTOPS, TABLE TOPS SHELVES AND SINKS

A. Countertops, General: Provide units with smooth surfaces in uniform plane free of defects.

Make exposed edges and corners straight and uniformly beveled. Provide front and end

overhang of 1 inch (25 mm), with continuous drip groove on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm) from

edge.

B. Sinks, General: Provide sizes indicated or laboratory casework manufacturer's closest standard

size of equal or greater volume, as approved by Engineer.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Outlets: Provide with strainers and tailpieces, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40), unless otherwise

indicated.

2. Overflows: For each sink except cup sinks, provide overflow of standard beehive or open-

top design with separate strainer. Height 2 inches (50 mm) less than sink depth. Provide in

same material as strainer.

C. Epoxy Countertops Table Tops and Sinks:

1. Countertop Fabrication: Fabricate with factory cutouts for sinks, holes for service fittings

and accessories, and with butt joints assembled with epoxy adhesive and concealed metal

splines.

a. Countertop Configuration: Flat, thick, with beveled edge and corners, and with drip

groove and integral coved backsplash.

b. Countertop Configuration: As indicated.

c. Countertop Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness.

d. Product Option: Phenolic-composite countertops may be substituted for epoxy

countertops at Contractor's option.

2. Table-Top Fabrication:

a. Table-Top Configuration: Flat, 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with beveled edge and corners,

and with drip groove at perimeter.

b. Table-Top Construction: Uniform throughout full thickness.

c. Product Option: Phenolic-composite table tops may be substituted for epoxy table

tops at Contractor's option.

3. Sink Fabrication: Molded in 1 piece with smooth surfaces, coved corners, and bottom

sloped to outlet; 1/2-inch (13-mm) minimum thickness.

a. Provide with polypropylene strainers and tailpieces.

b. Provide sinks for drop-in installation with 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick lip around

perimeter of sink.

c. Provide integral sinks in epoxy countertops, bonded to countertops with invisible joint

line.

d. Provide manufacturer's recommended adjustable support system for table- and

cabinet-type installations.

2.09 LABORATORY ACCESSORIES

A. Reagent Shelves: Provide as indicated, fabricated from same material as adjacent countertop,

unless otherwise indicated.

B. Burette Rods: Aluminum or stainless-steel rods, 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter and 18 inches

(450 mm) long, threaded on 1 end to fit tapered plug adapter for flush socket receptacle. Provide

with tapered plug adapter and receptacle.

C. Upright Rod Assembly and Metal Crossbar: Aluminum or stainless steel. Two vertical rods and

1 horizontal crossbar, 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and 36 inches (900 mm) long, unless

otherwise indicated; 2 flush socket receptacles and 2 crossbar clamps. Ends of vertical rods are

tapered to fit receptacles; all other rod ends are rounded.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Greenlaw Arm Assembly: Aluminum or stainless-steel vertical rod, tapered on one end to fit

flush socket receptacle. Adjustable crossbar of hardwood with black, acid-resistant finish,

secured to upright with adjustable clamp. Provide with receptacle.

E. Lattice Assembly: Aluminum or stainless-steel, vertical and horizontal rod lattice assembly

with 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter rods at approximately 12 inches (300 mm) O.C. with two

flush socket receptacles for mounting.

1. Size: 36 inches (900 mm) wide by 36 inches (900 mm) high.

F. Pegboards: Stainless-steel pegboards with removable polypropylene pegs and stainless-steel

drip troughs with drain outlet.

2.10 WATER AND LABORATORY GAS SERVICE FITTINGS


1. Broen A/S.

2. Chicago Faucet Company (The); a Geberit company.

3. WaterSaver Faucet Co.

4. Or equal.

B. Service Fittings: Provide units that comply with SEFA 7, "Laboratory and Hospital Fixtures -

Recommended Practices." Provide fittings complete with washers, locknuts, nipples, and other

installation accessories. Include wall and deck flanges, escutcheons, handle extension rods, and

similar items.

1. Provide units that comply with "Vandal-Resistant Faucets and Fixtures" recommendations

in SEFA 7.

C. Materials: Fabricated from cast or forged red brass unless otherwise indicated.

1. Reagent-Grade Water Service Fittings: Polypropylene, PVC, or PVDF for parts in contact

with water.

D. Finish: Acid- and solvent-resistant powder coating complying with requirements in SEFA 7 for

corrosion-resistant finishes.

1. Provide chemical-resistant powder coating in laboratory casework manufacturer's standard

metallic brown, aluminum, white, or other color as approved by Engineer.

E. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units complying with ASME A112.18.1, with renewable

seats, designed for working pressure up to 80 psig (550 kPa).

1. Vacuum Breakers: Provide ASSE 1035 vacuum breakers on water fittings with serrated

outlets.

2. Aerators: Provide aerators on water fittings that do not have serrated outlets.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Self-Closing Valves: Provide self-closing valves where indicated.

F. Ground-Key Cocks: Tapered core and handle of one-piece forged brass, ground and lapped,

and held in place under constant spring pressure. Provide units designed for working pressure

up to 40 psig (280 kPa), with serrated outlets.

G. Ball Valves: Chrome-plated ball and PTFE seals. Handle requires no more than 5 lbf (22 N) to

operate. Provide units designed for working pressure up to 75 psig (520 kPa), with serrated

outlets.

1. Where ball valves are indicated for fuel-gas use, provide locking safety handles that must

be pushed in before being turned on.

H. Steam Valves: Stainless-steel seat and PTFE seat disc. Provide units designed for steam

working pressure up to 20 psig (140 kPa), with serrated outlets.

I. Needle Valves: Provide units with renewable, self-centering, floating cones and renewable

seats of stainless steel or Monel metal, with removable serrated outlets.

1. Provide units designed for working pressure up to 60 psig (410 kPa).

J. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings unless fitting designation is followed by "L."

K. Remote-Control Valves: Provide needle valves, straight-through or angle type as indicated for

fume hoods and where indicated.

L. Handles: Provide three- or four-arm, forged-brass handles for valves unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Provide lever-type handles for ground-key cocks. Lever handle aligns with outlet when

valve is closed and is perpendicular to outlet when valve is fully open.

2. Provide lever-type handles for ball valves unless otherwise indicated. Lever handle aligns

with outlet when valve is closed and is perpendicular to outlet when valve is fully open.

3. Provide heat-resistant plastic handles for steam valves.

4. Provide knurled, molded plastic handles for needle valves.

M. Service-Outlet Identification: Provide color-coded plastic discs with embossed identification,

secured to each service-fitting handle to be tamper resistant. Comply with SEFA 7 for colors

and embossed identification.

2.11 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Service Fittings, General: Provide units complete with metal housings, receptacles, terminals,

switches, pilot lights, device plates, accessories, and gaskets required for mounting on

laboratory casework.

B. Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, and UL 498. Duplex type,

Configuration 5 20R.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Receptacle Grade: Hospital grade unless otherwise indicated.

2. Color of Receptacles: Black in cabinets & epoxy counters & splash unless otherwise

required by NFPA 70.

3. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with UL 943, Class A,

Hospital grade, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

4. TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor) Receptacles: Comply with UL 1449, with

integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

a. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level

rating of 400 V and a minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J,

according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

b. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to

indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

c. Receptacle Type: Hospital grade, with isolated-ground terminal.

d. Identification: Distinctive marking on face of device to denote TVSS-type unit.

e. Color of TVSS Receptacles: Blue.

C. Switches: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20. Provide single-pole, double-pole, or 3-way

switches as required; rated 120 to 277-V ac; and in amperage capacities to suit units served.

1. Color of Switches: brown at wood cabinerts, black at epoxy resin counters and black with

Stainless steel plates at stainless steel counters. unless otherwise indicated or required by

NFPA 70.

2. Provide pilot light adjacent to switch or neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is

"ON," where noted as "PL" next to switch identification.

3. Provide key-operated switch where noted as "KEY" next to switch identification.

4. Provide thermal-overload switches, single or double pole, as required, with maximum

overcurrent trip setting to suit particular motor controlled.

D. Service Fittings, General: Provide units with metal housings and gaskets required for mounting

on laboratory casework. Receptacles, terminals, switches, pilot lights, device plates, and

accessories are included in Division 16.

E. Pedestal-Type Fittings: Cast-aluminum housings with sloped single face or two faces, as

indicated, with neoprene gasket under base and with concealed mounting holes in base for

attaching to laboratory casework. Provide holes tapped for conduits.

F. Line-Type Fittings: Provide with cast-metal boxes with threaded holes for mounting on rigid

steel conduit. Provide cover plates same size as boxes.

G. Recessed-Type Fittings: Provide with galvanized-steel boxes.

H. Finishes for Service-Fitting Components: Provide housings or boxes for pedestal- and line-type

fittings with manufacturer's standard baked-on, chemical-resistant enamel in color as selected

by Engineer from manufacturer's full range.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



I. Cover Plates: Provide satin finish, Type 304, stainless-steel cover plates with formed, beveled

edges.

J. Cover-Plate Identification: Use 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) high letters unless otherwise indicated. For

stainless steel or chrome-plated metal, stamp or etch plate and fill in letters with black enamel.

1. Provide at the following locations:

a. Receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type.

b. Switches and thermal-overload switches.

c. Pilot lights when located remotely from associated equipment or switch, where

function is not obvious.

d. Receptacles, switches, and other locations indicated.

2. Provide the following information:

a. Voltage and phase for receptacles other than standard 125-V duplex, grounding type.

b. Indicate equipment being controlled by switches and thermal-overload switches.

c. Indicate equipment being controlled for pilot lights when located remotely from

associated equipment or switch, where function is not obvious.

d. Number of breaker in panelboard that controls device.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances, location of reinforcements, and other conditions affecting performance of laboratory

casework.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF CABINETS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Install level, plumb, and true; shim as

required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other finished work, apply

filler strips and scribe for accurate fit, with fasteners concealed where practical. Do not exceed

the following tolerances:

1. Variation of Tops of Base Cabinets from Level: 1/16 inch in 10 feet (1.5 mm in 3 m).

2. Variation of Bottoms of Upper Cabinets from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).

3. Variation of Faces of Cabinets from a True Plane: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).

4. Variation of Adjacent Surfaces from a True Plane (Lippage): 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

5. Variation in Alignment of Adjacent Door and Drawer Edges: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

B. Utility-Space Framing: Secure to floor with two fasteners at each frame. Fasten to partition

framing, wood blocking, or metal reinforcements in partitions and to base cabinets.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Base Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to utility-space framing, partition framing, wood blocking, or

reinforcements in partitions with fasteners spaced not more than 24 inches (600 mm) O.C. Bolt

adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.

1. Where base cabinets are installed away from walls, fasten to floor at toe space at not more

than 24 inches (600 mm) O.C. and at sides of cabinets with not less than two fasteners per

side.

D. Wall Cabinets: Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, partition framing, blocking, or

reinforcements in partitions. Fasten each cabinet through back, near top, at not less than 24

inches (600 mm) O.C.

E. Install hardware uniformly and precisely. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises.

F. Adjust laboratory casework and hardware so doors and drawers align and operate smoothly

without warp or bind and contact points meet accurately. Lubricate operating hardware as

recommended by manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true

plane with flush hairline joints and with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Locate

joints only where shown on Shop Drawings.

B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in same manner as shop-made joints using dowels,

splines, fasteners, adhesives, and sealants recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges in shop

for field-made joints.

1. Use concealed clamping devices for field-made joints in plastic-laminate countertops.

Locate clamping devices within 6 inches (150 mm) of front and back edges and at intervals

not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Tighten according to manufacturer's written

instructions to exert a uniform heavy pressure at joints.

C. Fastening:

1. Secure countertops, except for epoxy countertops, to cabinets with Z-type fasteners or

equivalent, using two or more fasteners at each cabinet front, end, and back.

2. Secure epoxy countertops to cabinets with epoxy cement, applied at each corner and along

perimeter edges at not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) O.C.

3. Where necessary to penetrate countertops with fasteners, countersink heads approximately

1/8 inch (3 mm) and plug hole flush with material equal to countertop in chemical

resistance, hardness, and appearance.

D. Provide required holes and cutouts for service fittings.

E. Seal unfinished edges and cutouts in plastic-laminate countertops with heavy coat of

polyurethane varnish.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of countertop, curb, and splash with walls as

recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Match materials and finish to adjacent

laboratory casework. Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where


G. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

3.04 INSTALLATION OF SINKS

A. Comply with installation requirements in SEFA 2.3.

B. Underside Installation of Epoxy Sinks: Use laboratory casework manufacturer's recommended

adjustable support system for table- and cabinet-type installations. Set top edge of sink unit in

sink and countertop manufacturers' recommended chemical-resistant sealing compound or

adhesive and firmly secure to produce a tight and fully leakproof joint. Adjust sink and securely

support to prevent movement. Remove excess sealant or adhesive while still wet and finish joint

for neat appearance.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF LABORATORY ACCESSORIES

A. Install accessories according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Securely fasten adjustable shelving supports, stainless-steel shelves, and pegboards to partition

framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

C. Install shelf standards plumb and at heights to align shelf brackets for level shelves. Install

shelving level and straight, closely fitted to other work where indicated.

D. Securely fasten pegboards to partition framing, wood blocking, or reinforcements in partitions.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Comply with requirements in Divisions 15 and 16 Sections for installing water and laboratory

gas service fittings and electrical devices.

B. Install fittings according to Shop Drawings, installation requirements in SEFA 2.3, and

manufacturer's written instructions. Set bases and flanges of sink- and countertop-mounted

fittings in sealant recommended by manufacturer of sink or countertop material. Securely

anchor fittings to laboratory casework unless otherwise indicated.

3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to

match original factory finish, as approved by Engineer.

B. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 6-mil (0.15-mm) plastic or other suitable

water-resistant covering. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm)

O.C.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.08 SERVICE-FITTING SCHEDULE

A. Refer to plumbing and electrical specifications

END OF SECTION

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



This page is blank.


City of New Orleans Entrance Floor MatCriminal Evidence Processing Complex 12480 - 1

SECTION 12480ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Entrance matting systems, including recessed and surface mounted aluminum foot grids]

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include:

1. Section 03100 – Concrete Formwork1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. The Standards listed here are identified with a designation number, title or other designation established by the issuing authority.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D2047 Coefficient of Friction (James Method)

2. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux

3. ASTM B117 Product Corrosion to Salt

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Provide recessed aluminum entrance floor mat system, which has been manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.

B. Product data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's specification sheet and installation instructions for specified products. Include methods of installation and substrate preparation for each type of substrate.



C. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.

D. Samples: Submit samples for each type and color of exposed entrance mat, frames and accessories required. Provide sample of mat materials.

E. Quality Assurance Submittals: (1) Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties, and (2) Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.

F. Closeout Submittals: (1) Cleaning & Maintenance Data (Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance), and (2) Warranty.


A. Installer: Installer should be highly experienced in performing work of this section, having previously done work similar to that required for this project.

1.06 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Ordering: Comply with Manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials in Manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged packaging.

C. Storage: Store materials at temperature and in humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer and protect from exposure to harmful weather conditions.

D. Installation: Except as otherwise indicated herein, sequencing or scheduling for performance of work of this section in relation with other work is Contractor's option. Delay installation of mats until near time of substantial completion for the project.


A. Temperature: Maintain temperature where products will be installed before, during and after installation as recommended by Manufacturer.

B. Field Measurements: Where possible, verify actual measurements by field measuring before fabrication and include measurements in shop drawings. To avoid construction delays, coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule based upon construction progress.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Provide Nuway® foot grille by Mats Inc., 179 Campanelli Parkway, Stoughton, MA, 02072; telephone 800-628-7462 or 781-344-1536; fax 781-344-1537; www.matsinc.com. or equal



2.02 RECESSED ALUMINUM FOOT GRILLE MATERIALS

A. Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid: Nuway® Tuftiguard Design with choice of colored buffed rubber wiper strips with aluminum scraper bars or equal.

B. Recessed Aluminum Foot Grid:

1. Thickness 11/16”

2. Wiper Strip Colors: Charcoal

3. Scraper Bar Colors: Aluminum

4. Construction: Closed

5. Frame type: Deep frame 1 inch depth

C. Fabrication for Recessed Aluminum Foot Grids and framing will have the following characteristics:

1. Size: Fabricate entrance mats as units, but do not exceed manufacturer’s size recommendation.

2. Joints: Where joints in the entrance mats are necessary space them symmetrically and away from normal traffic ways.

3. Entrance Mats with Curved Perimeter: Provide full size templates to the manufacturer to ensure accurate fabrication.

a. Mats Frames: Fabricate frames in single lengths. Where frame dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, use minimum number of pieces possible with hairline joints equally spaced.

b. Corners: Miter corners.

c. Protective Coating: Coat surface off frame, which will contact cementitious material with zinc chromate primer conforming to SAE AMS 3110F.

4. Surface Mounted Frames: Mats Inc. matting systems standard ramp surface frame, drill and counter sunk to receive floor-fixing screws.

D. Testing and Standards

1. ASTM D2047 Coefficient of Friction (James Method): 0.79

2. ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux: Class 1

3. ASTM B117 Product Corrosion to Salt: Able to sustain 100 hours of salt fog without any notable changes

4. Rolling load Standard Model (12mm, Classic, closed construction, charcoal wiper strips with aluminum scraper bars): 1,000 lbs/wheel

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions where floor mats will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Sub floor shall be clean and dry, and within acceptable tolerances.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Sizes: Shop-fabricate units of floor mat to greatest extent possible in sizes as indicated. Where not indicated otherwise, provide single unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.

B. Accessories: Where indicated for recessed or wall-to-wall applications, provide aluminum framework as recommended by manufacturer General: Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and to prevent tripping hazards.

3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General Cleaning: Refer to Manufacturer’s Cleaning and Maintenance Instructions.B. Owner’s Personnel: Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper maintenance procedures.C. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction and until

acceptance.

END OF SECTION


City of New Orleans Lightning ProtectionCriminal Evidence Processing Complex 13730 - 1

SECTION 13100 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for building and site components.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following:

1. Ground rods.2. Ground loop conductor.




A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label.2. LPI System Certificate.3. UL Master Label Recertification.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:

a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc.b. ERICO International Corporation.c. Harger.d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.e. Independent Protection Co.f. Preferred Lightning Protection.g. Robbins Lightning, Inc.h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=2216&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=95&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456896406&mf=95&src=wd










3. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches (600 mm) Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.

4. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper.

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

E. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter by 10 feet (3 m).

F. Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: Solid copper.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors.2. Down conductors.3. Interior conductors.4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet (60 m) of

building.

D. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

E. Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components.

1. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used only below the roof level.

F. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet (18 m) in length to lightning protection components.



H. Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the perimeter of structure.

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building foundation.2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop.3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet (3.6 m) of

grade level.

I. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot (18-m) intervals.

3.2 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 16091 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.

END OF SECTION 13100

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Lighting Protection


SECTION 13100 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for [structures] [structure elements] [building site

components].



B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be

used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be

met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal

bodies.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or

certification by UL.

B. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing

material.


D. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of

Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

E. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding

features, including the following:

1. Ground rods.

2. Ground loop conductor.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by [UL] [or] [LPI as a Master Installer/Designer], trained

and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label.

2. LPI System Certificate.

3. UL Master Label Recertification.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780,

"Definitions" Article.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and

components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal

bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and

Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I, aluminum unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc.

b. ERICO International Corporation.

c. Harger.

d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc.

e. Independent Protection Co.

f. Preferred Lightning Protection.

g. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.

Air Terminals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less

than half the height of the terminal.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-

membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in roofing Sections.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Aluminum.

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

E. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long.

F. Heavy-Duty, Stack-Mounted, Lightning Protection Components: Solid copper.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp

bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors.

2. Down conductors.

3. Interior conductors.

4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building.

D. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and

connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in

underground portions of the system.

E. Cable Connections: Use exothermic-welded connections for all conductor splices and

connections between conductors and other components.

1. Exception: In single-ply membrane roofing, exothermic-welded connections may be used

only below the roof level.

F. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive


G. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet in length to lightning protection

components.

H. Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the

perimeter of structure.

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation.

2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop.

3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet of grade

level.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



I. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors

to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot intervals.


A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 16091 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in

the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such

materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of

conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning

protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.


© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Bullet Resistant Partitions and Equipment


SECTION 13110

BULLET RESISTANT PARTITIONS AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Bullet Resistant Transaction Modules (Windows)

B. Bullet Resistant Doors

C. Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Panels

D. Bullet Resistant Pass-Through Drawers


A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 08710 - Hardware.

C. Section 08800 - Glass Glazing.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel

Sheet, Strip, Plate and Flat Bar.

B. ASTM B 209/B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate.

C. NIJ Standard 0108.01 - (National Institute of Justice) Standard for Ballistic Resistant Protective

Materials.

D. Underwriters Laboratories: UL 752 - Standard for Bullet Resisting Equipment.


A. Design, fabricate and install all partition materials specified in this section to meet or exceed the

requirements of UL 752.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01330.



© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit Manufacturer approved shop drawings detailing plan, section and

elevation views as necessary to ensure proper field installation procedures. Coordinate

locations with those listed in the Contract Drawings. Verification of existing conditions and

field verification required as part of shop drawing submittal.Selection Samples: For each finish

product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of

available colors and patterns.

D. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches

(150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by

a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer

with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same

type and scope as specified.

C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application

workmanship.

1. Finish areas designated by Architect.

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by

Architect.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by hazardous materials, in

accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under

environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.09 WARRANTY

A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed copy of the

manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms,

conditions, and exclusions from coverage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of design manufacturer: Design is based on aluminum bullet resistant fixed windows,

transaction drawer, bullet resistant partition systems manufactured by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.

(800) 421-6144

B. Or Equal

2.02 BULLET RESISTANT TRANSACTION MODULES

A. Construction:

1. Model: Interior - All aluminum fixed window voice around transaction window.

2. Basis of design: CRLNIVIA Aluminum Narrow Inset Frame Interior Glazed Vision

window

3. Rating: UL 752 Protection Level 3.

4. Frame: Aluminum tube and fixed glazing channel. Glazing is wrapped with anodized

aluminum channels.

5. Finish All aluminum to be clear anodized.

6. Counter Construction: Stainless Steel, No. 4 Brushed Finish.

7. Unit Size: 36” wide x 60” high

B. Glazing: As specified in Article 20.2 of this section. Meets Underwriters Laboratories Standard

752 for bullet resistance.

1. Glazing Type: Lexan, 1 ¼”

C. Voice Transmission:

1. System Type: Natural Voice Transmission Surround sound

2. Provide for two way “natural voice” or “surround sound” communication permitted by the

design of the window jambs and glazing technique. Units must be manufactured in strict

accordance with the specifications, design and details. No field alterations to the

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



construction of the units fabricated under the acceptable standards shall be allowed unless

approved by the manufacturer and the architect.

2.03 BULLET RESISTANT DOORS

A. Door Type:

1. Steel Door: All steel, bullet-resistant protective barrier, hung on a steel frame. Peepholes,

view windows and door scopes are pre-drilled and factory installed in accordance with the

Contract Documents for installation into specified system.

B. Door Construction:

1. Aluminum: Ballistic aluminum frame, pre-drilled in accordance with the Contract

Documents for installation into specified system. Extruded and keyed aluminum spline

joinery with continuous 3/8 inch (10mm) diameter steel tie rod at door top and bottom

rails.

a. Clear anodized

2. Steel, prime painted. Field painting as designated in door schedule

3. Glazing: As specified in Article 2.2 of this section. Meets Underwriters Laboratories

Standard 752 for bullet resistance.

a. Rating: UL 752 Level 3.

4. Hardware: refer to specification section 08710

a. View window: 12” x 12” mounted at ADA compliant height

2.04 BULLET RESISTANT FIBERGLASS PANELS

A. Bullet resistant fiberglass armor tested and approved to meet U.L. 752 for the level of protection

specified.

1. Basis of design is CRL Level 3 Panels

a. Rating: UL 752 Level 3, UN Listed.

b. Panel Thickness: 7/16 inch (10mm).

c. Panel Weight: 4.31 Lbs per square foot (19.56 kg/sm).

d. Panel size 96” x 48”

B. Location shown on drawings.

2.05 PASS-THROUGH DRAWERS

A. Through Wall Drawer: Secure drawer with removable stainless steel deal tray for money and

credit card transactions. Deal tray is removable to provide a larger transfer area. Lockable

storage compartment with a forward-hinge cover conceals contents from customer view.

1. Basis of Design CRL TD1724TW

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Protection Level 3 Special Order

3. Size: 17” wide x 27” deep x 14 5/8” High

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.02 PREPARATION




3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 PROTECTION



END OF SECTION

© 2019 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



This page is blank.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Access Controls


SECTION 13730 - ACCESS CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Access and security management system. (Pro-Watch)

B. Integrated security management system. (Win-Pak)

C. Web based modular access control system. (NetAXS-4 Access System)

D. Web based access control system. (NetAXS-123 Access System)

E. Visitor management system. (Lobbyworks)

F. Access control readers.

G. Access control credentials.

H. Access control cables.


A. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Section 27 11 23 - Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA):

1. RS232C - Interface between Data Terminal Equipment and Data Communications

Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange.

2. RS485 - Electrical Characteristics of Generators and Receivers for use in Balanced

Digital Multi-Point Systems.

B. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):

1. FCC Part 15 - Radio Frequency Device.

2. FCC Part 68 - Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network.

C. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS):

1. Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) (FIPS 197).

2. FIPS 201: Personal Identity Verification (PIV) of Federal Employees and Contractors.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA70 - National Electrical Code.

E. Homeland Security Presidential Directive 12 (HSPD-12).

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL294 - Access Control System Units.

2. UL1076 - Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.4 SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Pro-Watch: The Security Management System shall function as an electronic access control

system and shall integrate alarm monitoring, CCTV, digital video, ID badging and database

management into a single platform. A modular and network-enabled architecture shall allow

maximum versatility for tailoring secure and dependable access and alarm monitoring

solutions.

B. FIPS Certification: The system shall support FIPS 201 certification.

C. WIN-PAK: The Integrated Security Management System (ISMS) shall function as an

electronic access control system and shall integrate the alarm monitoring, CCTV, digital

video, ID badging and database management into a single platform. ISMS shall function as a

one-stop gateway for all the access control needs. A modular and network-enabled

architecture shall allow maximum versatility for tailoring secure and dependable access and

alarm monitoring solutions. The following definitions are applicable for the WIN-PAK

system:

1. Access Card: A coded employee card, usually the size of a credit card, recognizable to

the access control system and read by a reader to allow access. It can be used for

photo identification of the cardholder and for other data collection purposes. Card

technologies include magnetic strips, wiegand-effect, proximity (active/passive),

barium ferrite, and smart/intelligent cards.

2. Abstract Device: An Abstract Device (ADV) is a logical representation of a physical

device. The ADVs can be associated with any hardware device, including

communication interfaces, panels, alarm points, entrances, and CCTV equipment. The

ADVs help in monitoring the device status and controlling the actions of a physical

device through the Control Map, Floor Plan, or Alarm View.

3. Access Control System: An interconnected set of controllers, managing the entrance

and exit of people through secure areas.

4. Access Level: The door or combination of doors and/or barriers an individual is

authorized to pass through.

5. Anti-Pass back (Anti-Tailgating): This feature protects against more than one person

using the same card or number. It defines each system card reader and card ID number

as IN, OUT or other. Once a card is granted access to an IN reader, it must be

presented to an OUT reader before another IN reader access is granted. Cards will

continue to have access to all authorized OTHER readers.

6. Alarm: A signal that indicates a problem.

7. Alarm input: A device that is monitored by the access control panel. An alarm signal

will be generated if the device is activated.

8. Badge: Badge is a template or a design for creating a card. WIN-PAK includes a full-

featured badge layout utility for designing, creating, and printing badges. Badge

design includes magnetic stripe encoding, bar coding, signatures, and so on.

9. Bar Code: A method of encoding information using lines and blank spaces of varying

size and thickness to represent alphanumeric characters.

10. Biometrics: A general term for the verification of individuals using unique biological

characteristics (i.e. fingerprints, hand geometry, voice analysis, the retinal pattern in

the eye).

11. Card and Card Holder: A card is an identity proof of a person and a card holder is a

person who holds the card. Multiple cards can be assigned to a single card holder to

provide different access.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



12. Controller: A microprocessor based circuit board that manages access to a secure area.

The controller receives information that it uses to determine through which doors and

at what times cardholders are granted access to secure areas. Based on that

information, the controller can lock/unlock doors, sound alarms, and communicate

status to a host computer.

13. Communication Port: A hardware device that allows a computer to communicate with

external devices.

14. Card Reader: A device that retrieves information stored on an access card and

transmits that information to a controller.

15. Network or Digital Video Recorder (DVR): A security system device that records the

video from the surveillance cameras (IP and/or Analog) on a hard disk.

16. Door: A generic term for a securable entry way. In many access control applications a

"door" may actually be a gate, turnstile, elevator door, or similar device.

17. Duress: Forcing a person to provide access to a secure area against that person's

wishes.

18. Guard Tour: A defined route of a security guard.

19. Host Computer: The central controlling computer from which access control software

applications are run.

20. Input: An electronic sensor on a controller that detects a change of state in a device

outside the controller

21. Keypad: An alphanumeric grid which allows a user to enter an identification code. A

flat device which has buttons that may be pressed in a sequence to send data to a

controller, and which differs from a typewriter-like computer board.

22. Online Help: A reference program within most software programs that provides basic

descriptions and instructions on how to use that software program.

23. Output Relay: A device that changes its state upon receiving a signal from a

controller. Typically the state change prompts an action outside of the controller such

as activating or inactivating a device. The auxiliary relays found in access control

panels or NODES that control external devices.

24. Reader: A device that "receives" an identification code from a card, key tag, magnetic

stripe card, bar code card, or related item. Refers to the "front end" that a user must

interact with to allow access. Readers can be keypads, card readers, proximity readers,

and so on.

25. RS232: A serial communication protocol used for connecting data terminal devices.

RS-232 is the most commonly used communication protocol.

26. Server: The host computer, which has the ISMS functions.

27. Shunt Time: The length of time a door open alarm is suppressed (shunted) after a

valid card access or free egress request. This time should be just enough to allow a

card user to open a door or gate, pass through, and then close it.

28. Time zones: "Schedules" that allow cards to function or not function depending on the

time of day. This is used to limit access to the facility. The schedule may include not

only time but which days of the week a card is valid.

29. Wiegand Card: An access control card based on the Wiegand effect. Small bits of

specially processed wire are embedded in the card in a pattern that uniquely identifies

the card. This identification information can then be decoded by a Wiegand reader.

30. Wiegand Reader: A reader capable of reading the information encoded on a Wiegand

card.

31. Video Management System (VMS): An enterprise-class video management and

storage solution.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.




3. Installation methods.

C. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6

inches (150 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns.

D. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets indicating systems and

components proposed for use.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings indicating system components, wiring

diagrams and load calculations.

F. Record Drawings: During construction maintain record drawings indicating location of

equipment and wiring. Submit an electronic version of record drawings for the Security

Management System not later than Substantial Completion of the project.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data,

customized to the Security Management System installed. Include system and operator

manuals.

H. Maintenance Service Agreement: Submit a sample copy of the manufacturer's maintenance

service agreement, including cost and services for a two year period for Owner's review.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum ten years experience in manufacturing and maintaining Security

Management Systems. Manufacturer shall be Microsoft Silver Certified.

B. Installer must be certified by Honeywell Integrated Security Dealer Service Certification

Program (DSCP).


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.




environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty for the security

management system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Honeywell Security and Fire, which is located at: 2700

Blankenbaker Pkwy. Suite 150; Louisville, KY 40299; Toll Free Tel: 800-323-4576;

Email:request info ([email protected]); Web:www.security.honeywell.com

B. Substitutions: Not permitted.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60

00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 ACCESS AND SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (PRO-WATCH)

A. Security Management System Manufacturer: Pro-Watch Security Management Suite as

manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group.

B. The Security Management System shall function as an electronic access control system and

shall integrate alarm monitoring, CCTV, digital and network video, ID badging and database

management into a single platform. A modular and network-enabled architecture shall allow

maximum versatility for tailoring secure and dependable access and alarm monitoring

solutions.

C. Access Control Software Suite: The Security Management System shall offer a security

management software suite available in four scalable versions: The Security Management

System platform shall offer a complete access control solution: alarm monitoring, video

imaging, ID badging and video surveillance control. Provide the following software system:

1. Pro-Watch Lite Edition: The Security Management System shall utilize the Microsoft

SQL Express database for applications with one to four users and up to 32 controlled

doors. The Security Management System shall operate in Windows 7

Ultimate/Professional as the host operating system.

2. Pro-Watch Professional Edition. Professional Edition: The Security Management

System shall utilize Microsoft SQL Express (SQL 2008 or later) database for

applications from one to five users and up to 64 controlled doors. The Security

Management System shall provide a set of tools to easily backup, restore and maintain

the Security Management System database. The Security Management System shall

allow for expansion to Corporate and/or Enterprise Edition without changing the user

interface or database structure. The Security Management System shall operate in

Windows 7 Ultimate/Professional as the host operating system.

3. Pro-Watch Corporate Edition: The Security Management System shall operate in the

Windows Server 2012 (64-bit) and Windows Server 2012 R2 (64-bit) environment

and utilize SQL Server 2012 SP1 (32-bit and 64-bit) as the database engine.

4. Pro-Watch Enterprise Edition: The Security Management System shall incorporate

regional server architecture. Regional sites shall operate autonomously with all

information required to maintain security locally. The enterprise server shall maintain

any critical system information via synchronization with each regional site. A single

enterprise server shall provide global management of all regional servers and shall act

as a central collecting point for all hardware configurations, cardholder and clearance

code data and transaction history. The enterprise server and regional server(s) shall

support Windows Server 2012 (64-bit) and Windows Server 2012 R2 (64-bit).

D. Software Requirements: The Security Management System shall be a modular and network-

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



enabled access control system. The Security Management System shall be capable of

controlling multiple remote sites, alarm monitoring, video imaging, ID badging, paging,

digital video and CCTV switching and control that allows for easy expansion or

modification of inputs and remote control stations. The Security Management System

control at a central computer location shall be under the control of a single software program

and shall provide full integration of all components. It shall be alterable at any time

depending upon facility requirements. Security Management System reconfiguration shall be

accomplished online through system programming. The Security Management System shall


1. Multi-User/Network Capabilities: The Security Management System shall support

multiple operator workstations via local area network/wide area network

(LAN/WAN). The communications between the workstations and the server computer

shall utilize the TCP/IP standard over industry standard IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet). The

communications between the server and workstations shall be supervised, and shall

automatically generate alarm messages when the server is unable to communicate

with a workstation. The operators on the network server shall have the capability to

log on to workstations and remotely configure devices for the workstation. Standard

operator permission levels shall be enforced, with full operator audit.

2. Concurrent Licensing: The Security Management System shall support concurrent

client workstation licensing. The Security Management System application shall be

installed on any number of client workstations, and shall provide the ability for any of

the client workstations to connect to the database server as long as the maximum

number of concurrent connections purchased has not been exceeded.

3. Security Key: The Security Management System shall only require a software security

key to be present on the application server for the Security Management System to

operate. Security keys shall not be required at the client workstations. The Security

Management System shall allow a user to read the information that is programmed on

the server security key. The Security Management System shall support the

installation, update, and termination of the security key.

4. Terminal Services: The Security Management System shall support Windows Server

2008 Terminal Services. Terminal Services shall allow the Security Management

System server application to reside on the Windows Terminal Server. Operating

systems supporting a standard web browser shall be capable of utilizing the thin client

architecture. The Security Management System shall support unlimited connections,

based on concurrent licensing, to the Security Management System software. Full

functionality shall be obtained through the intranet connection allowing full

administration and monitoring without the need for a local installation.

5. Relational Database Management System: The Security Management System shall

support industry standard relational database management systems. This shall include

relational database management system Microsoft SQL Server 2012 SP1.

6. Database Partitioning: The Security Management System shall provide the option to

restrict access to sensitive information by user ID.

7. Memory: Proprietary software programs and control logic information used to

coordinate and drive system hardware shall be stored in read-only memory.

8. LDAP/ Microsoft Active Directory Services: The Security Management System shall

provide support of Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) for enabling the

user to locate organizations, individuals, and other resources such as files and devices

in a network, whether on the public internet or on a private intranet. The Security

Management System shall provide a direct link to Microsoft Active Directory

Services. The Security Management System shall allow the transfer of Active

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Directory users into the database via the Data Transfer Utility. Conversely, Security

Management System users shall be capable of being exported to the Active Directory.

9. Unicode: The Security Management System shall utilize Unicode worldwide character

set standard. The Security Management System shall support double-byte character

sets to facilitate adaptation of the Security Management System user interface and

documentation to new international markets. Language support shall include at a

minimum English, Spanish, Portuguese, French, German and Simple Chinese.

10. Encryption: The Security Management System shall provide multiple levels of data

encryption

a. True 128-bit AES data encryption between the host and intelligent controllers.

The encryption shall ensure data integrity that is compliant with the

requirements of FIPS-197 and SCIF environments. Master keys shall be

downloaded to the intelligent controller, which shall then be authenticated

through the Security Management System based on a successful match.

b. Transparent database encryption, including log files and backups

c. SQL secure connections via SSL

11. Supervised Alarm Points: Both supervised and non-supervised alarm point monitoring

shall be provided. Upon recognition of an alarm, the system shall be capable of

switching CCTV cameras that are associated with the alarm point.

12. Compliance and Validation: The Security Management System shall incorporate

signature authentication where modifications to Security Management System

resources will require either a single or dual signature authentication. Administrators

will have the ability to select specified devices in the Security Management System

where data manipulation will be audited and signatures will be required to account for

the data modification. Upon resource modification, the user will be required to enter a

reason for change or select a predefined reason from a list. All data will be securely

stored and maintained in the database and can be viewed using the reporting tool. This

functionality will meet the general requirements of Validation and Compliance

through Digital Signatures with special attention to the case of Title 21 CFR Part 11

Part B compliance.

13. Clean Room Solution:

a. Overview: The Security Management System shall provide a clean room

solution which enables users to manage their "Clean Environments" or other

areas requiring special restricted access through a process-oriented graphical

user interface (GUI).

b. Configuration: The user shall have the capability of adding, editing, or deleting

clean rooms. Each "clean room" shall be capable of having a contamination

level set. Entry to a higher level contamination area shall automatically restrict

access to cleaner level areas. Individual cards shall be capable of being reset on

an immediate one time, automatic, or per-hour basis.

E. Security Management System Operational Requirements:

1. System Operations:

a. Windows Authentication Login: The Security Management System shall use an

integrated login method which accepts the user ID of the person who has

logged on to Windows.

b. Password: The Security Management System shall use an integrated

authentication method which utilizes Windows user accounts and policies.

c. Information Access: The Security Management System shall be capable of

limiting operator access to sensitive information. Operators shall have proper

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



authorization to edit the information.

d. Shadow Login: The Security Management System shall allow users to login

over a currently logged-on user without having the current user log off the

Security Management System or out of the Windows operating system.

e. Graphical User Interface: The Security Management System shall be fully

compliant with Microsoft graphical user interface standards, with the look and

feel of the software being that of a standard Windows application, including

hardware tree-based system configuration.

f. Guard Tour: The Security Management System shall include a guard tour

module, which shall allow the users to program guard tours for their facility.

The tours shall not require the need for independent or dedicated readers.

g. Secure Mode Verification (e.g., force guard to do a visual verify): The Security

Management System shall provide ' secure mode' control from the verification

viewer. This shall allow a user or guard to decide the access of an individual

who presents his/her card at a designated secure mode reader.

h. Database Partitioning: The Security Management System shall support dynamic

partitioning. A Security Management System in which partitions are set up at

installation and cannot be easily changed shall not be acceptable.

i. Status Groups: The Security Management System shall support a real-time

system status monitor that graphically depicts all logical devices.

j. Keyboard Accelerators: The Security Management System shall allow the user

to use a shortcut key to enable designated system commands.

k. Automatically Disable Card upon Lack of Use: The Security Management

System shall allow system operators to set a predefined time period in which

cardholders shall swipe their card through a card reader in the Security

Management System.

l. User Functions and ADA Ability: The Security Management System shall

provide user functions and ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) ability that

provides the capability to trigger an event at the Security Management System

intelligent controller when a defined card is presented.

m. Pathways: The Security Management System shall support the capability of

programming pathways. A pathway shall be an object that combines input

points to be masked (shunted) for a set duration, and an output point to be

activated, when a particular card receives a local grant at a reader.

n. Database Audit Log: The Security Management System shall be capable of

creating an audit log in the history file following any change made to the

Security Management System database by an operator.

o. Operator Log: The Security Management System shall be capable of creating

an action log in the history file following actions performed by an operator.

p. Alarm Routing: The Security Management System shall be capable of defining

routing groups that determine what event information shall be routed to a user

or class of users.

q. Global and Nested Anti-passback: The Security Management System shall

support the use of an optional anti-passback mode, in which cardholders are

required to follow a proper in/out sequence within the assigned area.

r. Two Person Rule: The Security Management System shall support a "two

person rule" to restrict access to specific access areas unless two cardholders

present two different valid cards to the reader one after the other within a period

time defined by the door unlock time multiplied by a factor of 2.

s. Occupancy Restrictions: The Security Management System shall allow the user

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



to define the minimum and maximum occupancy allowed in a designated area.

t. Multiple Sequential Card Swipes to Initiate Procedure: The Security

Management System shall allow the user to define a logical device, quantity of

consecutive identical events, a time period and a Security Management System

procedure to trigger when the event occurs a maximum quantity of times in the

allocated time period.

u. Hardware Templates: The Security Management System shall include the

ability to define hardware templates (door templates) in order to simplify the

process of creating an access control system. Hardware templates shall allow a

user to define a "typical" door configuration and then use that template over and

over in the process of defining doors.

v. MRDT. Pro-Watch can accommodate Mercury Intrusion hardware like the

Mercury MRDT ("Mercury Digital Terminal") with keypad. MRDT works with

PW-6000 panel to provide intrusion functionality. Mercury Intrusion requires a

special Pro-Watch license.

2. Access Control Functional Requirements: Functions shall include validation based on

time of day, day of week, holiday scheduling, site code verification, automatic or

manual retrieval of cardholder photographs, and access validation based on positive

verification of card/PIN, card, and video. The following features shall be

programmable and shall be capable of being modified by a user with the proper

authorization:

a. Time Zones: Shall define the period during which a reader, card, alarm point,

door, or other system feature is active or inactive. In addition to Monday-

Sunday, there shall be at least one day of the week called Holiday.

b. Holidays: The application shall allow holidays to be entered into the Security

Management System. Holidays shall have a start date plus duration defining

multiple days. Holidays shall have a holiday type of 1, 2, or 3, which may be

defined by the user.

c. Response Codes: The Security Management System shall allow the user to

enter a predefined code to represent a response to an alarm occurring in the

facility.

d. Clearance Codes: The Security Management System shall allow the user to

establish groups of readers at a facility for the purpose of granting or denying

access to badge holders. Clearance codes shall be assigned to companies and

individuals employed by the company, and may be modified for individual

users in the badge holder maintenance application.

e. Companies: Each badge holder entered into the Security Management System

shall be assigned a company code identifying the individual's employer. The

company information dialog box displays and maintains information related to

companies having access to the facility.

f. Group Access: The Security Management System shall allow a user or group of

users via company selection, a temporary denial of access to specific readers or

areas based on a preconfigured event. The group access function shall limit

access to a group of cardholders, overriding all other access criteria.

g. Event: Definitions shall be shipped with system software but shall be capable,

upon installation, of being modified, added to, or deleted from the Security

Management System.

h. Alarm Pages: Security Management System shall include the capability to

create an unlimited number of customized alarm pages for the alarm monitor

and each shall be assignable to users and user classes.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



i. Event Types: Definitions shall be shipped with system software but shall be

capable, upon installation, of being modified, added to, or deleted from the

Security Management System.

j. Dynamic Graphical Maps: The Security Management System shall provide the

user with the means to add maps and indicator icons to maps that shall

represent input/output points, logical devices, or cameras located throughout

the Security Management System. Security Management System maps shall

display the state and condition of alarm points. The Security Management

System shall also provide the ability to monitor the channels or panels.

k. Brass Keys: Shall maintain information related to assets that are issued in the

facility, including brass keys, laptops, RSA keys, cell phones, company cards,

etc.

l. ID Badging Client: The Security Management System Shall maintain

information related to a badge holder's card access privileges. Upon entering

this application, a window shall appear on the screen and all actions (add,

modify, or delete) involving badges and cards shall be initiated from this

window. Access privileges shall be linked to the cards used to gain access to

doors in the facility. Modifications shall be made by adding or deleting

clearance codes, or by door types assigned to the cards or to a badge holder.

m. ID Badging System: The Security Management System shall include

seamlessly integrated ID badging system.

n. Users: Information related to the users of the Security Management System

software shall be stored in the database. Users entered into the Security

Management System shall be assigned the access privileges of the class to

which they are assigned.

o. Elevator Control: The elevator control shall be of the Security Management

System intelligent controller-based line of devices. The elevator control shall

include the following functional features:

1) Elevator call: Valid card read calls elevator to the floor. No reader in the

elevator car.

2) Floor control: Valid card read in the elevator car enables selectable floor

buttons.

3) Floor select: Valid card read in the elevator car enables selectable floor

buttons and logs which floor is selected after the card is presented.

p. Data Transfer Unit (DTU): The DTU enables data to be imported from an

external system directly into the Security Management System database and

also exported from Pro-Watch to an external system.

1) Insert only: If a "data file key column #" shall be provided, the DTU will

only insert a new badge record if the key column value is not found. An

error shall be displayed in the log file if an existing badge record is

found. If no "data file key column #" is provided, every record will be

inserted into the Security Management System.

2) Updates only: The DTU shall use the "data file key column #" to look for

the matching Security Management System record. An error shall be

logged in the log file if the badge holder is not found in the Security

Management System database.

3) Inserts, updates: The DTU shall use the "data file key column #" to look

for the matching Security Management System record. If a matching

record is not found, the DTU shall insert the data. If a matching record is

found, the record shall be updated.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4) DTU shall support SOAP web services.

q. Generic Channel Interface: The Security Management System shall provide the

ability to define generic communications channels over serial port or TCP/IP

network socket including IP address and port/socket, to support custom

integration of external foreign devices. The Security Management System shall

generate events based on data received from the channel matching operator pre-

defined instructions.

3. Application Localization: The Security Management System shall support at least

seven languages including English. The languages available shall include German,

French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese (simplified), Portuguese (Brazil), Norwegian,

Chinese (Traditional), Danish, and Dutch, All database resources will be localized,

and will include a standard U.S. English help file.

4. Event Manager: The Security Management System shall utilize an event manager as a

component of system administration and offer the ability to have users control the

amount of data stored as well as a quick snapshot of the logged data in the system.

Using the various logs in event manager, the user will be able to gather information

about events, auditing, and operator actions. The logs are defined as follows: Event

log, audit log, unacknowledged alarms.

F. Intelligent Controllers - Hardware Requirements:

1. Distributed architecture shall allow controllers to operate independently of the host.

The architecture shall place key access decisions, event/action processing and alarm

monitoring functions within the controllers, eliminating degraded mode operation.

2. Flash memory management shall support firmware updates and revisions to be

downloaded to the system. Upgrades to the hardware and software shall occur

seamlessly without the loss of database, configurations, or historical report data.

3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Field Controllers or

comparable product by one of the following:

a. Honeywell Security Star II (Legacy support only)

b. Honeywell Security PW-2000

c. Honeywell Security PW-3000 (Legacy support only)

d. Honeywell Security PW-5000

e. Honeywell Security PW-6000

f. Honeywell Security PW-6101ICE

4. Cardkey Controllers: The Security Management System software suite shall provide

functionality to Cardkey Controllers using Nodal Protocol B, the Cardkey Controllers

D620 (Firmware revision PS-143D or PS143-E), and the Cardkey D600AP (Firmware

Revisions PS-155A or PS-155B). Supported interface is currently, but not limited to,

standard STI and STIE devices. Minimum functionality to be supported:

a. Controller to host communications.

b. Downloading of cards.

c. Downloading of Security Management System parameters.

d. Downloading of reader parameters.

e. Downloading of input point parameters.

f. Downloading of relay output point parameters.

G. Field Hardware:

1. The security management system shall be equipped with access control field hardware

required to receive alarms and administer all access granted/denied decisions. All field

hardware shall meet UL requirements.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Intelligent Controller Board:

1) Honeywell Security PW3K1IC (Legacy support only)

2) Honeywell Security PW6K1IC

3) Honeywell Security PW6K1ICE

b. Single Reader Module (SRM):

1) Honeywell Security PW6K1R1

2) Honeywell Security PW6K1R1E

c. Dual Reader Module (DRM):

1) Honeywell Security PW6K1R2

d. Alarm Input Module (AIM):

1) Honeywell Security PW6K1IN

e. Relay Output Module (ROM):

1) Honeywell Security PW6K1OUT

f. Mercury Family Hardware:

1) EP-1501

2) EP-1502

3) EP-2500 with Wiegand Reader.

4) MR-16IN (16 Input Board).

5) MR-16OUT (16 Output Board).

6) MR-50 (Single Reader Board).

7) MR-51E (Single Reader Board ETHERNET).

8) MR-52 (2-Reader Board).

9) SCP/SCP2.

10) Mercury M5 Bridge.

11) M2K

g. Lenel Family Hardware:

1) LNL-1000 with Wiegand Reader.

2) LNL-1100 (16 Input Board).

3) LNL-1200 (16 Input Board).

4) LNL-1300 (Single Reader Board).

5) LNL-1320 (2-Reader Board).

6) LNL-2000 with Wiegand Reader.

7) LNL-2210.

8) LNL-3300.

9) LNL-8000.

h. SALTO Locksets:

1) Locksets compatible with SVN - Salto's Virtual Network.

i. Card Readers:

1) Honeywell Security:

a) OmniProx.

b) OmniAssure

c) OmniClass.

d) DigiReaders.

2) HID:

a) ProxPro.

b) MiniProx.

c) MaxiProx.

d) ThinLine II.

e) ProxPro II.

f) ProxPoint Plus.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3) Indala:

a) FlexPass.

b) FlexPass Linear.

c) FlexPass Arch.

d) FlexPass Curve.

e) FlexPass Long Range.

f) FlexPass Wave.

4) Biometric Readers:

a) BioScrypt.

b) Recognition Systems.

5) WSE Readers (SNET Protocol) - Star I, Star II, PW-6000:

a) DR4201.

b) DR4203.

c) DR4205.

d) DR4205K.

e) DR4208.

f) DR4208K.

g) DR4220.

h) MSR42-GW.

6) Wireless Readers:

a) IR Wireless Reader.

b) AD-400 Wireless Locks.

c) SALTO SALLIS Wireless Reader.

d) ASSA ABLOY APERIO Wireless Reader.

e) SCHLAGE Wireless Reader.

H. Digital Video Recording Systems:

1. The Security Management System shall provide fully integrated support for a

powerful network and digital video recording and transmission system. The Security

Management System shall record, search and transmit video, and shall provide users

with live, pre- and post- event assessment capabilities. The NVRs/DVRs shall be

seamlessly integrated with existing video equipment and incorporated into any

TCP/IP network. The NVRs/DVRs shall provide multiple levels of integration with

the Security Management System software, providing control of the network or digital

video system from the access control application.

2. Manufacturer and part numbers:

a. Honeywell MAXPRO® VMS

b. Honeywell Fusion III series digital recorders

c. Honeywell Rapid Eye Multi-Media series digital recorders

d. Integral Technologies DVXi series digital recorders

e. Integral Technologies DSXpress Series digital recorders

I. Video Management Systems (VMS):

1. With integration to VMS, Security Management System shall control multiple sources

of video subsystems in a facility to collect, manage and present video in a clear and

concise manner. VMS intelligently determines the capabilities of each subsystem

across various sites, allowing video management of any analog or digital video device

through a unified configuration and viewer. Disparate video systems are normalized

and funneled through a common video experience. Drag and drop cameras from the

Security Management System hardware tree into VMS views. Leverage Security

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Management System alarm integration and advanced features such as pursuit that help

the operator track a target through a set of sequential cameras with a single click to

select a new central camera and surrounding camera views.


a. Honeywell Security MAXPRO VMS.

J. Intercom Interface:

1. The interface shall provide control of both remote and master intercom stations from

within the Security Management System application. The Security Management

System shall allow the user to define the site, channel, description, and address as well

as provide a checkbox for primary station.

2. Administrators shall have the capability to program a list of intercom functions that

report to the alarm-monitoring module as events. These functions shall coincide with

the intercom functions provided with the intercom system. For each intercom

function, Security Management System administrators shall be able to define an

alphanumeric event description 1 to 40 characters in length and shall also be able to

set the parameter value of that function.

3. The intercom interface shall allow for secondary annunciation of intercom calls,

events, and alarms in the alarm-monitoring window. Intercom reporting to the alarm

monitoring window shall report as any other access control alarm and shall have the

same annunciation and display properties as access control alarms.

4. All intercom calls, events, and alarms that report into the Security Management

System shall be stored in the system database for future audit trail and reporting

capabilities. Intercom events shall include but not be limited to: Station busy, Station

free, Intercom call to busy station, Intercom call to private station, Station

disconnected, Function dialed outside connection, Intelligent station ID, Station reset,

Station lamp test, Audio program changed, Group hunt occurred, Mail message, Digit

dialed during connection, Direct access key pressed, Handset off hook, M-key

pressed, C-key pressed

5. Manufacturer(s) and part numbers:

a. Stentofon/Zenitel Alphacom series intercoms.

b. Commend series intercoms.

K. Intrusion Detection Panels:

1. Honeywell VISTA-128FBP, VISTA-128BPE, VISTA-128BPT, VISTA-250FBP,

VISTA-250BPE, and VISTA-250BPT Controllers:

a. General Requirements: The Security Management System shall support

hardwired and TCP/IP communication for the VISTA 128FBP/VISTA-250

FBP panel. Each panel shall have 8 partitions and 15 zone lists. Zones,

partitions, and the top-level panel shall have an events page, with all supported

events present. Features:

1) Disarm and unlock a door on card swipe.

2) Arm and lock a door on card swipe.

3) Common area arm/disarm.

4) Access denied if intrusion system is in alarm or armed.

5) Monitor and log intrusion system events and alarms in the Security

Management System.

6) Associate intrusion system events and alarms to video surveillance

integrations.

2. Honeywell Galaxy Dimension GD264 and GD520 Controllers:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Security Management System users are able to control and monitor group and

zone status using the Security Management System client, and control the

individual zones and groups using Security Management System Access

control credentials. Depending on the combined user profiles and access

permissions defined in Security Management System, a Security Management

System cardholder is allowed or denied permission to arm/disarm zones and

groups. The access control functionality of the intrusion panel is disabled when

the integration is operational. Features:

1) Disarm a zone on a card swipe.

2) Arm a zone on consecutive card swipes. Security Management System

will support definition of quantity of swipes required and the timeout

time in seconds to recognize consecutive swipes.

3) Security Management System supports linking of intrusion panel users

with Security Management System cardholders.

4) Security Management System operators may be given control

permissions for intrusion input and output alarms.

5) Security Management System can associate alarm events with video

commands to look at current or historic footage.

6) Security Management System stores and reports on intrusion events.

L. Software Development Kit (SDK)

1. Security Management System shall permit custom integration with other third party

systems through an SDK. SDK shall support the OBIX communication protocol and

interface directly with the Niagara Framework for support of additional

communications protocols.


a. Honeywell Security HSDK.

M. Visitor Management System

1. The Visitor Management System shall allow the user to track visitors, employees,

assets and deliveries as they enter and exit the facilities.

2. The system shall also support printing of custom designed visitor passes with details

like expiration date, visit area, host being visited, and visit purpose.


a. Honeywell Security LobbyWorks.

N. Web Client:

1. Web Alarms

2. Web Events

3. Web Badging

4. Web Reports

O. Supported Web Browsers:

1. (Windows) Internet Explorer 11

2. (Windows) Google Chrome Version 42

2.3 INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Product: WIN-PAK Access System as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group.

B. The Integrated Security Management System (ISMS) shall function as an electronic access

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



control system and shall integrate the alarm monitoring, CCTV, digital and network video,

ID badging and database management into a single platform. ISMS shall function as a one-

stop gateway for all the access control needs. A modular and network-enabled architecture

shall allow maximum versatility for tailoring secure and dependable access and alarm

monitoring solutions. The ISMS shall offer a security management software suite that

includes all the features bundled in the following three editions:

1. Express Edition (XE): Shall include all the following features: Single concurrent user

license, one communication server 256 readers, 10,000 card holders and NetAXS-123,

NetAXS-4, NS2 and NS2+ panel support.

2. Standard Edition (SE): Shall include the following features: Single/Five user

concurrent license, one communication server, 512 readers, 25,000 card holders and

PRO3200, PRO2200, NetAXS-123, NetAXS-4, N1000/PW2000, NS2 and NS2+

panel support.

3. Professional Edition (PE): Shall include all the features of Standard Edition plus the

following additional features: Unrestricted concurrent users, multiple communication

servers, 255 IP connections per communication server, 100,000 card holders and

PRO3200, PRO2200, NetAXS-123, NetAXS-4, N1000/PW2000, NS2 and NS2+

panel support.

C. ISMS Components:

1. The ISMS shall be divided into three components: Database Server, Communication

Server, and User Interface. These components shall run on a single computer or on

multiple computers, allowing flexibility in configuring a networked system.

a. Database Server: The database server is used for storing the database tables.

This data is accessible to communication server and user interface for retrieving

and generating the reports. The database server shall be installed on the client

computer or any other computer connected to the network.

b. Communication Server: The communication server routes user interface

requests as well as the access transactions to the panel. The panel in-turn

processes the transactions and sends the information to the database server as

well as responses to the user interface through the communication server. When

the communication server is sending information to the database server, it can

also receive a request from the user interface. In this scenario, the

communication server considers the user request as a higher priority and stops

the panel-database server communication until the user request is processed.

The communication server shall be installed on the client computer or any other

computer connected to the network.

c. User Interface (ISMS Client): The user interface helps ISMS operators to

communicate with the access control system. The user interface shall be

installed on the computer where the database server or the communication

server is installed or any other computer connected to the network. Several

client computers can be run simultaneously and can access the single database

server simultaneously. The number of client computers varies based on the

licensing information of ISMS.

2. The ISMS includes the Command File Server: A command file server provides text

files containing device instructions that shall be stored in the command files database.

The commands in the command files can be sent to the devices automatically on

receiving, acknowledging, or clearing an alarm. Also, the command files can be

manually executed.

a. Guard Tour server: A guard tour is a defined series of check points a guard

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



must activate within a given amount of time. The check points are readers or

input points where the guard presents the card or presses the button.

b. Tracking and Muster Server: A muster server is enabled in the event of an

emergency and allows the card holders to swipe the readers. Muster areas are

logical areas that contain readers to be used by the card holders, only if there is

a call for muster (in the event of a disaster, for example).

c. Schedule Server: A schedule server schedules the list of events to be performed

at a predetermined time and intervals such as hourly, daily, or monthly.

d. Video Management Server: A video management server provides interface to

connect to various DVR's/NVR's. In addition, it also provides CCTV control

with live monitor display, PTZ control of cameras and video playback

operations.

D. Integrated Security Management System Operational Requirements:

1. The ISMS shall be a modular and network-enabled access control system capable of

controlling multiple remote sites, alarm monitoring, video imaging, ID badging,

paging, digital video and CCTV switching and control that allows for easy expansion

or modification of inputs and remote control stations. The ISMS control at a central

computer location shall be under the control of a single software program and shall

provide full integration of all components. It shall be alterable at any time depending

upon facility requirements. The ISMS reconfiguration shall be accomplished online

through system programming.

2. The ISMS application shall have the major functional capabilities (considered

essential for the system) categorized as follows:

a. General:

1) All the databases shall have the ability to add, delete, report, view, and

edit information.

2) All the system transactions shall be saved in a retrievable file.

3) All the events shall be logged by date and time.

4) All the system transactions or selected system transactions shall be saved

in a disk file.

5) The end-user shall have the provision to make any system configuration

changes such as, but not limited to door open time, door contact shunt

time, point and reader names, when and where a cardholder is valid, and

the ability to add or modify card databases at any time.

6) Shall support "Global Anti-pass back", feature allowing cardholder to

enter/exit any such defined card reader on the same intelligent control

panel or RS-485 drop-line consisting of 2 and 4 door controllers.

7) Anti-pass back modes shall include: hard (no forgiveness), soft (allows

access but generates an alarm event) and timed for all readers on the

intelligent controller, on specified reader or card for a definable period of

time up to 32,000 seconds.

8) Shall support the "Duress" feature, where a PIN is used in conjunction

with a card read; the numbers of digits are selected using the keypad

where the PIN number is a value different from the normal PIN.

9) Shall support the "Two card holder" rule, where two valid, non-identical

"cards" must be used within a 20 second period to grant access.

10) Shall have the option to display the time when a card holder using a

reader has accessed (opened) the door or the card was used, but the door

was not opened.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



11) Shall support the "Latch mode" operation where the first card read

unlocks the door and the second card read locks it.

12) Shall provide a mode of system operation that stores system commands

not accepted by the hardware.

13) Shall provide a mode of system operation that requires the operator to

enter a response to an event when acknowledging it from the alarm view

window.

14) Shall provide a mode of system operation that allows acknowledged

alarms to be automatically cleared.

15) Shall provide a mode of system operation where when an acknowledged,

but not cleared event will be reissued requiring acknowledgement when

the event changes to an alarm or trouble state.

16) Shall provide a mode of system operation that does not allow the

operator to clear an alarm before prior to it being restored to normal.

17) Shall provide the ability for manual operator control of system output

relays. The manual functions shall include the ability to energize, de-

energize, return to time zone, or pulse the output relay. The pulse time

shall be a programmable setting.

18) Shall provide the ability for manual operator control of system doors.

The manual functions shall include the ability to Lock, Un-Lock,

Disable, Card only, Card-Pin only, Pin only, exit only and site code only.

19) Shall provide the ability to automatically display stored "video image" of

cardholder, and switch real-time camera from CCTV or digital video

server to card reader location for specific card usage.

20) The cardholder "video image" pop-up shall be activated based on a

priority level set to the cardholder or reader. Information in the pop-up

shall include, but not be limited to the card holder's primary image a live

video pop-up showing the person who initiated the pop-up, entrance

name, time, date, cardholder name, and status. User shall be able to

display up to 40 note fields. The size of the pop-ups shall be adjustable

by the operator.

21) Shall support multiple card reader technology including: Proximity,

Wiegand effect, Biometrics, Magnetic stripe, Bar Code, Keypad,

Card/keypad (PIN), High-speed long range Vehicle ID, and Smart Card.

22) Shall provide an option for taking scheduled automatic backups of any or

all database system files. A means to restore these files from a simple

menu shall exist.

23) Shall provide the ability to address up to 255 serial communication ports

per communication server, where each port can be configured for either

hardwired, or dial-up. When configured for dial-up, any one port can

support multiple dial-up locations.

24) Communication from the access control communication server to the

remote intelligent control panels shall be selectable. Communication

options shall be RS-232 directly to the intelligent control, via RS-485

converter, dial-up, leased line from a defined communication port or by

LAN/WAN using an IP address for direct connection to the intelligent

controller via network interface card. When using IP addressing it shall

be un-acceptable to use a communication port converter device on the

communication server side of the transmission. A minimum of 255 such

IP connections shall be allowed per communication server.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



25) All commands and updates to the panels shall be verified and shall

automatically retry if communications fail.

26) Shall provide a system scheduler that shall automatically: Call remote

locations to retrieve history transactions and update panel information,

including time and date, Activate or deactivate cards locally or at remote

dial-up sites, Initiate a pre-programmed command event/action,

Synchronize system to intelligent controller time, Run a pre-defined

(template) History report, Run a pre-defined (template) Card Holder

report, Card frequency report defined by reader(s), over a defined period

of time with disposition options to automatically report or report and de-

activate card or change the access level of the card, Frequency shall be

defined as Never, Now, Once, Hourly, Daily, and Weekly, Once per 2

weeks, and Monthly.

27) Shall provide drop boxes for all system-required information that the

user has previously entered.

28) Shall provide the ability to initiate an email (via SMTP) or page to a

paging system based on a transaction state. A transaction state shall be

defined as but not limited to Normal, Alarm, Trouble, Ajar, Trace, Not

Found, Anti-Pass back Violation, PIN Violation, Time Zone Violation,

Site Code Violation, Door Used, Duress, No Second Card Presented,

Trace Card or Expired Card, and System Alarms including, Panel Com,

Panel Power Failure, Modem Pool, Guard Tour, and Tamper. Intrusion

partition events including but not limited to: Alarm, Alarm Cancel, Aram

Away, Arm Stay, Auto Arm, Auto Disarm, Bypass, Disarm, Early Arm,

Early Disarm, Fail to Arm, Fail to Disarm, Normal, Not Ready, Part

Arm, Quick Arm, Recent Close, Remote Arm, Remote Disarm,

Unbypass, User Code Added, User Code Deleted, user Code Edited.

Intrusion zone events including but not limited to: Alarm, Alarm Restore,

Bypass, Fault, Fault Restore, Normal, Trouble, Trouble Restore, and

Unbypass. Intrusion output events including but not limited to: Alarm,

Communication Loss, Normal, Tamper, and Tamper Restore. Intrusion

panel events including but not limited to: Access Denied, Automatic

Test, Comm Fail, Comm Restore, Faults, Faults Restore, Line Restore,

Line Trouble, Manual Test, Pager Restore, Pager Trouble, AC Restore,

AC Trouble, Alarm, Battery Low, Battery Low Restore, Disarm,

Normal, Recent Close, Reset, Panic Alarm, Power Up, Program begin,

Program Changed, Program End, System Shutdown, System Shutdown

Restore, Tamper Alarm, Tamper Restore, Test End, Test Start,

Time/Date changed.

29) Shall include a "host grant" mode of operation that requires the host

computer to grant accesses to "valid" cards. An alternate host grant mode

shall allow the card access information to be downloaded along with

unlocking the door for "valid" cards.

b. Cards: Shall provide a simple card and card holder database import utility. The

utility shall be password protected and accessible only to administrators of the

access control system. Information that can be imported shall include but not be

limited to: First Name, Last Name, Card Number, Activation Date, De-

activation Date, Status, up to 40 note fields and Photo Images. A simple CSV

(comma separated value) file shall be used for the importing of data and image

file names.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



c. Access Levels: Shall provide an option to define specific access times and

specific readers for access. Shall provide a template of a defined access level

detail, where changes can be made to the template and saved as a new access

level detail.

d. Video Management Server: Shall support the following Recorders: MAXPRO

NVR, MAXPRO NVR HYBRID, RapidEye, HRDP, and Fusion from

Honeywell.

e. Camera Control:

f. Alarm Monitoring - Alarms Only View:

g. Alarm Monitoring/System Control - Tree View: Shall provide the ability for

dynamic alarm monitoring of alarm points in real time on the system

computer's video display terminal.

h. Operator Database: Shall allow the assignment of operator levels to define the

system components that each operator has access to view, operate, change, or

delete.

i. Access Control Panels: Shall provide ability to program Action Messages and

assign an alarm event priority. .

j. Reports: Shall provide Card holder report capability with filter options to define

door(s) that a card holder has access to, reporting card holder name, Card(s),

Access Level/schedules, Activation/Expiration.

k. Tracking/Muster Report: A tracking feature shall allow the system operator to

identify an area and the person(s) in that area.

l. Time Zones: Time zone definitions shall include Starting time, Ending time,

Days of the week, and Holiday override.

m. Floor Plan Graphic: Shall provide the ability to import floor plan graphics

stored in a WMF format.

n. Remote Locations: Shall provide the ability to place remote control panels in an

offline mode. In the offline mode, the remote control panels shall retain all

panel history events. The amount of historical events shall be limited to the

panels' buffer capacity.

o. Guard Tour: Guard Tour shall allow the operator to program a series of guard

check points that must be activated to accomplish the task of a Guard Tour.

p. ID Badging System/Video Image System: Shall allow any card data fields to be

assigned to a badge.

q. Networking: Shall provide networking capabilities (LAN or WAN) as allowed

by the computer's operating system license.

E. ISMS Hardware and Software Requirements:

1. The ISMS shall be installed in a computer that supports 1 to 10 readers, 250 cards,

and 2 communication ports. The minimum hardware and software requirements to

fulfill this installation are:

a. Processor: Dual Core Intel(R).

b. CPU: 2.4 GHz.

c. RAM: 2 Gigabytes (GB).

d. Hard Disk: 80 GB SATA with minimum 5 GB free space.

e. Serial Communication Ports: 2.

f. Secondary Storage: Tape or DVD burner.

g. Printer port: 1 (2 if badging).

h. Monitor Display: Size: 15 Inches SVGA, Resolution: 1024 x 768, Colors: 256.

i. Pointing Device: Mouse (USB preferred).

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



j. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 SP1.

k. Database: Microsoft SQL Server 2012 Express Edition.

2. The ISMS shall be installed in a computer that supports 1 to 100 readers, 5,000 cards,

and 8 communication ports. The recommended hardware requirements to fulfill this

installation are:

a. Processor: Quad Core Intel Xeon® .

b. CPU: 2.4 GHz.


d. Hard Disk: 250 GB SATA or SCSI.

e. Serial Communication Ports: 2.


g. Printer port: 1 (2 if badging).

h. Monitor Display: Size: 17 Inches SVGA, Resolution: 1024 x 768, Colors: True

color.

i. Pointing Device: Mouse (USB preferred).

j. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 SP1.

k. Database: Microsoft SQL Server2012 Express Edition.

3. The ISMS shall be installed in a computer that supports that supports more than 100

readers, 100,000 cards and 255 communication ports, The maximum/performance

hardware requirements to fulfill this installation are:

a. Processor: Intel(R) Quad Core E5504 Xeon.

b. CPU: 2.4 GHz.


d. Hard Disk: Minimum 500 GB SATA 7200 RPM, recommended 15kRPM.

e. Serial Communication Ports: As per the requirement.


g. Monitor Display: Size: 19 Inches SVGA, Resolution: 1280 x 1024, Colors:

True color.

h. Pointing Device: Mouse (USB preferred).

i. Operating System: Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2.

j. Database: Microsoft SQL Server2012 with processor/core license.

F. Hardware Requirements:

1. Intelligent Controllers:

a. Distributed architecture shall allow controllers to operate independently of the

host. The architecture shall place key access decisions, event/action processing,

and alarm monitoring functions within the controllers, eliminating degraded

mode operation.

b. Flash memory management shall support firmware updates and revisions to be

downloaded to the system. Upgrades to the hardware and software shall occur

seamlessly without the loss of database, configurations, or historical report

data.

c. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Field

Controllers or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Honeywell NetAXS Controller (NetAXS-123 and NetAXS-4 are the two

types of NetAXS controllers).

2) Honeywell P-Series Controller (PRO-2200 (Legacy), PRO-3200 are the

types of P-Series controllers).

3) Intelligent Controller Board: Honeywell Security PRO32IC

4) Honeywell N-1000 or PW-2000 Controller (Legacy only).

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5) Honeywell Security NS2 or NS2+ (Legacy only).

2. Field Hardware:

a. The security management system shall be equipped with access control field

hardware required to receive alarms and administer all access granted/denied

decisions. All field hardware shall meet UL requirements.

b. Intelligent Controller Board: Honeywell Security PRO32IC

c. Single Reader Module (SRM): Honeywell Security PRO22R1

d. Dual Reader Module (DRM): Honeywell Security PRO32R2

e. Alarm Input Module (AIM): Honeywell Security PRO32IN. 16 Inputs 2

Outputs.

f. Relay Output Module (ROM): Honeywell Security PRO32OUT. 16 Outputs 2

Inputs.

g. NetAXS-4 Access System as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group

1) NX4S1: 4 Door Control Panel (Standard Enclosure)

2) NX4L1: Pre-wired 4 Door Control Panel (Deluxe Enclosure)

h. NetAXS-123 Access System as manufactured by the Honeywell Security

Group

1) NX1P: One-door compact (plastic) enclosure with tamper switch

2) NX1MPS: One-door standard (metal) enclosure with tamper switch,

power supply, and battery

3) NXD1: One-door add-on board (to NX1P or NX1MPS) for two-door

capacity

4) NXD2: Two-door add-on board (to NX1P or NX1MPS) for three-door

capacity

i. Card Readers:

1) Proximity.

2) Magnetic Stripe.

3) Wiegand.

4) Barcode.

j. MRDT - Mercury Intrusion Display Terminal

G. System Integrations:

1. Network and Digital Video Recording Systems:

a. The Security Management System shall provide fully integrated support for a

powerful network and digital video recording and transmission system. The

Security Management System shall record, search and transmit video, and shall

provide users with live, pre and post- event assessment capabilities. The

NVRs/DVRs shall be seamlessly integrated with existing video equipment and

incorporated into any TCP/IP network. The NVRs/DVRs shall provide multiple

levels of integration with the Security Management System software, providing

control of the network or digital video system from the access control

application.

b. WIN-PAK shall support the following Network (NVRs) and Digital Video

Recorders (DVRs).

1) MAXPRO NVR.

2) MAXPRO NVR HYBRID.

3) HRDP.

4) Rapid Eye (Legacy only).

5) Fusion (Legacy only).

2. Access Control Panels(Controllers):

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Honeywell P-Series Controller (PRO-2200 (Legacy), PRO-3200 are the types

of P-Series controllers), Honeywell NetAXS Controller (NetAXS-123 and

NetAXS-4 are the two types of NetAXS controllers). Honeywell N-1000, PW-

2000, NS2, and NS2+ Controller are legacy controllers and are listed for

reference to existing systems only.

b. P Series Panels shall have the following capabilities:

1) Supports ABA and WIEGAND card formats.

2) Types of P-Series panels are: PRO-2200, PRO-3200.

3) Eight SIO Boards are included in the PRO-2000 panel. A maximum of

16 SIO boards are supported by the PRO-3200 panel. SIO boards enable

extended input and output capabilities to the panel.

4) Readers, inputs, and outputs that can be connected to the panel are based

on the type of SIO Board that is added to the panel. The SIO Board types

include 16-Zone Input/Output (16 inputs, 2 outputs, and 0 readers), 16-

Relay Output (0 inputs, 16 outputs, and o readers), 2-Reader I/O (2

inputs, 8 outputs, and 6 readers), and 1-Reader I/O (1 input, 2 outputs,

and 2 readers).

c. NetAXS Panels shall have the following capabilities:

1) Types of NetAXS panels available are: NetAXS-4 panel and NetAXS-

123 panel.

2) Panels (NetAXS-123 and NetAXS-4) are called as Gateway panels when

added directly to the communication server.

3) NetAXS-4 Gateway panel supports the downstream devices feature. This

feature shall extend the input and output capabilities of the NetAXS-4

panels.

4) NX4IN and NX4OUT

a) NX4IN is a 32 input and 0 output downstream add on device

b) NX4OUT is a 2 input and 16 output downstream add on device

5) Supports only the WIEGAND card format. The NetAXS panel allows

multiple sets of card numbers and site codes embedded in a card format.

These multiple embedded sets will be represented as A, B, C, and D sets

of card numbers and site codes. The A set shall be used as the default /

primary card and site code numbers. The resulting maximum length of

the card number will be 64-bits in length (20-digit card number). This is

the reason that the system defaults will incorporate the ability to select a

20-digit card number size in addition to the existing 5, 12 and 16 digit

6) Supports 128 time slots and 256 holidays (per holiday group). Holidays

shall be definable in two different holiday types thus allowing for

different operational time definitions for each holiday type. The NetAXS

panels shall have a provision to add a new time zone while within the

panel database. After creating the new time zone, it shall be added to the

Time Zones database and applied to the panel's database.

7) Panel options such as Anti-passback, Groups, Forgiveness, Continuous

Card Reads, Reverse Read LEDs, Host Grant, Site Codes, and Command

File can be set for providing access to the readers, input points, and

output points attached to the NetAXS panels.

8) NetAXS-4 panel shall allow configuring of 14 inputs with default values.

NetAXS-123 panel shall allow configuring 17 inputs with default values.

9) NetAXS-4 panel shall allow configuring of 16 inputs with default values.

NetAXS-123 panel shall allow configuring 14 inputs with default values.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



10) NetAXS-4 panel shall support 4 readers. NetAXS-123 shall support 6

readers controlling 3 doors where the "A" reader is the primary reader for

the door and the "B" reader is the Out reader for the door when so used.

The B Reader can be programmed separately regarding name, Advanced

Options, Anti-Passback configuration, and Intrusion support. The B

Reader cannot work alone as a Reader only. When used, the B reader

will be tied to the A reader in terms of the interlock relationships

pertaining to Door operation. The Advanced Options selection shall

provide several advance features not normally used in the typical system

and thus the reason they are accessed separately to reduce confusion for

typical installations. For the NetAXS-123, Reader A and Reader B shall

support their own settings.

11) The Groups option shall be supported only by the NetAXS-4 panels. A

maximum of 64 groups shall be defined with a maximum of 76 relays.

d. N-1000 Series Panels (Legacy) shall have the following capabilities:

1) Stores 5,000 cards/key codes, expandable to 25,000 with memory

upgrade.

2) Supports ABA and WIEGAND card formats.

3) Stores eight format (software) commands, allowing use of cards with

various bit structures and encoding schemes.

4) Supports an option to define 63 time zones. Each time zone shall include

a start time, end time, day of week specification and holiday

specification. Time zones may be assigned to cards via access levels to

define when the card is allowed access. Time zones may be assigned to

input points, to define when the input points are shunted (de-activated).

Time zones may be assigned to output points (relays), to define when the

output points are energized, for timed control of doors or devices.

5) Supports setting of panel options such as anti-passback, groups, and

keypads for providing access for the readers, input points, and output

points attached to the panel.

6) Supports the use of card readers in conjunction with keypads, in which

users are required to enter a PIN, followed by a card, to gain access.

7) Supports an option to assign shunt times to input points, from 1-63

seconds, minutes, or hours, and debounce times to input points, from 1-

255 seconds.

8) Supports an option to assign pulse times to output points, from 1-63

seconds, minutes, or hours.

9) Supports the option to interlock selected input and output points, in any

combination. An interlocked input or output point shall take action based

upon a change of state from another input or output point.

10) Stores 32 relay group definitions. Each group may be controlled with the

same options available for individual relays.

11) Supports an option to define 32 holidays, for override of normal system

operation.

12) Supports the followings mechanical and electrical specifications:

a) Mechanical specifications: Height: 14.6 inches (370mm), Width:

12.6 inches (320mm), Depth: 3.5 inches (89mm), Weight: 5.51 lb.

(2.5kg).

b) Electrical Specifications: 16.5VAC 50 VA or +24 VDC @ 1.25

Amps

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. NS2+ Series Panels (Legacy) shall have the following capabilities:

1) Stores 10, 000 cards/key codes. (NS2 = 2,000 cards/key codes)

2) Supports WIEGAND card format.

3) Stores eight format (software) commands, allowing use of cards with

various bit structures and encoding schemes.

4) Supports an option to define 63 time zones. Each time zone shall include

a start time, end time, day of week specification and holiday

specification. Time zones may be assigned to cards via access levels to

define when the card is allowed access. Time zones may be assigned to

input points, to define when the input points are shunted (de-

activated).Time zones may be assigned to output points (relays), to

define when the output points are energized, for timed control of doors or

devices.

5) Supports setting of panel options such as anti-passback, groups, and key

pads for providing access for the readers, input points, and output points

attached to the panel.

6) Supports the use of card readers in conjunction with keypads, in which

users are required to enter a PIN, followed by a card, to gain access.

7) Supports an option to assign shunt times to input points, from 1-63

seconds, minutes, or hours, and debounce times to input points, from 1-

255 seconds.

8) Supports an option to assign pulse times to output points, from 1-63

seconds, minutes, or hours. Output points shall also have the ability to

report in change of state status in the same way an alarm point would.

This provides added awareness of door operation in critical installations.

9) Supports the option to interlock selected input and output points, in any

combination. An interlocked input or output point shall take action based

upon a change of state from another input or output point.

10) Supports an option to define 32 holidays, for override of normal system

operation. Holidays shall be definable in two different holiday types thus

allowing for different operational time definitions for each holiday type.

11) Supports the followings mechanical and electrical specifications:

a) Mechanical specifications: Height: 14.6 inches (370mm), Width:

12.6 inches (320mm), Depth: 3.5 inches (89mm), Weight: 5.51 lb.

(2.5kg).

12) Electrical Specifications: 16.5VAC 50 VA or +24 VDC @ 1.25 Amps.

3. Intrusion Detection Panels:

a. Honeywell VISTA-128FBP, VISTA-250FBP Controllers, Honeywell VISTA -

128BPT, and Honeywell VISTA-250BPT.

1) General Requirements: The Security Management System shall support

hardwired and TCP/IP communication for the VISTA 128FBP/VISTA-

250 FBP panel. Each panel shall have 8 partitions and 15 zone lists.

Zones, partitions, and the top-level panel shall have an events page, with

all supported events present. Features:

a) Disarm and unlock a door on card swipe.

b) Arm and lock a door on card swipe.

c) Common area arm/disarm.

d) Access denied if intrusion system is in alarm or armed.

e) Monitor and log intrusion system events and alarms in the Security

Management System.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



f) Associate intrusion system events and alarms to video surveillance

integrations.

b. Honeywell Galaxy Dimension Controllers: GALAXY__GD264,

GALAXY_GD_48, GALAXY_GD_96 GALAXY_GD_520, Firmware 6.02

and above, Ethernet module firmware 2.08 and above controllers. Honeywell

Galaxy Grade 3 Controllers: GALAXY_144, GALAXY_20, Firmware

5.04/5.50 and above, Ethernet module firmware 2.01 and above. Honeywell

Classic Panel Controllers: GALAXY_60, GALAXY_128, GALAXY_500,

GALAXY_504, GALAXY_512, Firmware 4.50 and above, Ethernet module

firmware 2.10 and above.

1) Security Management System users are able to control and monitor

Group and zone status using the Security Management System client,

and control the individual zones and groups using Security Management

System Access control credentials. Depending on the combined user

profiles and access permissions defined in Security Management System,

Security Management System cardholder is allowed or denied

permission to arm/disarm zones and groups. The access control

functionality of the intrusion panel is disabled when the integration is

operational. Features:

a) Disarm a zone on a card swipe.

b) Arm a zone on consecutive card swipes. Security Management

System will support definition of quantity of swipes required and

the timeout time in seconds to recognize consecutive swipes.

c) Security Management System supports linking of intrusion panel

users with Security Management System cardholders.

d) Security Management System operators may be given control

permissions for intrusion input and output alarms.

e) Security Management System can associate alarm events with

video commands to look at current or historic footage.

f) Security Management System stores and reports on intrusion

events.

H. Controller for High Density Installations (PRO3200):

1. Designed for high density installations. Supporting up to 16 readers per enclosure and

32 readers per intelligent controller along with up to 100,000 card capacity provides a

combination of small installation footprint and superior cost per door ratio.

2. The PRO22R1 provides I/O support for one card access reader, while the PRO32R2

supports two card access readers. Both interface with the intelligent control module

(PRO32IC). In the event that communication to the intelligent control module is lost,

the card access readers can be individually configured to allow entrance based on

security needs. This customization allows for a door to be configured as locked,

unlocked, or access only via valid facility code.

3. The PRO32OUT interfaces with the intelligent control module (PRO32IC) providing

up to 12 or 16, Form C, 12 VDC, 2A relay output controls depending if the board is

rack or tile-mounted and power fail and panel tamper when tile mounted. Relays may

be used for elevator control, status annunciation and for general facility control, such

as door monitoring.

4. The PRO32IN interfaces with the intelligent control module (PRO32IC) providing 16

supervised alarm inputs and a dedicated power fail and panel tamper when tile

mounted. An analog to digital converter samples the input values and the digitized

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



result is filtered and processed. Filter parameters are configurable for each input point,

resulting in the ability to specify a custom End-Of-Line (EOL) resistance value,

sensitivity range and timing parameter.

5. The PRO3200 Series of access modules are designed to accommodate various

mounting options. Units can be mounted in a rack configuration (PRO22ENC1,

PRO22ENC2 and PRO22ENC5) when space is limited, or in a tile-mount

configuration (PRO22ENC3).

6. PRO22ENC1 is a wall-mounted enclosure rack unit.

7. PRO22ENC2 is a 19 inch rack-mounted enclosure rack unit.

8. PRO22ENC5 is a rack unit which fits inside a customer's enclosure.

2.4 WEB BASED MODULAR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. System: NetAXS-4 Access System as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group.

1. NX4S1: 4 Door Control Panel (Standard Enclosure)

2. NX4L1: Pre-wired 4 Door Control Panel (Deluxe Enclosure)

B. The Honeywell NetAXS modular access control system shall function as a web-based open

architecture facility management system that tracks individuals, defines and controls access

levels, monitors alarms, and generates reports. The system shall include the capability to

configure alarms and incorporate scheduled events that may be activated by either time or a

specific programmed event. Access shall be controlled through a password-protected user

interface. Operators can communicate with the system either through a host software system

or by connecting to the web server through an Ethernet connection.

1. The system control panels will be fully upgradeable using flash memory firmware.

C. System Architecture:

1. The access control and alarm monitoring system shall be a flexible single-user, open-

architecture facility management system. The system shall be designed using reliable

state-of-the-art technology allowing for easy and economical expansion. The scaleable

design shall allow for operation from an embedded Web based server without a

dedicated server or PC workstation. The panel shall also have the capability to operate

in a hosted mode with WIN-PAK XE/SE/PE/CS access control software.

2. The system shall feature embedded Linux software that intelligently controls the

reader network to provide automated data collection and configuration updates,

facilitating seamless operation from controllers. All control panels shall utilize off-line

distributed processing concepts including inter-controller communication if upgraded.

3. Connecting to the NetAXS web server shall be accomplished via USB, Ethernet

through a web server hub connection or Ethernet through web server direct

connection.

D. System Software:

1. The software suite shall comprise various integrated software modules that allow for

the full integration and retrieval of transactions from the hardware, as well as alarm

monitoring, reporting, and scheduling capabilities. The software modules shall allow

editing of personnel, access levels, system configuration and reporting to be controlled

by a password protected user interface. System operation for individual operators shall

be possible using assigned passwords only.

2. The user shall have the ability to perform hardware configuration changes during or

after the installation which shall include functions such as door open time, door

contact time, location and reader names, and access rights configuration.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. The system software shall support configuration of alarms triggering the system.

4. The system shall incorporate scheduled events activated by either time or a specific

programmed event, therefore being time or event triggered.

5. Access control functions shall include validation based on time of day, day of week,

holiday scheduling, and access validation based on positive verification of card or

card + PIN (Personal Identification Number).

6. Zone-related Software Features:

7. Supervisor card unlock.

8. Card-related Software Management:

a. Time-limited access.

b. PIN codes.

c. Suspension of cards.

d. Multiple card access.

e. Card access groups.

f. Time patterns (schedules).

g. Anti-pass back (APB) control.

h. Reporting.

i. First Card Rule (Activates the door time zone).

j. Two Card Rule-Supervisor card and regular card to allow access.

k. Time zone card toggle for door locks.

l. Latching mode for door locks.

E. Hardware:

1. The quantities of components shall be determined and installed by the Contractor

based on the requirement to provide a fully operational integrated access control

system as per the intent of the design.

2. Communication between components i.e. gateway controller shall be RS485.

3. All terminals and controllers shall allow for direct Firmware upgrade from the RS485

network connection. The units shall be upgradeable during normal system operation.

Therefore should one unit be in upgrade mode all other units will continue to operate

normally. The firmware shall be stored in FLASH memory on the individual units.

4. System Controller:

a. The system controller shall be the Honeywell NetAXS-4 controller. Each

controller loop shall be capable of 31 panels or 124 readers.

b. The standard controller configuration shall support 10,000 card capacity and

25,000 event capacity.

5. Door Control: The terminals and remote readers supported by the controller shall be

any combination of the following: card only, card and pin, card or pin, pin only,

lockdown, disabled, supervisor, escort, limited use card, expire on date, first card rule,

snow day rule, time zone toggle and anti-passback with local/global capability and

hard and soft implementation.

6. Honeywell OmniProx: The reader shall be fully sealed and potted electronics for use

outdoors. It shall include 3 bezels color including black, charcoal and ivory. It shall

have an integral optical tamper and security screw. The unit shall be able to

communicate with the proximity cards at a read range of 2 to 3 inches (51 to 76 mm).

7. Inputs: Provides 14 fully configurable four-state supervised input points. System

capacity shall have a total of 78 inputs

8. Outputs: Provides 8 SPDT Form C relay outputs rated at 10A @ 28vdc, 8 open

collector's outputs 16ma @12vdc, 4 reader LED aux output and 4 reader buzzer

output.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



9. Cards and Database: The card and event buffer capacity shall be 10,000 card capacity

and 25,000 event capacity. The firm ware revision shall have on-board flash memory

for field firmware revisions and feature expansion. Offline database backup shall be

available. Export capabilities for card database, alarms and events. The panel shall

support 128 unique card formats and 8 site codes. Maximum card format size shall be

75bit suitable for handling the card format of PIV, TWIC, and FRAC cards. The time

zones support will be a minimum of 127 with 128 access levels and 255 holidays.

10. Reports and Analysis: The system shall be capable of integrated reports, import/export

of card database and alarms and events can be exported and saved in offline storage.

11. Embedded Web Server: Supported browsers shall include Internet Explorer. The web

browser control will allow full control monitor, view live events and manually control

doors and readers. Secure web browsing shall be SSL and SHA-1 secure socket layer

encryption.

12. System Information: The system shall support Global Geographic Time Zone support

and Daylight Saving Time support. The processor will be Freescale Coldfire 32-bit.

The system shall be CE and FCC compliant with UL-294 listing.

13. System Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the functionality of the system

upon completion of installation, and shall document the result of all tests and provide

these results to the Customer.

14. Warranty: All equipment and systems shall be guaranteed by the Contractor for a

period of one year commencing with the filing date of the Notice of Completion,

provided the system has been inspected and signed off by the Owner. The guarantee

shall cover all costs for Warranty Service, including parts, labor, prompt field service,

pick-up, transportation, and delivery.

2.5 WEB BASED ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. System: NetAXS-123 Access System as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group.

1. NX1P: One-door compact (plastic) enclosure with tamper switch.

2. NX1MPS: One-door standard (metal) enclosure with tamper switch, power supply,

and battery.

3. NXD1: One-door add-on board (to NX1P or NX1MPS) for two-door capacity.

4. NXD2: Two-door add-on board (to NX1P or NX1MPS) for three-door capacity.

B. The Access Control System shall function as a Web-based open-architecture facility

management system that tracks individuals, defines and controls access levels, monitors

alarms, and generates reports. The system shall include the capability to configure alarms

and incorporate scheduled events that may be activated by either time or a specific

programmed event. Access shall be controlled through a password-protected user interface.

Operators can communicate with the system either through a host software system or by

connecting to the Web server through an Ethernet connection.

C. The NetAXS-123 Door Access System shall include, as a minimum, the following

performance:

1. The NetAXS-123 Door Access System shall be protected by the most extensive

support services in the industry, including Customer Service, Pre-Sales Applications

Assistance, After-Sales Technical Assistance, access to Technical Online Support, and

Online Training using web conferencing.

2. The NetAXS-123 Door Access System and its components shall be thoroughly tested

before shipping from the manufacturer's facility.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. The door access system shall support easy remote management anywhere with an

Internet connection.

4. The door access system shall allow you to purchase the exact amount of access

control doors immediately required, and to easily add more access controlled doors in

the future.

5. The door access system shall be capable of being web based and controlled using a

web browser, and seamless integration with Honeywell's MAXPRO Cloud and/or

WIN-PAK XE, WIN-PAK SE, Win-PAK PE, and WIN-PAK CS access control

software.

6. The door access system web user interface shall support Google ChromeTM.

7. The door access system shall support SSL and SHA-1 secure socket layer encryption.

8. The door access system shall allow each TCP/IP network connected door controller to

support connection of up to 31 downstream door controllers by way of a standard

RS485 data bus, for control of up to 123 downstream doors in a single web interface.

9. The door access system shall support up to 10,000 user cards and up to 128 unique

card formats up to 75 bits, and eight site codes.

10. The door access system shall support up to 127 time zones, 128 access levels, and 255

holidays.

11. The door access system shall maintain up to 25,000 status event log.

12. The door access system shall provide a number of door control modes including Card

only, card and PIN, PIN only, lockdown, disabled, supervisor, escort, limited use card,

expire on date, first card rule, snow day rule, time zone toggle, local and global anti-

passback, duress and others.

13. The door access system shall support interlocks for custom actions.

14. The door access system shall include integrated basic reports, import/export of the

card database, and Alarms and event exporting to offline storage in a CSV database.

15. The door access system shall be designed to be user friendly and shall be easily to

train the system user.

16. The door access system shall feature dynamic screen updating over a web connection,

continually collecting and displaying door and system status for immediate display.

17. The door access system browser shall feature full control of the system to monitor and

view live events and to manually control doors and readers.

18. Door access system status shall include the door state, alarms, events, inputs, outputs,

power and other operational status.

19. The door access system shall feature a Supervisor First capability that allows a

supervisor to present his ID card once to the reader and to give individual access. If a

supervisor presents a card twice, this shall enable access for their team, allowing

members of the team to gain access during a specified time zone.

20. The door access system shall feature an Escort mode for a Non-supervisor cardholder.

The system allows the supervisor to first present his card, and then an escorted person

to present his card to maintain accompanied access while in the escort mode.

21. The door access system shall offer options to be powered by PoE (Power over

Ethernet), or to be powered by way of an external power supply.

22. The door access system enclosure shall offer connection to one, two or three doors by

simply exchanging optional cards to accommodate the door control requirement.

23. The door access system processors shall features a System MTBF (Mean Time

between Failure) of 250,000 hours.

24. The door access system shall provide a multi-lingual user interface, including English,

Italian, French, Dutch, Spanish, German, Czech, Simplified Chinese and Arabic.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. The NX1P Door access Controller shall have the following mechanical specifications:

1. Unit Dimensions: 7.75 inches H x 7.75 inches W x 2.75 inches D (20 mm H x 20 mm

W x 7 mm D).

2. Ethernet Connector: RJ45.

3. Enclosure Type: High Impact Plastic.

4. Wiring Access Holes: 7.

E. The NX1MPS Door Access Controller shall have the following mechanical specifications:

1. Unit Dimensions: 13.9 inches H x 11.9 inches W x 4.7 inches D (35 mm H x 31 mm

W x 12 mm D).

2. Enclosure Type: Metal.

3. Wiring Access Holes: 19.

F. The NX1P access door controller shall have the following electrical specifications:

1. Voltage: 450mA @ 12VDC.

2. Power over Ethernet 802.3af.

3. Power Consumption: < 6 Watts.

G. The NX1MPS access door controller shall have the following electrical specifications:

1. Voltage: 93VAC to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 12VDC @ 3.5A.

2. Power Consumption: < 45 Watts.

H. The NetAXS-123 Door Access System shall be designed to meet the following

environmental conditions:

1. Operating Temperature: 32 to 122 degrees F (0 degrees to 50 degrees C).

2. Storage Temperature: -67 degrees to 185 degrees F (-55 degrees to 85 degrees C).

3. Emissions: FCC: Part 15, Class B.

4. CE: EN55013.

2.6 VISITOR MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Product; Lobbyworks as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group: The Visitor

Management System shall allow the user to track visitors, employees, assets and deliveries

as they enter and exit the facilities. The system shall also support printing of custom

designed visitor passes with details like expiration date, visit area, host being visited, and

visit purpose.

B. The Visitor Management System shall allow the user to:

1. Keep track of contractors and consultant timesheets.

2. Track which employees have regular personal visitors.

3. Secure visitor log.

4. Clearly identify visitors by category, to restrict access to vulnerable goods and

information.

5. Designate special areas for visitors with custom badges.

6. Process most visitors in 20 seconds.

7. Track and print temporary parking passes.

8. Print vehicle window stickers.

9. Use self-expiring badges to tighten security.

10. Generate end-of-day reports to ensure regulatory compliance.

11. Label information packets with personalized customer information.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Visitor Pre-Registration:

1. Visitor pre-registration to include security level, length of stay, and maximum entries.

2. Visitor pre-registration by using FrontDesk, Microsoft Office Outlook Calendar or

through Web-based application.

3. Group/Event pre-registration, pre-loading of visitor picture, badge pre-printing, and

arrival instructions.

4. Complete visitor registration processing within 20 seconds.

D. Visitor Information Capture:

1. Quick and complete capture of visitor information as an essential component for

proper record keeping and security checks.

2. Capture of visitor information using various hardware devices. The tasks that can be

performed include scanning business cards, scanning driver license, capturing visitor

photo, capturing visitor signature, and 2D barcode scanning of driver licenses.

3. Quick processing of large groups of visitors through queuing of captured data.

E. Visitor Authentication:

1. Recalling previous visit information (including pictures) when a visitor revisits.

2. Detecting each attempted visit and deterring potential security breaches before they

affect the user facilities.

3. Importing guests ranging from disgruntled ex-employees to known felons into the

watch list to alert personnel of a potential threat to the organization.

4. Authenticating a person as having proper identification and determining that he or she

is who they claim to be.

F. Visitor Authorization:

1. Enforcing visitor authorization prior to printing a badge, entering the premises,

authorizing visits at reception, security lobby, or remotely by the host employee.

2. Delegating authorization responsibility to specific individuals.

3. Providing a denied visitors list.

G. Visitor Badges Generation:

1. Provide quick, cost-effective, and individualized badging as an essential component of

proper visitor identification.

2. Allow printing of individualized visitor badges containing name, picture, expiration

date, and valid access areas.

3. Customize badge templates for visitors, VIPs and contractors.

4. Supports tight integration with Pro-Watch Security systems that allow the assignment

of access control privileges via barcode or card to visitors

H. Host Notification:

1. Of a visitor's arrival by e-mail messages or real-time network messaging.

2. When a visitor does not sign out.

I. Visitor Tracking:

1. Track events automatically by an accurate log as they relate to the visitor's activities

on site.

2. Track the number of times the visitor signs in and signs out.

3. Support quick sign in and out using a barcode scanner.

4. Provide proactive checking for expired visits and network notification to hosts and

visitors of expired visits.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Provide web access to the visitor manifest.

J. Security Policies:

1. Provide accurate and consistent application of security policies.

2. Provide a means to view picture and a person's attributes, reason for being on the

watch list, and the action to be performed upon visitor's arrival.

3. Check each visitor against his/her previous visit information.

4. Ensure that visitors sign out by tracking expired visits and informing their hosts.

5. Allow host to extend a visit or assign host responsibilities to another employee.

K. Host Management:

1. Assign the capabilities available to employees based on their requirement.

2. Differentiate permanent and temporary employees; limit the number of daily and

concurrent visitors per host.

3. The Front Desk operator shall:

a. Assign temporary day cards in Pro-Watch for Pro-Watch employees who have

forgotten their card.

b. Have an option to assign either Pro-Watch access privileges to match their

permanent card or a visitor privilege. The permanent card is automatically

disabled while the temp card is active.

c. Be able to do a visual verify of the employee to their photo at the Front Desk.

L. Traffic Reporting:

1. Traffic reports - per station, per building, per company, per employee, and per

department.

2. Detailed visit reports.

3. Time and attendance reports for contractors and other visitors.

4. Reports on demand, or schedule reports for regular generation and e-mail delivery.

M. Assets and Deliveries:

1. Track assets and deliveries as they arrive and depart premises.

2. Generate asset and delivery tags and scan assets and deliveries in and out with a

barcode scanner.

3. Provide e-mail notification of delivery recipient for unreturned assets.

N. Self-Registration Kiosk:

1. Provide a fully featured visitor kiosk to handle visitor registration needs in a busy or

unattended lobby. The Kiosk shall be used to perform touchscreen visitor registration

using a visitor's business card or driver license.

2. Allow to sign visitors in and out with voice agent scripted behavior, voice, and text

message prompts. The Kiosk shall be used to take picture of visitors for true visitor

identification, as well as display visitation rules/non-disclosure agreement.

3. Print a visitor badge at the self-registration station or at a remote FrontDesk and allow

for remote authorization of the visit by the host or security desk. The Kiosk shall

notify the hosting employee when their visitor arrives.

O. Security Audit Compliance:

1. Secure database.

2. Audit log.

3. Tamper proof visitor records.

4. Audit reports.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Backup and restore capabilities.

2.7 ACCESS CONTROL READERS

A. Contactless Smart Card Readers:

1. Contactless Smart Card readers shall be "single-package" type, combining electronics

and antenna in one package in the following configurations:

2. Provide surface mounting style 13.56 MHz or 13.56 MHz and 125 kHz prox

contactless smart card readers suitable for minimal space mounting configurations as

shown on the project plans.

3. Contactless smart card readers shall comply with ISO 15693, ISO 14443A (CSN), and

ISO 14443B and shall read credentials that comply with these standards.

4. Contactless smart card readers shall output credential data in compliance with the SIA

AC-01 Wiegand standard as follows:

a. Reads standard proximity format data from OmniClass cards and outputs data

as encoded.

b. Reads card serial number (CSN) of a MIFARE or DESFIRE card with

configurable outputs as 26-bit, 32-bit, 34-bit, 40-bit, or 56-bit.

5. Data security with OmniClass cards shall use up to 128-bit authentication keys to

reduce the risk of compromised data or duplicate cards. The contactless smart card

reader and OmniClass cards shall require matching keys in order to function together.

All RF data transmission between the card and the reader shall be encrypted, using a

secure algorithm. Card readers shall be provided with keys that are compatible with

the OmniClass cards.

6. The reader shall be of potted, polycarbonate material, sealed to a NEMA rating of 4X

(IP65).

7. The contactless smart card reader shall provide the ability to change operational

features in the field through the use of a factory-programmed command card.

Additionally, firmware may be updated by flashing the reader. Command card

operational programming options shall include:

a. Output configurations.

b. LED & Audio configurations.

c. Keypad configurations.

8. Contactless smart card readers shall provide the following programmable audio/visual

indication:

a. An audio transducer shall provide various tone sequences to signify: access

granted, access denied, power up, and diagnostics.

b. A high-intensity light bar shall provide clear visual status (red/green/amber)

that is visible even in bright sunlight.

9. Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following certifications:

a. UL 294.

b. Canada/UL 294.

c. FCC Certification.

d. Canada Radio Certification.

e. EU and CB Scheme Electrical Safety.

f. EU - R&TTE Directive.

g. CE Mark (Europe).

h. IP55 Rated.

i. C-Tick (New Zealand/Australia/Taiwan).

10. Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following environmental specifications:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Operating temperature: -30 to 150 degrees F (-35 to 65 degrees C).

b. Operating humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing.

c. Weatherized design suitable to withstand harsh environments.

11. Contactless smart card reader cabling requirements shall be:

a. Manufacturer: Honeywell Cable

b. Cable distance: (Wiegand): 500 feet (150m).

c. Cable type: 6-conductor #22 AWG minimum with overall foil shield and drain

wire

d. Standard reader termination: 18 inches (.5m) cable pigtail.

12. Warranty of contactless smart card readers shall be lifetime against defects in

materials and workmanship.

B. Product: OM15 Mullion 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart Card Readers as manufactured by the

Honeywell Security Group:

1. Typical contactless smart card read range shall be:

a. 2 inches - 3 inches (5.0 - 7.6 cm) using OmniClass card.

b. 1 inches (2.5 cm) using OmniClass Key Fob.

c. 1 inches(2.5 cm) using OmniClass Sticker (Tag).

d. 1 inches - 1.5 inches (2.5 - 3.8 cm) using OmniClass + HID 125KHz Prox card.

e. 1 inches - 2 inches (2.5 - 5.0 cm) using MIFARE Card (card serial number

only).

2. Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following electrical specifications:

a. Operating voltage: 5 - 16 VDC, reverse voltage protected. Linear power supply

recommended.

b. Current requirements: (average/peak) 60/90mA @ 12 VDC.

3. Contactless smart card readers shall meet the following physical specifications:

a. Dimensions: 1.90 inches x 6 inches x .90 inches (4.8 cm x 15.3 cm x 2.3 cm).

b. Weight: 3.2.oz (90.7 g).

c. Material: UL94 Polycarbonate.

d. Two-part design with separate mounting plate and reader body.

e. Color: Black.

C. Product: OM16 Mullion 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart and 125 kHz Prox Card Readers as

manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group:







only).

f. 1 inches - 3.5 inches (2.5 - 8.9 cm) using 125 kHz Prox card



recommended.



a. Dimensions: 1.90 inches x 6 inches x .90 inches (4.8 cm x 15.3 cm x 2.3 cm).

b. Weight: 3.2.oz (90.7 g).


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Two-part design with separate mounting plate and reader body

e. Color: Black.

D. Product: OM30 Mini-Mullion 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart Card Readers as manufactured

by the Honeywell Security Group:







only).



recommended.



a. Dimensions: 1.90 inches x 4.04 inches x .80 inches (4.83cm x 10.26 cm x 2.03

cm).

b. Weight: 3.2.oz (90.7 g).



e. Color: Black.

E. Product: OM31 Mini-Mullion 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart and 125 kHz Prox Card

Readers as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group:







only).

f. 1 inches - 3.5 inches (2.5 - 8.9 cm) using 125 kHz Prox Card



recommended.




cm).

b. Weight: 3.2.oz (90.7 g).



e. Color: Black.

F. Product: OM40 US Single-Gang 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart Card Readers as



a. 2.5 inches - 4.5 inches (6.3 - 11.4 cm) using OmniClass card.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




c. 1 inches (2.5 cm) using OmniClass Sticker (Tag).

d. 1.5 inches - 2 inches (3.8 - 5.0 cm) using OmniClass + 125KHz HID Prox card.


only).


a. Dimensions: 3.30" x 4.80" x .85" (8.38cm x 12.19 cm x 2.16 cm).

b. Weight: 8.8.oz (249.5 g).



e. Color: Black.



recommended.


G. Product: OM41 US Single-Gang 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart and 125 kHz Prox Card



a. 2.5 inches - 4.5 inches (6.3 - 11.4 cm) using OmniClass card.


c. 1 inches (2.5 cm) using OmniClass Sticker (Tag).

d. 1.5 inches - 2 inches (3.8 - 5.0 cm) using OmniClass + 125KHz HID Prox card.


only).



a. Dimensions: 3.30 inches x 4.80 inches x .85 inches (8.38 cm x 12.19 cm x 2.16

cm).

b. Weight: 8.8 oz (249.5 g).



e. Color: Black.



recommended.


H. Product: OM55 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart Card with Keypad Readers as manufactured




b. 1 inches - 1.5 inches (2.5 - 3.8 cm) using OmniClass Key Fob.

c. 1 inches - 1.5 inches (2.5 - 3.8 cm) using OmniClass Sticker (Tag).

d. 1.5 inches - 2.0 inches (3.8 - 5.0 cm) using OmniClass + 125KHz HID Prox

card.


only).



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



cm).

b. Weight: 10oz (283.4 g).



e. Color: Black.



recommended.


I. Product: OM56 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart and 125 kHz Prox Card W/ Keypad Readers

as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group:



b. 1 inches - 1.5 inches (2.5 - 3.8 cm) using OmniClass Key Fob.

c. 1 inches - 1.5 inches (2.5 - 3.8 cm) using OmniClass Sticker (Tag).

d. 1.5 inches - 2.0 inches (3.8 - 5.0 cm) using OmniClass + 125KHz HID Prox

card.


only).




cm).

b. Weight: 10oz (283.4 g).



e. Color: Black.



recommended.


J. Contactless Proximity Card Readers:

1. Card readers shall be "single-package" type, combining electronics and antenna in one

package in the following configurations:

2. Provide surface mounting style 125kHz contactless proximity card readers suitable for

minimal space mounting configurations as shown on the project plans.

3. Contactless proximity card readers shall output credential data in compliance with the

SIA AC-01 Wiegand standard as follows:

a. Reads standard proximity format data from OmniProx cards and outputs data in

Wiegand format.

b. Reads card number with formats up 84 bits.

4. The reader shall be of potted, polycarbonate material, sealed to a NEMA rating of 4X

(IP65).

5. The contactless proximity card reader shall provide the ability to change operational

features in the field through the use of a factory-programmed command card.

Additionally, firmware may be updated by flashing the reader. Command card

operational programming options shall include:

a. Output configurations.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. LED & Audio configurations.

c. Keypad configurations.

6. Contactless proximity card readers shall provide the following programmable

audio/visual indication:

a. An audio transducer shall provide various tone sequences to signify: access

granted, access denied, power up, and diagnostics.

b. A high-intensity light bar shall provide clear visual status (red/green/amber)

that is visible even in bright sunlight.

7. Contactless proximity card readers shall meet the following certifications:

a. UL 294.

b. Canada/UL 294.

c. FCC Certification.

d. ROHS compliant

e. Canada Radio Certification.

f. CE Mark (Europe).

8. Contactless proximity card readers shall meet the following environmental

specifications:

a. Operating temperature: -25 to 145 degrees F (-31 to 63 degrees C).

b. Operating humidity: 0% to 95% relative humidity non-condensing.

c. Weatherized design suitable to withstand harsh environments.

9. Contactless proximity card reader cabling requirements shall be:

a. Manufacturer: Honeywell Cable

b. Cable distance: (Wiegand): 500 feet (150m).

c. Cable type: 6-conductor #22 AWG minimum with overall foil shield and drain

wire.

d. Standard reader termination: 18 inches (.5m) cable pigtail.

10. Warranty of contactless proximity card readers shall be lifetime against defects in

materials and workmanship.

K. Product: OP10 Mini-Mullion 125kHz Contactless Proximity Card Readers as manufactured


1. Typical contactless proximity card read range shall be:

a. 1.5 inches - 4 inches (3.8 - 10.2 cm) using OmniProx card

2. Contactless proximity card readers shall meet the following electrical specifications:

a. Operating voltage: 5.0 - 16 VDC, reverse voltage protected. Linear power

supply recommended.

b. Current requirements: 60/120mA @ 12 VDC.

3. Contactless proximity card readers shall meet the following physical specifications:

a. Dimensions: 3.15 inches x 1.57 inches x 0.50 inches (80cm x 40 cm x 12.8 cm).

b. Material: UL94 Polycarbonate.

c. Two-part design with separate reader body and cover.

d. Color: Black, charcoal gray & ivory interchangeable bezels.

4. Contactless card reader shall be Honeywell OP10 compatible with selected card

media.

L. Product: OP30 Mullion 125kHz Contactless Proximity Card Readers as manufactured by the

Honeywell Security Group:

1. Typical contactless proximity card read range shall be:


2. Contactless proximity card readers shall meet the following electrical specifications:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




supply recommended.


3. Contactless proximity card readers shall meet the following physical specifications:

a. Dimensions: 5.71 inches x 1.69 inches x 0.79 inches (145cm x 43 cm x 20 cm).




4. Contactless proximity card reader shall be Honeywell OP30 compatible with selected

card media.

M. Product: OP40 Single-Gang (US) 125kHz Contactless Proximity Card Readers as


1. Typical Contactless proximity Card read range shall be:


2. Contactless proximity Card readers shall meet the following electrical specifications:


supply recommended.


3. Contactless proximity Card readers shall meet the following physical specifications:





4. Contactless proximity Card reader shall be Honeywell OP40 compatible with

selected card media.

N. Product: OP45 Single-Gang (EU/APAC) 125kHz Contactless Proximity Card Readers as






supply recommended.



a. Dimensions: 3.5 inches x 3.5 inches x 0.595 inches (88.9 cm x 88.9 cm x 15

cm).



d. Color: Black, charcoal gray & ivory interchangeable bezels

4. Contactless proximity Card reader shall be Honeywell OP45 compatible with selected

card media.

O. Product: OP90 Single-Gang (US) 125kHz Contactless Proximity Card Vandal Resistant






© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



supply recommended.





c. Two-part design with reader body and cover.

d. Color: Silver.

4. Contactless proximity Card reader shall be Honeywell OP90 compatible with

selected card media.

P. Product: OP95 Single-Gang (US) 125kHz Contactless Proximity Card Vandal Resistant

Readers + Keypad as manufactured by the Honeywell Security Group:





supply recommended.






d. Color: Silver

4. Contactless proximity Card reader shall be Honeywell OP95 compatible with selected

card media.

2.8 ACCESS CONTROL CREDENTIALS

A. Access cards shall be used with access readers to gain entry to access controlled portals (e.g.;

doors, gates, turnstiles) and to hold information specific to the user and shall be Contactless

Smart Card or Contactless Proximity Card technology credentials.

B. Contactless Smart Cards

1. Single Technology Access Card:

a. The card shall meet the following standards for contactless smart cards: ISO

15693 and ISO 14443B2.

b. The card shall meet ISO 7810 specifications for length, width, thickness,

flatness, card construction and durability, and shall be in a form suitable for

direct two-sided dye-sublimation or thermal transfer printing on the specified

badge printer.

c. Presentation to the access control reader at any angle within a minimum of one

inch (25 mm) shall result in an accurate reading of the card.

d. Unique 64-bit, fixed card serial number, used for anti-collision and key

diversification.

e. The card shall support capability, with a minimum of 2 Kbits (256 bytes) of

EEPROM memory or 16 Kbits (2048 bytes) of EEPROM memory. The 2 Kbit

card shall have a minimum of 2 Application Areas, and the 16Kbit shall have

either 2 or 16 Application Areas to support future applications. Data retention

shall be 10 years, nominal. Wiegand card data up to 84 bits in length shall be

factory programmed in Application Area 1 for use with access control systems.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



f. Each Application Area on the card shall be secured with up to a 128-bit unique,

diversified security key, such that data stored in that area cannot be accessed or

modified until the card and reader have completed a mutual authentication

process.

g. The card shall be capable of completing any write operation, even if the card is

removed from the RF field during that operation.

h. The card shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for

two years, or if multiple technologies are used: with a magnetic stripe the card

shall have a fifteen month warranty; or with a contact chip, the card shall have a

one year warranty.

i. Provide "smart" access cards, compatible with the specified card readers. Cards

shall be encoded with Wiegand card data, at the factory.

j. The card shall not carry any identification showing the location of the property

unless otherwise specified herein.

k. The card shall be capable of accepting a slot punch on one end, allowing it to be

hung from a strap/clip in a vertical orientation.

2. Multiple Technology Access Card:

a. The card shall support 13.56 MHz OmniClass contactless smart chip and

antenna plus any or all of the following technologies, simultaneously:

1) 125 kHz HID Proximity chip and antenna.

2) Magnetic Stripe.

3) Embedded Contact Smart Chip Module.

b. The card shall be available with a 13.56 MHz OmniClass contactless smart chip

and antenna plus a Wiegand Strip with an optional magnetic stripe, meeting all

ISO 7810 standards except for card thickness, which shall be 0.037 inch (0.939

mm). The card will not be available with 125 kHz proximity technology and/or

an embedded contact smart chip module.

3. Access Key Fob:

a. The Key Fob shall meet the following standards for contactless smart cards:

ISO 15693 and ISO 14443B2.

b. The Key Fob shall be constructed of durable injection molded polycarbonate

plastic, with a slot molded into one end, and shall be suitable for placement on

a key ring.

c. Presentation to the access control reader at any angle within one inch (25 mm)

shall result in an accurate reading of the key fob.

d. Provide key fobs compatible with the specified card readers.

e. The key fob shall not carry any identification showing the location of the

property unless otherwise specified herein.

f. The key fob shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship

for two years.

4. Access Sticker:

a. The Sticker shall meet the following standards for contactless smart cards: ISO

15693 and ISO 14443B2.

b. The Sticker shall be a flat disc-shaped unit with a polycarbonate cover and a

self-stick adhesive back.

c. The Sticker shall be capable of affixation to non-metallic personal items such as

PDAs, cell phones, business assets, or to existing access control or

identification cards for the purpose of transitioning from earlier technologies to

contactless smart cards.

d. The Sticker shall not be used with tractor-feed (full insertion) readers.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. Presentation to the access control reader at any angle within one inch (25 mm)

shall result in an accurate reading of the Sticker.

f. The Sticker shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship

for two years.

g. Provide Access Stickers compatible with the specified card readers.

h. The Sticker shall not carry any identification showing the location of the

property unless otherwise specified herein.

C. Contactless Proximity Cards:

1. The card shall meet the following standards for contactless proximity cards:

a. 125 kHz HID Proximity chip and antenna

b. The card shall meet ISO 7810 specifications for length, width, thickness,

flatness, card construction and durability, and shall be in a form suitable for

direct two-sided dye-sublimation or thermal transfer printing on the specified

badge printer.

c. Presentation to the access control reader at any angle within a minimum of one

inch (25 mm) shall result in an accurate reading of the card.

d. The card shall be capable of completing any write operation, even if the card is

removed from the RF field during that operation.

e. The card shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for

two years, or if multiple technologies are used: with a magnetic stripe the card

shall have a fifteen month warranty.

f. Provide "smart" access cards, compatible with the specified card readers. Cards

shall be encoded with Wiegand card data, at the factory in 26 or 34 bit formats.

g. The card shall not carry any identification showing the location of the property

unless otherwise specified herein.

h. The card shall be capable of accepting a slot punch on one end, allowing it to be

hung from a strap/clip in a vertical orientation

2.9 ACCESS CONTROL CABLES

A. Access Control System components shall be connected using the following Honeywell

Genesis Series Cables:

1. Shielded 6-Conductor Reader Cables: foil shielded with drain wire, stranded copper

conductors:

a. 22AWG:

1) General Purpose Rated: CM, CL2, Sunlight Resistant Listed: Part #:

1206.

2) Riser Rated: CMR, CL2R, FT4, Sunlight Resistant Listed: Part #: 2206.

3) Plenum Rated: CMP, CL2P, FT6 Listed: Part #: 3206.

b. 18AWG:

1) General Purpose Rated: CM, CL2, Sunlight Resistant Listed: Part #:

1216.



2. Unshielded 18AWG 2-Conductor Power/Door Cables: Stranded copper conductors:

a. General Purpose Rated: CM, CL2, Sunlight Resistant Listed: Part #: 1118.



3. Shielded 22AWG 2-Conductor Alarm Cables: foil shielded with drain wire, stranded

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



copper conductors:

a. General Purpose Rated: CM, CL2, Sunlight Resistant Listed: Part #: 1202.



4. Bundled Access Control Cables: 4 components, Profusion unjacketed bundle.

a. Part #: 2195, Riser Rated, CMR, CL2R, FT4, Sunlight Resistant Listed.

1) Component 1: 22 AWG, 6 stranded conductors, shielded.

2) Component 2: 18 AWG, 4 stranded conductors.



b. Part #: 2295, Riser Rated, CMR, CL2R, FT4, Sunlight Resistant Listed.





c. Part #: 3195, Plenum Rated, CMP, CL2P, FT6 Listed.





d. Part #: 3295, Plenum Rated, CMP, CL2P, FT6 Listed.





5. Bundled Access Control Cables: 4 components, Overall jacketed bundle.

a. Part #: 2196, Riser Rated, CMR, CL2R, FT4, Sunlight Resistant Listed.





b. Part #: 2296, Riser Rated, CMR, CL2R, FT4, Sunlight Resistant Listed.





c. Part #: 3196, Plenum Rated, CMP, CL2P, FT6 Listed.





d. Part #: 3296, Plenum Rated, CMP, CL2P, FT6 Listed.





PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Examine site conditions to determine site conditions are acceptable without qualifications.

Notify Owner in writing if deficiencies are found. Starting work is evidence that site

conditions are acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION




3.3 INSTALLATION

A. System, including but not limited to access control, alarm monitoring and reporting, time

management, and user identification cards shall be installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Supervise installation to appraise ongoing progress of other trades and contracts, make

allowances for all ongoing work, and coordinate the requirements of the installation of the

System.

3.4 FIELD TESTING AND CERTIFICATION

A. Testing: The control, alarm monitoring and reporting, time management, and user

identification cards shall be tested in accordance with the following:

1. Conduct a complete inspection and test of all installed access control and security

monitoring equipment. This includes testing and verifying connection to equipment of

other divisions such as life safety and elevators.

2. Provide staff to test all devices and all operational features of the System for witness

by the Owner's representative and authorities having jurisdiction as applicable.

3. Correct deficiencies until satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Submit written copies of test results.

3.5 PROTECTION



END OF SECTION

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Intrusion Detection System


13731 - INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM.

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Burglary/access control/CCTV intrusion detection system.

B. Intrusion detection cables.



B. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Section 27 11 23 - Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Provide systems which meet or exceed the requirements of the

following publications and organizations as applicable to the Work of this Section:

1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

a. UL 365: Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.

b. UL 609: Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.

c. UL 636: Holdup Alarm Units and Systems.

d. UL 684: Local, Central Station, and Remote Station.

e. UL 985: Household Fire-Warning System Units

f. UL 1037: Antitheft Alarms and Devices

g. UL 1610: Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units.

h. UL 1635: Installation and Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Systems.

2. Federal Communications Commission (FCC):

a. Code of Federal Regulations Title 47: Part 15: Radio Frequency Devices.

b. Code of Federal Regulations Title 47: Part 68: Connection of Terminal

Equipment to the Telephone Network.

1.4 REFERENCES





b. UL 609: Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems.

c. UL 985: Household Fire-Warning System Units





1.5 REFERENCES

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







b. UL 636: Holdup Alarm Units and Systems.

c. UL 684: Local, Central Station, and Remote Station.

d. UL 985: Household Fire-Warning System Units

e. UL 1037: Antitheft Alarms and Devices

f. UL 1610: Central-Station Burglar-Alarm Units.

g. UL 1635: Installation and Classification of Residential Burglar Alarm Systems.





1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets indicating systems and

components proposed for use, including instruction manuals.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings including connection diagrams for

interfacing equipment, list of connected equipment, and locations for major equipment

components.

D. Record Drawings: During construction maintain record drawings indicating location of

equipment and wiring. Submit an electronic version of record drawings not later than

Substantial Completion of the project.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data,

customized to the system installed. Include system and operator manuals.

F. Field Tests: Submit results of field testing of every device including date, testing personnel,

retesting date if applicable, and confirmation that every device passed field testing.

G. Maintenance Service Agreement: Submit a sample copy of the manufacturer's maintenance

service agreement, including cost and services for a one year period for Owner's review.

Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, labor and materials to repair the system,

provide test and adjustments, and regular inspections.

H. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6

inches (150 mm) square, represent actual product, color, and patterns.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum ten years of experience in manufacturing and maintaining similar

systems. Alarm manufacturer shall be certified compliant with ISO 9001.

B. Installer: Minimum two years of experience installing similar systems, and acceptable to the

manufacturer.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and

application workmanship.


2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are

approved by Architect.

3. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's labeled packages. Store and handle in accordance with

manufacturer's requirements, in a facility with environmental conditions within

recommended limits.

B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Honeywell Security and Fire. Toll Free Tel: 800-323-4576;

Email: [email protected]; Web: www.security.honeywell.com.




2.2 INTRUSION DETECTION CONTROL PANELS

A. Basis-of-design shall be the Honeywell VISTA 20P Burglary System:

1. Listed for UL Commercial Burglary.

2. The control panel shall be a two (2)-partition, UL commercial burglary control panel

that supports up to 48 zones using basic hardwired, zone expanders, and wireless

zones. It shall also provide supervision of the bell output, RF receivers, and relay

modules. In addition, the control shall provide the ability to schedule time-driven

events, and allow certain operations to be automated by pressing a single button. The

system shall be capable of interfacing with an ECP long range radio (LRR) unit that

can send Contact ID messages, and alphanumeric paging devices.

3. System Power - The Fire and Burglary Alarm System shall operate using standard 120

volts AC, 50/60 Hz power.

a. Control Primary Power - Transformer power shall be 16.5 VAC, 40VA.

b. Backup Battery - A rechargeable 12 VDC, gel type, lead acid backup battery

shall be provided. The battery shall be rated between 7 and 34-ampere hours

(AH).

c. Alarm Power - Alarm power shall be 12 VDC, 1.0 amps for each bell output

d. Auxiliary Standby Power - Standby power shall be 12 VDC, 600 mA

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



maximum.

e. Fusing - The battery input, auxiliary, and bell outputs shall be protected using

PTC circuit breakers. All outputs shall be power limited.

4. Communications Options

a. Internet reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the

central station via the internet using Alarmnet-I and the Honeywell model

7847i internet communicator. It shall provide the user with the ability to control

the system via a browser interface (i.e. Internet Explorer). All packet data

transmitted to the monitoring station shall be encrypted with a minimum of 256

bits of encryption.

b. GSM/GPRS reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the

central station by way of wireless GSM/GPRS using Alarmnet-GSM/GPRS

service. The installer shall furnish a Honeywell model GSMX4G or equivalent.

It shall provide the user with the ability to control the system via a browser

interface (i.e. Internet Explorer). All packet data transmitted to the monitoring

station shall be encrypted.

c. Combined AlarmNet-I (Internet) and AlarmNet-GSM (Global System for

Mobile) - The facility system shall be monitored using both the AlarmNet-I and

the AlarmNet-G Communication services. The system shall use Honeywell's

AlarmNet iGSMV4G transmitter or equivalent. The communication service

shall employ a two-way Internet connection through AlarmNet Communication

Service as the primary method of communication, and then the two-way GPRS

(General Packet Radio Service) as the secondary means of communication and

shall use SMS (Short Message Service) as a tertiary means of communication.

The equipment shall be UL listed for use in this application. The installer shall

follow manufacturer's instructions when installing the AlarmNet unit.

d. High Security, Combined AlarmNet-I (Internet) and AlarmNet-GSM (Global

System for Mobile) - The facility system shall be monitored using both the

AlarmNet communication services. The system shall use Honeywell's

AlarmNet iGSMHS4G communicator or equivalent. The communication

service shall employ a high-security two-way Internet connection through

AlarmNet Communication Service as the primary method of communication,

and then the high-security two-way GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) as

the secondary means of communication and shall use SMS (Short Message

Service) as a tertiary means of communication. The equipment shall be UL

listed for use in this application. The installer shall follow manufacturer's

instructions when installing the AlarmNet unit.

e. CDMA reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the

central station by way of wireless CDMA using AlarmNet service. The installer

shall furnish a Honeywell model CDMA-X or equivalent. It shall provide the

user with the ability to control the system via a browser interface (i.e. Internet

Explorer). All packet data transmitted to the monitoring station shall be

encrypted.

5. User interface options:

a. Keypad, Alpha Display: The system keypad shall include a two-line,

alphanumeric LCD display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6160 keypad or

equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions

when installing system equipment.

b. Premium Keypad, Alpha Display: The system keypad shall include a two-line,

reverse display alphanumeric LCD display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6460

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



keypad or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's installation

instructions when installing system equipment.

c. Keypad: Color Graphic Touch Screen Display: The system keypad shall

employ a dynamic, interactive graphic touch screen display. Use the Honeywell

Vista 6280 keypad or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's

installation instructions when installing system equipment.

d. Keypad: Color Graphic Touch Screen Display, ZWAVE, IP Camera, Remote

control support: The system keypad shall employ a dynamic, interactive

graphic touch screen display. Use the Honeywell Tuxedo Touch Screen keypad

or equivalent. The keypad shall feature the ability to integrate with up to 232

ZWAVE devices, and 32 compatible IP Cameras. The Touch Screen keypad

shall provide a web page on the Local Area Network featuring system status

and remote control functions. The installer shall follow manufacturer's

installation instructions when installing system equipment.

B. Basis-of-design shall be the Honeywell VISTA 21iP Burglary System:

1. ETL listed for Residential Fire and Burglary and Commercial Burglary

2. The control panel shall be a two (2)-partition, ETL listed commercial burglary control

panel that supports up to 48 zones using basic hardwired, zone expanders, and

wireless zones. It shall also provide supervision of the bell output, RF receivers, and

relay modules. In addition, the control shall provide the ability to schedule time-

driven events, and allow certain operations to be automated by pressing a single

button. The system shall be capable of interfacing with an ECP long range radio

(LRR) unit that can send Contact ID messages, and alphanumeric paging devices. The

control shall provide integrated access control and CCTV-switching capability. The

system shall integrate with facility doors, windows, and departments. The system shall

also integrate with external systems, such as building appliances and building alert

systems for remote control and central collection of external system alerts. When

integrated with external systems, the system shall connect to the external system to

receive status changes by way of a dry contact output from the external system. The

system shall use its user interface to provide local status messages from external

systems, providing for the initiation of local building policies. The system may

transmit information to an off-site monitoring service to provide initiation of remote

policies when appropriate.

3. System Power - The Fire and Burglary Alarm System shall operate using standard 120

volts AC, 50/60 Hz power.

a. Control Primary Power - Transformer power shall be 16.5 VAC, 40VA.

b. Backup Battery - A rechargeable 12 VDC, gel type, lead acid backup battery

shall be provided. The battery shall be rated between 4 and 34-ampere hours

(AH).

c. Alarm Power - Alarm power shall be 12 VDC, 2.0 amps for each bell output

d. Auxiliary Standby Power - Standby power shall be 12 VDC, 600 mA

maximum.

e. Fusing - The battery input, auxiliary, and bell outputs shall be protected using

PTC circuit breakers. All outputs shall be power limited.

C. Communication Options.

1. Internet reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the central

station via the internet using Alarmnet-I using its built-in internet communicator. It

shall provide the user with the ability to control the system via a browser interface (i.e.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Internet Explorer). All packet data transmitted to the monitoring station shall be

encrypted with a minimum of 256 bits of encryption.

2. GSM/GPRS reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the

central station by way of wireless GSM/GPRS using Alarmnet-GSM/GPRS service.

The installer shall furnish a Honeywell model VISTA-GSM or equivalent. It shall

provide the user with the ability to control the system via a browser interface (i.e.


encrypted.

3. Combined AlarmNet-I (Internet) and AlarmNet-GSM (Global System for Mobile) -

The facility system shall be monitored using both the AlarmNet-I and the AlarmNet-G

Communication services. The system shall use Honeywell's AlarmNet iGSMV4G

transmitter or equivalent. The communication service shall employ a two-way Internet

connection through AlarmNet Communication Service as the primary method of

communication, and then the two-way GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) as the

secondary means of communication and shall use SMS (Short Message Service) as a

tertiary means of communication. The equipment shall be UL listed for use in this

application. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing the

AlarmNet unit.

4. High Security, Combined AlarmNet-I (Internet) and AlarmNet-GSM (Global System

for Mobile) - The facility system shall be monitored using both the AlarmNet

communication services. The system shall use Honeywell's AlarmNet iGSMHS4G

communicator or equivalent. The communication service shall employ a high-security

two-way Internet connection through AlarmNet Communication Service as the

primary method of communication, and then the high-security two-way GPRS

(General Packet Radio Service) as the secondary means of communication and shall

use SMS (Short Message Service) as a tertiary means of communication. The

equipment shall be UL listed for use in this application. The installer shall follow

manufacturer's instructions when installing the AlarmNet unit.

5. CDMA reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the central

station by way of wireless CDMA using AlarmNet service. The installer shall furnish

a Honeywell model CDMA-X or equivalent. It shall provide the user with the ability

to control the system via a browser interface (i.e. Internet Explorer). All packet data

transmitted to the monitoring station shall be encrypted.

D. User interface options

1. Keypad, Alpha Display: The system keypad shall include a two-line, alphanumeric

LCD display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6160 keypad or equivalent. The installer shall

follow manufacturer's installation instructions when installing system equipment.

2. Premium Keypad, Alpha Display: The system keypad shall include a two-line, reverse

display alphanumeric LCD display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6460 keypad or

equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions when

installing system equipment.

3. Keypad: Color Graphic Touch Screen Display: The system keypad shall employ a

dynamic, interactive graphic touch screen display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6280

keypad or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions


4. Keypad: Color Graphic Touch Screen Display, ZWAVE, IP Camera, Remote control

support: The system keypad shall employ a dynamic, interactive graphic touch screen

display. Use the Honeywell Tuxedo Touch Screen keypad or equivalent. The keypad

shall feature the ability to integrate with up to 232 ZWAVE devices, and 32

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



compatible IP Cameras. The Touch Screen keypad shall provide a web page on the

Local Area Network featuring system status and remote control functions. The

installer shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions when installing system

equipment.

E. The Control Panel shall be enclosed in a metal cabinet, suitable for wall mounting. The

dimensions shall not exceed 14.5 inches (36.8 cm) in height, 12.5 inches (31.8 cm) in width

or 3 inches (7.6 cm) in depth.

F. Environmental Conditions - The System shall be designed to meet the following

environmental conditions.

1. Storage Temperature - The system shall be designed for a storage temperature of -10

degree C to 70 degree C.

2. Operating Temperature - The system shall be designed for an operating temperature of

0 degree C to 50 degree (32 degree F to 120 degree F).

3. Humidity - The system shall be designed for normal operation in an 85% relative

humidity environment.

4. Electromagnetic Interference - The system shall meet or exceed the requirements of

FCC Part 15, Class B devices, FCC Part 68, IEC EMC directive.

G. Control Panel:

1. Compatible Detection Devices: Conventional.

2. Partitions: 2.

3. System Users: 48.

4. Access Readers: 0.

5. Total Inputs: 48.

6. Onboard Inputs: 8.

7. Addressable Inputs: 40.

8. Wireless Inputs: 40.

9. Onboard Communication: Digital Dialer, TCP/IP.

10. Communication Choices: Digital Dialer, TCP/IP, GSM.

11. Event Log: 100.

12. Basic Hardwired Zones - The control shall provide eight (8) style-B hardwire zones

with the following characteristics:

a. EOLR supervision (if required for zones 1-8): Shall support N.O. or N.C.

sensors (EOLR supervision required for UL installations).

b. Individually assignable to one of two (2) partitions.

c. Supports up to 16 two-wire smoke detectors on one selected zone.

d. Supports four-wire smoke or heat detectors on any zone (power to four-wire

smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device).

13. Expansion Zones:

a. ECP Zone Expansion - The control shall support up to 40 additional hardwire

zones using a built-in four-wire polling (ECP) loop interface. The polling loop

shall provide power and data to remote point modules, and constantly monitor

the status of all zones on the loop. The polling loop zones shall have the

following characteristics:

1) Interface with RPM (Remote Point Module) devices that provide Class

B, Style Y (e.g., 4219).

2) Individually assignable to one of two (2) partitions.

3) Supervised by the control panel.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. Wireless Expansion - The control shall support up to 40 wireless zones using a

5800 series RF receiver (fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones).

Wireless zones shall have the following characteristics:

1) Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain non-

supervised transmitters).

2) Tamper-protection for supervised zones.

3) Individually assignable to one of eight (8) partitions.

4) Supports wireless devices listed for Commercial Burglary using the

5881ENHC RF Receiver.

14. Partitions - The control shall provide the ability to operate two (2) separate areas, each

functioning as if it had its own control.

15. User Codes - The control shall accommodate 48 user codes, all of which can operate

any or all partitions. Certain characteristics must be assignable to each user code, as

follows:

a. Authority level (Master, Manager, or several other Operator levels). Each User

Code (other than the installer code) shall be capable of being assigned the same

or a different level of authority for each partition that it will operate.

b. Opening/Closing central station reporting.

c. Specific partitions that the code can operate.

d. Global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the code has access to in

one command).

e. Use of an RF (button) to arm and disarm the system (RF key must first be

enrolled into the system).

16. Peripheral Devices - The control shall support up to 16 addressable ECP devices,

which can be any combination of keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, annunciator

modules, and interactive phone modules. Peripheral devices have the following

characteristics:

a. Each device set to an individual address according to the device's instructions.

b. Each device enabled in system programming.

c. Each device's address shall be supervisable (via programming).

17. Keypad/Annunciator - The control shall accommodate up to sixteen (16) keypads or

five (5) touch-screen (i.e., advanced user interface) keypads. The keypads shall be

capable of the following:

a. Performing all system arming functions.

b. Being assigned to any partition.

c. Providing four programmable single-button function keys, which can be used

for:

1) Panic Functions - activated by wired and wireless keypads; reported

separately by partition.

2) Keypad Macros - 32 keypad macro commands per system (each macro is

a series of keypad commands). Assignable to the A, B, C, and D keys by

partition.

18. Keypad/Annunciator - The control shall accommodate up to eight (8) keypads or four

(4) touch-screen (i.e., advanced user interface) keypads. The keypads shall be capable

of the following:




for:

1) Panic Functions - activated by wired and wireless keypads; reported

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




2) Keypad Macros - 32 keypad macro commands per system (each macro is


partition.

19. Output Relays - A total of 16 relay outputs shall be accommodated using relay

modules. Each relay module shall provide four (4) Form C (normally open and

normally closed) relays for general-purpose use or two (2) Class-B, Style-Y

supervised notification appliance circuit outputs, when using the 4204CF module. The

relays shall be capable of being:

a. Programmed to activate in response to system events.

b. Programmed to activate using time intervals.

c. Activated manually.

d. Assigned an alpha descriptor.

e. Used for Class B, Style-Y supervised bell outputs (4204CF module).

f. Use of 4204 (ECP) relays.

20. Keyswitch - The control shall support the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of

the system's 8 partitions. If used, zone 7 is no longer available as a protection zone.

21. Voltage Triggers - The system shall provide voltage triggers, which change state for

different conditions. Used with LRR (Long Range Radio) equipment or other devices

such as a remote keypad sounder, keyswitch ARMED and READY LEDs, or a printer

to print the system's event log.

22. Event Log - The System shall maintain a log of different event types (enabled in

programming). The event log shall provide the following characteristics:

a. Stores up to 100 events.

b. Viewable at the keypad or through the use of Compass software.

23. Scheduling - Provides the following scheduling capabilities:

a. Open/close schedules (for control of arming/disarming and reporting).

b. Holiday schedules (allows different time windows for open/close schedules).

c. Timed events (for activation of relays, auto-bypassing and un-bypassing, auto-

arming and disarming, etc.).

d. Access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time)

e. End User Output Programming Mode (provides 20 timers for relay control).

f. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time.

24. Communication Features - Supports the following formats and features for the

primary and secondary central station receivers:

a. Formats

1) ADEMCO Low Speed (Standard or Expanded).

2) Sescoa/Radionics.

3) ADEMCO Express.

4) ADEMCO High Speed.

5) ADEMCO Contact ID.

b. Backup Reporting: The system shall support backup reporting via the

following:

1) Secondary phone number.

2) ECP long range radio (LRR) interface.

3) Ability to select long range radio (LRR) or dialup as the primary

reporting method (dynamic signaling feature).

25. Audio Alarm Verification; Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification

(AAV) that can be used in conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog

between an operator at the central station and a person at the premises.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



26. Cross-Zoning Capability - Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from

going into alarm unless its cross-zone is also faulted within 5 minutes.

27. Pager Interface - The Control Panel shall be capable of sending event information to

an alphanumeric pager via a VA-8201 pager interface device.

28. Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature - The System shall be capable of

differentiating between an actual alarm and an alarm caused by leaving an entry/exit

door open. If not subsequently disarmed, the control panel shall:

a. Bypass the faulted E/E zone(s) and/or interior zones and arm the system.

b. Generate an Exit Error report by user and by zone so the central station knows

it was an exit alarm and who caused it.

29. Programming - The Control shall be capable of being programmed locally or remotely

using the ADEMCO Compass Downloader and shall be capable of:

a. Uploading and downloading all programming information at 300 baud.

b. Uploading and displaying firmware revision levels from the control.

H. Conventional Detection Devices. The system shall integrate with facility doors, windows,

and departments. The system shall also integrate with external systems, such as building

appliances and building alert systems for remote control and central collection of external

system alerts. When integrated with external systems, the system shall connect to the

external system to receive status changes by way of a dry contact output from the external

system. The system shall use its user interface to provide local status messages from external

systems, providing for the initiation of local building policies. The system may transmit

information to an off-site monitoring service to provide initiation of remote policies when

appropriate.

1. Grouped Zone Inputs - System zone inputs allow the system to sense the change in

state of an output from an external device, such as a door/window position sensor, a

motion detector, a relay output from an appliance, the output of an external alert

system, or other devices that provide a dry closure output. System zone inputs shall be

available for connection of sensing devices at the control panel and 4219 zone

expander modules located at designated locations. The installer shall follow

manufacturer's instructions when installing and programming system equipment.

2. Wood Frame Doors, Concealed Sensor, conventional - The system shall monitor the

opened and closed position of doors in the facility. The installer shall install a

Honeywell Model 951WG Recessed sensor or equivalent. The installer shall follow

manufacturer instructions while installing and programming system equipment.

3. Wood Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed Sensor, Conventional - The system shall

monitor the opened and closed position of doors and windows in the facility. The

installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed Door/window Sensor, or

equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while installing and

programming system equipment.

4. Wood Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Armored, Conventional - The system

shall monitor the opened and closed position of doors and windows in the facility. The

installer shall install a Honeywell Model 960 Armored Door Sensor, or equivalent.

The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while installing and programming

system equipment.

5. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and windows, concealed, conventional - The system shall

monitor the opened and closed position of doors in the facility. The installer shall

install a Honeywell Model 947-75T concealed sensor, equipped with the steel door

adapter or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while

installing and programming system equipment.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Armored, Conventional - The

system shall monitor the opened and closed position of doors and windows in the

facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 960 Armored Door Sensor, or



7. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed Sensor, Conventional - The


facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed

Door/window Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer

instructions while installing and programming system equipment.

8. Filled Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, conventional- The system shall


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed sensor, or equivalent. The

installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while installing and programming

system equipment.

9. Filled Steel Frame Doors, Exposed, Armored, conventional - The system shall


install a Honeywell Model 960 Armored Door Sensor, or equivalent. The installer

shall follow manufacturer instructions while installing and programming system

equipment.

10. Roof Hatches, Exposed, Armored, Conventional - The system shall monitor the

opened and closed position of hatches and access doors to the roof of the facility. The



system equipment.

11. Hatches, Exposed, Conventional - The system shall monitor the opened and closed

position of doors in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model

7939WG Exposed Door Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer


12. Overhead Doors - The system shall monitor the opened and closed position of

overhead bay doors in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 957

Overhead Door sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer


13. Glass Break Detector, Conventional - Selected areas in the protected site will use

glass break detectors to sense the breaking of windows. Where designated in the

plans, install a Honeywell Model FG1625T Glass Break detector or equivalent. The

installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing, testing and


14. Glass Break Detector, Conventional, Flush-mounted - Selected areas in the protected

site will use glass break detectors to sense the breaking of windows. Where designated

in the plans, install a Honeywell Model FG1625RFM Glass Break detector or

equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing,

testing and programming system equipment.

15. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Ceiling-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in

the protected site will use motion detectors to sense motion in rooms or areas of

rooms. Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model IS280CM Ceiling

Mounted Passive Infrared Motion Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow


16. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in the

protected site will use motion detectors to sense motion in rooms or areas of rooms.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model IS3035 Passive Infrared

Motion Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions

when installing and programming system equipment.

17. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT8050 Dual-Tec Motion

Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when


18. DUAL-TEC Motion Detector, Ceiling-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT6360STC Ceiling

Mounted DUAL TEC Motion Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow


19. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, anti-mask, Wall-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas

in the protected site will use motion detectors to sense motion in rooms or areas of

rooms. Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT-906 Dual-Tec

Motion Detector or equivalent with anti-mask detection capabilities. The installer

shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing and programming system

equipment.

20. Vibration Sensors - The system shall include Vibration Sensors where designated.

When the sensor detects vibration, the sensor shall send messages indicating the fault

to the control panel. The model number of the vibration sensor is the Honeywell

SC100 or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when


21. Temperature Threshold Detector - Selected areas in the facility will use Temperature

Threshold detectors to sense high or low level temperatures within a designated area.

Locations for Temperature Threshold detectors may be in kitchens, laboratories,

server rooms, classrooms or other areas where temperature threshold notification is

critical. For each Temperature Threshold detector, install a Honeywell zone input

module and a Honeywell TS300 Temperature Threshold detector and T280R

Temperature Probe or equivalent, and an appropriate power supply. The installer shall

follow manufacturer's instructions when installing and programming system

equipment.

22. Leak, Flood, Water Level - The system shall monitor the level of water in a

designated location. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 470-12 Water

Sensor and FP280 or 470PB Water Probe, or equivalent. The owner may monitor air

conditioning duct drip pans, areas beneath water heaters and tanks, refrigeration drain

basins, sump pumps, basements, or restrooms. The installer shall follow manufacturer


23. Carbon Monoxide Detector, Conventional - Selected areas in the facility will use

carbon monoxide detectors to sense high levels of carbon monoxide. Locations for

carbon monoxide detectors may be in parking garages, kitchens, laboratories, near

fireplaces, or in natural gas fueled heater closets. For each carbon monoxide detector,

install a System Sensor CO1224 Carbon Monoxide detector or equivalent, and an

appropriate power supply. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when


24. Natural Gas Detector - Selected areas in the facility will use natural gas detectors to

sense high levels of natural gas. Locations for natural gas detectors may be in

kitchens, laboratories, near fireplaces, or in natural gas fueled heater closets. For each

natural gas detector, install a Honeywell zone input module and a Macurco MA-

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



GD2A natural gas detector or equivalent, and an appropriate power supply. The

installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing and programming

system equipment.

25. Panic and Emergency Buttons - The system shall include manual panic buttons under

desks, in storage rooms, in walk-in refrigeration units and other designated locations.

The panic button shall be the Honeywell Model 269R or equivalent. The installer shall


equipment.

26. Holdup Device - Foot Rail, Conventional - The system shall include Foot Rail

Devices on the floor below the customer service station or below designated desks

within the protected location. The Foot Rail devices are the Honeywell Model 266 or

equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing and


27. Holdup Device - Bill Trap, Conventional - The system shall include Bill Trap Devices

inside of money drawers in customer service areas. The Bill trap devices are the

Honeywell Model 264 or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's

instructions when installing and programming system equipment.

28. Safe or Vault Protection: Monitor the status of the Safe. For each Safe, the installer

shall provide complete protection integrated with the system including seismic

detectors such as the Honeywell SC100 or equivalent where designated.

29. ATM and Cabinet Protection: Monitor the status of the ATM or file cabinet. For each

Safe, the installer shall provide complete protection integrated with the system

including seismic detectors such as the Honeywell SC105 or equivalent where

designated.

30. Photo Beam, 100 Feet, conventional - The system shall monitor the status of photo

beam units installed in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model CK-

IB100D Photo Beam Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer



beam units installed in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model



I. Wireless Detection Devices. The system shall integrate with facility doors, windows, and

departments. The system shall also integrate with external systems, such as building







appropriate.

1. Wireless Receivers for Commercial Applications - The system shall include one

Commercial Wireless Receiver where designated. The wireless receiver shall be UL

Listed, Factory Mutual Approved, MEA Listed, and CSFM Listed for the application.

The wireless receiver shall receive messages from wireless devices indicating device

detection loop open, normal, shorted, tamper alarm, and low battery status when sent

from transmitters associated with the system. Each wireless transmitter shall send

periodic check-in signals to its associated control panel. The transmitter's associated

control panel shall report any missing transmitter within four and one-half hours. Each

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



transmitter shall report any low battery condition a minimum of seven days before its

battery becomes too discharged to power the transmitter. The transmitter's associated

control panel shall report any low battery condition by providing a local indication at

system keypads, and shall send a trouble report to the central monitoring station. The

model number of the receiver is Honeywell 5881ENHC or equivalent. The installer


equipment.

2. Wireless Repeaters for Commercial Applications - The system shall include

Commercial Wireless Repeaters where designated. The wireless repeater shall be UL

Listed for the application. The wireless repeater shall receive and forward messages

from wireless devices indicating device detection loop open, normal, shorted, tamper

alarm, and low battery status when sent from transmitters associated with the system.

Each wireless transmitter shall send periodic check-in signals to its associated control

panel. The transmitter's associated control panel shall report any missing transmitter

within four and one-half hours. Each transmitter shall report any low battery condition

a minimum of seven days before its battery becomes too discharged to power the

transmitter. The transmitter's associated control panel shall report any low battery

condition by providing a local indication at system keypads, and shall send a trouble

report to the central monitoring station. The model number of the repeater is

Honeywell 5800RP or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's


3. 5817CB Universal Transmitter for zone inputs. The system shall include Wireless

transmitters where designated. When the device is triggered and normal, the wireless

transmitter shall send messages indicating the state of the device to the control panel.





transmitter. Each transmitter shall include an internal tamper switch, and shall send a

tamper alert to the control panel when removed from its installed location. The

transmitter's associated control panel shall report any low battery condition by

providing a local indication at system keypads, and shall send a trouble report to the

central monitoring station. The transmitter shall be model number 5817CB or



4. Wireless Door Sensors for Wood Jambs, concealed - The system shall include

Wireless Door Sensors for Wood Jamb Doors where designated. When the door is

opened and closed, the wireless door sensor shall send messages indicating the state of

the door to the control panel. Each wireless transmitter shall send periodic check-in

signals to its associated control panel. The door sensor's associated control panel shall

report any missing door sensor within four and one-half hours. Each transmitter shall

report any low battery condition a minimum of seven days before its battery becomes

too discharged to power the transmitter. Each door sensor shall include an internal

tamper switch, and shall send a tamper alert to the control panel when removed from

its installed location. The transmitter's associated control panel shall report any low

battery condition by providing a local indication at system keypads, and shall send a

trouble report to the central monitoring station. The model number of the wireless

door sensor is the 5818MN or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's


5. Wood Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Wireless - The system shall monitor the

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed Door Sensor, and a 5817CB wireless transmitter

or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while installing and






system equipment.

7. Wireless Door Sensors for Hollow Metal Door Frames, concealed - The system shall

include Wireless Door Sensors for Hollow Metal Jamb Doors where designated. The

when the door is opened and closed, the wireless door sensor shall send messages

indicating the state of the door to the control panel. Each wireless transmitter shall

send periodic check-in signals to its associated control panel. The door sensor's

associated control panel shall report any missing door sensor within four and one-half

hours. Each transmitter shall report any low battery condition a minimum of seven

days before its battery becomes too discharged to power the transmitter. Each door

sensor shall include an internal tamper switch, and shall send a tamper alert to the

control panel when removed from its installed location. The transmitter's associated



model number of the door sensor is the 947-75T and the 5817CB Wireless transmitter

or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing

and programming system equipment.

8. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Wireless - The system shall


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed Sensor, and the 5817CB

Wireless transmitter or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions

while installing and programming system equipment.






10. Filled Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Wireless- The system shall


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed sensor, and the 5817CB



11. Filled Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Armored, Wireless- The system


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 960 Exposed sensor, and the 5817CB



12. Wireless Door Sensors for Roof Hatches, exposed, Armored - The system shall

include Wireless Door Sensors for Roof Hatches where designated. When the door is





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




too discharged to power the transmitter. Each wireless transmitter shall include an

internal tamper switch, a back tamper switch, and shall send a tamper alert to the

control panel when removed from its installed location, or when opened. The



central monitoring station. The model number of the door sensor is the Ademco 960

and the 5817CB Wireless transmitter or equivalent. The installer shall follow


13. Hatch doors, exposed, wireless - The system shall monitor the opened and closed

position of hatches in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model

7939WG Exposed Sensor, and the 5817CB Wireless transmitter or equivalent. The


system equipment.

14. Wireless Door Sensors for Overhead Rollup Doors - The system shall include

Wireless Door Sensors for Overhead Rollup Doors where designated. When the door

is opened and closed, the wireless door sensor shall send messages indicating the state

of the door to the control panel. Each wireless transmitter shall send periodic check-in









central monitoring station. The model number of the door sensor is the ADEMCO 957


manufacturer's instructions when installing and programming system

15. Glass Break Detector, Wireless - Selected areas in the protected site will use glass

break detectors to sense the breaking of windows. Where designated in the plans,

install a Honeywell Model 5853 Glass Break detector or equivalent. The installer shall

follow manufacturer's instructions when installing, testing and programming system

equipment.

16. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Wireless - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5800PIR-COM Wireless



17. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Wireless - Selected areas in the protected

site will use motion detectors to sense motion in rooms or areas of rooms. Where

designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5898 Wireless Motion Detector or



18. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Curtain, Wireless - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5898 Wireless Motion



19. Temperature Threshold Detector, Wireless - Selected areas in the facility will use

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Temperature Threshold detectors to sense high or low level temperatures within a

designated area. Locations for Temperature Threshold detectors may be in kitchens,

laboratories, server rooms, classrooms or other areas where temperature threshold

notification is critical. For each Temperature Threshold detector, install a Honeywell

5821 wireless temperature alarm transmitter and a Honeywell TS280R Temperature

probe or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when


20. Leak, Flood, Water Level, Wireless - The system shall monitor the level of water in a

designated location. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 5821 Water Sensor

with a FP280 remote probe or equivalent. The owner may monitor air conditioning

duct drip pans, areas beneath water heaters and tanks, refrigeration drain basins, sump

pumps, basements, or restrooms. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions


21. Carbon Monoxide Detector, Wireless - Selected areas in the facility will use carbon

monoxide detectors to sense high levels of carbon monoxide. Locations for carbon

monoxide detectors may be in parking garages, kitchens, laboratories, near fireplaces,

or in natural gas fueled heater closets. For each carbon monoxide detector, install a

System Sensor CO1224 Carbon Monoxide detector or equivalent, and an appropriate

power supply. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing


22. Holdup Device - Two-button, Conventional - The system shall include Two-button

Holdup Devices at customer windows. The holdup devices shall be the Honeywell

Model 268 two-button holdup button or equivalent. The installer shall follow


23. Asset Protection, Wireless - Selected indoor assets within the protected site will use

wireless indoor asset protection devices to sense protected object Asset Protection.

Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5870API Wireless Asset



24. Outdoor Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Wall, Post, or Pole-mounted, Wireless -

Selected outdoor areas in the protected site will use outdoor motion detectors to sense

motion. Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5800PIR-OD

Wireless Motion Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's


J. SPECIAL ALERT SYSTEMS

1. Server Room Alert Systems - The system shall be provide sensing of critical

conditions within the server room. The system shall alert the user when the

temperature is too high, when the humidity is too high, when air conditioning

condensation drip pans require draining and when there is an extended power failure.

2. Kitchen Alert Systems - The system shall be provide sensing of critical conditions

within the kitchen or food processing facility. The system shall alert the user when the



3. Safe or Vault Protection - The system shall monitor the status of the Safe. For each

Safe, the installer shall provide complete protection integrated with the system. The


system equipment.

4. Vending Machine Protection - The system shall monitor the status of the Vending

Machine. For each Vending Machine, the installer shall provide complete protection

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



integrated with the system. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when


5. Gas Water Heater Alert Systems - The system shall provide sensing of critical

conditions within the water heater room. The system shall alert the user in the event of

natural gas leaks, carbon monoxide presence, and in the event of water leaks.

6. Automatic Door Locking - Selected doors in the facility will use system automatic

door locking capabilities to restrict entry to into the facility, yet allow free exit by

those who have completed their business. For each automatic locking door, install a

4204 relay output module, a power supply, and an electric locking device. The


system equipment.

7. Automatic Door Holders - Selected doors in the facility will use system automatic

door holder capabilities to hold doors open until particular system events release the

door. For each automatic locking door, install a 4204 relay output module, a power

supply, and an electric magnetic door holder device. The installer shall follow


8. Energy Management - The system shall be connected to the central EMS system for

the purposes of affecting the operation of heat and air conditioning appliances when

the partition is armed.

9. Energy Management - The system shall be connected to each HVAC thermostat for

the purposes of disabling heat and air conditioning appliances when the partition is

armed.

10. Refrigeration Temperature Threshold Detector - Selected refrigeration units in the

facility will use Temperature Threshold detectors to sense high temperature levels.

Locations for Temperature Threshold detectors may be in kitchens or laboratories. For

each Temperature Threshold detector, connect a Honeywell TS300 Temperature

Threshold detector or equivalent to a zone input, and include an appropriate power

supply. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing and


K. Sirens, Sounders and Indicators

1. Siren, Outdoor, High Output in Enclosure - The system shall monitor the status of

protected openings and areas in the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm

occurs, the system shall sound a Honeywell Model 702 Siren or equivalent inside of

the Model 743BE Enclosure. The installer shall install the siren as directed by

manufacturer instructions.

2. Siren Enclosure, Outdoor, Large - For large sirens, the system shall be mounted inside

of the Model 743BE Enclosure. The installer shall install the siren as directed by


3. Siren Indoor/Outdoor in Enclosure- The system shall monitor the status of protected

openings and areas in the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs,

the system shall sound a Honeywell Model 719 Siren or equivalent located inside a

742BE Enclosure. The installer shall install the siren as directed by manufacturer

instructions.

4. Siren Indoor/Outdoor- The system shall monitor the status of protected openings and

areas in the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall

sound a Honeywell Model 748LC Siren or equivalent. The installer shall install the

siren as directed by manufacturer instructions.

5. Siren Indoor, Wireless - The system shall monitor the status of protected openings and

areas in the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



sound a Honeywell Model 5800WAVE Wireless Siren or equivalent. The installer

shall install the siren as directed by manufacturer instructions.

6. Siren Indoor - The system shall monitor the status of protected openings and areas in

the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall sound a

Honeywell Model Wave2 Siren or equivalent. The installer shall install the siren as

directed by manufacturer instructions.

7. Siren Indoor, Flush Mount - The system shall monitor the status of protected openings

and areas in the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system

shall sound a Honeywell Model Wave2F Siren or equivalent. The installer shall install

the siren as directed by manufacturer instructions.

8. Strobe, Indoor/Outdoor - The system shall monitor the status of protected openings

and areas in the armed and disarmed state. When an alarm occurs, the system shall

indicate the alarm with a Honeywell Model 710 Strobe or equivalent. The installer

shall install the strobe as directed by manufacturer instructions.

2.3 INTRUSION DETECTION CONTROL PANELS

A. Basis-of-design shall be the Honeywell VISTA 128BPT System, a burglary/access

control/CCTV switching system that includes the following capabilities:


2. Compatible Detection Devices: Addressable.



5. Onboard Communication: Digital Dialer.



8. Event Log: 512.

9. Supports up to 128 zones.

10. Supports up to 8 separate partitions.

11. Supports up to 150 users.

12. Supports commercial wireless devices.


14. Provides integrated security, access control, and CCTV switching capability.

15. Provides supervision of peripheral devices.

16. Supports up to 96 relay outputs.

17. Supports long-range radio (LRR) communication.

18. Provides scheduling capability to allow for automated operations.

19. Supports alarm reporting via Internet.

20. Interfaces with automation software.

21. Monitors smoke detector maintenance signals.

22. Capable of being installed using existing wiring.

B. Basis-of-design shall be the Honeywell VISTA 250BPT System, a burglary/access

control/CCTV switching system that includes the following capabilities:


2. Compatible Detection Devices: Addressable.



5. Onboard Communication: Digital Dialer.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




8. Event Log: 1024.

9. Supports up to 250 zones.

10. Supports up to 8 separate partitions.

11. Supports up to 250 users.

12. Supports commercial wireless devices.


14. Provides integrated security, access control, and CCTV switching capability.

15. Provides supervision of peripheral devices.

16. Supports up to 96 relay outputs.

17. Supports long-range radio (LRR) communication.

18. Provides scheduling capability to allow for automated operations.

19. Supports alarm reporting via Internet.

20. Interfaces with automation software.

21. Monitors smoke detector maintenance signals.

22. Capable of being installed using existing wiring.

C. Environmental Conditions: System shall be designed to function in the following


1. Storage Temperature: Designed for a storage temperature of -10 degree C to 70 degree

C.

2. Operating Temperature: System shall be designed for an operating temperature of 0

degree C to 50 degree C (32 degree F to 120 degree F).

3. Humidity: System shall be designed for normal operation in an 85% relative humidity

environment.

4. Electromagnetic Interference: System shall meet or exceed the requirements of FCC

Part 15, Class B devices, FCC Part 68, IEC EMC directive.

D. Power Requirements: Components shall have the following electrical specifications. The

system shall operate using standard 120 VAC, 50 Hz/60 Hz power.

1. Control Primary Power: Transformer power shall be 16.5 VAC, 40 VA.

2. Backup Battery: Rechargeable 12 VDC, gel type, lead acid backup battery shall be

provided. The battery shall be rated between 12 and 34-ampere hours (AH).

3. Alarm Power: 12 VDC, 1.7 amps for each bell output

4. Auxiliary Standby Power: 12 VDC, 0.75 amp maximum.

5. Total Power: Combined auxiliary standby and alarm currents shall be 2.3 amps.

6. Fusing: The battery input, auxiliary, and bell outputs shall be protected using PTC

circuit breakers. All outputs shall be power limited.

E. Control Panel Enclosure: A metal cabinet, suitable for wall mounting. Dimensions shall not

exceed 14.5 inches (36.8 cm) in height, 12.5 inches (31.8 cm) in width or 3 inches (7.6 cm)

in depth.

F. Control Panel: The control panel shall be an 8-partition, UL commercial and burglary

control panel that supports zones using basic hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones, RF

receivers, and relay modules. The control shall provide the ability to schedule time-driven

events, and allow certain operations to be automated by pressing a single button. The system

shall be capable of interfacing with an ECP long range radio (LRR) unit that can send

Contact ID messages. The control shall provide integrated access control and CCTV-

switching capability with the use of a single downloader and database.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Basic Hardwired Zones: Control shall provide 8 style-B hardwire zones with the

following characteristics:

a. EOLR supervision (if required for zones 2-8) shall support N.O. or N.C.

sensors (EOLR supervision required for UL installations).

b. Zones/Points shall be individually assignable to any partition.

c. Supports up to 16 two-wire smoke detectors on zone 1.

d. Supports four-wire smoke or heat detectors on any zone (power to four-wire

smoke detectors must be supervised with an EOL device).

2. Expansion Zones:

a. Polling Loop Expansion: Control shall support up to 120 additional hardwire

zones using a built-in two-wire polling (multiplex) loop interface. The polling

loop shall provide power and data to remote point modules, and constantly

monitor the status of all zones on the loop. Maximum current draw shall not

exceed 128 mA. The polling loop zones shall have the following

characteristics:

1) Interface with RPM (Remote Point Module) devices that provide Class

B, Style Y (e.g., 4208U/4208SN) or a combination of Class B, Style Y,

and Class A, Style Z (e.g., 4208SNF) zones.

2) Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions.

3) Supervised by the control panel.

4) A 12,000 feet (3658 m) wire runs capability without using shielded

cable.

5) Each RPM (Remote Point Module) enclosure shall be tamper protected.

b. Wireless Expansion Zone: Control shall support wireless zones using a 5800

series RF receiver (fewer if using hardwire and/or polling loop zones). Wireless

zones shall have the following characteristics:

1) Supervised by control panel for check-in signals (except certain non-

supervised transmitters).

2) Tamper-protection for supervised zones.

3) Individually assignable to one of 8 partitions.

4) Individually assignable to bell outputs and/or auxiliary relays.

5) Support wireless devices listed for Commercial Burglary using the

5881ENHC RF Receiver.

3. Partitions: Control shall provide the ability to operate e8 separate areas, each

functioning as if it had its own control. Partitioning features shall include:

a. A Common Lobby partition (1-8), which can be programmed to perform the

following functions:

1) Arm automatically when the last partition that shares the common lobby

is armed.

2) Disarm when the first partition that shares the common lobby is

disarmed.

b. A Master partition (9), used strictly to assign keypads for the purpose of

viewing the status of all 8 partitions at the same time (master keypads).

c. Assignable by zone.

d. Assignable by keypad/annunciator.

e. Assignable by relay to one or all 8 partitions.

f. Ability to display burglary and panic and/or trouble conditions at all other

partitions' keypads (as a selectable choice).

g. Certain system features selectable by partition, such as entry/exit delay and

subscriber account number.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. User Codes: Control shall accommodate user codes, all of which can operate any or

all partitions. Certain characteristics must be assigned to each user code, as follows:

a. Authority level (Master, Manager, or several other Operator levels). Each User

Code (other than the installer code) shall be capable of being assigned the same

or a different level of authority for each partition that it will operate.

b. Opening/Closing central station reporting.

c. Specific partitions that the code can operate.

d. Global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the code has access to in

one command).

e. Use of an RF (button) to arm and disarm the system (RF key must first be

enrolled into the system).

5. Peripheral Devices: Control shall support up to 30 addressable ECP devices, which

can be any combination of keypads, RF receivers, relay modules, and interactive

phone module. Peripheral devices have the following characteristics:

a. Each device set to an individual address according to the device's instructions.

b. Each device enabled in system programming.

c. Each device's address shall be supervisable (via programming).

6. Keypad/Annunciator: Control shall accommodate up to 16 keypads or six (6) touch-

screen (i.e.; advanced user interface) keypads. The keypads shall be capable of the

following




for:

1) Panic Functions: activated by wired and wireless keypads; reported


2) Keypad Macros: 32 keypad macro commands per system (each macro is


partition.

7. Output Relays: A total of 96 relay outputs shall be accommodated using relay

modules. Each relay module shall provide four (4) Form C (normally open and

normally closed) relays for general-purpose use. The relays shall be capable of being:

a. Programmed to activate in response to system events.

b. Programmed to activate using time intervals.

c. Activated manually.

d. Assigned an alpha descriptor.

e. A combination of 4204 (ECP) and 4101SN (polling loop) relays.

8. Integrated Access Control: Control shall be capable of the following:

a. Providing a command that activates relays to allow access doors to open (e.g.,

lobby door), lights to be turned on or off, etc.

b. Becoming a fully integrated access control system by using numerous VistaKey

Single-Door Access Control Modules.

c. Supporting up to 15 VistaKey Access Control Modules. The VistaKey Access

Control Modules shall use the same Compass Downloader as the Vista-250BPT

and shall be programmable from the Compass Downloader or the

Keypad/Annunciators.

d. Assigning any number of access control relays to each partition (up to 96 for

the system).

e. Supporting up to 500 access card holders using VistaKey.

9. Commercial Wireless Equipment: Control shall be compatible with UL Listed

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Commercial Wireless Security equipment including:

a. ADEMCO 5881ENHC Commercial Wireless Receiver: The receiver shall be

capable of receiving as many points as the control panel is rated for. Up to two

(2) Receivers may be used on any system. Receivers may be remotely located

anywhere on the system Keypad/Annunciator bus.

b. Honeywell 5808W3 Wireless Photoelectric Smoke and Heat Detector: The

device shall be UL 268 listed and shall have Maintenance Alert capability and

Automatic Drift Compensation.

c. ADEMCO 5809 Wireless 135D Fixed Temperature and Rate of Rise Heat

Detector: The device shall be UL 521 listed for commercial applications.

d. ADEMCO 5817CB Wireless Universal Contact Monitoring Transmitter: This

device shall be capable of making any conventional UL listed contact device a

wireless device. The device shall be UL listed for commercial burglary

applications as follows: UL 365, 609, 1023, 1076 and 1610 for security and

nurse call.

e. ADEMCO 5869 Wireless Hold Up Switch/Transmitter: This device shall be

UL 636 listed for commercial burglary applications.

10. Keyswitch: Control shall support the ADEMCO 4146 Keyswitch on any one of the

system's 8 partitions. If used, zone 7 is no longer available as a protection zone.

11. Voltage Triggers: System shall provide voltage triggers, which change state for

different conditions. Used with devices such as a remote keypad sounder or keyswitch

ARMED and READY LEDs.

12. Event Log: System shall maintain a log of different event types (enabled in

programming). The event log shall provide the following characteristics:

a. Stories events.

b. Viewable at the keypad or through the use of Compass software.

c. Printable on a serial printer, including zone alpha descriptors.

13. Scheduling: Provides the following scheduling capabilities:

a. Open/close schedules (for control of arming/disarming and reporting).

b. Holiday schedules (allows different time windows for open/close schedules).

c. Timed events (for activation of relays, auto-bypassing and un-bypassing, auto-

arming and disarming, etc.).

d. Access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time).

e. End User Output Programming Mode (provides 20 timers for relay control).

f. The system shall automatically adjust for daylight savings time.

14. Communication Features: Supports the following formats and features for the primary

and secondary central station receivers:

a. Formats: ADEMCO Express; ADEMCO Contact ID 4 and 10 Digit Acct

number.

b. Backup reporting: The system shall support backup reporting via the following:

Secondary phone number; ECP long-range radio (LRR) interface; with ability

to select long range radio (LRR) or dialup as the primary reporting method

(dynamic signaling feature).

c. Internet reporting: The system shall be capable of communicating with the

central station via the internet using Alarmnet-i. It shall provide the user with

the ability to control the system via a browser interface (i.e., AOL, Netscape,


encrypted with a minimum of 1024 bits of encryption.

15. Audio Alarm Verification: Provides a programmable Audio Alarm Verification

(AAV) that can be used in conjunction with an output relay to permit voice dialog

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



between an operator at the central station and a person at the premises.

16. Cross-Zoning Capability: Helps prevent false alarms by preventing a zone from going

into alarm unless its cross-zone is also faulted within 5 minutes.

a. Alarm notification appliances, including but not limited to sirens horns, bells

and strobes.

b. Auxiliary devices capable of operating using full-wave rectified unfiltered

voltage.

17. Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature: System shall be capable of differentiating

between an actual alarm and an alarm caused by leaving an entry/exit door open. If

not subsequently disarmed, the control panel shall:

a. Bypass the faulted E/E zone(s) and/or interior zones and arm the system.

b. Generate an Exit Error report by user and by zone so the central station knows

it was an exit alarm and who caused it.

18. Built-in User's Manual and Descriptor Review: For end-user convenience, the control

panel shall contain a built-in User's Manual. It shall include the following capabilities:

a. By depressing any of the function keys on the keypad for five (5) seconds, a

brief explanation of that function shall scroll across the alphanumeric display.

b. By depressing the READY key for five (5) seconds, all programmed zone

descriptors shall be displayed (one at a time). This feature shall provide a check

for installers and ensure all descriptors have been entered properly.

19. Programming: Control shall be capable of being programmed locally or remotely

using the ADEMCO Compass Downloader and shall be capable of:

a. Uploading and downloading all programming information at 300 baud.

b. Uploading and displaying firmware revision levels from the control.

20. Automation Software: The Control shall be capable of interfacing with automation

software via an RS232 input on a single partition.

G. Communications Options

1. Internet reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the central

station via the internet using Alarmnet-I and the Honeywell model 7847i internet

communicator. It shall provide the user with the ability to control the system via a

browser interface (i.e. Internet Explorer). All packet data transmitted to the

monitoring station shall be encrypted with a minimum of 256 bits of encryption.

2. GSM/GPRS reporting - The system shall be capable of communicating with the

central station by way of wireless GSM/GPRS using Alarmnet-GSM/GPRS service.

The installer shall furnish a Honeywell model GSMV4G or equivalent. It shall

provide the user with the ability to control the system via a browser interface (i.e.


encrypted.

3. Combined AlarmNet-I (Internet) and AlarmNet-GSM (Global System for Mobile) -

The facility system shall be monitored using both the AlarmNet-I and the AlarmNet-G

Communication services. The system shall use Honeywell's AlarmNet iGSMV4G

transmitter or equivalent. The communication service shall employ a two-way Internet

connection through AlarmNet Communication Service as the primary method of

communication, and then the two-way GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) as the

secondary means of communication and shall use SMS (Short Message Service) as a

tertiary means of communication. The equipment shall be UL listed for use in this

application. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing the

AlarmNet unit.

4. High Security, Combined AlarmNet-I (Internet) and AlarmNet-GSM (Global System

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



for Mobile) - The facility system shall be monitored using both the AlarmNet

communication services. The system shall use Honeywell's AlarmNet iGSMHS4G

communicator or equivalent. The communication service shall employ a high-security

two-way Internet connection through AlarmNet Communication Service as the

primary method of communication, and then the high-security two-way GPRS

(General Packet Radio Service) as the secondary means of communication and shall

use SMS (Short Message Service) as a tertiary means of communication. The

equipment shall be UL listed for use in this application. The installer shall follow

manufacturer's instructions when installing the AlarmNet unit.

H. User Interfaces

1. Keypad, Alpha Display: The system keypad shall include a two-line, alphanumeric

LCD display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6160 keypad or equivalent. The installer shall

follow manufacturer's installation instructions when installing system equipment.

2. Premium Keypad, Alpha Display: The system keypad shall include a two-line, reverse

display alphanumeric LCD display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6460 keypad or

equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions when

installing system equipment.

3. Keypad: Color Graphic Touch Screen Display: The system keypad shall employ a

dynamic, interactive graphic touch screen display. Use the Honeywell Vista 6280

keypad or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions


4. Keypad: Color Graphic Touch Screen Display, ZWAVE, IP Camera, Remote control

support: The system keypad shall employ a dynamic, interactive graphic touch screen

display. Use the Honeywell Tuxedo Touch Screen keypad or equivalent. The keypad

shall feature the ability to integrate with up to 232 ZWAVE devices, and 32

compatible IP Cameras. The Touch Screen keypad shall provide a web page on the

Local Area Network featuring system status and remote control functions. The

installer shall follow manufacturer's installation instructions when installing system

equipment.

I. VPLEX Addressable Detection Devices. System shall integrate with facility doors, windows,

and departments. The system shall also integrate with external systems, such as building







appropriate. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing and


1. VPLEX Bus Extensions: Extended system VPLEX bus branch circuits shall be scale

able to increase the total size of the bus in larger installations. Branch circuits leading

from different buildings or from different floors in multi-story buildings shall be

isolated from one another so that a shorted or grounded branch circuit is isolated away

from other near-side branch circuits, allowing other VPLEX devices to be isolated so

that they can continue to operate. The installer shall furnish Honeywell Model 4297

VPLEX Bus Extender modules for each 128 mA of current required on the VPLEX

bus.

2. VSI Bus Isolation and Integrity: System VPLEX bus branch circuits shall be isolated

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



from one another so that a shorted, overloaded, or grounded branch circuit is isolated

away from other near-side branch circuits, allowing undamaged VPLEX bus circuits

to continue to operate. VSI Isolation modules shall be installed at near-side

connections to cable runs leading to additional buildings, at cable runs leading to

additional floors in multi-story buildings, and at junction boxes leading to multiple

VPLEX branch circuits within the system. The installer shall use the Honeywell VSI

module or equivalent.

3. Individual Zone Input: When zone inputs shall be located next to individual detection

devices, system zone inputs allow the system to sense the change in state of an output

from an external device, such as a door/window position sensor, a motion detector, a

relay output from an appliance, the output of an external alert system, or other devices

that provide a dry closure output. The installer shall furnish Honeywell Model

4193SN zone input modules for each detection device that will be connected to the

VPLEX Bus.

4. Wood Frame Doors, VPLEX, concealed: Monitor the opened and closed position of

doors in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 4191SN-WH

Recessed 1/2" sensor or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer


5. Wood Doors and Windows, Exposed, VPLEX: Monitor the opened and closed

position of doors and windows in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell

Model 4939SN Exposed Addressable Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow


6. Wood Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Armored, VPLEX: Monitor the opened

and closed position of doors and windows in the facility. The installer shall install a

Honeywell Model 960 Armored Door Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow


7. Hollow Steel Frame Doors, VPLEX, Concealed: Monitor the opened and closed


4191SN-WH Recessed 1/2" sensor, equipped with the steel door adapter or



8. Hollow Metal Doors and Windows, Exposed, VPLEX: Monitor the opened and closed




9. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Armored, VPLEX: Monitor the

opened and closed position of doors and windows in the facility. The installer shall



equipment.

10. Filled Metal Doors and Windows, Exposed, VPLEX: Monitor the opened and closed




11. Filled Steel Frame Doors, VPLEX, Exposed, Armored: Monitor the opened and

closed position of doors in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model

960 Door sensor, and a 4193SN or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer


12. Roof Hatches, Exposed, Armored: Monitor the opened and closed position of hatches

and access doors to the roof of the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Model 960 Armored Door Sensor, and a 4193SN or equivalent. The installer shall

follow manufacturer instructions while installing and programming system equipment.

13. Roof Hatch Doors, Exposed, VPLEX: Monitor the opened and closed position of

doors in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 4939SN Exposed

Addressable Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions


14. Overhead Doors: Monitor the opened and closed position of overhead bay doors in the

facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 4959SN Overhead Door sensor,



15. Glass Break Detector, VPLEX: Selected areas in the protected site will use glass


install a Honeywell Model FG1625SN Glass Break detector or equivalent. The



16. Glass Break Detector, VPLEX, Flush-Mounted, Concealed: Selected areas in the

protected site will use concealed glass break detectors to sense the breaking of

windows. Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model FG1625RFM

Glass Break detector or equivalent and a 4193SN zone input device along with an

approved power supply. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when

installing, testing and programming system equipment.

17. Glass Break Detector, Flush Mount, VPLEX: Selected areas in the protected site will

use glass break detectors to sense the breaking of windows. Where designated in the

plans, install a Honeywell Model FG1625F Flush-mount Glass Break detector or

equivalent and a 4193SN zone input device. The installer shall follow manufacturer's

instructions when installing, testing and programming system equipment.

18. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Wall-Mounted, VPLEX: Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model IS2500SN VPLEX PIR

Motion Detector or equivalent.

19. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Ceiling-mounted, VPLEX: Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a 4193SN zone input module and a Honeywell

Model IS280CM Ceiling Mounted Passive Infrared Motion Detector with the

appropriate power supply or equivalent.

20. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Ceiling-Mounted, VPLEX: Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 997 Passive Infrared


21. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Wall-Mounted, VPLEX: Selected areas in the protected


designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT7500SN VPLEX Dual-Tec


22. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Anti-Mask, Wall-Mounted, VPLEX: Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT-906 Dual-Tec Motion

Detector or equivalent with anti-mask detection capabilities.

23. Photo Beam, 100 Feet, VPLEX: Monitor the status of photo beam units installed in

the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model IB100D Photo Beam

Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




24. Photo Beam, 200 Feet, VPLEX: Monitor the status of photo beam units installed in

the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model IB200D Photo Beam

Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while


25. Vibration Sensors: Include Vibration Sensors where designated. When the sensor

detects vibration, the sensor shall send messages indicating the fault to the control

panel. Each vibration sensor shall report a trouble condition if disconnected from its

zone expander. The model number of the vibration sensor is the SC100 or equivalent.

26. Refrigeration Temperature Threshold Detector: Selected refrigeration units in the

facility will use Temperature Threshold detectors to sense high temperature levels.

Locations for Temperature Threshold detectors may be in kitchens, laboratories, for

each Temperature Threshold detector, install a Honeywell 4193SN zone input module

and a Honeywell TS300 Temperature Threshold detector or equivalent, and an

appropriate power supply.

27. Leak, Flood, Water Level: Monitor the level of water in a designated location. The

installer shall install a Honeywell Model 470-12 Water Sensor and FP280 or 470PB

Water Probe, or equivalent. The owner may monitor air conditioning duct drip pans,

areas beneath water heaters and tanks, refrigeration drain basins, sump pumps,

basements, or restrooms. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while


28. Carbon Monoxide Detector, VPLEX: Selected areas in the facility will use carbon




Honeywell 4193SN zone input module and a System Sensor CO1224 Carbon

Monoxide detector or equivalent, and an appropriate power supply.

29. Natural Gas Detector: Selected areas in the facility will use natural gas detectors to



natural gas detector, install a 4193SN Honeywell zone input module and a Macurco

MA-GD2A natural gas detector or equivalent, and an appropriate power supply.

30. Panic Buttons: Include manual panic buttons under desks, in storage rooms, in walk-in

refrigeration units and other designated locations. The panic button shall be the

Honeywell Model 269SN or equivalent.

31. Holdup Device - Foot Rail, VPLEX - The system shall include Foot Rail Devices on

the floor below the customer service station or below designated desks within the

protected location. The Foot Rail devices are the Honeywell Model 266 or equivalent.

Install with a 4193SN zone input device. The installer shall follow manufacturer's


32. Holdup Device, Bill Trap, VPLEX: Include Bill Trap Devices, Honeywell Model 264

or equivalent inside of money drawers in customer service areas.

J. Conventional Devices. The system shall integrate with facility doors, windows, and







© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




appropriate.

1. Grouped Zone Input: When zone input devices shall be located in the control panel

room or at designated locations in the protected location., system zone inputs allow

the system to sense the change in state of an output from an external device, such as a

door/window position sensor, a motion detector, a relay output from an appliance, the

output of an external alert system, or other devices that provide a dry closure output.

The installer shall furnish Honeywell Model 4208SN zone input modules for each 8

detection devices that will be connected to the system.

2. Wood Frame Doors, Concealed Sensor, conventional - The system shall monitor the


Honeywell Model 951WG Recessed sensor or equivalent. The installer shall follow


3. Wood Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed Sensor, Conventional - The system shall


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed Door/window Sensor, or







system equipment.

5. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and windows, concealed, conventional - The system shall


install a Honeywell Model 947-75T concealed sensor, equipped with the steel door

adapter or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions while







7. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed Sensor, Conventional - The


facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed

Door/window Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer


8. Filled Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, conventional- The system shall


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed sensor, or equivalent. The


system equipment.

9. Filled Steel Frame Doors, Exposed, Armored, conventional - The system shall




equipment.

10. Roof Hatches, Exposed, Armored, Conventional - The system shall monitor the

opened and closed position of hatches and access doors to the roof of the facility. The

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





system equipment.

11. Hatches, Exposed, Conventional - The system shall monitor the opened and closed


7939WG Exposed Door Sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer


12. Overhead Doors - The system shall monitor the opened and closed position of

overhead bay doors in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 957

Overhead Door sensor, or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer


13. Glass Break Detector, Conventional - Selected areas in the protected site will use

glass break detectors to sense the breaking of windows. Where designated in the

plans, install a Honeywell Model FG1625T Glass Break detector or equivalent. The



14. Glass Break Detector, Conventional, Flush-mounted - Selected areas in the protected

site will use glass break detectors to sense the breaking of windows. Where designated

in the plans, install a Honeywell Model FG1625RFM Glass Break detector or

equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing,

testing and programming system equipment.

15. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Ceiling-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in

the protected site will use motion detectors to sense motion in rooms or areas of

rooms. Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model IS280CM Ceiling

Mounted Passive Infrared Motion Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow


16. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model IS3035 Passive Infrared



17. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT8050 Dual-Tec Motion



18. DUAL-TEC Motion Detector, Ceiling-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT6360STC Ceiling

Mounted DUAL TEC Motion Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow


19. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, anti-mask, Wall-mounted, Conventional - Selected areas

in the protected site will use motion detectors to sense motion in rooms or areas of

rooms. Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model DT-906 Dual-Tec

Motion Detector or equivalent with anti-mask detection capabilities. The installer


equipment.

20. Vibration Sensors - The system shall include Vibration Sensors where designated.

When the sensor detects vibration, the sensor shall send messages indicating the fault

to the control panel. The model number of the vibration sensor is the ADEMCO 11 or

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





21. Temperature Threshold Detector - Selected areas in the facility will use Temperature

Threshold detectors to sense high or low level temperatures within a designated area.

Locations for Temperature Threshold detectors may be in kitchens, laboratories,

server rooms, classrooms or other areas where temperature threshold notification is

critical. For each Temperature Threshold detector, install a Honeywell zone input

module and a Honeywell TS300 Temperature Threshold detector and T280R

Temperature Probe or equivalent, and an appropriate power supply. The installer shall


equipment.

22. Leak, Flood, Water Level - The system shall monitor the level of water in a

designated location. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 470-12 Water

Sensor and FP280 or 470PB Water Probe, or equivalent. The owner may monitor air

conditioning duct drip pans, areas beneath water heaters and tanks, refrigeration drain

basins, sump pumps, basements, or restrooms. The installer shall follow manufacturer


23. Carbon Monoxide Detector, Conventional - Selected areas in the facility will use

carbon monoxide detectors to sense high levels of carbon monoxide. Locations for

carbon monoxide detectors may be in parking garages, kitchens, laboratories, near

fireplaces, or in natural gas fueled heater closets. For each carbon monoxide detector,

install a System Sensor CO1224 Carbon Monoxide detector or equivalent, and an

appropriate power supply. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when


24. Natural Gas Detector - Selected areas in the facility will use natural gas detectors to




GD2A natural gas detector or equivalent, and an appropriate power supply. The


system equipment.

25. Panic and Emergency Buttons - The system shall include manual panic buttons under

desks, in storage rooms, in walk-in refrigeration units and other designated locations.

The panic button shall be the Honeywell Model 269R or equivalent. The installer shall


equipment.

26. Holdup Device - Foot Rail, Conventional - The system shall include Foot Rail

Devices on the floor below the customer service station or below designated desks

within the protected location. The Foot Rail devices are the Honeywell Model 266 or



27. Holdup Device - Bill Trap, Conventional - The system shall include Bill Trap Devices

inside of money drawers in customer service areas. The Bill trap devices are the

Honeywell Model 264 or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's





29. ATM and Cabinet Protection: Monitor the status of the ATM or file cabinet. For each

Safe, the installer shall provide complete protection integrated with the system

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



including seismic detectors such as the Honeywell SC105 or equivalent where

designated.


beam units installed in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model CK-




beam units installed in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model



K. Wireless Detection Devices. The system shall integrate with facility doors, windows, and








appropriate.

1. Wireless Receivers for Commercial Applications - The system shall include up to two

Commercial Wireless Receivers where designated. The wireless receiver shall be UL

Listed, Factory Mutual Approved, MEA Listed, and CSFM Listed for the application.

The wireless receiver shall receive messages from wireless devices indicating device

detection loop open, normal, shorted, tamper alarm, and low battery status when sent

from transmitters associated with the system. Each wireless transmitter shall send

periodic check-in signals to its associated control panel. The transmitter's associated

control panel shall report any missing transmitter within four and one-half hours. Each

transmitter shall report any low battery condition a minimum of seven days before its

battery becomes too discharged to power the transmitter. The transmitter's associated



model number of the receiver is Honeywell 5881ENHC or equivalent. The installer


equipment.

2. Wireless Repeaters for Commercial Applications - The system shall include

Commercial Wireless Repeaters where designated. The wireless repeater shall be UL

Listed for the application. The wireless repeater shall receive and forward messages

from wireless devices indicating device detection loop open, normal, shorted, tamper

alarm, and low battery status when sent from transmitters associated with the system.





transmitter. The transmitter's associated control panel shall report any low battery

condition by providing a local indication at system keypads, and shall send a trouble

report to the central monitoring station. The model number of the repeater is

Honeywell 5800RP or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's


3. 5817CB Universal Transmitter for zone inputs. The system shall include Wireless

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



transmitters where designated. When the device is triggered and normal, the wireless

transmitter shall send messages indicating the state of the device to the control panel.





transmitter. Each transmitter shall include an internal tamper switch, and shall send a

tamper alert to the control panel when removed from its installed location. The



central monitoring station. The transmitter shall be model number 5817CB or



4. Wireless Door Sensors for Wood Jambs, concealed - The system shall include

Wireless Door Sensors for Wood Jamb Doors where designated. When the door is






too discharged to power the transmitter. Each door sensor shall include an internal

tamper switch, and shall send a tamper alert to the control panel when removed from

its installed location. The transmitter's associated control panel shall report any low

battery condition by providing a local indication at system keypads, and shall send a

trouble report to the central monitoring station. The model number of the wireless

door sensor is the 5818MN or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's


5. Wood Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Wireless - The system shall monitor the


Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed Door Sensor, and a 5817CB wireless transmitter







system equipment.

7. Wireless Door Sensors for Hollow Metal Door Frames, concealed - The system shall

include Wireless Door Sensors for Hollow Metal Jamb Doors where designated. The

when the door is opened and closed, the wireless door sensor shall send messages

indicating the state of the door to the control panel. Each wireless transmitter shall

send periodic check-in signals to its associated control panel. The door sensor's

associated control panel shall report any missing door sensor within four and one-half

hours. Each transmitter shall report any low battery condition a minimum of seven

days before its battery becomes too discharged to power the transmitter. Each door

sensor shall include an internal tamper switch, and shall send a tamper alert to the

control panel when removed from its installed location. The transmitter's associated



model number of the door sensor is the 947-75T and the 5817CB Wireless transmitter

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing


8. Hollow Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Wireless - The system shall


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed Sensor, and the 5817CB








10. Filled Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Wireless- The system shall


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 7939WG Exposed sensor, and the 5817CB



11. Filled Metal Frame Doors and Windows, Exposed, Armored, Wireless- The system


installer shall install a Honeywell Model 960 Exposed sensor, and the 5817CB



12. Wireless Door Sensors for Roof Hatches, exposed, Armored - The system shall

include Wireless Door Sensors for Roof Hatches where designated. When the door is











central monitoring station. The model number of the door sensor is the Ademco 960



13. Hatch doors, exposed, wireless - The system shall monitor the opened and closed

position of hatches in the facility. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model

7939WG Exposed Sensor, and the 5817CB Wireless transmitter or equivalent. The


system equipment.

14. Wireless Door Sensors for Overhead Rollup Doors - The system shall include

Wireless Door Sensors for Overhead Rollup Doors where designated. When the door

is opened and closed, the wireless door sensor shall send messages indicating the state

of the door to the control panel. Each wireless transmitter shall send periodic check-in





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







central monitoring station. The model number of the door sensor is the ADEMCO 957


manufacturer's instructions when installing and programming system

15. Glass Break Detector, Wireless - Selected areas in the protected site will use glass


install a Honeywell Model 5853 Glass Break detector or equivalent. The installer shall

follow manufacturer's instructions when installing, testing and programming system

equipment.

16. Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Wireless - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5800PIR-COM Wireless



17. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Wireless - Selected areas in the protected


designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5898 Wireless Motion Detector or



18. Dual-Tec Motion Detector, Wall-mounted, Curtain, Wireless - Selected areas in the


Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5898 Wireless Motion



19. Temperature Threshold Detector, Wireless - Selected areas in the facility will use

Temperature Threshold detectors to sense high or low level temperatures within a

designated area. Locations for Temperature Threshold detectors may be in kitchens,

laboratories, server rooms, classrooms or other areas where temperature threshold

notification is critical. For each Temperature Threshold detector, install a Honeywell

5821 wireless temperature alarm transmitter and a Honeywell TS280R Temperature

probe or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when


20. Leak, Flood, Water Level, Wireless - The system shall monitor the level of water in a

designated location. The installer shall install a Honeywell Model 5821 Water Sensor

with a FP280 remote probe or equivalent. The owner may monitor air conditioning

duct drip pans, areas beneath water heaters and tanks, refrigeration drain basins, sump

pumps, basements, or restrooms. The installer shall follow manufacturer instructions


21. Carbon Monoxide Detector, Wireless - Selected areas in the facility will use carbon




System Sensor CO1224 Carbon Monoxide detector or equivalent, and an appropriate

power supply. The installer shall follow manufacturer's instructions when installing


22. Holdup Device - Two-button, Conventional - The system shall include Two-button

Holdup Devices at customer windows. The holdup devices shall be the Honeywell

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Model 268 two-button holdup button or equivalent. The installer shall follow


23. Asset Protection, Wireless - Selected indoor assets within the protected site will use

wireless indoor asset protection devices to sense protected object Asset Protection.

Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5870API Wireless Asset



24. Outdoor Passive Infrared Motion Detector, Wall, Post, or Pole-mounted, Wireless -

Selected outdoor areas in the protected site will use outdoor motion detectors to sense

motion. Where designated in the plans, install a Honeywell Model 5800PIR-OD

Wireless Motion Detector or equivalent. The installer shall follow manufacturer's


L. SPECIAL APPLICATIONS

1. Automatic Door Locking: Selected doors in the facility will use system automatic

door locking capabilities to restrict entry to into the facility, yet allow free exit by

those who have completed their business. For each automatic locking door, install a

4101SN relay output module, a power supply, and an electric locking device.

2. Automatic Door Holders: Selected doors in the facility will use system automatic door

holder capabilities to hold doors open until particular system events release the door.

For each automatic locking door, install a 4101SN relay output module, a power

supply, and an electric magnetic door holder device.

3. Energy Management: The system shall be connected to the central EMS system for

the purposes of affecting the operation of heat and air conditioning appliances when

the partition is armed.

4. Energy Management: The system shall be connected to each HVAC thermostat for the

purposes of disabling heat and air conditioning appliances when the partition is armed.

5. Server Room Alert Systems: The system shall provide sensing of critical conditions

within the server room. The system shall alert the user when the temperature is too

high, when the humidity is too high, when air conditioning condensation drip pans

require draining and when there is an extended power failure.

6. Natural Gas Detector: Selected areas in the facility will use natural gas detectors to




GD2A natural gas detector or equivalent, and an appropriate power supply.

7. Kitchen Alert Systems: The system shall provide sensing of critical conditions within

the kitchen or food processing facility. The system shall alert the user when the






9. Vending Machine Protection: Monitor the status of the Vending Machine. For each

Vending Machine, the installer shall provide complete protection integrated with the

system.

10. Gas Water Heater Alert Systems: The system shall be provide sensing of critical

conditions within the water heater room. The system shall alert the user in the event of

natural gas leaks, carbon monoxide presence, and in the event of water leaks.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



M. Sirens, Sounders and Indicators

1. Siren, Outdoor, High Output in Enclosure: Monitor the status of protected openings

and areas in the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system

shall sound a Honeywell Model 702 Siren or equivalent inside of the Model 743BE

Enclosure. The installer shall install the siren as directed by manufacturer instructions.

2. Siren Enclosure, Outdoor, Large: For large sirens, the system shall be mounted inside

of the Model 743BE Enclosure. The installer shall install the siren as directed by


3. Siren Indoor/Outdoor in Enclosure: Monitor the status of protected openings and areas

in the armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall

sound a Honeywell Model 719 Siren or equivalent located inside a 742BE Enclosure.

The installer shall install the siren as directed by manufacturer instructions.

4. Siren Indoor/Outdoor: Monitor the status of protected openings and areas in the armed

and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall sound a

Honeywell Model 748LC Siren or equivalent. The installer shall install the siren as


5. Siren Indoor, Wireless: Monitor the status of protected openings and areas in the

armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall sound a

Honeywell Model 5800WAVE Wireless Siren or equivalent. The installer shall install

the siren as directed by manufacturer instructions.

6. Siren Indoor: Monitor the status of protected openings and areas in the armed and

disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall sound a Honeywell

Model Wave2 Siren or equivalent. The installer shall install the siren as directed by


7. Siren Indoor, Flush Mount: Monitor the status of protected openings and areas in the

armed and disarmed state. When an audible alarm occurs, the system shall sound a

Honeywell Model Wave2F Siren or equivalent. The installer shall install the siren as


8. Strobe, Indoor/Outdoor: Monitor the status of protected openings and areas in the

armed and disarmed state. When an alarm occurs, the system shall indicate the alarm

with a Honeywell Model 710 Strobe or equivalent. The installer shall install the strobe

as directed by manufacturer instructions.

2.4 INTRUSION DETECTION CABLES

A. Intrusion Detection System components shall be connected using the following Honeywell

Genesis Series Cables:

1. Keypads use four conductor, 18AWG with 22AWG, non-shielded cable:

a. Element 1: 18AWG:

1) General Purpose applications: Part #: 1119.

2) Riser applications: Part #: 2115.

3) Plenum applications: Part #: 3115.

b. Element 2: 22AWG:

1) General Purpose applications: Part #: 1104.

2) Riser applications: Part #: 2104.

3) Plenum applications: Part #: 3104.

2. VPLEX Zone Expanders shall connect to a VPLEX data bus using two conductor,

18AWG, non-shielded cable.

a. General Purpose applications: Part #: 1118.

b. Riser applications: Part #: 2114.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



c. Plenum applications: Part #: 3114.

d. Direct burial applications: Part #: 4156.

3. VPLEX Fire detection devices and two wire fire detection devices connect using two

conductor, 18AWG, non-shielded fire alarm cable.





4. Four wire fire detection devices connect using four conductor, 18AWG, non-shielded

fire alarm cable.





5. Unpowered detection devices connect to zone inputs using two conductor, 22AWG,

non-shielded cable.




6. Powered detection devices connect to zone inputs using four conductor, 18AWG, non-

shielded cable.





7. The Bell output shall use two conductor, 16AWG, non-shielded cable.




8. Power connections for control panels shall be made using two conductor, 16AWG,

non-shielded cable.




9. Ground connections to control panels shall be made using 14AWG solid insulated

copper ground wire.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine site conditions prior to installation. Notify Architect and Owner in writing if

unsuitable conditions are encountered. Do not start installation until site conditions are

acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Intrusion detection and fire alarm control panel system shall be installed and tested in

accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

1. Coordinate interfaces with Owner's representative where appropriate.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Provide backboxes, pullboxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable, and wire for a

complete and reliable installation. Obtain Owner's approval for exact location of all

boxes, conduit, and wiring runs prior to installation.

3. Install conduit, cable, and wire parallel and square with building lines, including

raised floors areas. Do not exceed forty percent fill in conduits. Gather wires and tie to

create an orderly installation.

4. Coordinate with other trades to provide proper sequencing of installation.

3.3 FIELD COMMISSIONING AND CERTIFICATION

A. Field Commissioning: Test system as recommended by manufacturer, including the

following:

1. Conduct complete inspection and testing of equipment, including verification of

operation with connected equipment.

2. Test devices and demonstrate operational features for Owner's representative and

authorities having jurisdiction as applicable.



3.4 TRAINING

A. Conduct on-site system training, with the number of sessions and length of sessions as

recommended by the manufacturer. Training shall include administration, provisioning,

configuration, operation and diagnostics.

3.5 PROTECTION



END OF SECTION

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Video Security Surveillance Management System


13732 - VIDEO SECURITY SURVEILLANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Video surveillance and management system.

1. Video Management System (VMS).

2. Network Video Recorders (NVR).

3. Encoders.

4. Fixed Cameras.

5. PTZ Cameras.

6. Network & IP Cables.



B. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

C. Section 27 11 23 - Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack.

1.3 REFERENCES.

A. Canadian ICES-003.

B. Consultative Committee for International Radio (CCIR).

C. Conformity for Europe (CE).

D. Electronic Industry Association (EIA).

E. Federal Communications Commission (FCC).

F. Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG).

G. National Television Systems Committee (NTSC).

H. Phase Alternating Line (PAL).

I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. HD (High-definition) - refers to video having resolution substantially higher than traditional

television systems. HD has one or two million pixels per frame.

B. CIF (Common Intermediate Format) - refers to a standard video format, which is categorized

based on the resolution.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. General: Submittals shall be made in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract and

Submittal Procedure Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets indicating systems and

components proposed for use, including instruction manuals.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings including connection diagrams for

interfacing equipment, list of connected equipment, and locations for major equipment

components.

D. Record Drawings: During construction maintain record drawings indicating location of

equipment and wiring. Submit an electronic version of record drawings not later than

Substantial Completion of the project.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data,

customized to the system installed. Include system and operator manuals.

F. Field Tests: Submit results of field testing of every device including date, testing personnel,

retesting date (if applicable), and confirmation that every device passed field testing.

G. Maintenance Service Agreement: Submit a sample copy of the manufacturer's maintenance

service agreement, including cost and services for a one year period for Owner's review.

Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, labor and materials to repair the system,

tests and adjustments, and regular inspections.

H. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6

inches (150 mm) square representing actual product, color, and patterns.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum ten years experience in manufacturing and maintaining video

management systems. Manufacturer shall provide toll-free technical assistance and support

available 24/7.

1. Manufacturer shall provide customer service, pre-sales applications assistance, after-

sales technical assistance, access to online technical support, and online training using

Web conferencing.

2. Manufacturer shall provide 24/7 technical assistance and support by means of a toll-

free telephone number at no extra charge.

B. Manufacturing Location: Provide equipment assembled in the United States.

C. Installer: Minimum two years experience installing similar systems, and acceptable to the

manufacturer of the video management system.

D. Power Requirements: Components shall have the following electrical specifications: 100-

240 V AC (50 Hz/60 Hz) or as specified for individual products within part 2 of the

specification.

E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and

application workmanship.


2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship is approved by Architect.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Rebuild mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section.


A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging bearing the brand name

and manufacturer's identification until ready for installation.

B. Handling: Handle materials to avoid damage.





1.10 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent

interruption of construction progress.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard one-year warranty for the video

surveillance system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Honeywell Security and Fire, which is located at: 2700

Blankenbaker Pkwy. Suite 150; Louisville, KY 40299; Toll Free Tel: 800-323-4576;

Email:[email protected]; Web:www.security.honeywell.com




2.2 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (VMS)

A. The Video Management System (VMS) shall control multiple sources of video surveillance

subsystems in a facility to collect, manage and present video in a clear and concise manner.

VMS shall intelligently determine the capabilities of each subsystem across a single or

multiple sites, allowing video management of any compatible analog or digital video device

through a unified configuration platform and viewer.

B. Product: Honeywell MAXPRO VMS as manufactured by the Honeywell Security and Fire.

C. System Components:

1. VMS server, controller containing a database of all network-connected cameras,

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



integrated components and their configurations.

2. Workstations that render video and act as a main user/machine interface.

D. Operational Requirements:

1. VMS shall provide a single graphical user interface (GUI) to monitor, control and

administer digital video surveillance equipment from multiple systems and platforms.

2. VMS shall include a fully scalable enterprise-class media management system to

enable simultaneous live monitoring from multiple stations and be configurable for

storage both on and off site.

3. VMS software shall be configured to store and to view images captured by one

camera or numerous cameras and monitor connections across an unlimited number of

servers.

4. The VMS application shall have following major capabilities:

a. Capable of managing pentaplex user operations of attached recording devices

simultaneously, including live viewing, recording, playback, archiving of video

data to an external storage device, and handling the exchange of data between

the server and a remote workstation.

b. Live viewing of up to 64 cameras on a single workstation with up to four

monitors set up at CIF resolution. For D1 resolution, the number of live streams

shall be benchmarked based on the client hardware configuration deployed.

c. Integration with multiple digital and network video recording devices.

d. Integration with multiple video matrix switchers and matrix keyboards.

e. The number of recorders and switchers shall be scalable within a network to

handle any size of installation.

f. Capable of managing the integration with multiple digital IP cameras through

compatible recording devices.

g. Integration with electronic access control systems.

h. Integration with video analytics and a data management utility.

i. Capable of managing failover and redundant capabilities of the recording

device(s) and the database server.

j. Capable of managing the investigation and video archive search tools of the

recording devices.

k. Capable of managing advanced search capabilities of the recording devices.

l. Capable of managing motion detection-based recording.

m. Multi-level user access rights for managing viewing rights and access to the

recorder functions.

n. Capable of managing continuous, scheduled, manual, event-based and alarm-

based recording features of the recording devices.

o. Support for both multicast and Unicast network topologies and communication

protocols.

p. Macro capability to allow for custom scripts and to provide both customization

and third party integration.

q. Support for both centralized and distributed architectures.

r. Simultaneous use of multiple video compression including H.264, MPEG-4 and

M-JPEG.

s. Utilization of off-the-shelf computer workstations, servers, networking and

storage equipment.

5. Mode for User Login: VMS Server and Workstation shall have the option of two

modes of user logins:

a. Windows Authentication: Uses the Windows logged-in user name.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. User DB Authentication: Uses a preconfigured user name and password.

6. VMS Workstation shall provide the following operator functions:

a. Configuration: The operator (with Administrator privileges) shall have the

option to configure VMS. VMS shall support live updates of all configurations.

The following configurations shall be possible:

1) Recorders Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete recorders.

2) Camera Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete cameras and associate

to a particular recorder or switcher and map to a particular site, partition

or event group.

3) Monitor Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete monitors and map to a

particular site, partition, event group or keyboard. It shall provide an

option to add a digital monitor and associate it with a particular

workstation. It shall provide an option to configure a digital monitor with

a default salvo and startup in full screen. It shall provide an option to add

an analog monitor and associate it with a particular switcher. Option to

save a digital correction in the video input page.

4) Switcher Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete analog video

switchers.

5) Keyboard Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete keyboard controllers.

6) User Management (Users and Roles): Option to add/edit/delete roles and

associate to predefined privileges and then add/edit/delete users and

associate users with roles. Option to associate permissions with salvo

selection and tool bar buttons.

7) Site Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete a site.

8) Workstation Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete a workstation.

9) Event Group Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete event groups.

Support of bulk event association to enable/disable and adjust events for

recorders and inputs in bulk.

10) Partition Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete partitions.

11) Sequence Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete a scan sequences.

12) Intercept Key Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete intercept keys

from UltraKey keyboards to change the key function to a new and

desired function.

13) System Macro Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete macros. Option

to restore macros. Execute button option to trigger selected macros

provides mechanism for testing written macros.

14) Port Configuration: Option to add/edit/delete keyboard controllers and

analog video switchers to the ports available on the controller.

b. Viewer:

1) Capable of being launched multiple times on the same workstation a

minimum of four (4) times to display four (4) viewers on four (4)

separate monitors per workstation.

2) Main video viewing screen capable of showing 1x1, 2x2, 3x3, 4x4, 1x5,

2x8, and 1x12 salvos of live or recorded video. The Viewer application

shall be capable of a full screen mode where only the video salvo is

displayed.

3) Each Viewer has the capability to be associated to a specific monitor on

a workstation and be assigned a unique output number that is either

selectable from the viewer device tree, an UltraKey controller, or from a

system macro.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4) Capable of saving current salvo as a View and allowing the user to select

the saved view by either dragging and dropping it into the viewer, or

using an UltraKey controller, or a system macro.

5) Capable of selecting a particular camera or salvo by using the mouse to

drag it onto the main video viewing screen. Users shall also have an

undo/redo option for camera drag/drop and salvo selection from the

viewer and UltraKey controller.

6) Capable of switching an analog camera to an analog or digital monitor so

that the system will recognize to switch to the analog matrix switch or to

pull the video from an encoder.

7) Capable of choosing My Salvos (unique to the current operator) or

Shared Salvos while saving a salvo.

8) Capable of allowing duplicate salvo names to be set by different users

and in different locations.

9) Capable of dragging any monitor defined in the system onto a video

panel and take control of that monitor.

10) Option to send a command to the controller to switch a particular analog

camera onto the analog monitor through a drag and drop operation.

11) Capable of configuring and running scan sequences.

12) Capable of independently adjusting the contrast, brightness, and

saturation settings for each camera.

13) Support for both analog and digital PTZs through the GUI or the

keyboard.

14) Capable of exporting user selected images or video clips. A digital

signature shall be attached to every exported clip.

15) Clip Creation: The Clip Creation facility shall permit multi-camera clip

generation.

a) Story clips allow for selecting multiple cameras at different times

to create a single clip to play the cameras back in order. Also

supports saving salvo information in a story clip.

b) Salvo clips provide an instant clip export button to create an

instant clip while maintaining the salvo information. Supports pre-

determined pre- and post-times that are user-configurable in the

preferences.

c) Clip preview window facility supports play back of the individual

cameras prior to commencing clip creation.

d) Capable of manually setting the clip duration in the clip creation

window for each camera.

16) Capable of playing back the exported video clips. Each video channel

that is being recorded by the recording system shall be overlaid with text

and a time stamp that is customizable by the user.

17) Allows the user to initiate recording through the GUI or controller.

18) Capable of complete alarm management for the alarms coming from

recorders or switchers.

19) Application launch pad launches other applications from within the

Viewer.

20) Control of operator messaging, allowing operators to communicate with

each other. Operators can exchange text, images and annotated video

sources. Operators can hand over a video source to another operator

using messaging.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



21) Ability to set up surrounding camera views. Support for setting presets in

surrounding cameras.

22) Option to perform various operations through the context menu on a

particular video (live/recorded/sequence). These operations include: Full

screen, point and drag, enable square select, maintain aspect ratio, toggle

text, digital PTZ, add bookmark, send message, start recording, stop

recording, mark in, mark out, save image, save image as, and show


23) Ability to manage the timeline control of the recording device, which

provides camera recording statistics. Timeline control shall have the

following features: Mark in/out (with looping facility), bookmark

(including for all playing cameras or all selected cameras or removing all

bookmarks), snapshot, time slider, time search, time jump, and play

controls. Timeline control shall also include dedicated buttons for step

reverse and step forward and keyboard shortcuts for playback operations.

24) Support for bookmark searches based on cameras, time duration, and

comments.

25) Controllable by a keyboard controller connected to the VMS

server/controller with the following major features: selecting salvos,

ending monitor commands, switching operations, and PTZ control

operations.

26) Preference configuration including: fps of unselected panels, rendered

type, preview pane, and text display format.

c. Search: The Search facility shall include searches based on date and time.

d. Reports: The Report facility shall include event history reports and audit log

reports.

e. Remote Monitor: The Remote Monitor facility shall allow operators to control

a remote monitor connected to another workstation and perform review

capabilities so that both the local operator and the remote viewer can

simultaneously watch the same video.

E. VMS Environmental Conditions:

1. Video management system shall be designed to function in the following


a. Operating Temperature: shall be between 5 degree C and 40 degree C (40

degree F - 104 degree F) non-condensing.

b. Emissions: CFR 47 Part 15 Subpart B EN55022, EN61000-3-2, EN61000-3-3,

CISPR 22.

c. Immunity: EN55024.

d. Safety: UL60950, NWGQ (7), IEC60950, IEC 60825-1:2001.

F. VMS Integrations:

1. Recorders: VMS shall support integration with digital and network video recorders

(DVRs/NVRs). VMS shall have the ability to access and manage necessary functions

of the recording devices through the VMS client interface, such as live video,

recorded video, camera configuration, PTZ control and other associated functions.

The system shall support the following recorders:

a. Honeywell MAXPRO NVR PE.

b. Honeywell MAXPRO NVR SE.

c. Honeywell MAXPRO NVR XE.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID PE.

e. Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID SE.

f. Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID XE.

g. Honeywell Enterprise Series.

h. Honeywell IP Engine.

i. Honeywell Rapid Eye HYBRID.

j. Honeywell Fusion NVR.

k. Honeywell Fusion HYBRID.

2. Analog Video Switchers: VMS shall support matrix switcher integration including

camera call up, monitor switching, video command support and PTZ support. The

video subsystem shall be the controller device for video cameras, monitors, and

VCRs, and shall associate camera inputs with monitor outputs. The system shall allow

users to program video monitors and video cameras to execute commands upon

recognition of an alarm or any other condition within the system. The user shall be

able to add, edit, delete, and partition video subsystems. The system shall support the

following analog video switchers:

a. Honeywell VideoBloX Series.

b. Ultrak MAXPRO-1000.

c. Pelco 9600 Series.

d. American Dynamics.

e. Vicon.

f. Burle.

3. Video Analytics:

a. VMS shall support video analytics integration with Honeywell's Active Alert

solution.

4. Data Management Utility:

a. VMS shall support data analytics integration with Honeywell's Integrated Data

Manager solution.

5. IP Surveillance Control Keyboards:

a. VMS shall support full integration with the Honeywell HJK7000 UltraKey Plus

fully programmable touch screen keyboard and joy stick controller.

b. VMS shall support full integration with the Honeywell HJC5000 UltraKey Lite

fully programmable keyboard and joystick controller.

6. Electronic Access Control Systems:

a. Honeywell Pro-Watch Release 3.8 or later.

b. Honeywell WIN-PAK Release 4.0 or later.

G. System Hardware:

1. VMS Server: Server shall operate with no performance degradation using the

following minimum hardware and operating system configuration:

a. Processor:

1) Up to 5 Client Server: Single Intel Quad Core Xeon E3 1224V3 3.2

GHz.

2) Up to 10 Client Server: Single Intel 6 Core Xeon E5 2630V2 2.6 GHz.

3) Up to 25 Client Server: Dual Intel 6 Core Xeon E5 2630V2 2.6 GHz.

b. System Memory (RAM):

1) Up to 5 Client Server: 8 GB.

2) Greater than 5 Client Server: 16 GB.

c. Optical Drive: DVD+/-RW.

d. Hard Disk Drives: Two separate hard drives or two sets of RAID arrays.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1) Disk/RAID set 1 utilizing 7200 SATA or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146 GB.

2) Disk/RAID set 2 utilizing 7200 SATA or 10K-15K RPM SCSI 146 GB.

3) If fault tolerance is required, RAID set one is RAID 1 or 10 and RAID

set two is RAID 10 or 0 + 1.

e. Network Interface Card (NIC): Dual or compatible pair of NICs, 1 Gbps.

f. Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse pointing device.

g. Graphics Adapter: 32-bit color or higher, video resolution 1280x1024 pixels,

65K colors non-interlaced.

h. Operating System: Original software CDs and startup installation diskettes for:

1) Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard 64-bit OR Windows Server 2012 64-

bit.

2) Microsoft SQL Express 2008 R2 OR SQL Express 2012.

i. Windows Media Player Version 12.

j. For installations where the system is integrated with Honeywell IP Engine

recording software with more than 500 cameras, install a separate IP Engine

database server. The specification of this server shall be determined based on

end-user deployment requirements.

2. VMS Workstation: Workstation shall operate with no performance degradation using

the following minimum hardware and operating system configuration:

a. Processor: Intel Core i7-4770K, 3.5 GHz.

b. System Memory (RAM): 8 GB.

c. Optical Drive: DVD-RW.

d. Hard Disk Drives: Single disk or RAID 7200 SATA 250 GB or 10K to 15K

SCSI 250 GB; RAID 0 or 0+1.

e. Network Interface Card (NIC): 1 Gbps.

f. Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse pointing device.

g. Graphics Adapter: 2 x 256MB PCIe x16 NVIDIA Quadro NVS 285, Dual DVI

or Dual VGA or DVI+VGA; Video resolution 1280x1024 pixels, 32-bit.

1) Dual Monitor Workstation: NVIDIA Quadro NVS300 512 MB PCI-E

x12.

2) Four Monitor Workstation: NVIDIA Quadro NVS510 2 GB PCI-E x16.

h. Operating System: Windows 7 Pro 32- and 64-bit or Windows 8.1 Professional

64-bit.

i. Windows Media Player Version 12.

2.3 NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS

A. Product: Honeywell MAXPRO NVR PE Network Video Recording System.

1. Manufacturer:

a. Network Video Recording System, Manufacturer Honeywell MAXPRO NVR

PE Network Video Recording System, www.honeywell.com/security.

2. System Description:

a. The Network Video Recorder (NVR) supports simultaneous recording, remote

viewing and search, and system management for up to 64 IP cameras including

high definition formats. Multiple NVRs may be deployed for system expansion

using a distributed architecture and integrated with the multi-site software or

enterprise video management system.

b. Basis-of-design is the Honeywell MAXPRO NVR PE.

3. System Components:

a. NVR Server: The NVR Server shall contain the recording engine, database of

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



all network-connected cameras and encoders, integrated components and their

configurations. Server shall be provided as a combined hardware and software

device.

b. Workstation Software (NVR Client): The NVR Client software shall render

video and act as a main human/machine interface.

4. System Hardware:

a. MAXPRO NVR PE Server: NVR Server shall operate with no performance

degradation using the following minimum hardware and operating system

configuration:

1) 2U 8 bay storage unit with SAS hard drives.

2) Processor: Intel Core i7-4790, 3.6 GHz, Intel HD Graphics 4600.

3) Memory: 8 GB.

4) Power supply: Dual redundant 820 W.

5) OS Drives: 2 x 2.5" 128 GB SATA solid state drives, RAID 1 support.

6) Operating system: Windows Embedded Standard 7, 64-bit SP1.

7) Database: Microsoft SQL Server Express 2008 R2.

8) Storage capacities: 4 TB to 32 TB raw storage, Video storage

redundancy with RAID 5/6 support.

9) Video Storage Hard Disk Options: 8 field-upgradable 1 TB, 2 TB, 3 TB,

or 4 TB SAS Hard Disk Drive options.

10) Optical drive: DVD-RW.

11) Network interface: Dual 1 Gigabit Ethernet.

12) RAID card: 6 GB SAS/SATA RAID card, PCI Express x8, supports

RAID levels up to 6+0.

13) Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse pointing device.

14) Monitor Output: HDMI with DVI-D to HDMI adapter or VGA or DVI-D

or Display Port (1 monitor support).

15) Rack kit: Rack kit for use with 2U chassis.

5. Quality Assurance:

a. Environmental Conditions: The NVR shall be designed to function in the

following environmental conditions:

1) Operating Temperature: 32 degree F to 95 degree F (0 degree C to 35

degree C).

2) Emissions: FCC part 15B Class A; EN 55022 Class A.

3) Immunity: EN 50130-4.

4) Safety: ANSI / UL 60950-1; CAN / CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; IEC

60950-1.

5) RoHS: EN 50581.

b. Power Requirements: NVR shall have the following electrical specifications:

1) Input Voltage: 110/220 VAC 50/60 Hz.

2) Operating Voltage: 110V/220V Auto Sensing.

3) Power Dissipation:

a) Average BTU rating = 800 BTU/HR.

b) Peak BTU rating = 2800 BTU/HR.

6. Operational Requirements Specific to MAXPRO NVR PE:

a. NVR shall provide a user-friendly graphical user interface (GUI) to configure

the cameras, create schedules for recording, perform video surveillance and

recording operations, and view various reports.

b. NVR shall be configured to store and to view images captured by 64 cameras.

c. NVR shall have following major capabilities:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1) Record and monitor up to 64 IP channels at 1920 fps at 4CIF/VGA or

1920 fps at 720p HD or 1920 fps at 1080p (4 Mbps bitrate) HD per

MAXPRO NVR PE. Network bandwidth/throughput supported per NVR

with Incoming: 256 Mbps, Outgoing: 425 Mbps providing a Total: 681

Mbps. Archival support of 25 channels at 4 Mbps bitrate each (100 Mbps

total archival throughput capacity per MAXPRO NVR PE), with

outgoing archival storage throughput of 275 Mbps. Multi-stream support

with maximum 128 streams per MAXPRO NVR PE. Support for

configuring one (1) preferred stream for continuous recording and one

(1) preferred stream for live video/motion based recording per camera.

Support for One-Way Audio (for specific IP cameras) with live,

playback and clip export on NVR desktop client for up to 64 IP channels.

2) Live viewing of up to 64 IP cameras on a single remote workstation with

up to two (2) monitors set up at CIF resolution. For 4CIF and HD

resolution, the number of live streams needs to be benchmarked based on

client hardware configuration deployed. Cost-effective enhanced HD

video rendering on remote desktop clients with support for monitoring of

up to 18 1080p HD cameras in real time (30 fps)/540 fps 1080p HD with

no-time lapse using the GPU capabilities of in-built processor graphics

with 4th generation Intel Core Processors for client systems. Up to 4

1080p HD at 30 fps/120 fps on local client.

B. Product: Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID PE Network Video Recording System:

1. Manufacturer:

a. HYBRID Network Video Recording System (HYBRID NVR) Manufacturer:

Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID PE Network Video Recording System,

www.honeywell.com/security.


a. The HYBRID Network Video Recorder (NVR) supports simultaneous

recording, viewing, search, and system management for up to 64 channels - any

combination of either up to 64 IP cameras including high definition formats or

up to 16 analog cameras. Multiple HYBRID NVRs may be deployed for system

expansion using a distributed architecture and integrated with the multi-site

software or enterprise video management system.

b. Basis-of-design is the Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID PE.


a. NVR HYBRID Server: The NVR HYBRID Server shall contain the recording

engine, database of all analog cameras, network-connected cameras and

encoders, integrated components and their configurations. Server shall be

provided as a combined hardware and software device.

b. Workstation Software (NVR HYBRID Client): The NVR HYBRID Client

software shall render video and act as a main human/machine interface.

4. System Hardware:

a. MAXPRO NVR HYBRID PE Server: NVR HYBRID Server shall operate with

no performance degradation using the following minimum hardware and

operating system configuration:

1) 2U 8 bay storage unit with SAS hard drives.

2) Processor: Intel Core i7-4790 3.6 GHz, Intel HD Graphics 4600.

3) Memory: 8 GB.

4) Power supply: Dual redundant 820 W.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5) OS Drives: 2 x 2.5" 128 GB SATA solid state drives, RAID 1 support.


7) Database: Microsoft SQL Express 2008 R2.

8) Storage capacities: 4 TB to 32 TB raw storage, video storage redundancy

with RAID 5/6 support.

9) Video Storage Hard Disk Options: 8 field-upgradable 1 TB or 2 TB or 3

TB or 4 TB SAS Hard Disk Drive options.


11) Analog video inputs: 16 looping, BNC 1 Vp-p at 75 Ohms.

12) Inputs and outputs: 16 NO/NC - selectable inputs, 4 relay outputs, 1

RS485 PTZ control port.

13) Network interface: Dual 1 Gigabit Ethernet.


15) Monitor Output: HDMI with DVI-D to HDMI adapter or VGA or DVI-D

or Display port (1 monitor support) and RCA Spot monitor output.



a. Environmental Conditions: The NVR HYBRID shall be designed to function in

the following environmental conditions:


degree C).

2) Emissions: FCC part 15B Class A.

3) Safety: ANSI / UL 60950-1; CAN / CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1.

b. Power Requirements: The NVR HYBRID shall have the following electrical

specifications:

1) Input Voltage: 110-220 VAC 50/60 Hz.

c. Power Dissipation:

1) Average BTU rating = 830 BTU/HR.

2) Peak BTU rating = 2800 BTU/HR.

6. Operational Requirements Specific to MAXPRO NVR HYBRID PE:

a. NVR HYBRID shall provide a user-friendly graphical user interface (GUI) to

configure the cameras, create schedules for recording, perform video

surveillance and recording operations, and view various reports.

b. NVR HYBRID shall be configured to store and to view images captured by 64

cameras.

c. NVR HYBRID shall have following major capabilities:

1) Record and monitor up to 64 channels with combination of 16 analog

with 480 fps at CIF NTSC or 120 fps at 4CIF NTSC and 48 IP with 1440

fps at 1080p (4 Mbps bitrate) HD; OR all 64 IP channels at 1920 fps at

720p HD or 1920 fps at 1080p (4 Mbps bitrate) HD per MAXPRO NVR

HYBRID PE. Network bandwidth/throughput supported per NVR

HYBRID with Incoming: 256 Mbps, Outgoing: 425 Mbps providing a

total: 681 Mbps. Archival support of 25 channels at 4 Mbps bitrate each

(100 Mbps total archival throughput capacity per MAXPRO NVR

Hybrid PE), with outgoing archival storage throughput of 275 Mbps.

Multi-stream support with maximum 128 streams per MAXPRO NVR

Hybrid PE. Support for configuring one (1) preferred stream for

continuous recording and one (1) preferred stream for live video/motion

based recording per camera. Support for One-Way Audio (for specific IP

cameras) with live, playback and clip export on NVR HYBRID desktop

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



client for up to 64 IP channels.

2) Live viewing of up to 64 cameras on a single remote workstation with up

to two (2) monitors set up at CIF resolution. For 4CIF and HD








C. Product: Honeywell MAXPRO NVR SE Network Video Recording System.

1. Manufacturer:

a. Network Video Recording System (NVR) Manufacturer: Honeywell MAXPRO

NVR SE Network Video Recording System, www.honeywell.com/security.


a. The Network Video Recorder (NVR) supports simultaneous recording,

viewing, search, and system management for up to 64 IP cameras including

high definition formats. Multiple NVRs may be deployed for system expansion

using a distributed architecture and integrated with the multi-site software or

enterprise video management system.

b. Basis-of-design is the Honeywell MAXPRO NVR SE.





device.



4. System Hardware:

a. MAXPRO NVR SE Server: NVR Server shall operate with no performance


configuration:

1) 2U 6 bay storage unit with SATA hard drives.

2) Processor: Intel Core i7-4790, 3.6 GHz, Intel HD Graphics 4600.

3) Memory: 8 GB.

4) Power supply: Single 400 W.

5) OS Partition: 100 GB partition in storage drive 1.



8) Storage capacities: 1 TB to 24 TB with 6 bays - 1 operating system and

storage drive, 5 field-upgradable, 1, 2, 3 or 4 TB SATA hard drives.

9) Video Storage Hard Disk Options: 6 field-upgradable 1 TB, 2 TB, 3 TB

or 4 TB SATA Hard Disk Drive options.


11) Network interface: Two 1 Gigabit Ethernet included.


13) Monitor Output: Dual monitor support: HDMI, VGA, DVI-D, Display

Port.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







degree C).

2) Emissions: FCC part 15B Class B.

3) Safety: ANSI / UL 60950-1; CAN / CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1.






6. Operational Requirements Specific For MAXPRO NVR SE.




b. NVR shall be configured to store and to view images captured by 64 cameras.


1) Record and monitor up to 64 IP channels at 1920 fps at 4CIF/VGA or


MAXPRO NVR SE. Network bandwidth/throughput supported per NVR

with Incoming: 160 Mbps, Outgoing: 350 Mbps providing a total: 510


total archival throughput capacity per MAXPRO NVR SE), with


with maximum 128 streams per MAXPRO NVR SE. Support for




playback and clip export on NVR desktop client for up to 64 IP channels.

2) Live viewing of up to 64 IP cameras on a single remote workstation with

up to two (2) monitors set up at CIF resolution. For 4CIF and HD








D. Product: Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID SE Network Video Recording System.

1. Manufacturer:


Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID SE Network Video Recording System,







© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





b. Basis-of-design is the Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID SE.








4. System Hardware:

a. MAXPRO NVR HYBRID SE Server: NVR HYBRID Server shall operate with

no performance degradation using the following minimum hardware and


1) 4U 4 bay storage unit with SATA hard drives.


3) Memory: 8 GB.


5) OS Partition: 100 GB partition in storage drive 1.



8) Storage capacities: 1 TB to 16 TB with 4 bays - 1 operating system and

storage drive, 3 field-upgradable, 1, 2, 3, or 4 TB SATA hard drives.

9) Video Storage Hard Disk Options: 4 field-upgradable 1 TB, 2 TB, 3 TB,

or 4 TB SATA Hard Disk Drive options.


11) Analog video inputs: 16 looping, BNC 1 Vp-p at 75 Ohms.





15) Monitor Output: HDMI or VGA or DVI-D or Display port (1 monitor

support) and RCA Spot monitor output.

16) Rack kit: Rack ears included for use with four post racking systems.


a. Manufacturer: Minimum ten years experience in manufacturing and

maintaining HYBRID IP video recording systems. Manufacturer shall provide

toll-free technical assistance and support available 24/7.

b. Installer: Minimum two years experience installing similar systems, and

acceptable to the manufacturer of the HYBRID IP video recording system.

c. Environmental Conditions: The NVR HYBRID shall be designed to function in



degree C).

2) Emissions: FCC part 15B Class B; EN55022:2010.

3) Safety: ANSI / UL 60950-1; CAN / CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1; EN60950-

1:2006+A11:2009+A12:2011+A1:2010.

d. Power Requirements: The NVR HYBRID shall have the following electrical

specifications:


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






6. Operational Requirements Specific to MAXPRO NVR SE HYBRID:





cameras.



with 480 fps at CIF NTSC or 120 fps at 4CIF NTSC and 48 IP with 1440

fps at 1080p (4 Mbps bitrate) HD OR all 64 IP channels at 1920 fps at

4CIF/VGA or 1920 fps at 720p HD or 1280 fps at 1080p (4 Mbps

bitrate) HD per MAXPRO NVR HYBRID SE. Network

bandwidth/throughput supported per NVR HYBRID with Incoming: 160

Mbps, Outgoing: 350 Mbps providing a total: 510 Mbps. Archival

support of 16 channels at 4 Mbps bitrate each (64 Mbps total archival

throughput capacity per MAXPRO NVR Hybrid SE), with outgoing

archival storage throughput of 200 Mbps. Multi-stream support with

maximum 128 streams per MAXPRO NVR Hybrid SE. Support for




playback and clip export on NVR HYBRID desktop client for up to 64

IP channels.










E. Product: Honeywell MAXPRO NVR XE Network Video Recording System.

1. Manufacturer:

a. Network Video Recording System (NVR) Manufacturer: Honeywell MAXPRO

NVR XE Network Video Recording System, www.honeywell.com/security.


a. The Network Video Recorder (NVR) supports simultaneous recording,

viewing, search, and system management for up to 8 or 16 IP cameras

including high definition formats. Multiple NVRs may be deployed for system



b. Basis-of-design is the Honeywell MAXPRO NVR XE.




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




device.



4. System Hardware:

a. MAXPRO NVR XE Server: NVR Server shall operate with no performance


configuration:

1) Desktop unit with internal SATA hard drives.


3) Memory: 8 GB.


5) OS Partition: 100 GB partition in internal storage drive 1.



8) Storage capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB, 3 TB, 4 TB, 6 TB, or 8 TB.

9) Video Storage Hard Disk Options: Internal fixed 1 TB, 2 TB or 3 TB

SATA Hard Disk Drive options.




13) Monitor Output: HDMI or VGA or DVI-D or Display Port (1 monitor

support).





degree C).

2) Emissions: FCC part 15B Class A; EN55022:2010.


1:2006+A11:2009+A12:2011+A1:2010.






6. Operational Requirements Specific to MAXPRO NVR XE:




b. NVR shall be configured to store and to view images captured by 8 or 16

cameras.


1) Record and monitor up to 8 or 16 IP channels at 480 fps at 4CIF/VGA or


MAXPRO NVR XE. Network bandwidth/throughput supported per NVR

with Incoming: 65 Mbps, Outgoing: 180 Mbps providing a Total: 245


total archival throughput capacity per MAXPRO NVR XE), with


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



with maximum 128 streams per MAXPRO NVR XE. Support for




playback and clip export on NVR desktop client for up to 8 or 16 IP

channels.

2) Live viewing of up to 8 or 16 IP cameras on a single remote workstation

with up to two (2) monitors set up at CIF resolution. For 4CIF and HD








F. Product: Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID XE Network Video Recording System:

1. Manufacturer:


Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID XE Network Video Recording System,









b. Basis-of-design is the Honeywell MAXPRO NVR HYBRID XE.








4. System Hardware:

a. MAXPRO NVR HYBRID XE Server: NVR HYBRID Server shall operate

with no performance degradation using the following minimum hardware and


1) Desktop unit with internal SATA hard drives.


3) Memory: 8 GB.


5) OS Partition: 100 GB partition in internal storage drive 1.



8) Storage capacities: 1 TB, 2 TB, 3 TB, 4 TB, 6 TB or 8 TB.

9) Video Storage Hard Disk Options: Internal fixed 1 TB, 2 TB, 3 TB, or 4

TB SATA Hard Disk Drive options.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




11) Analog video inputs: 16 looping , BNC 1 Vp-p at 75 Ohms (looping

outputs with accessory cables).





15) Monitor Output: HDMI or VGA or DVI-D or Display Port (1 monitor

support), RCA Spot monitor output.

16) Rack kit: Rack ears included for use with four post racking systems.


a. Manufacturer: Minimum ten years experience in manufacturing and

maintaining HYBRID IP video recording systems. Manufacturer shall provide

toll-free technical assistance and support available 24/7.

b. Installer: Minimum two years experience installing similar systems, and

acceptable to the manufacturer of the HYBRID IP video recording system.

c. Environmental Conditions: The NVR HYBRID shall be designed to function in



degree C).

2) Emissions: FCC part 15B Class A; EN55022:2010.


1:2006+A11:2009+A12:2011+A1:2010.

d. Power Requirements: The NVR HYBRID shall have the following electrical

specifications:



e. Average BTU rating = 340 BTU/HR.

f. Peak BTU rating = 860 BTU/HR.

6. Operational Requirements Specific to MAXPRO NVR XE HYBRID:





cameras.



with 480 fps at CIF NTSC or 120 fps at 4CIF NTSC; OR combination of

8 analog with 100 fps at 4CIF NTSC and 8 IP with 240 fps at 720p HD

or 240 fps at 1080p (4 Mbps bitrate) HD; OR all 16 IP with 480 fps at

4CIF/VGA or 480 fps at 720p HD or 480 fps at 1080p (4 Mbps bitrate)

HD per MAXPRO NVR HYBRID XE. Network bandwidth/throughput

supported per NVR HYBRID with Incoming: 65 Mbps, Outgoing: 180

Mbps providing a Total: 245 Mbps. Archival support of 16 channels at 4

Mbps bitrate each (64 Mbps total archival throughput capacity per

MAXPRO NVR Hybrid XE), with outgoing archival storage throughput

of 200 Mbps. Multi-stream support with maximum 128 streams per

MAXPRO NVR Hybrid XE. Support for configuring one (1) preferred

stream for continuous recording and one (1) preferred stream for live

video/motion based recording per camera. Support for One-Way Audio

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



(for specific IP cameras) with live, playback and clip export on NVR

HYBRID desktop client for up to 16 IP channels.










G. Other NVR Operational Requirements:

1. Powerful investigation and video archive search tools from remote client.

2. Capable of managing motion detection-based recording with pre-event and post-event

recording based on camera-based motion detection or Server-based motion detection

events (SMART VMD) and "advanced" search on recordings from remote client.

3. Preview and Calendar Search permitting search for videos and events-based on user-

selected date and time from remote client. SMART motion search - fast and efficient

forensic search and investigation for objects/motion on recorded video using

Honeywell SMART motion detection Analytics algorithms on the client PC without

impacting the NVR Server load.

4. Simultaneous use of multiple video compressions including MJPEG, MPEG-4 and

H.264.

5. Internationalization - supports the following languages: French, German, Russian,

Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Arabic and English.

6. Email on alarm.

7. Instant clip creation from snapshot.

8. Dynamic IP Camera Discovery - Automatically discover all compatible cameras

connected to NVR.

9. Multi-level user access rights for viewing and manages access to the recorder

functions.

10. Capable of managing continuous, scheduled, manual, event-based, and alarm-based

recording features.

11. Advanced security features with encryption support for communication between

desktop client to NVR and secure https login for web client and mobile apps.

12. Support for web client and mobile apps.

13. Mode for User Login: NVR shall have the option of two modes of user logins:

a. Windows Authentication: Uses Windows logged-in user name.

b. User DB Authentication: Uses preconfigured user name and password.

14. Workstation (NVR Client) shall provide the following operator options:

a. Configuration: The operator (with Administrator privileges) shall have the

option to configure the NVR. Live update of all configurations is supported.

The following configurations shall be possible:

1) System Configuration: Provide options to configure the system level

settings.

2) Camera Configuration: Provide options to add/edit/delete IP cameras and

encoders.

3) Schedules: Provide options to configure schedule-based recording for

cameras connected to the NVR.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4) Input and Output: Provide options to configure camera input and output.

5) Sequences: Provide options to group a fixed number of cameras to view

video.

6) User Management (Users and Roles): Provide option to add/edit/delete

users.

7) Clip Deletion Settings: Provide the ability to automatically utilize more

storage on event-initiated recording.

8) Independent deletion setting for continuous recording.

9) Independent deletion setting for event recording.

10) Surrounding Cameras: Provide option to grant a user the ability to view a

single camera surrounded by the cameras programmed as the

"Surrounding Cameras".

11) Profile Cameras: Multi-zoom views on HD video and support to create

virtual cameras by digitally zooming into the field of view. For example:

zooming in on a cash register in one view of the HD camera while at the

same time monitoring the cashier in the zoomed out view of that HD

camera.

15. Configurations for cameras connected to NVR:

a. Camera Configuration: The user shall be able to configure the following

parameters for each camera connected to the NVR.

1) Camera Name.

2) IP Address.

3) Camera Type.

4) Fixed/PTZ.

5) Continuous Recording: All cameras added shall be defaulted to "24/7"

recording with the option to select other recording modes.

6) Event-based Recording: Shall be "None" by default, with the option to

select motion-based recording.

7) User name: Shall display and enable setting the user name for a camera.

8) Password: Shall enable setting the password for a camera.

9) Camera Advanced Settings: Shall enable configuration of Video Format,

Compression Format, Resolution, Compression, Video Frame Rate,

GOP, Record Quality Settings, Clip Deletion Settings, Launching Web

View of camera for Advanced Setup, Motion detection zones

configuration for Server-based motion detection, Video Archival

Settings, Multi-Stream Settings and Video Preview. Shall enable

configuration of RTSP URL for cameras or encoders added with camera

type - Generic RTSP.

b. The following video recording options shall be supported:

1) Scheduled-based recording: The system shall support the ability to

schedule recordings for each individual camera for times in the future.

By default, the NVR shall be pre-loaded with the following four

schedules: 24x7, Weekday, Daytime, and Nighttime, which cannot be

edited. A maximum of 50 schedules can be created in the NVR.

2) User-based recording: The user shall be able to configure user activated

settings for recording moments of interest while viewing live video from

a camera. After configuring the user activated settings, the operator can

start recording of video when needed. The video is recorded for the time

period specified in the System settings for user activated recording. The

User-based Recording Time Duration shall be selectable from a list of

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



values ranging between 30 seconds and 5 minutes.

3) Event-based recording: Event-based recording shall be possible on

SMART Video Motion Detection and alarm triggers. The NVR must be

capable of managing motion detection-based recording with pre-event

and post-event recording based on camera and Server-based motion

detection events. The server-based SMART VMD analytics must be

object-based and not traditional pixel-based, reducing false alarms due to

changing light conditions, video noise, rain or other false alarm triggers

that occur using pixel-based (traditional) VMD.

16. Viewer: The NVR Viewer shall have the following minimum capabilities:

a. Main video viewing screen capable of showing 1, 4, 9, 16, and other

customized split salvos of live or recorded video. Standard presets shall be

customizable to the user preferences.

b. Capable of saving current salvo as a View and allowing the user to drag this

view at any later point in time.

c. Capable of configuring and running scan sequences.

d. Capable of adjusting the contrast, brightness, and saturation settings for each

camera independently.

e. Capable of exporting user selected image or video clips in simple .wmv, .asf,

.mpvc and .bmp formats. Capable of attaching a digital signature for

authentication of exported clips in .wmv format.

f. Capability to play back the video clips exported. Each video channel that is

being recorded by the recording system shall be overlaid with text and a time

stamp that is customizable by the user.

g. MAXPRO Video Container (.mpvc) format support - only playable in

MAXPRO desktop clients and standalone Clip Player. Features quicker exports

of raw video and support for estimating clip size and split to multiple clips to

ensure clip storage media matches. Include the clip player with exported clip

for easier review of video evidence and efficient investigation. Clip Player -

Portable standard secure player for archived and exported clips (*.mpvc), 360

camera de-warping and 2x2 Salvo support. Smooth playback support with up to

256x review speed. No software needed to run on a Windows PC, with the

option to include the clip player with the exported clip.

h. Allow the user to initiate recording through the GUI or a controller.

i. Capability of complete alarm management for the alarms coming from the

NVR.

j. Facility of surrounding camera view.

k. Option to perform various operations through context menu on a particular

video (live/recorded/sequence). These operations include: Full screen, point and

drag, maintain aspect ratio, toggle text, digital PTZ, add bookmark, start

recording, stop recording, mark in, mark out, save image, save image as, show


l. Ability to manage timeline control of the recording device, which provides

camera recording statistics. Timeline control shall have the following features:

Mark input (with looping facility), bookmark, snapshot, time slider, time jump,

play controls.

m. Preference configuration including: frame rate of unselected panels, rendered

type, preview pane, text display format.

17. Search: The Search facility shall include search for recorded video and events based

on date and time.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



18. Reports: The Report facility shall include event history report and audit log report.

H. NVR Integrations:

1. NVR shall be compatible with the following interoperability standards:

a. Physical Security Interoperability Alliance (PSIA).

b. Open Network Video Interface Forum Profile S (ONVIF Profile S).

c. Real Time Streaming Protocol (RTSP).

2. NVR shall be compatible with the following Fixed and PTZ IP cameras.

a. Honeywell Performance Series and equIP Series IP cameras.

b. Supports IP cameras from the following manufacturers. Please contact

Honeywell for the complete list of manufacturers and models.

1) AXIS Communications.

2) Sony.

3) Panasonic.

4) Bosch.

5) Samsung.

6) Vivotek.

7) Pelco.

3. NVR shall be compatible with the following encoders:

a. Honeywell HVE Series Encoders.

b. Supports Encoders from the following manufacturers. Please contact

Honeywell for the complete list of manufacturers and models.

1) AXIS Communications.

2) Sony.

3) Panasonic.

4) Bosch.

5) Samsung.

6) Vivotek.

4. NVR shall be compatible with the following 360 degree Camera solutions. Please

contact Honeywell for the complete list of models.

a. Oncam Grandeye.

b. Immervision Enables - Panomorph Lenses.

c. AXIS 360 degree /180 degree.

d. Arecont 360 degree /180 degree.

5. NVR shall be compatible with the following Multi-site Video Management Systems:

a. Honeywell MAXPRO Viewer.

6. NVR shall be compatible with the following Video Management Systems:

a. Honeywell MAXPRO VMS.

7. NVR shall be compatible with the following Access Control Security System:

a. Honeywell Pro-Watch Access Control System through MAXPRO VMS and

MAXPRO Viewer.

b. Honeywell WIN-PAK Access Control System.

8. Video Analytics supported through MAXPRO VMS:

a. Honeywell Active Alert.

9. IP Surveillance Control Keyboards supported through MAXPRO VMS:

a. Honeywell HJK7000 UltraKey Plus.

b. Honeywell HJC5000 UltraKey Lite.

c. Honeywell HJC4000 UltraKey Touch.

I. Workstation Hardware:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. NVR Workstation: NVR Workstation shall operate with no performance degradation

using the following recommended hardware and operating system configuration for

rendering up to eighteen (18) 1080p HD cameras in real time (30 fps)/540 fps at

1080p HD with no time-lapse:

a. Processor: Intel Core i7-4790, 3.6 GHz or equivalent 4th generation Intel Core

Processors for client systems. GPU rendering by NVR client is not currently

supported on 6th generation Intel(r) Core(tm) processors (Skylake processors)

and CPU rendering should be used by uninstalling the GPU driver.

b. Graphics Adapter: In-built Processor Graphics (GPU): Intel HD Graphics 4600

or equivalent.

c. System Memory (RAM): 8 GB.

d. Optical Drive: DVD-RW.

e. Hard Disk Drives: Single Disk or RAID 0 or 0+1 10K SATA 80GB or 10K to

15K SAS 73 GB.

f. Network Interface Card (NIC): 1 Gbps.

g. Human Interface: 102-key keyboard and a mouse pointing device.

h. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 64-bit SP1, Windows 8.1

Professional 64-bit, or Windows 10 Professional 64-bit.

J. Manufacturer Support:

1. Manufacturer shall provide customer service, pre-sales applications assistance, after-

sales technical assistance, access to technical online support, and online training using

Web conferencing.

2. Manufacturer shall provide 24/7 technical assistance and support via a toll-free

telephone number at no extra charge.

K. NVR Environmental Conditions:

1. The NVR shall be designed to function in the following environmental conditions:

a. Operating Temperature: 32 degree F to 95 degree F (0 degree C to 35 degree

C).

b. Emissions: FCC part 15B Class A.

c. Safety: ANSI / UL 60950-1; CAN / CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1.

2.4 ENCODERS

A. The audio/video encoder shall offer the latest in technology, providing unparalleled stability,

security, and ease of use, with advanced algorithms, fast capture rates, and a unique

Graphical User Interface (GUI).

B. The audio/video encoder is a complete analog-to-digital conversion solution. The

combination of motion detection, audio, recording resolutions, remote notification

technologies, and local and remote storage, shall provide an extremely flexible and reliable

solution.

1. Remote video software (the Honeywell IP Utility), that runs on a Microsoft Windows-

based personal computer. The Honeywell IP Utility is used for remotely accessing

multiple HVE Encoders for the purpose of viewing live video, searching and playing

back recorded video, and backing up video clips.

C. Available as a 1-channel configuration with encoding capability up to 30 fps at 4CIF

resolution (NTSC), and data storage from 4 GB (microSDHC card) to 32 GB.

1. Product: Honeywell HVE1 Audio/Video Encoder.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. HVE1 Audio/Video Encoder shall work with one (1) analog camera and transmit

audio and video over a network. It will use the latest encoding technology to digitize

analog audio and video signals.

3. HVE1 Audio/Video Encoder shall be configured to work with a Network Video

Recorder (NVR) to store and to view images.

4. HVE1 Audio/Video Encoder software shall be user configured via a web client on a

personal computer running a current version of the Internet Explorer web browser.

D. Available as a 4-channel configuration with encoding capability up to 30 fps at 4CIF

resolution (NTSC), and data storage from 16 GB (microSDHC card) to 32 GB.


2. HVE4 Audio/Video Encoder shall work with up to four (4) analog cameras and

transmit audio and video over a network. It will use the latest encoding technology to

digitize analog audio and video signals.





E. Available as an 8-channel configuration with encoding capability up to 30 fps at 4CIF

resolution (NTSC), and data storage up to 4 TB.


2. HVE8 Audio/Video Encoder shall work with up to eight (8) analog cameras and

transmit audio and video over a network. It will use the latest encoding technology to

digitize analog audio and video signals.





2.5 FIXED CAMERAS

A. Performance Standards: IP camera system shall meet or exceed the following camera

specifications:

1. Imager: CMOS (Progressive Scan).

2. Video Streaming: Configurable resolution and frame rate for each selected

MJPEG/H.264 stream.

a. Plus H.264+/H.265: HBD8GR1, H4D8GR1, HCD8G, HSW2G1.

b. Plus H.264H/B: H3W2GR1, H3W2GR2, H3W4GR1, H4L2GR1, H4W2GR1,

H4W2GR2, H4W4GR1, HBL2GR1, HBW2GR1, HBW2GR3, HBW4GR1,

HCL2G, HCW2G, HCW4G.

3. On Board Storage: Up to 128 GB microSDHS (Class10) support. Card not included.

4. Intelligent Video: Face detection, Video motion detection.

5. Fixed Cameras Privacy Zones: Conceals up to 4 areas of a scene from viewing and

recording.

6. PTZ Cameras Privacy Zones: Conceals up to 24 areas of a scene from viewing and

recording.

7. Compression:

a. Triple Stream H.265 Compression: H.265 (3X) and H.265/H.264/MJPEG -

HFD6GR1, HFD8GR1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. Triple Stream H.265 Compression: H.265 (3X) and

H.265/H.264+/H.264/MJPEG - H4D8GR1, HBD8GR1, HCD8G, HWS2G1.

c. Triple Stream H.264 Compression: H.264 (3X) and

H.264/H.264H/H.264B/MJPEG - H3W2GR1, H3W2GR2, H3W4GR1,

H4L2GR1, H4W2GR1, H4W2GR2, H4W4GR1, HBL2GR1, HBW2GR1,

HBW2GR3, HBW4GR1, HCW2G, HCL2G, HCW4G.

8. Security: Multiple user access levels with password protection.

9. Features: NTP Time Sync, Multiple Browser Support, Date/ Time Stamp Embedded.

10. Remote firmware updates.

11. Audio Support: Two-way (No audio - HSW2G1).

12. Regulatory: FCC, CE, UL/CSA Listed.

B. Product Series: equIP Series Models as manufactured by Honeywell Security and Fire:

1. True Day/Night IP Box Camera System:

a. Mechanical Specifications:

1) Unit Dimensions (L x H x D): 4.92 x 2.72 x 2.98 inches (125.0 x 69.0 x

75.8.0 mm), without a lens.

2) Unit Weight: 1.21 lb (0.55 kg) camera only.

3) Connectors:

a) Video Output: BNC connector.

b) Lens: 4-pin connector.

c) Network: RJ-45 connector.

d) Power Input: DC jack/2-pin terminal block.

e) Alarm I/O: Screw block.

f) Audio In: 3.5 mm mono phone jack.

g) Audio Out: 3.5 mm mono phone jack.

4) Construction: Die-cast Aluminum

b. Electrical Specifications:

1) Voltage: 12 V DC, 24 V AC, or PoE IEEE 802.3af.

2) Power Consumption:

a) 12 V DC/24 V AC: 6.5 watts max. - HCW2G, HCL2G, HCW4G

b) 12 V DC/24 V AC: 8.0 watts max. - HCD8G

c) PoE: PD Type 1, Class 0, 12.95 watts (max).

c. Designed to meet the following environmental conditions:

1) Operating temperature: -22 degree F (-30 degree C) to 140 degree F (60

degree C).

2) Relative Humidity: 0-95 percent, non-condensing.

3) Emissions: FCC, Part 15; EN 55022; AS/NZS CISPR 22:2009+A1

(2010).

d. Model HCD8G: 12 MP Indoor Box WDR Storage. 24 V AC/12 V DC/PoE, 8

W.

e. Model HCL2G: 2 MP Indoor Box Super WDR TDN Storage. 24 V AC/12 V

DC/PoE, 6.5 W.

f. Model HCW2G: 2 MP Indoor Box WDR Storage. 24 V AC/12 V DC/PoE, 6.5

W.

g. Model HCW4G: 4 MP Indoor Box WDR TDN Storage. 24 V AC/12 V

DC/PoE, 6.5 W.

h. Lens option: HLM105V42MPD: 10.5 - 42.0 mm high definition 12 megapixel

lens, F1.5 (sold separately).

i. Lens option: HLM37V16MPD: 3.7 - 16.0 mm high definition 12 megapixel

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



lens, F1.5 (sold separately).

j. Lens option: HLM27V12MPD: 2.7 - 12.0 mm high definition 4 megapixel lens,

F1.6 (sold separately) (not for HCD8G).

k. Lens option: HLM5V50MPD: 5.0 - 50.0 mm high definition 4 megapixel lens,

F1.6 (sold separately) (not for HCD8G).

2. TDN Indoor IP Bullet Camera System:

a. Mechanical specifications:

1) Unit Dimensions (L x H): 11.1 x 4.3 inches (281.0 x 110.0 mm).


3) Network Connectors: RJ-45 connector.

4) IR LEDs:

a) LEDs (see model).

b) IR Illumination Distance (see model). IR illumination is dependent

on scene reflectance.

5) Construction: Die-cast aluminum with powder coat

b. Electrical specifications:

1) Voltage: 12 V DC, 24 V AC, or PoE IEEE 802.3af.


a) 24 V AC: 12.0 watts max. - HBW2GR1, HBW2GR3, HBW4GR1.

b) 24 V AC: 14.5 watts max. - HBL2GR1.

c) 24 V AC: 18.0 watts max. - HBD8GR1.

d) PoE: Type 0, Class 0, 12.0 watts (max) - HBW2GR1, HBW2GR3,

HBW4GR1.

e) PoE: PD Type 1, Class 4, 14.5 watts (max). - HBL2GR1.

f) PoE: PD Type 1, Class 4, 12.95 watts (max). - HBD8GR1.


1) Operating Temperature: -40 degree F (-40 degree C) to 140 degree F (60

degree C).

2) Relative Humidity:

a) HBL2GR1/HBW2GR1/HBW2GR3/HBW4GR1: 10-100 percent,

non-condensing.

b) HBD8GR1: 0-95 percent, non-condensing.

3) Emissions:

a) HBL2GR1/HBW2GR1/HBW2GR3/HBW4GR1: FCC, Part 15;

EN 55022; Complies with RCM (AS/NZS).

b) HBD8GR1: FCC, Part 15B; EN 55032; AS/NZS CISPR 22:2009+

A1(2010).

d. Model HBD8GR1: 12 MP Indoor TDN 4K Ultra HD Low Light IR Bullet

Storage. 5.1 - 12.8 mm MFZ. PoE+, 18.0 W. 4 IR LEDs, up to 210 ft (65 m).

e. Model HBL2GR1: 2 MP Indoor TDN Ultra Low Light IR Bullet Storage. 2.7-

12.0 mm MFZ. PoE, 14.5 W. 4 IR LEDs, up to 195 ft (60 m).

f. Model HBW2GR1: 2 MP Indoor TDN Low Light IR Bullet Storage. 2.7-12.0

mm MFZ. PoE, 12.0 W. 4 IR LEDs, up to 195 ft (60 m).

g. Model HBW2GR3: 2 MP Indoor TDN Low Light IR Bullet Storage. 5.0-50.0


h. Model HBW4GR1: 4 MP Indoor TDN Low Light IR Bullet Storage. 2.7-12.0


3. IR TDN Indoor Dome IP Camera System:


1) Unit Dimensions: diameter 4.96 x 4.80 inches (diameter 126.0 x 122

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



mm), without a lens.

2) Unit Weight: 1.26 lb (0.57 kg).

3) Connectors:

a) Power Input: 2-pin terminal block.

b) Video Output (AUX): BNC connector (75 ohms).

c) Network: RJ-45 connector.

d) Alarm I/O: 4-pin terminal block.

e) Audio I/O: 2-pin terminal block.

4) IR LEDs:


b) IR Illumination Distance (see model). IR illumination is dependent

on scene reflectance.

5) Construction: Polycarbonate-Lid and Skirt, Die-cast Aluminum Camera

Base, RAL 9003.


1) Voltage: 12 V DC / 24 V AC; PoE IEEE 802.3af.


a) 9 watts max.

b) PoE: PD Type 1 Class 0. 12.95 watts (max).


1) Operating Temperature: -22 degree F (-30 degree C) and 122 degree F

(50 degree C).


3) Emissions: FCC, Part 15; CE - EN 55022; Complies with RCM

(AS/NZS).

d. Indoor Dome:

1) Model H3W2GR1: 2 MP Indoor Dome WDR TDN Storage. 2.7-12.0

mm MFZ. 24 V AC/12 V DC/PoE, 9 W. 2 IR LEDs, up to 65 ft (20 m).

2) Model H3W2GR2: 3 MP Indoor Dome WDR TDN Storage. 7.0 - 22.0


3) Model H3W4GR1: 4 MP Indoor Dome WDR TDN Storage. 2.7-12.0


4. Network Height Strip Camera System:


1) Unit Dimensions (W x H x D): 1.88 x 34.1 x 1.16 inches (48.0 x 867.0 x

29.4 mm).


3) Connectors:

a) Power Input: 2.1 mm jack.

b) Network: RJ-45 connector.

4) Construction: Extruded aluminum with scratch-coated acrylic front.


1) Voltage: 12 V DC.

2) Power Consumption: 2.2 watts max.



(60 degree C).


3) Emissions: FCC, Part 15B.

d. Model HSW2G1: 1080p Network Height Strip Storage. 2.8 mm Fixed Lens. 12

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



V DC, 2.2 W.

5. Network TDN Superior HD IR Fisheye Camera System:


1) Unit Dimensions (W x H): diameter 5.9 x 2.2 inches (diameter 150.2 x

55.8 mm).


3) Connectors:

a) Power Input: 2.1 mm jack.

b) Network: RJ-45 connector.

c) Audio I/O: RCA jack.

d) Alarm I/O: Wires

4) IR LEDs:

a) LEDs: 3

b) Illumination Distance: Up to 25 ft (8 m)

5) Construction: Die-cast aluminum with powder coat.


1) Voltage: 12 V DC, PoE IEEE 802.3af Class 0.


a) 12 V DC: 10.0 watts max. (with IR LEDs on)

b) PoE: PD Type 1, Class 0, 10.0 watts (max).



(60 degree C).


3) Ingress Protection Rating: IP67.

4) Vandal Resistance Rating: IK10.

5) Emissions: FCC, Part 15B; CE - EN 55032; AS/NZS CISPR 22:2009+

A1(2010).

d. Model HFD6GR1: 6 MP TDN Superior HD IR Fisheye Storage. 1.7 mm Fixed

Fisheye Lens. 12 V DC, 10.0 W. 3 IR LEDs.

e. Model HFD8GR1: 12 MP TDN Superior HD IR Fisheye Storage. 1.7 mm

Fixed Fisheye Lens. 12 V DC, 10.0 W. 3 IR LEDs.

6. True Day/Night IR Rugged Outdoor Dome IP Camera System:


1) Unit Dimensions (W x H): 6.2 x 4.6 inches (159.0 x 118.0 mm).


3) Connectors:

a) Network: RJ-45 connector.

b) Aux Video Output: BNC connector.

c) Alarm I/O: 3-pin terminal block.

d) Audio I/O: 2-pin terminal block.

e) Power Input: 2-pin terminal block.

4) IR LEDs:


5) IR Illumination Distance (see model). IR illumination is dependent on

scene reflectance.

6) Construction: Die-cast aluminum housing with powder coat.


1) Voltage:

a) 12 V DC, 24 V AC, or PoE+ (802.3af) Class 4 - H4D8GR1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b) 12 V DC, 24 V AC, or PoE (802.3af) Class 0 -

H4L2GR1/H4W2GR1/H4W2GR2/H4W4GR1.


a) 12 V DC/24 V AC: 18.0 watts max. - H4D8GR1

b) 12 V DC/24 V AC: 10.5 watts max. -

H4L2GR1/H4W2GR1/H4W2GR2/H4W4GR1

c) PoE: PoE+ (802.3af) Class 4, 18.0 watts (max) - H4D8GR1.

d) PoE: PoE (802.3af) Class 0, 10.5 watts (max) -



1) Operating temperature: -40 degree F (-40 degree C) to 140 degree F (60

degree C).

2) Relative Humidity:

a) 0-95 percent, non-condensing - H4D8GR1.

b) 10-100 percent, non-condensing -


3) Ingress Protection Rating: IP67.

4) Vandal Resistance Rating: IK10.

5) Emissions:

a) FCC, Part 15; EN 55022; Complies with RCM (AS/NZS) -

H4W2GR1, H4W2GR2, H4L2GR1, H4W4GR1.

b) FCC, Part 15B; EN 55032; AS/NZS CISPR 22:2009+ A1(2010) -

H4D8GR1.

d. Model H4D8GR1 12 MP TDN 4K Ultra HD Low Light IR Rugged Outdoor

Minidome Storage. 4.1-12.8 mm MFZ. 24 V AC/12 V DC/PoE, 18.0 W. 3

LEDs, up to 145 ft (45 m).

e. Model H4L2GR1 2 MP TDN Ultra Low Light IR Rugged Outdoor Minidome

Storage. 2.7-12.0 MFZ. 24 V AC/12 V DC/PoE, 12.0 W. 3 LEDs, up to 150 ft

(50 m).

f. Model H4W2GR1 2 MP TDN Low Light IR Rugged Outdoor Minidome


(50 m).

g. Model H4W2GR2 2 MP TDN Low Light IR Rugged Outdoor Minidome


(50 m).

h. Model H4W4GR1 4 MP TDN Low Light IR Rugged Outdoor Minidome


(50 m).

C. Mounts and Brackets

1. Indoor Wall Mount Bracket: HD3-MK2

a. Weight: 0.18 lb (0.08 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: Polycarbonate/White powder coating

c. Dimensions: 3.82 x 6.06 x 4.76 in. (97.0 x 154.0 x 121.0 mm)

d. Compatible with: H3W2GR1/H3W2GR2/H3W4GR1.

2. Wall Mount Bracket: HD4CHIP-WK2

a. Weight: 1.34 lb (0.61 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: Die-cast aluminum/White powder coating


d. Compatible with: H4W2GR1/H4W2GR2/H4L2GR1/H4W4GR1/H4D8GR1

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



(optional + HB34G-CM/HB4G-PM).

3. Pendant Mount Bracket: HD4CHIP-PK2

a. Weight: 0.82 lb (0.37 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: Die-cast aluminum /White powder coating

c. Dimensions: 1.82 x diameter 6.49 in. (46.2 x diameter 164.7 mm)

d. Compatible with: H4W2GR1/H4W2GR2/H4L2GR1/H4W4GR1/H4D8GR1.

4. Corner Mount Adapter: HB34G-CM

a. Weight: 3.7 lb (1.7 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: SECC /White powder coating


d. Compatible with:

H4W2GR1/H4W2GR2/H4L2GR1/H4W4GR1/H4D8GR1+HD4CHIP-WK2;

HBW2GR1/HBW2GR3/HBL2GR1/HBW4GR1/HBD8GR1 (+ HBG-BB);

HFD6GR1/HFD8GR1 + HFG-PK + HFG-WK.

5. Bullet Camera Back Box: HBG-BB

a. Weight: 0.67 lb (0.31 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: Die-cast aluminum /Gray powder coating

c. Dimensions: diameter 4.29 x 1.61 in. (diameter 109.0 x 41.0 mm)

d. Compatible with: HBW2GR1/HBW2GR3/HBL2GR1/HBW4GR1/HBD8GR1

(+ HB34G-CM/HB4G-PM).

6. Pole Mount Adapter: HB4G-PM

a. Weight: 2.05 lb (0.93 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: SECC /White powder coating


d. Compatible with: H4W2GR1/H4W2GR2/H4L2GR1/H4W4GR1/H4D8GR1 +

HD4CHIP-WK2; HBW2GR1/HBW2GR3/HBL2GR1/HBW4GR1/HBD8GR1

(+ HBG-BB); HFD6GR1/HFD8GR1 + HFG-PK + HFG-WK.

7. Fisheye Pendant Mount Bracket: HFG-PK

a. Weight: 0.46 lb (0.21 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: Die-cast Aluminum /White powder coating


d. Compatible with: HFD6GR1/HFD8GR1 (+ HFG-WK) (+ HB34G-CM/HB4G-

PM).

8. Fisheye Wall Mount Bracket: HFG-WK


b. Construction/Finish: Die-cast aluminum /White powder coating


d. Compatible with: HFD6GR1/HFG8GR1 (+ HFG-PK) (+ HB34G-CM/HB4G-

PM).

2.6 PTZ CAMERAS

A. HDZ Series TDN 1080p True Day/Night In/Outdoor High Speed 30x Zoom IP PTZ

Cameras:

1. Provide a True Day/Night 1080p In/Outdoor high speed IP PTZ dome camera with

30x zoom lens for video surveillance; including design, supply, installation and

commissioning.

a. Components: In/Outdoor dome housing, camera scan unit, cabling, and a web-

based GUI that provides complete control of the IP PTZ dome settings and live

video access.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. The HDZ Series PTZ dome camera shall use one of the following:

a. A rugged, discreet, outdoor IP67- and IK10-rated impact-resistant enclosure

that can be easily installed directly to a ceiling, wall or roof with either the wall

or pendant mounting accessories: HDZ302DE, HDZ302LIK.

b. A rugged, discreet, outdoor IP66- and IK10-rated impact-resistant enclosure


or pendant mounting accessories: HDZ302D.

c. A rugged, discreet, outdoor IP67-rated waterproof enclosure with lens wiper


or ceiling mounting accessories: HDZ302LIW.

d. A rugged, discreet enclosure that is designed for in-ceiling installation:

HDZ302DIN.

3. Standards: ONVIF Profile S and Profile G (HDZ302LIK/HDZ302LIW Profile S,

only)

4. Regulatory Requirements:

a. Emissions:

1) EU - EN55022; NA - FCC Part 15B, AS/NZL - CISPR 22:2009+A1

(2010): HDZ302LIK, HDZ302LIW.

2) EU - EN55032; NA - FCC Part 15B, AS/NZL - CISPR 22:2009+A1

(2010): HDZ302D, HDZ302DE, HDZ302DIN.

5. Environmental Requirements:

a. Operating Temperature:

1) -40 Degree C (-40 Degree F) to 70 Degree C (158 Degree F):

HDZ302DE, HDZ302LIK, HDZ302LIW.

2) -40 Degree C (-40 Degree F) to 60 Degree C (140 Degree F): HDZ302D.

3) -10 Degree C (14 Degree F) to 60 Degree C (140 Degree F):

HDZ302DIN.

b. Relative Humidity:

1) Less than 95 percent, non-condensing: HDZ302D, HDZ302DE,

HDZ302DIN.

2) Less than 90 percent, non-condensing: HDZ302LIK, HDZ302LIW.

c. Ingress Protection Rating:

1) IP67: HDZ302DE, HDZ302LIK, HDZ302LIW.

2) IP66: HDZ302D, HDZ302DIN.

d. IK10 Vandal Resistance Rating: HDZ302D, HDZ302DE, HDZ302DIN (bubble

only), HDZ302LIK.

6. Performance:

a. Resolution:

1) 1080p (1920 x 1080) at 60 fps (NTSC) or 50 fps (PAL), as well as

support for lower resolutions (1.3 M, 720p, D1, CIF): HDZ302D,

HDZ302DE, HDZ302DIN.

2) 1080p (1920 x 1080) at 30 fps (NTSC) or 25 fps (PAL), as well as

support for lower resolutions (720p, D1, CIF) at 60 fps (NTSC) or 50 fps

(PAL): HDZ302LIK and HDZ302LIW.

b. Streaming:

1) Triple stream codec support including H.265, H.264, and MJPEG:

HDZ302D, HDZ302DE, and HDZ302DIN.

2) Triple stream codec support including: H.264, MPEG4, and MJPEG:

HDZ302LIK and HDZ302LIW.

3) Plus MPEG4: HDZ302LIK; HDZ302LIW.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



c. Minimal Illumination:

1) 0.005 lux (color) / 0.0005 lux (B/W) at F1.6: HDZ302D, HDZ302DE,

and HDZ302DIN.

2) 0.005 lux (color) / 0.0005 lux (B/W) at F1.6; 0 lux IR on: HDZ302LIK

and HDZ302LIW.

d. Compression:

1) Dual Stream Compression: H.264 and H.264/MJPEG -

HDZ302LIK/HDZ302LIW.

2) Triple Stream H.265 Compression: H.265 (3X) and

H.265/H.264/MJPEG -HDZ302DE, HDZ302D, HDZ302DIN.

7. Power Requirements:

a. Input Voltage:

1) 24 V AC +/-25 percent, 3A, 50/60 Hz or PoE+ Class 4: HDZ302DE.

2) 24 V AC +/-25 percent, 1.5 A, 50/60 Hz or PoE+ Class 4: HDZ302D and

HDZ302DIN.

3) 24 V AC +/-10 percent, 3A, 50/60 Hz or High PoE Class 5: HDZ302LIK

and HDZ302LIW.

b. Power Consumption:

1) 13.0 W maximum (31.0 W with heater on): HDZ302DE.

2) 13.0 W maximum (23.0 W with heater on): HDZ302D.

3) 13.0 W maximum: HDZ302DIN.

4) 24.0 W maximum (38.0 W maximum with IR on): HDZ302LIK.

5) 24.0 W maximum (32.0 W maximum with IR on): HDZ302LIW.

8. HDZ TDN IR 1080p 30x Zoom WDR IP NTSC/PAL PTZ Dome Series:

a. Model: HDZ302D - Network TDN PTZ 5" Indoor/Outdoor Dome, WDR,

H.265/H.264, IK10, IP66. Storage. 4.5 - 135.0 mm, F1.6-F4.4 30X Optical

Zoom.

b. Model: HDZ302DE - Network TDN PTZ 6" Indoor/Outdoor Dome, WDR,

H.265/H.264, IK10, IP67. Storage. 4.5 - 135.0 mm, F1.6-F4.4 30X Optical

Zoom.

c. Model: HDZ302DIN - Network TDN PTZ Indoor, In-Ceiling Dome, WDR,

H.265/H.264, IK10. Storage. 4.5 - 135.0 mm, F1.6-F4.4 30X Optical Zoom.

d. Model: HDZ302LIK - Network TDN IR PTZ Dome, WDR, H.264, IK10.

Storage. 6.0 - 180 mm, F1.6-F4.8 30X Optical Zoom. IR LED up to 656 ft (200

m).

e. Model: HDZ302LIW - Network TDN IR PTZ Dome, WDR, H.264, Wiper.

Storage. 6.0 - 180 mm, F1.6-F4.8 30X Optical Zoom. IR LED up to 492 ft (150

m).

B. Mounts and Brackets

1. PTZ Ceiling Mount: HDZCM1

a. Weight: 1.72 lb (0.78 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: Die-cast Aluminum/Polycarbonate/White powder coating

c. Dimensions: 9.27 X diameter 5.26 in. (235.5 X diameter 133.6 mm)

d. Compatible with: HDZ302LIW/HDZ302LIK/HDZ302D/HDZ302DE (+

HDZCM2/HDZCM3).

2. 220 mm Ceiling Mount Extension Pole for HDZCM1: HDZCM2

a. Weight: 1.12 lb (0.51 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: Die-cast Aluminum/White powder coating

c. Dimensions: 8.7 X diameter 2.1 in. (220.0 X diameter 53.0 mm)

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Compatible with: HDZ302LIW/HDZ302LIK/HDZ302D/HDZ302DE +

HDZCM1.

3. 420 mm Ceiling Mount Extension Pole for HDZCM1: HDZCM3

a. Weight: 2.29 lb (1.04 kg)


c. Dimensions: 16.5 x diameter 2.1 in. (420.0 x diameter 53.0 mm)


HDZCM1.

4. PTZ Wall Mount: HDZWM1

a. Weight: 1.46 lb (0.66 kg)




HDZJB) (+ HDZCMA/HDZPMA).

5. PTZ Corner Mount Adapter for Wall Mount: HDZCMA


b. Construction/Finish: SECC/White powder coating


d. Compatible with: HDZ302LIW/HDZ302LIK/HDZ302D/HDZ302DE + HDZJB

+ HDZWM1/HDZWM2; HDZ302D + HDZGM + HDZJB.

6. PTZ Pole Mount Adapter for Wall Mount: HDZPMA

a. Weight: 2.05 lb (0.93 kg)

b. Construction/Finish: SECC/White powder coating


d. Compatible with: HDZ302LIW/HDZ302LIK/HDZ302D/HDZ302DE + HDZJB

+ HDZWM1/HDZWM2; HDZ302D + HDZGM + HDZJB.

7. PTZ Junction Box: HDZJB

a. Weight: 1.17 lb (0.53 kg)




HDZWM1/HDZWM2 + HDZPMA/HDZCMA; HDZ302D + HDZGM (+

HDZCMA/HDZPMA).

8. PTZ Wall Mount with Access Hole: HDZWM2

a. Weight: 3.64 lb (1.65 kg)




HDZJB) (+ HDZCMA/HDZPMA).

9. 1.5" NPT Adapter: HDZNPTA



c. Dimensions: 1.9 x 2.8 in. (48.0 x 72.0 mm)

10. PTZ Gooseneck Wall Mount: HDZGM

a. Weight: 1.08 lb (0.49 kg)



d. Compatible with: HDZ302D (+ HDZJB) (+HDZCMA/HDZPMA).

2.7 NETWORK & IP CABLES

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Video System components shall be connected using the following Honeywell Genesis Series

Cables:

B. Category 6A Cables: Unshielded twisted copper pairs, dielectric spline between pairs: UL

13, UL 444, NEC Articles 800 and 725, verified to TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Cat 6A:

1. Riser Rated: Polypropylene Insulation, PVC Jacket: CMR, CL2R, FT4, Sunlight

Resistant Listed:

a. Part #.: 5193, Cat 6A (500 MHz.).

2. Plenum Rated: FEP insulation, low-smoke PVC jacket: CMP, CL2P, FT6 listed:

a. Part #.: 5393, Cat 6A (500 MHz.).

C. Category 6 Plus Cables: Unshielded twisted copper pairs, dielectric spline between pairs: UL

13, UL 444, NEC Articles 800 and 725, verified to TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Cat 6:


Resistant Listed:

a. Part #.: 5092, Cat 6 Plus (500 MHz.).


a. Part #.: 5102, Cat 6 (500 MHz.).

D. Category 6 Cables: Unshielded twisted copper pairs: UL 13, UL 444, NEC Articles 800 and

725, verified to TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Cat 6:


Resistant Listed:

a. Part #.: 6360, Cat 6 (350 MHz.).


a. Part #.: 6361, Cat 6A (350 MHz.).

E. Shielded Category 6 Cables: Foil shielded twisted copper pairs (F/UTP), dielectric spline

between pairs: UL 13, UL 444, NEC Articles 800 and 725, verified to TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Cat

6:


Resistant Listed:

a. Part #.: 5192, Shielded Cat 6 Plus (500 MHz.).


a. Part #.: 5392, Shielded Cat 6 (500 MHz.).

F. Category 5e Cables: Unshielded twisted copper pairs: UL 13, UL 444, NEC Articles 800 and

725, verified to TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Cat 5e:


Resistant Listed:

a. Part #.: 5078, Cat 5e (350 MHz.).


a. Part #.: 5088, Cat 5e (350 MHz.).

3. Direct Burial Rated: Polypropylene insulation, LLDPE jacket: Direct Burial, Sunlight

Resistant, Wet Location Approved:

a. Part No.: 5090, Cat 5e (350 MHz.).

G. Shielded Category 5e Cables: Foil shielded twisted copper pairs (F/UTP): UL 13, UL 444,

NEC Articles 800 and 725, verified to TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Cat 5e:


Resistant Listed:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Part No.: 5178, Shielded Cat 6 Plus (500 MHz.).


a. Part No.: 5388, Shielded Cat 6 (500 MHz.).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Examine site conditions prior to installation. Notify Architect and Owner in writing if

unsuitable conditions are encountered. Do not start installation until site conditions are

acceptable.

C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of

deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All components of the video management system shall be thoroughly tested before shipping

to the project location.

B. Video management system shall be installed, programmed and tested in accordance with

manufacturer's installation instructions.

1. Coordinate interfaces with Owner's representative where appropriate.

2. Provide backboxes, racks, connectors, supports, conduit, cable, and wire for a

complete and reliable installation. Obtain Owner's approval for exact location of all

boxes, conduit, and wiring runs prior to installation.

3. Install conduit, cable, and wire parallel and square with building lines, including

raised floors areas. Do not exceed forty percent (40 percent) fill in conduits. Gather

wires and tie to create an orderly installation.

4. Coordinate with other trades to provide proper sequencing of installation.

3.3 FIELD COMMISSIONING AND CERTIFICATION

A. Field Commissioning: Test video management system as recommended by manufacturer,

including the following:

1. Conduct complete inspection and testing of equipment, including verification of

operation with connected equipment.

2. Test devices and demonstrate operational features for Owner's representative and

authorities having jurisdiction, as applicable.



3.4 TRAINING

A. Conduct on-site system administrator and security/surveillance operator training, with the

number of sessions and length of sessions as recommended by the video management system

manufacturer. Training shall include administration, provisioning, configuration, operation,

and diagnostics.

3.5 PROTECTION

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




B. Touch up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System


SECTION 13852 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.

2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

3. System smoke detectors.

4. Air-sampling smoke detectors.

5. Nonsystem smoke detectors.

6. Heat detectors.

7. Notification appliances.

8. Device guards.

9. Firefighters' two-way telephone communication service.

10. Firefighters' smoke-control station.

11. Magnetic door holders.

12. Remote annunciator.

13. Graphic annunciator.

14. Addressable interface device.

15. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.

16. Radio alarm transmitter.

17. Network communications.

18. System printer.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 16718 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for cables and

conductors for fire-alarm systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. FACP: Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. HLI: High Level Interface.

D. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. PC: Personal computer.

F. VESDA: Very Early Smoke-Detection Apparatus.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions, profiles, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and electrical characteristics.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the

"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor

sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory

and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.

5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.

6. Include battery-size calculations.

7. Include input/output matrix.

8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.

10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

11. Provide program report showing that air-sampling detector pipe layout balances

pneumatically within the airflow range of the air-sampling detector.

12. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,

detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.

c. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' control system.

d. Show field wiring and equipment required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm and

override by firefighters' smoke-evacuation system.

e. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

f. Show air-sampling detector pipe routing.

13. Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding

schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.

14. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them

to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.

b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level III minimum.

c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in

addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer

responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat

detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing

conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of

detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals

and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.


1.6 Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"

chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of

Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the

"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and

equipment. Each conductor shall be numbered at every junction point with

indication of origination and termination points.

d. Riser diagram.

e. Device addresses.

f. Air-sampling system sample port locations and modeling program report showing

layout meets performance criteria.

g. Record copy of site-specific software.

h. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested.

2) Frequency of testing of installed components.

3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.

4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

i. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

j. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective


1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount

installed, but no fewer than one unit.

2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer

than one unit.

3. Smoke Detectors, Fire Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type installed, but no

fewer than one unit of each type.

5. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked or tamperproofed components.

6. Audible and Visual Notification Appliances: One of each type installed.

7. Fuses: Two of each type installed in the system. Provide in a box or cabinet with

compartments marked with fuse types and sizes.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



8. Filters for Air-Sampling Detectors: Quantity equal to two percent of amount of each type

installed, but no fewer than one unit of each type.

9. Air-Sampling Fan: Quantity equal to one for every five detectors, but no fewer than one

unit of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation

of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm

Level II technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally

recognized testing laboratory).

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an

FM Global-approved alarm company.

F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72.


A. Perform a full test of the existing system prior to starting work. Document any equipment or

components not functioning as designed.

B. Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-

alarm service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Architect's written

permission.

C. Use of Devices during Construction: Protect devices during construction unless devices are

placed in service to protect the facility during construction.

1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new

equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN

SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service, and

label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected

fire-alarm equipment and wiring.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and

components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service

Agreement.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible

with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's

certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission horn/strobe

evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Flame detectors.

4. Smoke detectors.

5. Duct smoke detectors.

6. Air-sampling smoke-detection system (VESDA).

7. Carbon monoxide detectors.

8. Combustible gas detectors.

9. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

10. Preaction system.

11. Fire-extinguishing system operation.

12. Fire standpipe system.

13. Dry system pressure flow switch.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



14. Fire pump running.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Activate voice/alarm communication system.

7. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

8. Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighters' smoke-control

system panel.

9. Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.

10. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

11. Activate preaction system.

12. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.

13. Activate elevator power shunt trip.

14. Activate emergency lighting control.

15. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

16. Record events in the system memory.

17. Record events by the system printer.

18. Indicate device in alarm on the graphic annunciator.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

3. Alert and Action signals of air-sampling detector system.

4. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

5. Fire pump running.

6. Fire-pump loss of power.

7. Fire-pump power phase reversal.

8. Independent fire-detection and -suppression systems.

9. User disabling of zones or individual devices.

10. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control

module, remote annunciator, printer interface, or Ethernet module.

4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



7. Break in standby battery circuitry.

8. Failure of battery charging.

9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

10. Voice signal amplifier failure.

11. Hose cabinet door open.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.

2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit, connected network

control panels, off-premises network control panels, and remote annunciators.

3. Record the event on system printer.

4. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.

5. Transmit system status to building management system.

6. Display system status on graphic annunciator.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Bosch Security Systems.

2. Faraday.

3. Fike Corporation.

4. Fire-Lite Alarms.

5. GAMEWELL.

6. GE UTC Fire & Security; A United Technologies Company.

7. Keltron Corporation.

8. Mircom Technologies, Ltd.

9. Notifier.

10. Siemens Industry, Inc.; Fire Safety Division.

11. Silent Knight.

12. SimplexGrinnell LP.

B. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with

electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. System software and programs shall be held in nonvolatile flash, electrically

erasable, programmable, read-only memory, retaining the information through

failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and

printer.

c. Provide communication between the FACP and remote circuit interface panels,

annunciators, and displays.

d. The FACP shall be listed for connection to a central-station signaling system

service.

e. Provide nonvolatile memory for system database, logic, and operating system and

event history. The system shall require no manual input to initialize in the event of

a complete power down condition. The FACP shall provide a minimum 500-event

history log.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication

zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification

appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical

Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

C. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at

fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and

supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming

and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.

2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands.

D. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at



and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, two line(s) of 40 characters, minimum.


commands.

E. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class A.

2. Pathway Survivability: Level 0.

3. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling-line circuit.

4. Serial Interfaces:

a. One dedicated RS 485 port for central-station operation using point ID DACT.

b. One RS 485 port for remote annunciators, Ethernet module, or multi-interface

module (printer port).

c. One USB port for PC configuration.

d. One RS 232 port for VESDA HLI connection.

e. One RS 232 port for voice evacuation interface.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Stairwell and Elevator Shaft Pressurization: Provide an output signal using an addressable relay

to start the stairwell and elevator shaft pressurization system. Signal shall remain on until alarm

conditions are cleared and fire-alarm system is reset. Signal shall not stop in response to alarm

acknowledge or signal silence commands.

1. Pressurization starts when any alarm is received at fire-alarm control unit.

2. Alarm signals from smoke detectors at pressurization air supplies have a higher priority

than other alarm signals that start the system.

G. Smoke-Alarm Verification:

1. Initiate audible and visible indication of an "alarm-verification" signal at fire-alarm

control unit.

2. Activate an approved "alarm-verification" sequence at fire-alarm control unit and

detector.

3. Record events by the system printer.

4. Sound general alarm if the alarm is verified.

5. Cancel fire-alarm control unit indication and system reset if the alarm is not verified.

H. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.

2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be

a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or

5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured

at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in

the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

I. Elevator Recall:

1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices:

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.

b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.

c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if

lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room

shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a

delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.

J. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in

smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

K. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable

smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change

those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and

sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory, and print out the final adjusted

values on system printer.

L. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

M. Voice/Alarm Signaling Service: Central emergency communication system with redundant

microphones, preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators provided as a special module that is

part of fire-alarm control unit.

1. Indicate number of alarm channels for automatic, simultaneous transmission of different

announcements to different zones or for manual transmission of announcements by use of

the central-control microphone. Amplifiers shall comply with UL 1711.

a. Allow the application of, and evacuation signal to, indicated number of zones and,

at the same time, allow voice paging to the other zones selectively or in any

combination.

b. Programmable tone and message sequence selection.

c. Standard digitally recorded messages for "Evacuation" and "All Clear."

d. Generate tones to be sequenced with audio messages of type recommended by

NFPA 72 and that are compatible with tone patterns of notification-appliance

circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

2. Status Annunciator: Indicate the status of various voice/alarm speaker zones and the

status of firefighters' two-way telephone communication zones.

3. Preamplifiers, amplifiers, and tone generators shall automatically transfer to backup

units, on primary equipment failure.

N. Printout of Events: On receipt of signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events. Identify

zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble) and date and

time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications. Also print

system reset event, including same information for device, location, date, and time. Commands

initiate the printing of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system

and a historical log of events.

O. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating

devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm

communicator transmitters and digital alarm radio transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc

source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-

supply module rating.

P. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and

automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium.

Q. Instructions: Computer printout or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or

glass cover in a stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



appropriate response for displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the

system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions.

2.5 PREACTION SYSTEM

A. Initiate Presignal Alarm: This function shall cause an audible and visual alarm and indication to

be provided at the FACP. Activation of an initiation device connected as part of a preaction

system shall be annunciated at the FACP only, without activation of the general evacuation

alarm.

2.6 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES



1. AMSECO - A Potter Brand.


3. Cooper Wheelock.

4. Faraday.

5. Federal Signal Corporation.



8. GAMEWELL.




12. Notifier.


14. Silent Knight.


16. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be

finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show

visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as

surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to

communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with

integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal,

alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to

permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-

powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated, clear plastic enclosure hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.7 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS




2. Faraday.

3. Fenwal Protection Systems; A UTC Fire & Security Company.


5. GAMEWELL.


7. Gentex Corporation.

8. Harrington Signal, Inc.



11. Notifier.


13. Silent Knight.


15. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.

3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for

connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to

restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type, indicating detector has operated and power-

on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,

individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition and individually adjustable for sensitivity by fire-alarm control unit.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm

control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to

identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to

manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status.

b. Device type.

c. Present average value.

d. Present sensitivity selected.

e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

D. Ionization Smoke Detector:





a. Primary status.

b. Device type.




E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.





a. Primary status.

b. Device type.




3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with

the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.

5. Sampling Tubes: Design and dimensions as recommended by manufacturer for specific

duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.

6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control

circuit.

2.8 PROJECTED BEAM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Projected Beam Light Source and Receiver: Designed to accommodate small angular

movements and continue to operate and not cause nuisance alarms.

B. Detector Address: Accessible from fire-alarm control unit and able to identify the detector's

location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to


1. Primary status.

2. Device type.

3. Present average value.

4. Present sensitivity selected.

5. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

2.9 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.

2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell.

3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts.

4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or

internal faults.

5. Comply with UL 2075.

6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system.

8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.

2.10 MULTICRITERIA DETECTORS

A. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.

B. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm, or

trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

C. Automatically adjusts its sensitivity by means of drift compensation and smoothing algorithms.

The detector shall send trouble alarm if it is incapable of compensating for existing conditions.

D. Test button tests all sensors in the detector.

E. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to


1. Primary status.

2. Device type.

3. Present sensitivity selected.

4. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

F. Sensors: The detector shall be comprised of four sensing elements including a smoke sensor, a

carbon monoxide sensor, an infrared sensor, and a heat sensor.

1. Smoke sensor shall be photoelectric type as described in "System Smoke Detectors"

Article.

2. Carbon monoxide sensor shall be as described in "Carbon Monoxide Detectors" Article.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Heat sensor shall be as described in "Heat Detectors" Article.

4. Each sensor shall be separately listed according to requirements for its detector type.

2.11 NONSYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Nonsystem Smoke Detectors:

1. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall be listed as compatible with the fire-alarm equipment

installed or shall have a contact closure interface listed for the connected load.

2. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall meet the monitoring for integrity requirements in

NFPA 72.

B. Single-Station Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 217; suitable for NFPA 101, residential occupancies; operating at 120-

V ac with 9-V dc battery as the secondary power source. Provide with "low" or "missing"

battery chirping-sound device.

2. Auxiliary Relays: One Form C, rated at 0.5 A.

3. Audible Notification Appliance: Piezoelectric sounder rated at 90 dBA at 10 feet

according to UL 464.

4. Visible Notification Appliance: 177-cd strobe.

5. Heat sensor, 135 deg F combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.

6. Test Switch: Push to test; simulates smoke at rated obscuration.

7. Tandem Connection: Allow tandem connection of number of indicated detectors; alarm

on one detector shall actuate notification on all connected detectors.

8. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in

a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for


9. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to



on status.

C. Single-Station Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268A; operating at 120-V ac.

2. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

a. Detector Sensitivity: Smoke obscuration between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot when

tested according to UL 268A.


twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for

mounting directly to air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to

building wiring.

a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; listed for use with

the supplied detector.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.12 HEAT DETECTORS




2. Faraday.


4. GAMEWELL.






10. Notifier.


12. Silent Knight.


14. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or a rate

of rise that exceeds 15 deg F per minute unless otherwise indicated.




D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 190 deg F.




E. Continuous Linear Heat-Detector System:

1. Detector Cable: Rated detection temperature 155 deg F. Listed for "regular" service and a

standard environment. Cable includes two steel actuator wires twisted together with

spring pressure, wrapped with protective tape, and finished with PVC outer sheath. Each

actuator wire is insulated with heat-sensitive material that reacts with heat to allow the

cable twist pressure to short circuit wires at the location of elevated temperature.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Control Unit: Two-zone or multizone unit as indicated. Provide same system power

supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for fire-alarm control unit.

3. Signals to Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Any type of local system trouble shall be reported to

fire-alarm control unit as a composite "trouble" signal. Alarms on each detection zone

shall be individually reported to central fire-alarm control unit as separately identified

zones.



2.13 AIR-SAMPLING SMOKE DETECTOR



1. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.



4. Notifier.

5. Xtralis Pty Ltd.

B. General Description:

1. Air-sampling smoke detector shall be laser based using a piping system and a fan to

transport the particles of combustion to the detector.

2. Provide two levels of alarm from each zone covered by the detector and two supervisory

levels of alarm from each detector.

3. The air being sampled shall pass through filters to remove dust particulates greater than

20 microns before entering the detection chamber.

4. Detectors shall have the capability via RS 485 to connect up to 100 detectors in a

network.

5. Detectors shall communicate with the fire-alarm control unit via addressable, monitored

dry contact closures, RS 485, and interface modules. Provide a minimum of six relays,

individually programmable remotely for any function.

6. Pipe airflow balancing calculations shall be performed using approved calculation

software.

C. Detector:

1. Detector, Filter, Aspirator, and Relays: Housed in a mounting box and arranged in such a

way that air is drawn from the detection area and a sample passed through the dual-stage

filter and detector by the aspirator.

2. Obscuration Sensitivity Range: 0.005 - 6 percent obs/ft..

3. Four independent, field-programmable, smoke-alarm thresholds per sensor pipe and a

programmable scan time delay. The threshold set points shall be programmable.

a. The four alarm thresholds may be used as follows:

1) Alarm Level 1 (Alert): Activate a visual and an audible supervisory alarm.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2) Alarm Level 2 (Action): Activate shutdown of electrical/HVAC equipment

and activate a visual and an audible supervisory alarm.

3) Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1): Activate building alarm systems and initiate call to

fire response unit.

4) Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2): Activate suppression system or other

countermeasures.

b. Final Detection System Settings: Approved by Architect.

c. Initial Detection Alarm Settings:

1) Alarm Level 1 (Alert): 0.08 percent obs/ft..

2) Alarm Level 2 (Action): 1.0 percent obs/ft..

3) Alarm Level 3 (Fire 1): 2.0 percent obs/ft..

4) Alarm Level 4 (Fire 2): 4.0 percent obs/ft..

4. Power Supply:

a. Regulated 24-V dc, monitored by the fire-alarm control unit, with battery backup.

b. Battery backup shall provide 24 hours' standby, followed by 30 minutes at

maximum connected load.

5. Detector shall also transmit the following faults:

a. Detector.

b. Airflow.

c. Filter.

d. System.

e. Zone.

f. Network.

g. Power.

6. Provide four in-line sample pipe inlets that shall contain a flow sensor for each pipe inlet.

The detector shall be capable of identifying the pipe from which smoke was detected.

7. Aspirator: Air pump capable of allowing for multiple sampling pipe runs up to 650 feet in

total, (four pipe runs per detector) with a transport time of less than 120 seconds from the

farthest sample port.

8. Air-Sampling Flow Rates Outside Manufacturer's Specified Range: Result in a trouble

alarm.

9. Provide software-programmable relays rated at 2 A at 30-V dc for alarm and fault

conditions.

10. Provide built-in event and smoke logging; store smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator

actions, and faults with date and time of each event. Each detector (zone) shall be capable

of storing up to 18,000 events.

11. Urgent and Minor Faults. Minor faults shall be designated as trouble alarms. Urgent

faults, which indicate the unit may not be able to detect smoke, shall be designated as

supervisory alarms.

D. Displays:

1. Include display module within each detector.

2. Each display shall provide the following features at a minimum:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. A bar-graph display.

b. Four independent, high-intensity alarm indicators (Alert, Action, Fire 1, and

Fire 2), corresponding to the four alarm thresholds of the indicated sector.

c. Alarm threshold indicators for Alert, Action, and Fire 1.

d. LED indication that the first alarm sector is established.

e. Detector fault and airflow fault indicators.

f. LED indicators shall be provided for faults originating in the particular zone (Zone

Fault), faults produced by the overall smoke-detection system, and faults resulting

from network wiring errors (Network Fault).

g. Minor and urgent LED fault indicators.

E. Sampling Tubes:

1. Smooth bore with a nominal 1-inch OD and a 7/8-inch ID. Sampling pipe with between

5/8- and 1-inch ID can be used in specifically approved locations when recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Pipe Material: CPVC and complying with UL 1887, "Safety Fire Test of Plastic Sprinkler

Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke Characteristics."

3. Joints in the sampling pipe shall be airtight. Use solvent cement approved by the pipe

manufacturer on all joints except at entry to the detector.

4. Identify piping with labels reading: "Aspirating Smoke Detector Pipe - Do Not Paint or

Disturb" along its entire length at regular intervals according to NFPA 72.

5. Support pipes at not more than 60-inch centers.

6. Fit end of each trunk or branch pipe with an end cap and drilled with a hole appropriately

sized to achieve the performance as specified and as calculated by the system design.

F. Sampling Holes:

1. Sampling holes of 5/64 inch, or other sized holes per manufacturer's written instructions,

shall be separated by not more than the maximum distance allowable for conventional

smoke detectors. Intervals may vary according to calculations.

2. Follow manufacturer's written recommendations to determine the number and spacing of

sampling points and the distance from sampling points to ceiling or roof structure and to

forced ventilation systems.

3. Each sampling point shall be identified by an applied decal.

2.14 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES



1. Cooper Wheelock.









© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



10. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a

signaling-line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for system

connections.

C. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

D. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

E. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

F. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a sound-pressure level of

90 dBA, measured 10 feet from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test

protocol.

G. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or

nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is

engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15 cd.

b. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place.

4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

H. Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:


2. Speakers for Voice Notification: Locate speakers for voice notification to provide the

intelligibility requirements of the "Notification Appliances" and "Emergency

Communications Systems" chapters in NFPA 72.

3. High-Range Units: Rated 2 to 15 W.

4. Low-Range Units: Rated 1 to 2 W.

5. Mounting: Flush semirecessed or surface mounted and bidirectional.

6. Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker

location.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



I. Exit Marking Audible Notification Appliance:

1. Exit marking audible notification appliances shall meet the audibility requirements in

NFPA 72.

2. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to all building exits.

3. Provide exit marking audible notification appliances at the entrance to areas of refuge

with audible signals distinct from those used for building exit marking.

2.15 FIREFIGHTERS' TWO-WAY TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION SERVICE

A. Dedicated, two-way, supervised, telephone voice communication links between fire-alarm

control unit, the fire command center, and remote firefighters' telephone stations. Supervised

telephone lines shall be connected to talk circuits by controls in a control module. Provide the

following:

1. Common-talk type for firefighter use only.

2. Selective-talk type for use by firefighters and fire wardens.

3. Controls to disconnect phones from talk circuits if too many phones are in use

simultaneously. An indicator lamp shall flash if a phone is disconnected from the talk

circuits.

4. Addressable firefighters' phone modules to monitor and control a loop of firefighter

phones. Module shall be capable of differentiating between normal, off-hook, and trouble

conditions.

5. Audible Pulse and Tone Generator, and High-Intensity Lamp: When a remote telephone

is taken off the hook, it causes an audible signal to sound and a high-intensity lamp to

flash at the fire-alarm control unit.

6. Selector panel controls to provide for simultaneous operation of up to six telephones in

selected zones. Indicate ground faults and open or shorted telephone lines on the panel

front by individual LEDs.

7. Display: digital to indicate location of caller.

8. Remote Telephone Cabinet: Flush- or surface-mounted cabinet as indicated, factory-

standard red finish, with handset.

a. Install one-piece handset to cabinet with vandal-resistant armored cord. Silk-

screened or engraved label on cabinet door, designating "Fire Emergency Phone."

b. With "break-glass" type door access lock.

9. Remote Telephone Jack Stations: Single-gang, stainless-steel-plate mounted plug,

engraved "Fire Emergency Phone."

10. Handsets: 2 push-to-talk-type sets stored in a cabinet adjacent to fire-alarm control unit in

the fire command center.

2.16 FIREFIGHTERS' SMOKE-CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Initiate Smoke-Management Sequence of Operation:

1. Comply with sequence of operation as described in Section 15940 "Sequence of

Operation."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Fire-alarm system shall provide all interfaces and control points required to properly

activate smoke-management systems.

3. First fire-alarm system initiating device to go into alarm condition shall activate the

smoke-control functions.

4. Subsequent devices going into alarm condition shall have no effect on the smoke-control

mode.

B. Addressable Relay Modules:

1. Provide address-setting means on the module. Store an internal identifying code for

control panel use to identify the module type.

2. Allow the control panel to switch the relay contacts on command.

3. Have a minimum of two normally open and two normally closed contacts available for

field wiring.

4. Listed for controlling HVAC fan motor controllers.

2.17 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with

matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.18 GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR









B. Graphic Annunciator Panel: Mounted in an aluminum frame with nonglare, minimum 3/16-

inch-thick, clear acrylic cover over graphic representation of the facility. Detector locations

shall be represented by red LED lamps. Normal system operation shall be indicated by a

lighted, green LED. Trouble and supervisory alarms shall be represented by an amber LED.


2. Operating voltage shall be 24-V dc provided by a local 24-V power supply provided with

the annunciator.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Include built-in voltage regulation, reverse polarity protection, RS 232/422 serial

communications, and a lamp test switch.

4. Surface mounted in a NEMA 250, Type 1 cabinet, with key lock and no exposed screws

or hinges.

5. Graphic representation of the facility shall be a CAD drawing and each detector shall be

represented by an LED in its actual location. CAD drawing shall be at 1/8-inch per foot

scale or larger.

6. The LED representing a detector shall flash two times per second while detector is an

alarm.

C. Graphic Annunciator Workstation: PC-based, with fire-alarm annunciator software with

historical logging, report generation, and a graphic interface showing all alarm points in the

system. PC with operating system software, minimum 128GB hard drive, digital display

monitor, with wireless keyboard and mouse.

2.19 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,

supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm

control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Flush cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights

shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and

test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.20 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.

2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.


B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating

devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator

recall.



field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.

2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.21 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and

shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-

alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a

remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be transmitted.

If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local

trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm

receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone

service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter

shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the

following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.

3. LED display.

4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.

2. Address of the supervisory signal.

3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.

4. Loss of ac supply.

5. Loss of power.

6. Low battery.

7. Abnormal test signal.

8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

2.22 RADIO ALARM TRANSMITTER

A. Transmitter shall comply with NFPA 1221 and 47 CFR 90.

B. Description: Manufacturer's standard commercial product; factory assembled, wired, and tested;

ready for installation and operation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Packaging: A single, modular, NEMA 250, Type 1 metal enclosure with a tamper-

resistant flush tumbler lock.

2. Signal Transmission Mode and Frequency: VHF or UHF 2-W power output, coordinated

with operating characteristics of the established remote alarm receiving station designated

by Owner.

3. Normal Power Input: 120-V ac.

4. Secondary Power: Integral-sealed, rechargeable, 12-V battery and charger. Comply with

NFPA 72 requirements for battery capacity; submit calculations.

5. Antenna: Omnidirectional, coaxial half-wave, dipole type with driving point impedance

matched to transmitter and antenna cable output impedance. Wind-load strength of

antenna and mounting hardware and supports shall withstand 130 mph with a gust factor

of 1.3 without failure.

6. Antenna Cable: Coaxial cable with impedance matched to the transmitter output

impedance.

7. Antenna-Cable Connectors: Weatherproof.

8. Alarm Interface Devices: Circuit boards, modules, and other auxiliary devices, integral to

the transmitter, matching fire-alarm and other system outputs to message-generating

inputs of the transmitter that produce required message transmissions.

C. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm

control unit or from its own internal sensors or controls and shall automatically transmit signal

along with a unique code that identifies the transmitting station to the remote alarm receiving

station. Transmitted messages shall correspond to standard designations for fire-reporting

system to which the signal is being transmitted and shall include separately designated

messages in response to the following events or conditions:

1. Transmitter Low-Battery Condition: Sent when battery voltage is below 85 percent of

rated value.

2. System Test Message: Initiated manually by a test switch within the transmitter cabinet,

or automatically at an optionally preselected time, once every 24 hours, with transmission

time controlled by a programmed timing device integral to transmitter controls.

3. Transmitter Trouble Message: Actuated by failure, in excess of one-minute duration, of

the transmitter normal power source, derangement of the wiring of the transmitter, or any

alarm input interface circuit or device connected to it.

4. Local Fire-Alarm-System Trouble Message: Initiated by events or conditions that cause a

trouble signal to be indicated on the building system.

5. Local Fire-Alarm-System Alarm Message: Actuated when the building system goes into

an alarm state. Identifies device that initiated the alarm.

6. Local Fire-Alarm-System, Supervisory-Alarm Message: Actuated when the building

alarm system indicates a supervisory alarm.

2.23 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS

A. Provide network communications for fire-alarm system according to fire-alarm manufacturer's

written requirements.

B. Provide network communications pathway per manufacturer's written requirements and

requirements in NFPA 72 and NFPA 70.

C. Provide integration gateway using BACnet for connection to building automation system.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.24 SYSTEM PRINTER

A. Printer shall be listed and labeled as an integral part of fire-alarm system.

2.25 DEVICE GUARDS

A. Description: Welded wire mesh of size and shape for the manual station, smoke detector, gong,

or other device requiring protection.

1. Factory fabricated and furnished by device manufacturer.

2. Finish: Paint of color to match the protected device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for ventilation, temperature,

humidity, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that manufacturer's written instructions for environmental conditions have been

permanently established in spaces where equipment and wiring are installed, before

installation begins.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical connections to verify actual locations of connections before

installation.


3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for

installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with

requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

1. Devices placed in service before all other trades have completed cleanup shall be

replaced.

2. Devices installed but not yet placed in service shall be protected from construction dust,

debris, dirt, moisture, and damage according to manufacturer's written storage

instructions.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on concrete base. Comply with

requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install seismic bracing. Comply with requirements in Section 16074 "Seismic Controls

for Electrical Systems."

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor.

1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 16074

"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the

finished floor.



E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit

doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:

1. Comply with the "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with the "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" section in the "Initiating Devices"

chapter in NFPA 72, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet.

4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Annex A or Annex B in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 36 inches from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture and not directly above pendant mounted or indirect lighting.

G. Install a cover on each smoke detector that is not placed in service during construction. Cover

shall remain in place except during system testing. Remove cover prior to system turnover.

H. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they

extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.

1. Do not install smoke detector in duct smoke-detector housing during construction. Install

detector only during system testing and prior to system turnover.

I. Air-Sampling Smoke Detectors: If using multiple pipe runs, the runs shall be pneumatically

balanced.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



J. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts.

K. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a

dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the

alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

L. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,

sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal

viewing position.

M. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells

and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind

a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

N. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least

6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

O. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

P. Antenna for Radio Alarm Transmitter: Mount to building structure where indicated. Use

mounting arrangement and substrate connection that resists 130-mph wind load with a gust

factor of 1.3 without damage.

3.3 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in

smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 08710 "Door Hardware." Connect

hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before

making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and

systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an

addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system

being controlled.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighters'

smoke-control system panel.

2. Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.

3. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

4. Magnetically held-open doors.

5. Electronically locked doors and access gates.

6. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.

7. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.

8. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

9. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

10. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.

11. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker.

12. Data communication circuits for connection to building management system.

13. Data communication circuits for connection to mass notification system.

14. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.

15. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-

reversal condition.

16. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground

wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

D. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system

documentation that is required by the "Completion Documents, Preparation" table

in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section

of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the

"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the

"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2

requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72

and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection,

Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or

replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,

quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm

system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms

developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall

include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service

organization. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective

components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts and

supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Include visual inspections according to the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the

"Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Perform tests in the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the "Inspection,


3. Perform tests per the "Testing Frequencies" table in the "Testing" paragraph of the


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include

software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial

Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for

using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to

upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment


SECTION 13911 - IDENTIFICATION FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Stencils.

5. Valve tags.

6. Warning tags.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Equipment-Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled and the proposed

content for each label.

C. Valve Schedules: Valve numbering scheme.


A. Maintenance Data: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: stainless steel, 0.025 inch aluminum, or 0.032 inch thick, with

predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.

3. Background Color: Red.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

5. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,

1/16 inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.



4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.


2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

C. Equipment-Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where

equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and

title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and

maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16

inch thick, with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal

lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service and showing flow direction.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

C. Pipe-Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings; pipe size; and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

D. Pipe-Label Colors:



2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping-system abbreviation and 1/2-

inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: stainless steel, 0.025 inch or aluminum, 0.032 inch thick, with predrilled

holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or S-hook.

3. Valve-Tag Color: Red.


B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve

number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or

space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

D. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

E. Pipe-Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings

in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and

plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection excluding short takeoffs. Where flow pattern is not obvious,

mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet Insert dimension along each run. Reduce

intervals to 25 feet Insert dimension in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

3.3 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems. List tagged valves in a valve-tag

schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and with captions similar

to those indicated in "Valve-Tag Size and Shape" Subparagraph below:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Fire-Suppression Standpipe: 2 inches, square.

b. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches, square.

c. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: 2 inches, square.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.4 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping


SECTION 13915 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR WATER-BASED FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Two-piece ball valves with indicators.

2. Bronze butterfly valves with indicators.

3. Iron butterfly valves with indicators.

4. Check valves.

5. Bronze OS&Y gate valves.

6. Iron OS&Y gate valves.

7. NRS gate valves.

8. Indicator posts.

9. Trim and drain valves.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

B. NRS: Nonrising stem.

C. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

D. SBR: Styrene-butadiene rubber.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.

3. Set valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor

storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles

or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Protect flanges and specialties from moisture and dirt.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. UL Listed: Valves shall be listed in UL's "Online Certifications Directory" under the headings listed

below and shall bear UL mark:

1. Main Level: HAMV - Fire Main Equipment.

a. Level 1: HCBZ - Indicator Posts, Gate Valve.

b. Level 1: HLOT - Valves.

1) Level 3: HLUG - Ball Valves, System Control.

2) Level 3: HLXS - Butterfly Valves.

3) Level 3: HMER - Check Valves.

4) Level 3: HMRZ - Gate Valves.

2. Main Level: VDGT - Sprinkler System & Water Spray System Devices.

a. Level 1: VQGU - Valves, Trim and Drain.

B. FM Global Approved: Valves shall be listed in its "Approval Guide," under the headings listed below:

1. Automated Sprinkler Systems:

a. Indicator posts.

b. Valves.

1) Gate valves.

2) Check valves.

a) Single check valves.

3) Miscellaneous valves.

C. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.

D. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.

2. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

E. AWWA Compliance: Comply with AWWA C606 for grooved-end connections.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for valves.

G. Valve Pressure Ratings: Not less than the minimum pressure rating indicated or higher as required by

system pressures.

H. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

I. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Worm-gear actuator with handwheel for quarter-turn valves, except for trim and drain valves.

2. Handwheel: For other than quarter-turn trim and drain valves.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn trim and drain valves NPS 2 and smaller.

2.2 TWO-PIECE BALL VALVES WITH INDICATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that

may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. NIBCO INC.

2. Victaulic Company.

B. Description:

1. UL 1091, except with ball instead of disc and FM Global standard for indicating valves (butterfly

or ball type), Class Number 1112.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

3. Body Design: Two piece.

4. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.

5. Port Size: Full or standard.

6. Seats: PTFE.

7. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.

8. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

9. Actuator: Worm gear or traveling nut.

10. Supervisory Switch: Internal or external.

11. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends.

12. End Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.

2.3 BRONZE BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS



1. Fivalco Inc.

2. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

3. Milwaukee Valve Company.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class

Number 1112.

2. Minimum: Pressure rating: 175 psig.

3. Body Material: Bronze.

4. Seat Material: EPDM.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Stem Material: Bronze or stainless steel.

6. Disc: Bronze.



9. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2: Threaded ends.

10. Ends Connections for Valves NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.

2.4 IRON BUTTERFLY VALVES WITH INDICATORS



1. Anvil International, Inc.

2. Fivalco Inc.


4. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

5. NIBCO INC.

6. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.


B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 1091 and FM Global standard for indicating valves, (butterfly or ball type), Class

Number 112.


3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or polyamide coating.

4. Seat Material: EPDM.

5. Stem: Stainless steel.

6. Disc: Ductile iron, and EPDM or SBR coated.



9. Body Design: Grooved-end connections.

2.5 CHECK VALVES



1. Anvil International, Inc.

2. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

3. Fivalco Inc.



6. Matco-Norca.

7. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.

8. NIBCO INC.

9. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

10. Shurjoint Piping Products.


12. United Brass Works, Inc.

13. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.


15. Viking Corporation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



16. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

17. Wilson & Cousins Inc.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 312 and FM Global standard for swing check valves, Class Number 1210.


3. Type: Single swing check.

4. Body Material: Cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze.

5. Clapper: Bronze, ductile iron, or stainless steel with elastomeric seal.

6. Clapper Seat: Brass, bronze, or stainless steel.

7. Hinge Shaft: Bronze or stainless steel.

8. Hinge Spring: Stainless steel.

9. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or threaded.

2.6 IRON OS&Y GATE VALVES



1. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company subsidiary.

2. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.

3. Hammond Valve.



6. NIBCO INC.


8. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and

NRS-type gate valves).


3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

6. Stem: Brass or bronze.

7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.

8. Supervisory Switch: External.

9. End Connections: Grooved.

2.7 NRS GATE VALVES



1. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company subsidiary.

2. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc.



5. NIBCO INC.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Description:

1. Standard: UL 262 and FM Global standard for fire-service water control valves (OS&Y- and

NRS-type gate valves).


3. Body and Bonnet Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Wedge: Cast or ductile iron with elastomeric coating.

5. Wedge Seat: Cast or ductile iron, or bronze with elastomeric coating.

6. Stem: Brass or bronze.

7. Packing: Non-asbestos PTFE.

8. Supervisory Switch: External.

9. End Connections: Grooved.

2.8 TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

c. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

d. Flowserve.

e. FNW; Ferguson Enterprises, Inc.

f. Jomar International, LTD.

g. Kitz Corporation.

h. Legend Valve.

i. Metso Automation USA Inc.

j. Milwaukee Valve Company.

k. NIBCO INC.

l. Potter Roemer.

m. Red-White Valve Corporation.

n. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

o. Victaulic Company.

p. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

b. Body Design: Two piece.

c. Body Material: Forged brass or bronze.

d. Port size: Full or standard.

e. Seats: PTFE.

f. Stem: Bronze or stainless steel.

g. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

h. Actuator: Handlever.

i. End Connections for Valves NPS 1 through NPS 2-1/2: Threaded ends.

j. End Connections for Valves NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2-1/2: Grooved ends.

B. Angle Valves:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

b. NIBCO INC.

c. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Description:


b. Body Material: Brass or bronze.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Stem: Bronze.

e. Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

C. Globe Valves:



a. NIBCO INC.

b. United Brass Works, Inc.

2. Description:


b. Body Material: Bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

c. Ends: Threaded.

d. Stem: Bronze.

e. Disc Holder and Nut: Bronze.

f. Disc Seat: Nitrile.

g. Packing: Asbestos free.

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special

packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by

such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size,

length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for

service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in the following Sections for specific valve installation requirements and

applications:

1. Section 13930 "Wet-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers" for application of valves in wet-pipe, fire-

suppression sprinkler systems.

2. Section 13935 "Dry-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers" for application of valves in dry-pipe, fire-

suppression sprinkler systems.

3. Section 13974 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for application of valves in fire-suppression

standpipes.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply

except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of

system controlled by each valve.

C. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves

in potable-water-supply sources.

D. Install valves having threaded connections with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow easy

access, service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. Provide separate support

where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the pipe center.

F. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

G. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 13911 "Identification for Fire-Suppression Piping

and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules and signs on surfaces concealing valves; and the NFPA

standard applying to the piping system in which valves are installed. Install permanent identification signs

indicating the portion of system controlled by each valve.

H. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply

except from fire-department connections.

I. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps


SECTION 13921 - ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. In-line fire pumps.

2. Fire-pump accessories and specialties.

3. Flowmeter systems.


A. Pump Equipment, Accessory, and Specialty Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum unless higher

pressure rating is indicated.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, performance curves, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire pumps, motor drivers, and fire-pump accessories and specialties.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire pumps, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





B. Product Certificates: For each fire pump, from manufacturer.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire pumps to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 20, "Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire

Protection."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested fire-pump and driver unit.

B. Base: Fabricated and attached to fire-pump and driver unit with reinforcement to resist

movement of pump during seismic events when base is anchored to building substrate.

C. Finish: Red paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested unit before shipping.

2.2 IN-LINE FIRE PUMPS



1. A-C Fire Pump Systems; a business of ITT Industries.

2. Corcoran Piping System Co.

3. Patterson Pump Company; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Company.

4. Peerless Pump, Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Pentair Pump Group; Aurora Pump.

6. Pentair Pump Group; Fairbanks Morse.

7. Plad Equipment, Ltd.

8. Reddy-Buffaloes Pump Company.

9. S.A. Armstrong Limited.

B. Pump:

1. Standard: UL 448, for in-line pumps for fire service.

2. Casing: Radially split case, cast iron with ASME B16.1 pipe-flange connections.

3. Impeller: Cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.

4. Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze.

5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.

a. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.

b. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided

yarn and bronze packing gland.

6. Mounting: Pump and driver shaft is vertical, with motor above pump and pump on base.

C. Coupling: None or rigid.

D. Driver:

1. Standard: UL 1004A.

2. Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B.

2.3 VERTICALLY MOUNTED, SINGLE-STAGE, SPLIT-CASE FIRE PUMPS



1. A-C Fire Pump Systems; a business of ITT Industries.

2. Patterson Pump Company; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Company.

3. Peerless Pump, Inc.

4. Pentair Pump Group; Aurora Pump.


B. Pump:

1. Standard: UL 448, for split-case pumps for fire service.

2. Casing: Axially split case, cast iron with ASME B16.1 pipe-flange connections.

3. Impeller: Cast bronze, statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to shaft.

4. Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze.

5. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft with bronze sleeve.

a. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing.

b. Seals: Stuffing box with minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided

yarn and bronze packing gland.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Mounting: Pump and driver shafts are vertical, with motor above pump and pump on

base.

C. Coupling: Flexible and capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft misalignment. Include

metal coupling guard.

D. Driver:

1. Standard: UL 1004A.

2. Type: Electric motor; NEMA MG 1, polyphase Design B.

2.4 FIRE-PUMP ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Automatic Air-Release Valves: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation in fire-pump casing.

B. Circulation Relief Valves: UL 1478, brass, spring loaded; for installation in pump discharge

piping.

C. Relief Valves:



the following:

a. BERMAD Control Valves.

b. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.

c. Kunkle Valve; a part of Tyco International Ltd.

d. OCV Control Valves.

e. Watts Regulator Company; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description: UL 1478, bronze or cast iron, spring loaded; for installation in fire-

suppression water-supply piping.

D. Inlet Fitting: Eccentric tapered reducer at pump suction inlet.

E. Outlet Fitting: Concentric tapered reducer at pump discharge outlet.

F. Discharge Cone: Closed or open type.

G. Hose Valve Manifold Assembly:

1. Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 20.

2. Header Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized steel with ends threaded

according to ASME B1.20.1.

3. Header Pipe Fittings: ASME B16.4, galvanized cast-iron threaded fittings.

4. Automatic Drain Valve: UL 1726.

5. Manifold:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers

instead of inlets.

b. Body: Flush type, brass or ductile iron, with number of outlets required by

NFPA 20.

c. Nipples: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with ends

threaded according to ASME B1.20.1.

d. Adapters and Caps with Chain: Brass or bronze, with outlet threaded according to

NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.

e. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; rectangular.

f. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and

matching local fire-department threads.

g. Exposed Parts Finish: Rough brass.

h. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."

6. Manifold:

a. Test Connections: Comply with UL 405 except provide outlets without clappers

instead of inlets.

b. Body: Exposed type, brass, with number of outlets required by NFPA 20.

c. Escutcheon Plate: Brass or bronze; round.

d. Hose Valves: UL 668, bronze, with outlet threaded according to NFPA 1963 and

matching local fire-department threads. Include caps and chains.

e. Exposed Parts Finish: Rough brass.

f. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Equivalent to "FIRE PUMP TEST."

2.5 FLOWMETER SYSTEMS



1. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount Division.

2. Fire Research Corp.

3. Gerand Engineering Co.

4. Hydro Flow Products, Inc.

5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

6. Meriam Process Technologies.

7. Preso Meters; Division of Racine Federated Inc.



B. Description: UL-listed or FM-Approved, fire-pump flowmeter system with capability to

indicate flow to not less than 175 percent of fire-pump rated capacity.

C. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

D. Sensor: Annubar probe, orifice plate, or venturi unless otherwise indicated. Sensor size shall

match pipe, tubing, flowmeter, and fittings.

E. Permanently Mounted Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2

inches in diameter. Include bracket or device for wall mounting.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Tubing Package: NPS 1/8 or NPS 1/4 soft copper or plastic tubing with copper or brass

fittings and valves.

F. Portable Flowmeter: Compatible with flow sensor; with dial not less than 4-1/2 inches in

diameter and with two 12-foot-long hoses in carrying case.

2.6 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-

cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: Test and inspect fire pumps according to UL 448 requirements for "Operation Test"

and "Manufacturing and Production Tests."

1. Verification of Performance: Rate fire pumps according to UL 448.

B. Fire pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment bases and anchorage provisions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements and for conditions affecting performance of fire pumps.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-pump installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Fire-Pump Installation Standard: Comply with NFPA 20 for installation of fire pumps, relief

valves, and related components.

B. Equipment Mounting:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Install fire pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements

for equipment bases and foundations specified in [Section 03301 "Miscellaneous Cast-

in-Place Concrete."]

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in

Section 15072 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and

Equipment."

3. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 15071

"Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment."

C. Install fire-pump suction and discharge piping equal to or larger than sizes required by

NFPA 20.

D. Support piping and pumps separately so weight of piping does not rest on pumps.

E. Install valves that are same size as connecting piping. Comply with requirements for fire-

protection valves specified in Section 13974 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes." Section 13930

"Wet-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers."

F. Install pressure gages on fire-pump suction and discharge flange pressure-gage tappings.

Comply with requirements for pressure gages specified in Section 13930 "Wet-Pipe Fire-

Suppression Sprinklers."

G. Install piping hangers and supports, anchors, valves, gages, and equipment supports according

to NFPA 20.

H. Install flowmeters and sensors. Install flowmeter-system components and make connections

according to NFPA 20 and manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not

factory mounted. Furnish copies of manufacturers' wiring diagram submittals to electrical

Installer.

J. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where

possible.

3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. Align split-case pump and driver shafts after complete unit has been leveled on concrete base,

grout has set, and anchor bolts have been tightened.

B. After alignment is correct, tighten anchor bolts evenly. Fill baseplate completely with grout,

with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place. Tighten anchor bolts after grout has hardened.

Check alignment and make required corrections.

C. Align piping connections.

D. Align pump and driver shafts for angular and parallel alignment according to HI 1.4 and to

tolerances specified by manufacturer.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping and valves specified in Section 13930 "Wet-Pipe Fire-

Suppression Sprinklers." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps and equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect relief-valve discharge to drainage piping or point of discharge.

D. Connect flowmeter-system meters, sensors, and valves to tubing.

E. Connect fire pumps to their controllers.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for fire-pump marking according to

NFPA 20.


A. Test each fire pump with its controller as a unit. Comply with requirements for electric-motor-

driver fire-pump controllers specified in Section 13929 "Controllers for Fire-Pump Drivers."

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing components, assemblies, and equipment including controller, test for

compliance with requirements.

2. Test according to NFPA 20 for acceptance and performance testing.

3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.

4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

E. Components, assemblies, and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests

and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



G. Furnish fire hoses in number, size, and length required to reach storm drain or other acceptable

location to dispose of fire-pump test water. Hoses are for tests only and do not convey to

Owner.

3.7 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. .

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain fire pumps.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Wet-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers


SECTION 13930 - WET-PIPE FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Fire-protection valves.

3. Sprinklers.

4. Alarm devices.

5. Manual control stations.

6. Control panels.

7. Pressure gages.


1. Section 13921 "Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps" for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance

pumps, and fire-pump controllers.

2. Section 13935 "Dry-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers" for dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

3. Section 13974 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for standpipe piping.

4. Section 13976 "Fire-Department Connections" for exposed-, flush-, and yard-type fire-department

connections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working

pressure higher than standard 175 psig, but not higher than 250 psig.

B. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working

pressure of 175 psig maximum.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is

connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they

are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections

are included if indicated.

B. Deluge Sprinkler System: Open sprinklers are attached to piping connected to water supply through

deluge valve. Fire-detection system, in same area as sprinklers, opens valve. Water flows into piping

system and discharges from attached sprinklers when valve opens.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. High-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 250-psig minimum working pressure.

C. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

D. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 <Insert number> percent, including

losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Automobile Parking Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

b. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

c. Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

d. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

e. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

f. Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

5. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm for 30 minutes.

b. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,

electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements

and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer


D. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping.

2. Compressed air piping.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. HVAC hydronic piping.

4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

F. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been

approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

G. Welding certificates.

H. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

I. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for

Aboveground Piping."

J. Field quality-control reports.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and

providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base

calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test

reports by a qualified professional engineer.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall

comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including

Four Stories in Height."

3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including

light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for

storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for

minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by

NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type

of sprinkler used on Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting

materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard Weight, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends

may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight,

seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

D. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:



a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Corcoran Piping System Co.

c. National Fittings, Inc.

d. Shurjoint Piping Products.

e. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

f. Victaulic Company.

2. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-

iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless

otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber

gasket, and bolts and nuts.

G. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig pressure rating with steel housing, rubber

O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





a. Victaulic Company.

2.3 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, pressure fittings.

D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

E. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-

metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

F. Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings:



a. Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.

2. Standard: UL 213.

3. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

G. Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:




b. Shurjoint Piping Products.

c. Victaulic Company.

2. Grooved-End, Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze castings.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper-tube dimensions, with design similar to

AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for hot and cold

water, and bolts and nuts.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing unless otherwise indicated.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.5 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Branch Outlet Fittings:




b. National Fittings, Inc.

c. Shurjoint Piping Products.

d. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

e. Victaulic Company.



4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match

connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:



a. AGF Manufacturing Inc.

b. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

d. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by

FM Global, listing.


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve.

5. Size: Same as connected piping.

6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.

C. Branch Line Testers:



a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.


c. Potter Roemer.


3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig.

4. Body Material: Brass.


6. Inlet: Threaded.

7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

D. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






b. Triple R Specialty.



e. Viking Corporation.


FM Global, listing.


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.



E. Adjustable Drop Nipples:



a. CECA, LLC.


c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.



4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals.


6. Length: Adjustable.


F. Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:



a. Fivalco Inc.

b. FlexHead Industries, Inc.

c. Gateway Tubing, Inc.


3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid.


5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

2.6 SPRINKLERS



1. AFAC Inc.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







B. General Requirements:


FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum.

3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

4. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767.

2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

3. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary"

temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Open Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element Removed: UL 199.

1. Characteristics:

a. Nominal 1/2-inch Orifice: With Discharge Coefficient K between 5.3 and 5.8.

E. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated.

2. Bronze.

3. Painted.

F. Special Coatings:

1. Wax.

2. Lead.

3. Corrosion-resistant paint.

G. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications.

Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

H. Sprinkler Guards:



a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

b. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.


d. Viking Corporation.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.7 ALARM DEVICES

A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:



a. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.





3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.

4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.

5. Size: 10-inch diameter.

6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.

7. Inlet: NPS 3/4.

8. Outlet: NPS 1 drain connection.

C. Water-Flow Indicators:



a. ADT Security Services, Inc.

b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.

c. Potter Electric Signal Company.

d. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.


f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.


3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.

4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary

contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard

element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated.


7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.

D. Pressure Switches:



a. AFAC Inc.

b. Barksdale, Inc.

c. Detroit Switch, Inc.

d. Potter Electric Signal Company.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

g. United Electric Controls Co.

h. Viking Corporation.


3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.

4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.

5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.

E. Valve Supervisory Switches:



a. Fire-Lite Alarms, Inc.; a Honeywell company.

b. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.




3. Type: Electrically supervised.


5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.

F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:



a. Potter Electric Signal Company.

b. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.




5. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.

2.8 MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS

A. Description: UL listed or FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze

ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating

instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.

2.9 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated, including

NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge

valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip;

electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole,

double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit

wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.

2. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL

STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent

accidental opening.

3. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and bronze ball

valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating


2.10 PRESSURE GAGES



1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.

2. Ashcroft, Inc.

3. Brecco Corporation.

4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.

B. Standard: UL 393.

C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

F. Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design

calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.

3.2 SERVICE-ENTRANCE PIPING

A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with

requirements for exterior piping in Section 02515 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.

3.3 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS

A. Install shutoff valve, backflow preventer, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at

connection to water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements for backflow preventers in

Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities

having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working

plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and

installation in NFPA 13.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized

and located according to NFPA 13.

G. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

H. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler

piping is connected to standpipes.

I. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain

piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor

drain or to outside building.

J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with

requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each

standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe

valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install

where they will not be subject to freezing.

M. Pressurize and check preaction sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices.

N. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.

O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves

specified in Section 15091 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for

sleeve seals specified in Section 15091 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping."

Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for

escutcheons specified in Section 15096 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have

finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications


B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment

having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service.

Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and

clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings

and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

H. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools

recommended by fitting manufacturer.

I. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and

welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-

steel pipe.

J. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.

Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings

according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

K. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.


according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

L. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to AWWA C606.

Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join copper tube and grooved-end fittings


M. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal fittings with tools


N. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping

systems.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF COVER SYSTEM FOR SPRINKLER PIPING

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Install cover system, brackets, and cover components for sprinkler piping according to manufacturer's

"Installation Manual" and with NFPA 13 or NFPA 13R for supports.

3.7 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and

specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply





D. Specialty Valves:

1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to

system.

2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.

3. Deluge Valves: Install in vertical position, in proper direction of flow, and in main supply to

deluge system. Install trim sets for drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves,

pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

3.8 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-

type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no

leaks exist.


equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.

5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.

C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves and pressure-

maintenance pumps.

3.13 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe

with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

C. Copper-tube, extruded-tee connections may be used for tee branches in copper tubing instead of specified

copper fittings. Branch-connection joints must be brazed.

D. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings;

and threaded joints.

2. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings

for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

3. Standard-weight galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for

steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.

4. Type L, hard copper tube with plain ends; cast- or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and

brazed joints.

5. Type L, hard copper tube with plain ends; copper pressure-seal fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

6. NPS 2, Type L, hard copper tube with roll-grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; grooved-

end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.

E. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:



2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings


F. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and larger, shall be the following:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.14 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Pendent, recessed, flush, and concealed sprinklers as indicated.

3. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.

4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.

3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

4. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.

5. Upright Pendent and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view;

rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids,

chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Dry-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers


SECTION 13935 - DRY-PIPE FIRE-SUPPRESSION SPRINKLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Fire-protection valves.

3. Fire-department connections.

4. Sprinkler specialty pipe fittings.

5. Sprinklers.

6. Alarm devices.


8. Control panels.

9. Pressure gages.


1. Section 13852 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for alarm devices not specified in this

Section.

2. Section 13921 "Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps" for fire pumps, pressure-maintenance

pumps, and fire-pump controllers.

3. Section 13930 "Wet-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers" for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.

4. Section 13974 "Fire-Suppression Standpipes" for standpipe piping.

5. Section 13976 "Fire-Department Connections" for exposed-, flush-, and yard-type fire-department

connections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working

pressure 175 psig maximum.


A. Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air.

Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve. Water

then flows into piping and discharges from sprinklers that are open.

B. Combined Dry-Pipe and Preaction Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping

containing compressed air. Fire-detection system in same area as sprinklers actuates tripping devices that

open dry-pipe valve without loss of air pressure and actuates fire alarm. Water discharges from sprinklers

that have opened.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Single-Interlock Preaction Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing low-

pressure air. Actuation of fire-detection system in same area as sprinklers opens deluge valve, permitting

water to flow into piping and to discharge from sprinklers that have opened.

D. Double-Interlock Preaction Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing low-

pressure air. Actuation of a fire-detection system in the same area as sprinklers opens the deluge valve

permitting water to flow into the sprinkler piping; a closed solenoid valve in the sprinkler piping is

opened by another fire-detection device; then water will discharge from sprinklers that have opened.


A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

B. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by a

qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through

water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

2. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications:

a. Automobile Parking Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

b. Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

c. General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

d. Office and Public Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.

3. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:

a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.

4. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing.

5. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler:

a. Office Spaces: 120 sq. ft..

b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft..

c. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

6. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm for 60 to 90 minutes.



B. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements




A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and



2. Compressed air piping.


4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:



B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been

approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

D. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

E. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance


Aboveground Piping."

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and



A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for

storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for

minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by

NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type

of sprinkler used on Project.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and

providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base




B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


C. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall

comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."

2. NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including

Four Stories in Height."

3. NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including

light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.


A. Standard Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be

factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless

steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.

D. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

G. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved










3. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or

ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.











F. Copper Pressure-Seal Fittings:



a. Viega; Plumbing & Heating Systems.


3. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end.

G. Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:







3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper tube, with dimensions and design similar to




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. General Requirements:


FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating:

a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.

b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig minimum.

3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.


5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

B. Dry-Pipe Valves:



a. AFAC Inc.

b. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.


e. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.


g. Viking Corporation.

2. Standard: UL 260

3. Design: Differential-pressure type.

4. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm

connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line

attachment.

5. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:

1) AFAC Inc.

2) Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation.

3) Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.

4) Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

5) Venus Fire Protection Ltd.

6) Victaulic Company.

7) Viking Corporation.

b. Standard: UL 260.

c. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping, bypass

valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer, pressure

ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable range, and 175-psig outlet pressure.

6. Air Compressor:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering


following:

1) Gast Manufacturing Inc.

2) General Air Products, Inc,

3) Viking Corporation.

b. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing.

c. Motor Horsepower: Fractional.

d. Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase.

C. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. AFAC Inc.





4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.

5. Size: NPS 3/4.

6. End Connections: Threaded.

2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. General Requirements for Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service.

B. Branch Outlet Fittings:




b. National Fittings, Inc.






4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts.

5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.

6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match

connected branch piping.

8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.

C. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:








FM Global, listing.


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve.



D. Branch Line Testers:



a. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.


c. Potter Roemer.



4. Body Material: Brass.


6. Inlet: Threaded.

7. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped.

8. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.

E. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:




b. Triple R Specialty.





FM Global, listing.


4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Adjustable Drop Nipples:



a. CECA, LLC.


c. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.



4. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM O-ring seals.


6. Length: Adjustable.


G. Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings:



a. Fivalco Inc.

b. FlexHead Industries, Inc.

c. Gateway Tubing, Inc.


3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid.


5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.

2.7 SPRINKLERS



1. AFAC Inc.







B. General Requirements:


FM Global, listing.

2. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig maximum.

3. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.

4. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig minimum.

C. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:

1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with discharge coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary"

temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

D. Sprinkler Finishes:

1. Chrome plated.

E. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications.

Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers.

1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.

2. Sidewall Mounting: Chrome-plated steel , one piece, flat.

F. Sprinkler Guards:








3. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

2.8 ALARM DEVICES


B. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:








3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.

4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.

5. Size: 10-inch diameter.

6. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.

7. Inlet: NPS 3/4.

8. Outlet: NPS 1 drain connection.

C. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:



a. Fire-Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. Notifier; a Honeywell company.



3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.

4. Size: 6-inch minimum diameter.

5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.




a. AFAC Inc.

b. Barksdale, Inc.

c. Detroit Switch, Inc.

d. Potter Electric Signal Company.

e. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.

f. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

g. United Electric Controls Co.

h. Viking Corporation.








a. Fire-Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company.









A. Description: UL listed or FM Global approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and

bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating


2.10 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned type control panel as indicated, including



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





1. Panels: UL listed and FM Global approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector

circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.



accidental opening.




2.11 PRESSURE GAGES



1. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Division.

2. Ashcroft, Inc.

3. Brecco Corporation.

4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.


C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch diameter.

D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig minimum.

E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

F. Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION





A. Connect sprinkler piping to water-service piping for service entrance to building. Comply with

requirements in Section 02515 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for exterior piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with requirements in

Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping" for interior piping.

B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories indicated at connection to water-

distribution piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.






plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

E. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized

and located according to NFPA 13.

F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

G. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler

piping is connected to standpipes.

H. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department connections and check

valves. Drain to floor drain or to outside building.

I. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

J. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls.

2. Electrical power system.

3. Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with

requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each

standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft metal seated globe

valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install

where they will not be subject to freezing.

N. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



O. Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves


Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for


R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for









D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.


F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and





G. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.



H. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" Chapter.

I. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to AWWA C606.



J. Copper-Tubing, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and copper pressure-seal fittings with tools


K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping

systems.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply







system.

2. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip

valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

a. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.

b. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: Install shutoff valves to permit servicing without

shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling; pressure regulator or

switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable

range; and 175-psig maximum inlet pressure.

c. Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressed-air piping system.

3.7 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-

type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.

C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION


B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."





leaks exist.


equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Start and run air compressors.




C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain specialty valves.



with threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings.

C. Copper-tube, extruded-tee connections may be used for tee branches in copper tubing instead of specified

copper fittings. Branch-connection joints must be brazed.

D. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings;

and threaded joints.



3. Type L, hard copper tube with plain ends; cast- or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and brazed

joints.

4. Type L, hard copper tube with plain ends; copper pressure-seal fittings; and pressure-sealed joints.

5. NPS 2, Type L, hard copper tube with roll-grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; grooved-

end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.

E. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be the following:



F. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 5 and NPS 6, shall be the following:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.13 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE

A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:

1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers.

2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Dry pendent sprinklers.

3. Wall Mounting: Dry sidewall sprinklers.

4. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright sprinklers.

B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.

1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate.

2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.

3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon.

4. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view;

rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids,

chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Fire-Suppression Standpipes


SECTION 13974 - FIRE-SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY



2. Fire-protection specialty valves.

3. Hose connections.

4. Alarm devices.


6. Control panels.

7. Pressure gages.


1. Section 13852 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for connections to alarm devices.

2. Section 13915 "General-Duty Valves for Water-Based Fire-Suppression Piping."

3. Section 13930 "Wet-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers" for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.

4. Section 13935 "Dry-Pipe Fire-Suppression Sprinklers" for dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

5. Section 13976 "Fire-Department Connections" for exposed wall-mounted and yard fire hydrants.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Standpipe Piping: Fire-suppression standpipe piping designed to operate at working

pressure 175 psig maximum.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-suppression standpipes.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For standpipe systems indicated to comply with performance requirements



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Coordination Drawings: Fire-suppression standpipes, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:


2. Compressed-air piping.


B. Qualification Data: For Installer and professional engineer.

C. Approved Standpipe Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 14, that have been approved

by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance


Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping."

G. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-suppression standpipes specialties to include in emergency,




1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-suppression standpipes

and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base




B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


D. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing

shall comply with NFPA 14.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manual Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes NPS 2-1/2 hose connections. Has small water

supply to maintain water in standpipes. Piping is wet, but water must be pumped into standpipes to satisfy

demand.


A. Standard-Pressure, Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum

working pressure.

B. Delegated Design: Design fire-suppression standpipes, including comprehensive engineering analysis by

a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Fire-suppression standpipe design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is as follows:

a. NPS 2-1/2 Hose Connections: 100 psig.



materials and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.4 BLACK STEEL PIPE AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS

A. Schedule 40: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B; with factory- or field-formed ends to accommodate

joining method.

B. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M, threaded.

C. Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

D. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:










3. Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-

iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






2.5 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS

A. Schedule 40: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B; with factory- or field-formed ends to accommodate

joining method.

B. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M,

Standard Weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

C. Galvanized, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions:

1. ASME B16.39, Class 150.

2. Hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface.

4. Threaded ends.

E. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe:




b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.



2. Fittings for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Galvanized, ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-

iron casting; ASTM A 106/A 106M, steel pipe; or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with

dimensions matching steel pipe.

3. Fittings for Grooved-End, Galvanized-Steel Pipe:

a. AWWA C606 for steel-pipe dimensions.

b. Ferrous housing sections.

c. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water.

d. Bolts and nuts.

e. Minimum Pressure Rating:

1) NPS 8 and Smaller: 600 psig.

2.6 COPPER TUBE AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





F. Grooved-Joint, Copper-Tube Appurtenances:







3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: To fit copper tube dimensions, with design similar to



2.7 SPECIALTY VALVES


1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

2. Pressure Rating:

a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig minimum.

b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 250 psig minimum.

3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.


5. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.

B. Alarm Valves:






d. Venus Fire Protection Ltd.


f. Viking Corporation.


3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.

4. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, retarding

chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.

5. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain without valves and separate from main drain piping.

6. Drip Cup Assembly: Pipe drain with check valve to main drain piping.

C. Pressure-Reducing Valves:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. CLA-VAL Automatic Control Valves.


c. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

d. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

e. OCV Control Valves.

f. Potter Roemer.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Division.

2. UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing device.


4. Material: Brass or bronze.

5. Inlet: Female pipe threads.

6. Outlet: Threaded with or without adapter having male hose threads.

7. Pattern: Angle or gate.

8. Finish: Rough brass or bronze.

D. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:







4. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.

5. Size: NPS 3/4.


2.8 HOSE CONNECTIONS

A. Adjustable-Valve Hose Connections:



a. Brooks Equipment Co., Inc.

b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.

c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

d. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

e. GMR International Equipment Corporation.

f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

g. Potter Roemer.

h. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

i. Wilson & Cousins Inc.

j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products Division.

2. Standard: UL 668 hose valve, with integral UL 1468 reducing or restricting pressure-control

device, for connecting fire hose.



5. Size: NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2, as indicated.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



7. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose valve threads

according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.


9. Pressure-Control Device Type: Pressure reducing.


B. Nonadjustable-Valve Hose Connections:



a. Brooks Equipment Co., Inc.

b. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.

c. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

d. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

e. GMR International Equipment Corporation.

f. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

g. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

h. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division.

i. NIBCO INC.

j. Potter Roemer.

k. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

l. Viking Corporation.

m. Wilson & Cousins Inc.

2. Standard: UL 668 hose valve for connecting fire hose.



5. Size: NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2-1/2, as indicated.


7. Outlet: Male hose threads with lugged cap, gasket, and chain. Include hose valve threads

according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department threads.



2.9 ALARM DEVICES


B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:




b. Notifier; a Honeywell company.



3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.

4. Size: 6-inch minimum diameter.

5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.

C. Water-Flow Indicators:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





a. ADT Security Services, Inc.

b. McDonnell & Miller; ITT Industries.




f. Watts Industries (Canada) Inc.


3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.

4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary

contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard

element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed.

5. Type: Paddle operated.


7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.




a. Barksdale, Inc.

b. Detroit Switch, Inc.




f. United Electric Controls Co.

g. Viking Corporation.
















F. Indicator-Post Supervisory Switches:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





a. Potter Electric Signal Company.

b. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.




5. Design: Signals that controlled indicator-post valve is in other than fully open position.


A. Description: UL listed or FM Global approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 pipe nipple, and

bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating


2.11 CONTROL PANELS

A. Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated, including





1. Panels: UL listed and FM Global approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector

circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries.



accidental opening.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION




3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of piping connections

before installation.

B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction, framing for hose-

station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and stations are to be installed.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





A. Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to water-service piping at service entrance into building.

Comply with requirements for exterior piping in Section 02515 "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service

Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories at connection to fire-suppression water-

service piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water service.


A. Connect fire-suppression standpipe piping to building's interior water-distribution piping. Comply with

requirements for interior piping in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Install shutoff valve, pressure gage, drain, and other accessories at connection to water-distribution

piping.

C. Install shutoff valve, check valve, pressure gage, and drain at connection to water supply.






plans.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of fire-suppression standpipe

piping.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for seismic-restraint device

materials and installation.

D. Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe

sizes.

E. Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.

F. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department connections and check

valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.

G. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

H. Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14. Comply with

requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



I. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with

connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe

between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they are not subject to

freezing.

J. Drain dry-type standpipe system piping.

K. Pressurize and check dry-type standpipe system piping and air-pressure maintenance devices.

L. Fill wet-type standpipe system piping with water.

M. Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on wet-type fire-suppression standpipe piping in areas

subject to freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Section 15777 "Heat Tracing for

Fire-Suppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Section 15081 "Fire-Suppression Systems

Insulation."

N. Connect compressed-air or nitrogen supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping.

O. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring:

1. Pressure gages and controls.

2. Electrical power system.

3. Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves


Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for


R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for









D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.


F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



G. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.



H. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606.



I. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed

Joints" Chapter.

J. Copper-Tubing Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of tube according to AWWA C606.



K. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping

systems.




B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of water supply







system.

2. Alarm Valves: Install bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.

3. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip

valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment.

a. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping.

b. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: Install shutoff valves to permit servicing without

shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling; pressure regulator or

switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig adjustable

range; and 175-psig maximum inlet pressure.

c. Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressed-air piping system.

3.8 HOSE-CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes.

B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.

C. Install NPS 2-1/2 hose connections with quick-disconnect NPS 2-1/2 by NPS 1-1/2 reducer adapter and

flow-restricting device.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Install wall-mounted-type hose connections in cabinets. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish matching

valves, inside cabinet where water-supply piping penetrates cabinet. Install valves at angle required for

connection of fire hose. Comply with requirements for cabinets in Section 10522 "Fire Protection

Cabinets."

3.9 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type fire-department connections.

B. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION


B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."





leaks exist.


equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System Acceptance" Chapter.


5. Start and run air compressors.




C. Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.



with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints.

B. Standard-pressure, wet-type fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 4 and smaller, shall be one of the

following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and

threaded joints.

2. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and

threaded joints.

3. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for


4. Schedule 40, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for


5. Type L, hard copper tube with plain ends; cast- or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings; and

brazed joints.

6. Type L, hard copper tube with roll-grooved ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-tube

couplings; and grooved joints.

C. Standard-pressure, wet-type fire-suppression standpipe piping, NPS 5 to NPS 8, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Fire-Department Connections


SECTION 13976 - FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-type fire-department connections.

2. Flush-type fire-department connections.

3. Yard-type fire-department connections.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and

profiles, and finishes for each fire-department connection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXPOSED-TYPE FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION



1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet.

2. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Company, Inc.

3. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.

4. Fire Protection Products, Inc.

5. GMR International Equipment Corporation.

6. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.


8. Wilson & Cousins Inc.


C. Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting.

D. Pressure Rating: 175 psig minimum.

E. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Fire-Department Connections


F. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and threads.

Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers.

G. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain.

H. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type.

I. Outlet: Back, with pipe threads.

J. Number of Inlets: Two.

K. Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE."

L. Finish: Polished chrome plated.

M. Outlet Size: NPS 6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of fire-department connections.

B. Examine roughing-in for fire-suppression standpipe system to verify actual locations of piping

connections before fire-department connection installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-type fire-department connections.

B. Install automatic (ball-drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection.



City of New Orleans Electric Traction ElevatorsCriminal Evidence Processing Complex 14210 - 1

SECTION 14210ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: Passenger electric traction elevators.

B. All terms of this specification shall have their meaning defined in the American Society of Mechanical Engineers Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators A17.1 and hereinafter referred to as the ANSI A17.1 Code, including all revisions and authorized changes to date.

1.02 RELATED WORK AND RELATED SECTIONS

A. Provide the following in accordance with the requirements of the ANSI A17.1 Code plus applicable Model Building Code. For specific rules, refer to ANSI A17.1. State or local requirements must be used if more stringent.

1. Clear, plumb hoistway, with variations not to exceed 1'' at any point in the first 100 ft. Tolerance may increase at 1/32” for each additional 10 ft. up to a maximum of 2”. Minimum two hours of fire resistance rating of hoistway walls.

2. 75° Bevel guards on all projections, recesses or setbacks over 2'' (4'' for A17.1 2000 areas) except for loading or unloading.

3. Supports for rail brackets at pit, each floor and overhead. Maximum allowable vertical spacing of rail supports, without backing.

4. Divider beams between hoistway at each floor and overhead, for guide rail bracket supports.

5. Hoist beam(s) in the overhead.

6. Temporary electrical power for each group of elevator hoistways for installation equipment, 220VAC, single phase, 60Hz., GFCI protected.

7. Light outlet for each elevator, in center of hoistway.

8. Recesses, supports, and patching, as required, to accommodate hall button boxes, signal fixtures, etc.

9. All barricades outside elevator hoistways as required by regulatory agencies.

10. Dry pit reinforced to sustain normal vertical forces from rails and buffers. Pit floor to be level and free of debris.

11. Convenience outlet and light fixture in pit with switch located adjacent to the access door.



12. Where access to the pit is by means of the lowest hoistway entrance, vertical ladder of non-combustible material extending 42'' minimum above sill of access door or handgrips shall be provided to the same height.

13. Enclosed and protected machine room or control room depending on equipment configuration.

14. Access to the machine room or control room and machinery space as required by the governing code or authority.

15. Lighting, convenience outlets, heating, cooling and ventilation of machine room or control room, and machinery space. Machine room or control room temperature to be maintained between 55 and 90 degrees F. Machinery space temperature to be maintained between 32 and 122 degrees F when machine is in overhead.

16. A fused disconnect switch for each elevator and light switch located per the National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70), and where practical, located inside the machine room or control room adjacent to the door.

17. Suitable copper feeder, ground and branch wiring circuits for signal system and power operated door, included main line switch. Feeder and branch wiring circuits for car light and fan, including main line switch.

18. Convenience outlet and telephone outlet on control panel.

19. Cutout through hoistway wall for wiring ducts and conduit. Coordinate location with elevator furnished.

20. All conduit and wire runs remote from either the machine room or control room or the hoistways.

21. Heat, smoke or products of combustion sensing devices connected to elevator machine room or control room terminals when such devices are required. Make contacts on the sensors should be sided for 120 volt D.C.

22. Finished flooring in elevator cab.

23. Construct entrance walls and finished floors after door frames and sills are in place. Verify rough opening size.

24. The interface of the elevator wall with the hoistway entrance assembly shall be in strict compliance with the elevator requirements.

25. Filling and grouting around entrances.

26. For sill support by the elevator contractor, hoistway capable of accepting anchor stud type fasteners must be provided.

27. Coordinate fixtures in elevator hoistway partitions.

28. Where openings occur, all walls and sill supports must be plumb.



29. Power for sump pump. Refer to Division 15 Sections for Sump pump and pit drainage.

30. Cameras and Card Readers: Refer to Division 16 Section: Security Systems.


A. The elevator installer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing and installing elevator equipment with not less than ten years successful experience.

B. All designs, clearances, construction, workmanship and material, unless specifically excepted, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the ANSI code, handicap accessibility, Americans with Disabilities Act and all codes having legal jurisdiction. The ANSI A17.1 Code shall govern except where codes having legal jurisdiction include more rigid requirements or conflict with the ANSI A17.1 Code.

C. The elevator shall follow design and manufacturing procedures, certified in accordance with International Organization for Standardization (ISO9001-2000) to meet product and service requirements for quality assurance for new products.

D. Seismic Requirements: Design Category B.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, wiring diagrams and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine control room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

G. Warranty: Warranty specified in this Section.

H. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section.

I. Submit complete working drawings, showing the location of all equipment, loads, and all other information necessary to render a totally functional elevator for the Project.



J. Renewal Parts Catalogs and Maintenance Instructions.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. The elevator included in these specifications shall receive regular maintenance on each unit for a period of 12 months after the completion of work described herein or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier.

B. Trained employees shall make periodic examinations and perform work including necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling and replacing parts to keep the elevator in operation, except parts that require replacement because of accidents, vandalism, misuse or negligence by parties other than the manufacturer.

C. The elevator installer shall perform all work under this Agreement, except emergency minor adjustment call-back service, during regular working hours. The elevator installer shall provide emergency minor adjustment call back service, during regular working hours.

D. Should the owner request that examinations, cleaning, lubrication, adjustments, repairs, replacements or emergency minor adjustment callback service (unless included above) be performed on other than the elevator contractor's regular working hours of his regular working days, the elevator contractor shall absorb the straight time labor charges and the owner shall compensate the elevator contractor for the overtime premium, travel time and expense at his normal billing rates.

E. The elevator control system can incorporate a built-in remote diagnostic module to relay the constant status of the elevator and control system to a 24 hours 7 days a week central monitoring facility. The remote monitoring device is capable of transmitting information on the current status of the elevator, including any malfunction, system error or shutdown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS/OPERATIONS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. KONE Inc.

2. Otis Elevator Co.

3. Schindler Elevator Corp., as the basis of design, 504-613-2304.

4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.



B. Manufacturers other than Schindler: These Specifications and the Drawings were developed using Schindler Elevator Company requirements for materials, dimensions and construction of hoistways and pits. If approved products from a manufacturer other than Schindler is used on the Project, any adjustments to dimensions of pit, hoistway, supporting framing, over-rides and associate components shall be accomplished by the Contractor and submitted to the Architect for review and approval before submission of shop drawings. Changes from the Documents shall be highlighted for ready recognition. Any additional cost for adjustments due to the use of an optional manufacturer, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2.02 ELEVATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS

A. Elevator Equipment Summary:

1. Machine Room Type: Machine Room Less

2. Counterweight Location: Side

3. Service: Hospital/Service

4. Quantity of Units: 2

5. Capacity: 5000 lbs. AIA

6. Speed: 200 fpm

7. Travel: 63’-0” XX for Elevator 1: 47’-3” XX for Elevator 2

8. Landings: 5 for Elevator 1: 5 for Elevator 2

9. Front Openings: 6 for Elevator 1: 5 for Elevator 2

10. Rear Openings: 1 for Elevator 1 at First Floor: 1 for Elevator 2 at First Floor

11. Operation: Microprocessor Group Automatic Operation

12. Platform Size: 6'-1'' wide x 10'-7” deep

13. Door Type: Two Speed Side Opening

14. Cab Height: 9’-0”

15. Guide Rails: 15 lb. per foot

16. Hoistway Entrances: 4'-0'' wide x 8’-0' high

17. Power Supply: 480 Volts 3 Phase 60 Hz

18. Contract Maintenance: 12 months with emergency callback, during regular working hours



B. Additional Features:

1. Braille and Audible Signals

2. Dispatch Protection

3. Door Nudging

4. Emergency Lighting

5. Failed Car

6. False Car Canceling

7. Firefighter 's Service

8. Independent Service Feature

9. Infrared Light Curtain Door Protection

10. Inspection Service

11. Load Weigh Bypass

12. Locking Service Panel in Car Operating Panel

13. Remote Monitoring Capable

14. Telephone (ADA compliant)

15. Rough-in for camera in elevator cabs and flush mounted card reader for elevator control in the main car operating panel as specified in Division 16 Section “Security Systems” and as shown on the Security System Drawings.

2.03 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. Stainless steel with #4 satin finish.

B. Thresholds and hoistway entrance sills: Extruded aluminum.

C. Machines, microprocessor controller, controls, pushbuttons and wiring: UL, CSA or CUL approved.

D. Buffers, attachment brackets and anchors: Designed and sized according to code with safety factors.

E. Machine shall consist of gearless permanent magnet AC motor with integral drive sheave, normal and emergency brakes.

F. A manual brake release lever shall be provided attached to the control cabinet for rescue of passengers. A visual display shall be provided within the control cabinet, which indicates car position, speed and direction.



G. The machine shall be mounted to support channels.

H. A governor shall be mounted to the rail system in the hoistway overhead and shall be capable of manual reset from outside the hoistway.

2.04 CAB

A. Cab: 9'-0'' high from finished floor to underside of canopy.

B. Cab Walls: 115 Cab of #4 satin stainless steel with “pins and pads”; Schindler, as the basis of design.

C. Ceiling: SC04 #4 satin stainless steel with 6 panels and 6 disc lights; Schindler, as the basis of design.

D. Front returns shall be of integral construction. Transoms shall run full width of cab and will be finished in #4 stainless steel.

E. Cab doors shall be flush design both sides, rib construction, finished in #4 stainless steel.

F. Exhaust Fan: One speed mounted in cab transom or canopy.

G. Handrail: 1/4'' x 2'' flat in brushed aluminum mounted on the side walls.

H. Threshold: Extruded aluminum.

I. Cab Finish Flooring: Luxury Vinyl Tile, LVT-1, refer to finish schedule drawings sheet A-7.01.

J. Rough-in for camera in elevator cabs and card reader for elevator control in the main car operating panel as specified in Division 16 Section “Security Systems” and as shown on the Security System Drawings.

2.05 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway door and frame construction shall be UL rated, with required fire rating. Doors shall be of rigid flush panel construction and contain sound-deadening material. Frames shall be securely fastened at the corners to form a unit frame. Frames shall be bolted.

B. Exposed areas of the corridor frames shall be finished in #4 satin stainless steel.

C. Doors shall be finished in #4 satin stainless steel.

D. Sills shall be extruded aluminum on all floors.

2.06 CAB FIXTURES

A. The main car operating panel shall be mounted in the return and comply with handicap requirements. Pushbuttons and illuminating indications shall be included for each floor served, and emergency buttons and switches shall be provided per code. Switches for car light and accessories shall be provided.



B. The following cab fixtures shall also be provided:

1. Car Lantern(s)

2. Digital Car Position Indicator

3. Locking Service Panel in Car Operating Panel

4. Telephone (ADA compliant)

5. Card Reader in main operating panel to limit access to Fourth Floor, as per Division 16 Section “Security Systems”

2.07 HALL FIXTURES

A. An up button and down button at intermediate floors and a single button at each terminal floor at a height to comply with handicap requirements.

B. Hall Lanterns: Up at first floor, up or down at intermediate floors and down at top floors.

C. Hall Fixtures: Schindler Vandal-Resistant HT Series, as the basis of design. Verify exact location of hall fixtures with the Architect.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Prior to commencing elevator installation, inspect hoistways, hoistway openings, pits and machine rooms as constructed. Verify that hoistway, pit, machine rooms or control rooms and openings are of correct size and within tolerance and are ready for work of this section. Notify General Contractor in writing of any dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of elevator work. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. Arrange for temporary electrical power to be available for installation work and testing of elevator components.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR SYSTEM

A. Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays.

B. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings, and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.

C. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort. Adjust doors to prevent opening of doors at any landing on the corridor side unless the car is at rest at that landing, or is in the leveling zone and stopping at that landing. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve within 1/4'' of the landing.



3.03 PERMITS AND TESTS

A. The elevator contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary Municipal and State permits and relating to the installation of the elevator at his expense, shall make all tests as required by governing codes in effect at the time of the award. The elevator contractor shall be reimbursed for any permits, tests or equipment necessitated by governing authorities after the date of the award.

END OF SECTION



This page is blank.


City of New Orleans Vehicle LiftsCriminal Evidence Processing Complex 14450 - 1

SECTION 14450VEHICLE LIFTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and design to install two heavy duty two-post, frame contact, above ground lift design for lifting vehicle weighing up to 10,000 lbs.


1. Section 03300 Concrete.

2. Section 15211 Compressed-Air Systems.

3. Section 16140 Wiring Devices.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Automotive Lift Institute (ALI):

1. ANSI/ALI ALCTV -2006 - Standard for Automotive Lifts - Safety Requirements for Construction, Testing and Validation.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA Standards Publication 250-2003, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 201 - Garage Equipment.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this Section with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Comply with Section 013030 Submittals Procedures.

B. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing work of this Section to verify project requirements, substrate conditions and coordination with other building subtrades, and to review manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Section 01 31 10 - Project Management and Coordination.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit specified products as follows:



1. Manufacturer's product data, including manufacturer's technical data sheet.

2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

3. Catalog pages illustrating products to be incorporated into project.

4. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows:

1. Full layout of all lifts in the facility with dimensions and details shown for services and conduits between lift(s) and the control console(s).

D. Qualification Statements: Submit letter of verification that installer is acceptable to the manufacturer.


A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures. Include:

a. Manufacturer's instructions detailing maintenance requirements.b. Parts catalog showing complete list of available parts.c. Replacement parts with cuts and identifying numbers.d. Videography of equipment operation and maintenance.

C. Warranty Documentation: Submit warranty documents specified.


A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer:a. Having five years’ experience manufacturing components similar to or exceeding

requirements of project.b. Having sufficient capacity to produce and deliver required materials without causing

delay in work.c. Capable of providing field service representation during construction.

2. Installer: Acceptable to manufacturer.


A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:

1. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels intact and in sizes to suit project.



B. Storage and Handling Requirements:

1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Refer to Contract Conditions and Section 1740 - Warranties for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under other Contract Documents.

1. Warranty Term: Twenty-five years structural, 10 years Mechanical, plus limited lifetime cylinder seal warranty commencing on date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 HYDRAULIC/MECHANICAL IN-GROUND LIFT SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer:

1. Basis of Design: Mohawka. Contact: Mohawk Resources, LDT., P.O. Box 110, 65 Vrooman Ave., Amsterdam,

NY 12010, Telephone: 800-833-2006; 518-842-1289; www.mohawklifts.com.

2. Provide components and materials specified from a single manufacturer.

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Description:

1. Type: Provide the following:a. Drop-in, bolt-in, recessed, removable and re-locatable scissor-style vehicle lift system

assembly. Basis of Design: Mohawk Model System 1.

2. Regulatory Requirements:a. Equipment must be supplied by all ANSI, ALI/ETL Safety booklet, ANSI operations,

Installation and maintenance booklets, ANSI/ALI ALOIM-2008 Standards and lifting point guides1) Equipment must be supplied with all ANSI, ALI/ETL safety decals. Decals must be

permanently placed on the lift in clear view. For the operator. 2) The manufacturer must be a firm regularly engaged in the design and manufacturing of

the type equipment specified herein for a minimum of five years, manufacturing two

B. Performance Criteria:

1. Lift System: To ANSI/ALI ALCTV - 2006.

2. Electrical Control Console Enclosure: To UL 201, NEMA 4X rated.



3. Lift Capacity: Capable of raising 10,000 lbs. (4535.92 kg) minimum

4. Lifting Stroke: 72” minimum measured from floor to under swing arm.

5. Lifting Height: 78 ½” with 3” truck adapter. 81 ½” with 6” truck adaptor, 84 ½” when the 3” and 6” adaptor are stacked to 9”.

6. Lift Speed: 45 second minimum.

7. Synchronization: Hydraulic fluid displacement using no chains, cables, or overhead obstruction.

8. Lifting height: 6’ under arm,

9. Overall Width: 11’-10” adjustable

10. Width between Posts: 10’ adjustable

11. Weight: 2500 lbs. (1088.62 kg.)

12. Minimum Concrete Floor Requirements: 4000 psi

13. Design Load Factor of Safety: 3:1.

C. Assembly: Include the following components.

1. Concrete containment.a. Concrete Containment Drainage: Drainage: Drains to the oil/water separator.

2. Continuous recess assembly.

3. Movable carriage travel frame and insert.

4. Lift unit assemblies.

5. Rack.

6. Accessory adapters.

7. Hydraulic system.

8. Freestanding control console.

9. Safety system.a. Pendant control mechanism, NEMA 4 rated, rated for use in NEC Class 1, Div. 2

hazardous locations.b. Emergency E-Stop Buttons: Equip to de-energize power to all outputs of the printed

circuit board (PCB) control system and optional pendant, if specified. Provide requirement for resetting the E-stop to re-energize the control system.

c. Lift Cylinders: Operated from pedestal.

D. Operation:



1. Hydraulic/mechanical.

E. Electrical Requirements:

1. Motor Rating: 2.5 HP/208-230v, Single-phase

F. Lifting Arm: Constructed of 2 piece of Grade A 55 B structural tubing

G. Tubing must have a minimum tensile strength of 75,000 PSI and minimum yield strength of 60,000 PSI.


A. Certification: Provide lift(s) that meet(s) the Automotive Lift Institute (ALI) Certification Program as accredited by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrates previously installed under other sections or contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to vehicle lift installation.

1. Inform Architect and owner’s representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

2. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval from Owner’s Representative and Architect.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Ensure structure or substrate is adequate to support vehicle lift(s).

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installation of components in accordance with Section 01700 – Execution Requirements.

B. Coordinate vehicle lift work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays.

C. Install vehicle lift(s) in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Accurately fit, align, securely fasten and install free from distortion or defects.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust components and systems for correct function and operation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Lubricate moving parts to operate smoothly and fit accurately.



3.05 CLEANING

A. Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01710 - Final Cleaning.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstration and Training:

1. Coordinate requirements for vehicle lift demonstration with Section 01730- Operations and Maintenance Data.

2. Instruct Owner's designated maintenance personnel in care, adjustment and operation of vehicle lift(s).

3. Provide competent instructor for not less than 1 four-hour training session(s) after completion and acceptance of work. Provide video of training as described as Section 01730- Operations and maintenance Data.

4. Forward statement to Owner and Architect countersigned by maintenance personnel confirming that these instructions have been provided.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed product from damage during construction in accordance with Section 01710- Cleaning.

B. Repair or replace damage to adjacent materials caused by vehicle lift installation.

3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Coordinate maintenance requirements with Section 01700 – Contract Closeout and Section 01730- Operation and Maintenance Data.

END OF SECTION

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment


SECTION 15056 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment


SECTION 15057 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY





1.2 COORDINATION


following:





PART 2 - PRODUCTS





sea level.








© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



























motors.





2. Split phase.




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




thrust loading.





to normal range.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment


SECTION 15058 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY





1.2 COORDINATION


following:





PART 2 - PRODUCTS





sea level.








© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



























motors.





2. Split phase.




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




thrust loading.





to normal range.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment


SECTION 15061 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

4. Fastener systems.

5. Pipe positioning systems.

6. Equipment supports.


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall

withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.




A. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig

minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig

minimum compressive strength.

C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, positioning system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for

positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Pipe Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste

piping connections to each plumbing fixture.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

M. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of

length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09960 "High-Performance

Coatings."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4

to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two

rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

3. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

4. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

5. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

6. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

7. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

8. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



M. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and

waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment


SECTION 15062 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

4. Fastener systems.



A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including

comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance

requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according

to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.




A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

B. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig

minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

B. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

C. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

D. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air

temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete

with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building

materials where used.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for



A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for

grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze

pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less

than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use

operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger

and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten

inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

L. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.



3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.



4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING




1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply


3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for

general service applications.

F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing.

G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4

to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.

7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and

with U-bolt to retain pipe.

J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Vibration Controls for HVAC


SECTION 15068 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Restrained-spring isolators.

3. Pipe-riser resilient supports.

4. Resilient pipe guides.

5. Spring hangers.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:.



the following:

a. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.

b. Isolation Technology, Inc.

c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

d. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

5. Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.

6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.2 RESTRAINED-SPRING ISOLATORS

A. Freestanding, Laterally Stable, Open-Spring Isolators with Vertical-Limit Stop Restraint:.



the following:


b. Isolation Technology, Inc.

c. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

d. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Housing: Steel housing with vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight

being removed.

a. Base with holes for bolting to structure with an elastomeric isolator pad attached to

the underside. Bases shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

b. Top plate with threaded mounting holes.

c. Internal leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

5. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

6. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

7. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.3 PIPE-RISER RESILIENT SUPPORT

A. Description: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of two steel tubes separated by a

minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Vertical-Limit Stops: Steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical

travel in both directions.

2. Maximum Load Per Support: 500 psigon isolation material providing equal isolation in

all directions.

2.4 RESILIENT PIPE GUIDES

A. Description: Telescopic arrangement of two steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement

separated by a minimum 1/2-inch-thick neoprene.

1. Factory-Set Height Guide with Shear Pin: Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable

to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet

location requirements.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.5 SPRING HANGERS

A. Combination Coil-Spring and Elastomeric-Insert Hanger with Spring and Insert in

Compression:



the following:


b. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

c. Mason Industries, Inc.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a

maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring

at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.

9. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Vibration Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment


SECTION 15071 - VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Elastomeric isolation pads.

2. Elastomeric isolation mounts.

3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each vibration isolation device.

1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration

isolation bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION PADS

A. Elastomeric Isolation Pads:



the following:


b. California Dynamics Corporation.

c. Isolation Technology, Inc.

d. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.

e. Mason Industries, Inc.

f. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

g. Vibration Isolation.

h. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Fabrication: Single or multiple layers of sufficient durometer stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area.

3. Size: Factory or field cut to match requirements of supported equipment.

4. Pad Material: Oil and water resistant with elastomeric properties.

5. Surface Pattern: Ribbed pattern.

6. Infused nonwoven cotton or synthetic fibers.

7. Load-bearing metal plates adhered to pads.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Double-Deflection, Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



the following:









2. Mounting Plates:

a. Top Plate: Encapsulated steel load transfer top plates, factory drilled and

threaded with threaded studs or bolts.

b. Baseplate: Encapsulated steel bottom plates with holes provided for anchoring to

support structure.

3. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

2.3 RESTRAINED ELASTOMERIC ISOLATION MOUNTS

A. Restrained Elastomeric Isolation Mounts:



the following:







© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





2. Description: All-directional isolator with restraints containing two separate and opposing

elastomeric elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from

contacting the housing during normal operation.

a. Housing: Cast-ductile iron or welded steel.

b. Elastomeric Material: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric

material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VIBRATION CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment


SECTION 15076 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


1/16 inch thick.


3. Background Color: Black.



2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the

size of principal lettering.


B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16

inch thick.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Red.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2

inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater

viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal

lettering.

G. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

H. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS


indicating service, and showing flow direction.


C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 09960 "High-Performance

Coatings."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and

exterior exposed locations as follows:


2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.



piping.


6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.


C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Blue.

b. Letter Color: White.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Black.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment


SECTION 15077 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



2. Pipe labels.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTAL


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:


1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: Black.

3. Background Color: White.



2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the

size of principal lettering.


B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,

Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the

Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

2.2 PIPE LABELS


indicating service, and showing flow direction.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION



encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and

exterior exposed locations as follows:


2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.



piping.


6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment.


B. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Blue.


2. Refrigerant Piping:

a. Background Color: Black.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Plumbing Piping Insulation


SECTION 15085 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic hot-water piping.

2. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.

3. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.




A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and

cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for

miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," and "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where

insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.

d. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



Company; CP-82.



Company; 85-20.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.



a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry

film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White.

6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10

strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.




Company; Mast-A-Fab.

b. Vimasco Corporation; Elastafab 894.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,

complying with ASTM C 1136.



a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.

b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.

c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.

d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.

3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.

4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.

5. Elongation: 2 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.

7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.



a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





the following:

a. C & F Wire.

2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:


following:

a. Engineered Brass Company.

b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.

c. McGuire Manufacturing.

d. Plumberex.

e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.

f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act

(ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:



the following:

a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.

b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at [2 inches] [4 inches] o.c.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for

firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve

stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:


available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded

fittings, three locations of welded fittings, three locations of threaded valves, and three

locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation

Schedule, General" Article.

C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.7 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Stormwater and Overflow: Insulation shall be the following:


C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing

Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be the following:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Duct Insulation


SECTION 15086 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.

6. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

7. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.


1. Section 15087 "HVAC Equipment Insulation."

2. Section 15088 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

3. Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.





identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,

and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum

Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"

articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK

jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.



a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 ADHESIVES


insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




Company; CP-127.



Company; 85-60/85-70.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.



3. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for

bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






Company; CP-82.



Company; 85-50.







2.3 MASTICS





B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.




Company; 30-80/30-90.



film thickness.



5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.




Company; CP-10.



Company; 46-50.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.4 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; CP-76.



Company; 95-44.





5. Color: Aluminum.

6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; CP-76.




5. Color: White.






© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved








2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.



strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for ducts.






2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

2.8 TAPES









2. Width: 3 inches.





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;




a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.



d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.





7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 3/4

inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting

spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated

when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.

2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter

shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to

bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation,

hangers, and substrates.

2. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of

holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer

is in place. Comply with the following requirements:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers.

2) GEMCO; Peel & Press.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.

b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter

shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick, galvanized-

steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less

than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.



1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.

2) GEMCO; R-150.

3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.

4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure

permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

D. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.



a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely

affect insulation application.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of

voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of

duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories

that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive

recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports,

anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs

from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal

ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation

inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry

film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:


2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure

strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-

sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.



5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends

adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to

thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend

patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal

with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for

outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof

flashing.


B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously

through wall penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal

with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for

outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2

inches.


C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install

insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper

sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match

adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and

fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100

percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-

discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as

follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal

centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way,

and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation

tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.

e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.

f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation

surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken

vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by

removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent

insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,

seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot

intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern

over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation

face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not

less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end

joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each

surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut

to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-

wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger,

and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-

barrier mastic.

B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for

horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal

with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish

bead along seam and joint edge.

C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints.

Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant

recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at

end joints.

3.6 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below

and as specified in Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09912 "Interior Painting."

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and

finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the

completed Work.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.




1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and

insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to

one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.



3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.

2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.

3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.

4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.

5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.

6. Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

7. Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.

8. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.

9. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts.

2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.

4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.

5. Flexible connectors.


7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu.

ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu.


C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-

lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-

lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

E. Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation: Fire-rated blanket

or board; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating.

F. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu.


G. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft.

nominal density.

H. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu.


I. Exposed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans HVAC Piping Insulation


SECTION 15088 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Chilled-water indoors and outdoors.

2. Heating hot-water piping, indoors.

3. Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping, indoors and outdoors.


1. Section 15086 "Duct Insulation."







identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,

mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing

agency.



2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

D. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply

with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.



a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.

c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:



a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied

jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

F. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe Insulation Wicking System: Preformed pipe insulation complying with

ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with absorbent cloth factory-applied to the entire inside surface

of preformed pipe insulation and extended through the longitudinal joint to outside surface of

insulation under insulation jacket. Factory apply a white, polymer, vapor-retarder jacket with

self-sealing adhesive tape seam and evaporation holes running continuously along the

longitudinal seam, exposing the absorbent cloth.



a. Knauf Insulation; Permawick Pipe Insulation.

b. Owens Corning; VaporWick Pipe Insulation.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.



a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 ADHESIVES


insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.



a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.

b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.


Company; 85-75.

d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.






C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




Company; CP-127.



Company; 85-60/85-70.




D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




Company; CP-82.



Company; 85-50.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved








E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.



a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone.

b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.

c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.

d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.






2.4 MASTICS





B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.




Company; 30-80/30-90.



film thickness.



5. Color: White.

C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




Company; CP-10.



Company; 46-50.


e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:


Company; CP-76.



Company; 30-45.


e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444.


3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White or gray.






B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; CP-76.



Company; 95-44.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






5. Color: Aluminum.






C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:




Company; CP-76.




5. Color: White.











2. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.



1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and

Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

3. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to

ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.






2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.




Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.

c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

3. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

4. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper.

5. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and

kraft paper.

6. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

a. Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

b. Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.

c. Tee covers.

d. Flange and union covers.

e. End caps.

f. Beveled collars.

g. Valve covers.

h. Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

D. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing

membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a

rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white

aluminum-foil facing.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





a. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.

2.9 TAPES









2. Width: 3 inches.






B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;




a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.



d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.





7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch

thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.

C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel.



the following:

a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.



F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.


2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:


2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of

strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.



5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar

to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface




3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of

roof flashing.


B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush

with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface




3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches.


D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve

stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same



diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match

size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation

from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-

steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe

insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied

in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate

openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as

pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet

insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow

valve operation without disturbing insulation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to

surface being insulated.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.




adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.



available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.



available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight.

2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.

3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints.

5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end

joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof

sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12

inches o.c. and at end joints.




1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of

inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded

fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two

locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of

flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General"

Article.



3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water, above 40 Deg F: Insulation shall be the following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or Pipe Insulation Wicking System: 2 inches

thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.

C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.

3.11 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water and Brine: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 3 inches thick.

B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.

C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Insulation shall be the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. None.

3.13 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.032 inch thick.

D. Piping, Exposed:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. PVC: 30 mils thick.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping


SECTION 15091 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded

steel collar; zinc coated.

2.2 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping


2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal

system.

C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.


2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants

specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

a. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop

materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Section 078413

"Penetration Firestopping.”


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping


SECTION 15092 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 GROUT






PART 3 - EXECUTION



B. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping



system.

C. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.







D. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements

for firestopping specified in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.2 SLEEVE SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

b. Piping NPS 6 and Larger: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

2. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:


1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.


1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and

sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.

3. Concrete Slabs above Grade:



4. Interior Partitions:




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping


SECTION 15093 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves.

2. Grout.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with

welded longitudinal joint.

2.2 GROUT






PART 3 - EXECUTION



B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to

provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping


C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls

are constructed.





system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.







E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors

at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements

for firestopping specified in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 SLEEVE SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping


SECTION 15096 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-

steel type.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping


D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD


1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping


SECTION 15097 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and

spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.



b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping


c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

h. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.








© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Escutcheons for HVAC Piping


SECTION 15098 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.



b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Escutcheons for HVAC Piping


e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.








© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping


SECTION 15111 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

3. Bronze gate valves.

4. Bronze globe valves.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. ASME Compliance: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design

criteria.

B. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or


F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:


following:

a. Hammond Valve.

b. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation.

c. Legend Valve.

d. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Forged brass.

f. Ends: Threaded.

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Brass.

i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.

j. Port: Regular.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:


following:

a. American Valve, Inc.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.


h. Stem: Bronze.


j. Port: Regular.

2.4 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:


following:


b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

c. NIBCO INC.

d. Powell Valves.

e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Solder joint.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.



2.5 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:



the following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Kitz Corporation.


f. NIBCO INC.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



g. Powell Valves.

h. Red-White Valve Corporation.

i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

j. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves.

2. Throttling Service: Globe or ball valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.4 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

3. Ball Valves: Two piece, regular port, brass or bronze with brass trim.

4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS.

6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged

ends.

2. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.

3. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.

4. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.

3.5 SANITARY-WASTE AND STORM-DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded

ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, regular port, brass or bronze with brass trim.






ends.





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans General-Duty Valves fore HVAC Piping


SECTION 15112 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

2. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.

3. Bronze gate valves.

4. Iron gate valves.

5. Bronze globe valves.

6. Iron globe valves.

7. Chainwheels.


1. Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or


3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:



the following:



c. Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc.

d. Hammond Valve.

e. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation.

f. Kitz Corporation.

g. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

i. RuB Inc.

2. Description:





e. Body Material: Forged brass.

f. Ends: Threaded.


h. Stem: Stainless steel.

i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.

j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:



the following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

d. Hammond Valve.

e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

f. Legend Valve.

g. Milwaukee Valve Company.

h. NIBCO INC.

i. Red-White Valve Corporation.

j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc

2. Description:






f. Ends: Threaded.


h. Stem: Bronze.


j. Port: Full.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:



the following:



c. Hammond Valve.

d. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.


f. NIBCO INC.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:






f. Ends: Threaded.




j. Port: Full.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:



the following:



c. Hammond Valve.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:






f. Ends: Threaded.




j. Port: Regular.

2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:



the following:

a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.

b. Bray Controls; a division of Bray International.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

d. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp.

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

g. DeZurik Water Controls.

h. Hammond Valve.

i. Kitz Corporation.

j. Milwaukee Valve Company.

k. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.

l. NIBCO INC.

m. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.

n. Red-White Valve Corporation.

o. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.

p. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

q. Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control.

r. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.


c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

e. Seat: EPDM.

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Stainless steel.

B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:



the following:

a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

c. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp.

d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

f. DeZurik Water Controls.

g. Flo Fab Inc.

h. Hammond Valve.

i. Kitz Corporation.

j. Legend Valve.

k. Milwaukee Valve Company.

l. NIBCO INC.

m. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.

n. Red-White Valve Corporation.

o. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.

p. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

e. Seat: EPDM.

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

2.5 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





the following:


b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Kitz Corporation.


f. NIBCO INC.

g. Powell Valves.

h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.



2.6 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:



the following:



c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Hammond Valve.

f. Kitz Corporation.

g. Legend Valve.

h. Milwaukee Valve Company.

i. NIBCO INC.

j. Powell Valves.

k. Red-White Valve Corporation.

l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

e. Ends: Flanged.

f. Trim: Bronze.

g. Disc: Solid wedge.

h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:



the following:


b. Hammond Valve.

c. Kitz Corporation.

d. Milwaukee Valve Company.

e. NIBCO INC.

f. Powell Valves.

g. Red-White Valve Corporation.

h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem: Bronze.

f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.



2.8 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:



the following:



c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

d. Hammond Valve.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. Kitz Corporation.

f. Milwaukee Valve Company.

g. NIBCO INC.

h. Powell Valves.

i. Red-White Valve Corporation.

j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:



c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.

d. Ends: Flanged.

e. Trim: Bronze.

f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly, gate, and globe valves NPS 4 and larger and more

than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin

level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.

2. Throttling Service, Except Steam: Globe or ball or butterfly valves.

3. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end


3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end


6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE



ends.

2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.

3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with bronze trim.


5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, RS, bronze.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






ends.

2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,

stainless-steel disc.

3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange.


5. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.



3.6 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE



ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with bronze stainless-steel trim.






ends.

2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,

stainless-steel disc.

3. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Class 150, single flange.


5. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125, lever

and spring.


7. Iron Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Meters for Plumbing Piping


SECTION 15126 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

3. Thermowells.

4. Dial-type pressure gages.

5. Gage attachments.




A. Product certificates.


A. Operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Ashcroft Inc.

2. Dwyer Instrument, Inc.

3. Marsh Bellofram.

4. Miljoco Corporation.

5. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

6. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inch nominal diameter.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass or plastic.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


following:

a. Flo Fab Inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.

c. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

d. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.

7. Window: Glass or plastic.

8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


following:

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.

b. Ashcroft Inc.

c. Dwyer Instruments, Inc.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Miljoco Corporation.

f. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

h. Winters Instruments - U.S.


3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

9. Window: Glass.

10. Ring: Stainless steel.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the

most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

J. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.

3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.

K. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building.

2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.

3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

L. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

M. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.2 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be the

following:


C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be one of the

following:


2. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.

D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.3 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

3.4 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be one of the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.5 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping


SECTION 15127 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.

2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.

3. Thermowells.

4. Dial-type pressure gages.

5. Gage attachments.



B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Product certificates.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:



the following:

a. Flo Fab Inc.

b. Miljoco Corporation.

c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

e. Trerice, H. O. Co.

f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



g. Winters Instruments - U.S.


3. Case: Cast aluminum; [7-inch] [9-inch] nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

4. Case Form: Cast aluminum; 7-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.

5. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.

6. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

7. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.

8. Window: Glass.

9. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.

b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

10. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold

thermometer stem.

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES.

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





the following:

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.

b. Ashcroft Inc.

c. Ernst Flow Industries.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Marsh Bellofram.

f. Miljoco Corporation.

g. Noshok.

h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.

j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

k. Trerice, H. O. Co.

l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

m. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

o. Winters Instruments - U.S.


3. Case: Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

9. Window: Glass.

10. Ring: Metal.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of steel pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.

C. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical

position in piping tees.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the

most readable position.

I. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

K. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

L. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements

and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.

N. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

O. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.

3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller.

4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.

5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger.

6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank.

7. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.

P. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection.

3. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be the following:


B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be the following:


C. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each chiller shall be the following:


D. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central

systems shall be the following:


E. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 20 to 240 deg F.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be one of the following:

1. Sealed,-mounted, metal case.

2. Sealed,-mounted, plastic case.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection

shall be the following:

1. Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:

1. Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Domestic Water Piping


SECTION 15140 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting


B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 and the

regulations of the New Orleans Sewerage and Water Board.



B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.

2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.

3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.

4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or

flanged ends are indicated.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron.

2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber

gaskets, and steel bolts.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic

and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-

duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS


1. Same size as pipes to be joined.

2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.

3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system

fitting.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.

3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and

backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic

water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction

loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to

layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600

and AWWA M41.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside

the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure

gages in Section 15126 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for

drain valves and strainers in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with

requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties."

G. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb.

H. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants

unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

I. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



J. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and

coordinate with other services occupying that space.

K. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

L. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher

than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

O. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and

specialty.

P. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater.

Q. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in

Section 15441 "Domestic Water Pumps."

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 15092 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15092 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

Plumbing Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15097 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

U. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

V. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before

assembly.

W. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:


2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

X. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube.

Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Y. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of

both piping systems.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 15073 "Vibration and

Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 15061

"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.

3. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.

6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's


3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and

maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect

to the following:

1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.

2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.

3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and

installation in Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before

inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities

having jurisdiction:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing

or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests

specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance

with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests

or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air

bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a

separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and

unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered

or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source

and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof

until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.

2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.

3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during

installation.

5. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.

6. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or

repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if

methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or

AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at

outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm

of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from

system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-

sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.


A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used

in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground

copper tubing.

C. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Soft copper tube, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered

joints only. No flanges or valves underground.

D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Domestic Water Piping Specialties


SECTION 15145 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers.

2. Backflow preventers.

3. Water pressure-reducing valves.

4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

5. Strainers.

6. Hose bibbs.

7. Wall hydrants.

8. Drain valves.

9. Water-hammer arresters.

10. Trap-seal primer valves.


1. Section 15126 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers, pressure

gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping.

2. Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters.

3. Section 15412 "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering equipment.

4. Section 15426 "Drinking Fountains" for water filters for water coolers.

5. Section 15428 "Remote Water Coolers" for water filters for water coolers.







© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14. Mark "NSF-pw"

on plastic piping components.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise

indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:


2. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping.

3. Body: Bronze.

4. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded.

5. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers:


2. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain.

3. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7.

4. Finish: Rough bronze.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:


2. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.

3. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range.

4. Size: 4”, 8”.

5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow.

8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends

on inlet and outlet.

c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.5 WATER PRESSURE-REDUCING VALVES

A. Water Regulators:



the following:

a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation.

b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

c. Honeywell International Inc.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.


3. Pressure Rating: Initial working pressure of 150 psig.

4. Body: Bronze with chrome-plated finish for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior

lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and

NPS 3.

5. Valves for Booster Heater Water Supply: Include integral bypass.

6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3.

2.6 BALANCING VALVES

A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves:


following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.


c. Milwaukee Valve Company.

d. NIBCO Inc.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves.

3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller.

5. Body: Copper alloy.

6. Port: Standard or full port.


8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded.

10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.7 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




following:

a. Armstrong International, Inc.

b. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.

c. Leonard Valve Company.

d. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Symmons Industries, Inc.


3. Pressure Rating: 125 psi minimum unless otherwise indicated.

4. Type: Exposed-mounted, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve.

5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.

6. Connections: Threaded inlets and outlet.

7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies,

and adjustable, temperature-control handle.

8. Tempered-Water Setting: 115 deg F.

9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: 2 gpm.

10. Valve Finish: Chrome plated.

11. Piping Finish: Chrome plated.

12. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed mounting and with hinged,

stainless-steel door.

2.8 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated.

5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.

b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.

c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch.

6. Drain: Pipe plug.

2.9 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs:

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.

2. Body Material: Bronze.

3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable.

4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet.

5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011.

8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated.

9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze.

10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated.

11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key.

12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle.

13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle.

14. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb.

15. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.10 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants WH-1:

1. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for concealed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants.


3. Operation: Loose key.

4. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp.

5. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1.

6. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

7. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover.

8. Box and Cover Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7.

10. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze.

11. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

2.11 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves.

2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP.

3. Size: NPS 3/4.

4. Body: Copper alloy.


6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable.

7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel.

8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.12 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Josam Company.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

h. Watts Drainage Products.

i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.

3. Type: Copper tube with piston.

4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.13 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device:


following:

a. MIFAB, Inc.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.



4. Body: Bronze.

5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint.

6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint.

7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not

chrome finished.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to

other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with

authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe

diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or

under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and

outlet.

C. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

D. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

E. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for

proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables" for

electrical connections.



1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having

jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping


SECTION 15150 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Specialty pipe fittings.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 02530 "Sanitary Sewerage" for sanitary sewerage piping and structures outside

the building.




A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for

plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent

piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting


2.2 CPVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2846, drain, waste, and vent.

B. CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2845, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns

and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according

to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California



2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's

or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes

to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping

system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

2) Fernco Inc.

3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.

4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173.

c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear

ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each

end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

2) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers



1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism

on each end.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 02300

"Earthwork."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right


otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate

branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used

on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,

double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side

with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not

change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and

reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction

of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades

and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream.

Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants,

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as

completed.

J. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless

otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and

smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

K. Install aboveground CPVC piping according to ASTM D 2846.

L. Install underground CPVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

M. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements

for backwater valves specified in Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for

cleanouts specified in Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

3. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for

drains specified in Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements


P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with


Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with



A. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent

cements.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION


1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

2. In Drainage Piping: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.


A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless


2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves unless drain has integral backwater valve.

3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.

4. Comply with requirements for backwater valve specified in Section 15155 "Sanitary

Waste Piping Specialties."


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 15073 "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Section 15061 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.

4. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

5. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:



6. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.


C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum

rod diameters:


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.


G. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 48 inches.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join

dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than

required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts and drains specified in

Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and

union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection

to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification

specified in Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction

or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside

leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water

to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before

inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for

leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled

with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack

openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping

system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water

closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing

additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for

gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Exposed CPVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-

based latex paint.


A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall CPVC pipe, CPVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:



3.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:



E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:



F. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:



G. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties


SECTION 15155 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cleanouts.

2. Floor drains.

3. Trench drains.

4. Roof flashing assemblies.

5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

6. Flashing materials.

7. Oil-Water separators.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and accessories for grease interceptors.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts :

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers


the following:


following:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.

b. MIFAB, Inc.


d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.

4. Size: Same as connected drainage piping

5. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping.

6. Closure: Countersunk, cast-iron plug.

7. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.

B. Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts CO:



the following:


following:


b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

c. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

d. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule and threaded,

adjustable housing cleanout.

4. Size: Same as connected branch.

5. Type: Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule with Threaded, adjustable housing.

6. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.

7. Clamping Device: Not required.

8. Outlet Connection: Spigot.

9. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.

10. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.

11. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.

12. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.

13. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

14. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts WCO:



the following:


following:


b. MIFAB, Inc.


d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

5. Body: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match connected

piping.

6. Closure: Countersunk, drilled-and-threaded brass plug.


8. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:



the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Commercial Enameling Co.

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

f. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

2.3 TRENCH DRAINS

A. Trench Drains TD:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Commercial Enameling Co.

b. Josam Company; Josam Div.

c. MIFAB, Inc.

d. Prier Products, Inc.

e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

g. Watts Drainage Products Inc.

h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.

i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

3. Material: Ductile or gray iron.

4. Flange: Seepage.

5. Clamping Device: Required (center section only).

6. Outlet: Bottom (center section only).

7. Number of sections: 3

8. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



9. Grate Finish: Painted.

10. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: 12 by 12 inches per section

11. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

12. Trap Material: Cast iron.

13. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.

2.4 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies :



the following:


following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div.

b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing

collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement

and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap.

2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal

primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

B. Air-Gap Fittings :

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between

installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.

4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.

5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

C. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for

pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension

in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

D. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include

vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights

and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Use: 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness.

2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0469-inch thickness.

3. Burning: 6-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness.

B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units

required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

D. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

E. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

2.7 OIL-WATER SEPARATORS

A. Oil-Water Separators :


following:

a. Gainey’s Concrete Products.

b. Rockford Separators

c. Lee’s Precast Concrete, Inc.

2. Type: Factory-fabricated interceptor for separating and removing light oil from

wastewater.

3. Body Material: Class 1 concrete of 4500PSI at 28 days.

4. Capacity: 1000 Gallon

5. Inlet and Outlet Size: 4”

6. RING & COVER: Traffic Duty Cast Iron 24” nominal


8. Mounting: Subsurface.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck

plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove

valve cover for servicing.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following,

unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless

larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.

4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.

2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch

total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope.

c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless


F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

H. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor.

I. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



J. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer

connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.

K. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping

discharge into sanitary drainage system.

L. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

M. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is

indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 15150 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping

installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow-control fitting and vent

to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are

required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.

Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and

skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made

flashing fittings, according to Section 07620 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing

into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or

sign on or near each grease interceptor.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety

and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to

identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 15076 “Identification for

Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Storm Drainage Piping


SECTION 15160 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

2. Specialty pipe fittings.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 02630 "Storm Drainage" for storm drainage piping outside the building.




A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for

plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and

"NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


following:

a. ANACO-Husky.

b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

c. Fernco Inc.

d. Matco-Norca, Inc.

e. MIFAB, Inc.

f. Stant.

g. Tyler Pipe.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.2 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS


1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in

OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with

pipes to be joined.

2. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co.

2) Fernco Inc.



c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include

shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on

each end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 02300

"Earthwork."



systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,

expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless

deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings.


and service areas.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





otherwise.


E. Install piping at indicated slopes.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and

long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of

standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of

drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

I. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to

grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping

upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of

lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past

each joint as completed.

J. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: 1/8” downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller;

1/4” downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 1/4” downward in direction of flow.

K. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"

Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

L. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with

requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping

Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building

storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure

plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements

for cleanouts specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains

specified in Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

M. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by


N. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



O. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with


Plumbing Piping."

P. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with



A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron

Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

C. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness.

Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in

cross pattern.

D. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.

2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.


A. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. Use normally closed type unless


2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations.

3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 15165 "Storm

Drainage Piping Specialties."


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 15073 "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in

Section 15061 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

3. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.

4. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

5. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





6. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.

Support pipe rolls on trapeze.


C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum rod diameters:


2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.




6. Spacing for 10-foot pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is

limited to 60 inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting

to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover

flush with floor.

2. Comply with requirements for backwater valves cleanouts and drains specified in

Section 15165 "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of

equipment.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified

in Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection

must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in

after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to

observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,

make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in

absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been

altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report

for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage

piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed

before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping, except outside leaders, on completion of

roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but

not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts until

completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until

satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris

and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

A. Aboveground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty, hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

B. Aboveground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger shall be the following:


coupled joints.


C. Underground storm drainage piping NPS 6 and smaller shall be the following:


coupled joints.


D. Underground, storm drainage piping NPS 8 and larger shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; cast-iron, hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Storm Drainage Piping Specialties


SECTION 15165 - STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof drains.

2. Miscellaneous storm drainage piping specialties.

3. Cleanouts.

4. Backwater valves.

5. Trench drains.

6. Flashing materials.




A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing

agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL ROOF DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, General-Purpose Roof Drains RD-1 & 2:

1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.

2. Body Material: Cast iron.

3. Dimension of Body: Nominal 15 - inch diameter.

4. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.

5. Outlet: Bottom.

6. Extension Collars: Required on RD-2.

7. Underdeck Clamp: Required.

8. Expansion Joint: Required.

9. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.

10. Dome Material: Cast iron.

11. Water Dam: 2 inches high for RD-2.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.2 MISCELLANEOUS STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Downspout Nozzles:

1. Description: Bronze body with hubless inlet and bronze wall flange with mounting holes.

2. Size: Same as connected conductor.

2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. Test Tees:

1. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M and ASTM A 74, ASTM A 888, or CISPI 301, for

cleanout test tees.

2. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.

3. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe T-branch or hubless, cast-iron soil-

pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.

4. Closure Plug: Countersunk or raised head.


2.4 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Cast-Iron, Horizontal Backwater Valves:

1. Standard: ASME A112.14.1, for backwater valves.


3. Body Material: Cast iron.

4. Cover: Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve.

5. End Connections: hubless.

6. Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to

hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition.

7. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron soil-pipe extension to field-

installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.

2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, 12 oz./sq. ft..

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-

inch minimum thickness unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-

phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum

thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units

required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's

written installation instructions.

1. Install flashing collar or flange of roof drain to prevent leakage between drain and

adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

2. Install expansion joints, if indicated, in roof drain outlets.

3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.

B. Install downspout adapters on outlet of back-outlet parapet roof drains and connect to sheet

metal downspouts.

C. Install downspout boots at grade with top 12 inches above grade. Secure to building wall.

D. Install conductor nozzles at exposed bottom of conductors where they spill onto grade.

E. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following

instructions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Use cleanouts the same size as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger

drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate cleanouts at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.

3. Locate cleanouts at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100

feet for larger piping.

4. Locate cleanouts at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

F. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with

finished floor.

G. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types

indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

H. Install horizontal backwater valves in floor with cover flush with floor.

I. Install test tees in vertical conductors and near floor.

J. Install wall cleanouts in vertical conductors. Install access door in wall if indicated.

K. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with

finished surface unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install sleeve flashing device with each conductor passing through floors with waterproof

membrane.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15160 "Storm Drainage Piping."

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece of metal unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes

are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of 6.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker.

Solder joints of 4.0-lb/sq. ft. lead sheets, 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors

and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching the pipe size, with a minimum length of 10 inches

and with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches

around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and

to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Hydronic Piping Specialties


SECTION 15179 - HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special-duty valves and specialties for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping.

2. Makeup-water piping.

3. Condensate Drain Piping


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Valves: Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Hydronic specialties.




A. ASME Compliance: Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.

Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: 150psig at 200 deg F.

2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.

3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.2 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 15112 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements

specified in Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Control.”

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:



the following:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump.

c. Flow Design Inc.

d. Gerand Engineering Co.

e. Griswold Controls.

f. Nexus Valve, Inc.

g. Taco.

h. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel.

4. Plug: Resin.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Threaded or socket.

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).

10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

D. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASME labeled.



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump.

d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

f. Watts Regulator Co.

2. Body: Bronze or brass.

3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

4. Seat: Brass.

5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

6. Diaphragm: EPT.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



7. Low inlet-pressure check valve.

8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

E. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: ASME labeled.



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.



d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

f. Watts Regulator Co.

2. Body: Bronze or brass.

3. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

4. Seat: Brass.

5. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

6. Diaphragm: EPT.

7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.

8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating

pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

F. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:



the following:

a. Flow Design Inc.

b. Griswold Controls.

c. Nexus Valve, Inc.

2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.

3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self-cleaning, and removable.

4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.

5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.

6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.

7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure

fluctuations.

8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.

9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F .

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents:



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.



d. Nexus Valve, Inc.

e. Taco, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze.

3. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

4. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

5. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

6. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).

7. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).

8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).

B. Expansion Tanks:



the following:

a. AMTROL, Inc.



d. Taco, Inc.

2. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum

operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank

for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested after taps are fabricated and shall be labeled

according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

3. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and

stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal unit only; sized for compression-tank diameter. Provide

tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating

temperature.

4. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and

240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank,

drain water, and close off system.

5. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch diameter gage glass,

and slotted-metal glass guard.

2.4 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.

3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 40-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.

4. CWP Rating: 150 psig.

5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection

to each piece of equipment.

B. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to

the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.

F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required

for system air venting.

B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2

percent upward slope toward tank.

C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and

larger.

D. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge

tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose.

2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of

tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building

components and structural members.

E. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that

tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Hydronic Piping


SECTION 15181 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping.

2. Makeup-water piping.

3. Condensate-drain piping.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement.

2. RTRP and RTRF with adhesive.

3. Pressure-seal fittings.

4. Chemical treatment.




A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,

products, and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150psig at 200 deg F.

2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150psig at 200 deg F.

3. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.


A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and

wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping

Applications" Article.

C. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised

ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

E. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:



the following:


b. Central Sprinkler Company.

c. Star Pipe Products.


2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M,

Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated

steel; or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders

constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking

toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and EPDM gasket of central cavity

pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure

grooved pipe and fittings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless


a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining

copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate

for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working

temperatures and pressures.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating

nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:



the following:

a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

b. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Hart Industries International, Inc.

e. Jomar International, Ltd.

f. Matco-Norca.

g. Watts Regulator Co.

h. Zurn Industries, LLC; AquaSpec Commercial Faucet Products.

2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.6 BYPASS CHEMICAL FEEDER

A. Description: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill

funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent

accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange

fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

C. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

D. Condensate-Drain Piping: Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS


systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination

Drawings.


and service areas.



otherwise.


E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing

of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4threaded nipple

with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with

the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to

the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Section 15112 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere

as indicated.

S. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

T. Comply with requirements in Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment"

for identifying piping.

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements

for sleeves specified in Section 15093 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15093 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC

Piping."

W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15098 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 15062 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" for hanger, support, and anchor devices. Comply with the following requirements

for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feetlong.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feetor longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.

6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from

scratching pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet.

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet.

3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet.

4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet.

5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet.

6. NPS 3 and Larger: Maximum span, 12 feet.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. NPS 1-1/4:Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

4. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

5. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll

grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe

wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

G. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and

procedure, and brazed joints.

3.6 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment

connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are

installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply

with requirements in Section 15172 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and

detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a

minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.

B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first

year of operation.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains

installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to

pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum

yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building

Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing

components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully.

2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation.

3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.

4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Hydronic Pumps


SECTION 15185 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

2. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of pump.

B. Shop Drawings: For each pump.

1. Show pump layout and connections.

2. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and

other anchorages.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLOSE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS



1. American-Marsh Pumps.

2. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

3. Buffalo Pumps, Inc.

4. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.

5. ITT Corporation; Goulds Pumps.

6. Patterson Pump Co.; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Co.

7. Peerless Pump Company.

8. TACO Incorporated.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-coupled, end-

suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and

motor shafts mounted horizontally.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, drain plug at bottom

and air vent at top of volute, threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and flanged

connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,

and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match

specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel

spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor

and seal.

5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball bearings.

D. Motor: Single speed and rigidly mounted to pump casing with integral pump support.

1. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.

c. Motor Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings.

d. Efficiency: Premium efficient.

e. NEMA Design: 4.

f. Service Factor: 1.15.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 240.

2. Total Dynamic Head: 64.

3. Maximum Operating Pressure: 175 psig.

4. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

5. Motor Horsepower: 10.

6. Electrical Characteristics:

a. Volts: 460.

b. Phase: Three.

c. Hertz: 60.

2.2 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS



1. American-Marsh Pumps.


3. Aurora Pump; Division of Pentair Pump Group.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.

5. Peerless Pump Company.

6. Scot Pump; Div. of Ardox Corp.


B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, separately coupled,

end-suction pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for base mounting, with pump

and motor shafts horizontal.


1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded gage

tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and flanged

connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and provide attached

piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or

requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,

and secured with a locking cap screw. For pumps not frequency-drive controlled, trim

impeller to match specified performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a

stainless-steel spring, and Buna-N bellows and gasket.

5. Seal: Packing seal consisting of stuffing box with a minimum of four rings of graphite-

impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and

bronze packing gland.

6. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings in cast-iron housing with grease fittings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded-rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.

Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump

shaft or motor. EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;

removable; attached to mounting frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from

ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and

motor.

G. Motor: Single speed, secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment.



application.

2. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency

requirements for motors specified in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for

HVAC Equipment."

a. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

b. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.

c. Motor Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings.

d. Efficiency: Premium efficient.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. NEMA Design: 4.

f. Service Factor: 1.15.

H. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 240.


3. Maximum Operating Pressure: 175 psig.


5. Motor Horsepower: 10.


a. Volts: 460.

b. Phase: Three.

c. Hertz: 60.

2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser:

1. Angle pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-inlet fitting.

3. Bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers.

4. Bronze or stainless-steel straightening vanes.

5. Drain plug.

6. Factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve:

1. Angle or straight pattern.

2. 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-discharge fitting.

3. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

4. Brass gage ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers,

couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and

weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and spring

hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support weight of in-line pumps.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 15062 "Hangers

and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 ALIGNMENT

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service.

B. Comply with requirements in Hydronics Institute standards for alignment of pump and motor

shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between

motor feet and base frame.

C. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill

baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in

place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15182 "Steam and Condensate

Piping" and Section 15184 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties."

B. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

C. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance.

D. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

E. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

F. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps.

G. Install suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

H. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between

pump casing and valves.

I. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gage tapping, or

install single gage with multiple-input selector valve.

J. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

K. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

L. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic System


SECTION 15188 - WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following water treatment for closed-loop hydronic systems:

1. Automatic chemical-feed equipment.

2. Chemicals.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories for each type of product.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Ampion Corp.

2. Anderson Chemical Company.

3. Aqua-Chem, Inc.

4. Barclay Water Management, Inc.

5. Boland.

6. Cascade Water Services, Inc.

7. Earthwise Environmental Inc.

8. General Electric Company; GE Water & Process Technologies.

9. H-O-H Water Technology, Inc.

10. Metro Group, Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div.

11. Nalco; an Ecolab company.

12. Watcon, Inc.

13. Water Services Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Closed hydronic systems shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.

2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm.

3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm.

4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm.

5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm.

6. TSS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm.

7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.

8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm.

9. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL.

b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.

c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL.

d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.

e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of zero organisms/mL.

2.3 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill

opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill

cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system

pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 5 gal..

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.

2.4 AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Water Meter:

1. AWWA C700, oscillating-piston, magnetic-drive, totalization meter.

2. Body: Bronze.

3. Minimum Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

4. Maximum Pressure Loss at Design Flow: 3 psig.

5. Registration: Gallons or cubic feet.


7. Controls: Flow-control switch with normally open contacts; rated for maximum 10 A,

250-V ac; and that will close at adjustable increments of total flow.



application.

B. Chemical Solution Tanks:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque polyethylene with

minimum 110 percent containment vessel.

2. Molded cover with recess for mounting pump.

3. Capacity: 30 gal..

C. Chemical Solution Injection Pumps:

1. Self-priming, positive displacement; rated for intended chemical with minimum 25

percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.

2. Adjustable flow rate.

3. Metal and thermoplastic construction.

4. Built-in relief valve.

5. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, single-phase motor. Comply with requirements in

Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."



application.

D. Chemical Solution Tubing: Polyethylene tubing with compression fittings and joints except

ASTM A 269, Type 304, stainless steel for steam boiler injection assemblies.

E. Injection Assembly:

1. Quill: Minimum NPS 1/2 with insertion length sufficient to discharge into at least 25

percent of pipe diameter.

2. Ball Valve: Two-piece, stainless steel; selected to fit quill.

3. Packing Gland: Mechanical seal on quill of sufficient length to allow quill removal

during system operation.

4. Assembly Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 600 psig at 200 deg F.

2.5 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are

compatible with piping system components and connected equipment and that can attain water

quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain

manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require

servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building

structure. Comply with requirements in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for

HVAC" for seismic restraints.

C. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.

D. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors.

E. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits.

F. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including hot-water heating and chilled

water, and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings.

2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply.

3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings.

4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below the feeder

inlet.

5. Install a swing check on the inlet after the isolation valve.

G. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

H. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal

piping with dielectric fittings. Comply with requirements in Section 232116 "Hydronic Piping

Specialties"

I. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty

valves are specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

J. Comply with requirements in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for

backflow preventers required in makeup-water connections to potable-water systems.

K. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical

equipment.

L. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

M. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."



1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and

electrical connections.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been

cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing

chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the

preliminary phase of hydronic systems' startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test

results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for

each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until

it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before

it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and

allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.

B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Emergency Plumbing Fixtures


SECTION 15412 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Combination units.



B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Field quality-control test reports.






B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment."

C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects,"

for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC/ANSI A117.1, "Accessible and

Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public

Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with

disabilities.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMBINATION UNITS

A. Accessible, Plumbed Emergency Shower with Eyewash Combination Units,:



the following:

a. Acorn Safety; a division of Acorn Engineering Company.

b. Bradley Corporation.

c. Encon Safety Products.

d. Guardian Equipment Co.

e. Haws Corporation.

f. Sellstrom Manufacturing Company.

g. Speakman Company.

h. WaterSaver Faucet Co.

2. Piping:

a. Material: Chrome-plated brass or stainless steel.

b. Unit Supply: NPS 1-1/4 minimum.

c. Unit Drain: Outlet at back or side near bottom.

3. Shower:

a. Capacity: Not less than 20 gpm for at least 15 minutes.

b. Supply Piping: NPS 1 with flow regulator and stay-open control valve.

c. Control-Valve Actuator: Pull rod.

d. Shower Head: 8-inch-minimum diameter, chrome-plated brass or stainless steel.

e. Mounting: Pedestal.

4. Eyewash Unit:

a. Capacity: Not less than 0.4 gpm for at least 15 minutes.

b. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 with flow regulator and stay-open control valve.

c. Control-Valve Actuator: Paddle.

d. Spray-Head Assembly: Two receptor-mounted spray heads.

e. Receptor: Chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel bowl.

f. Mounting: Attached shower pedestal.

g. Drench-Hose Option: May be provided instead of eyewash unit.

1) Capacity: Not less than 0.4 gpm for at least 15 minutes.

2) Drench Hose: Hand-held spray head with squeeze-handle actuator and hose.

3) Mounting: Bracket on shower pedestal.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Certify performance of emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.

D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific

type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if permitted. Install

valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Comply with requirements

for valves specified in Section 15111 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to group of plumbing fixtures that includes

emergency equipment.

2. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to emergency equipment if prohibited by


E. Install shutoff valve and strainer in steam piping and shutoff valve in condensate return piping.

Comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in Section 15182 "Steam

and Condensate Piping" and Section 15184 "Steam and Condensate Piping Specialties."

F. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to emergency equipment if piping and equipment

connections are made of different metals. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings

specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."

G. Install thermometers in supply and outlet piping connections to water-tempering equipment.

Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 15126 "Meters and Gages for

Plumbing Piping."

H. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of emergency equipment receptors that are

indicated to be directly connected to drainage system. Comply with requirements for waste

piping specified in Section 15150 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

I. Install indirect waste piping on drain outlet of emergency equipment receptors that are indicated

to be indirectly connected to drainage system. Comply with requirements for waste piping

specified in Section 15150 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

J. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15097 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



K. Fill self-contained fixtures with flushing fluid.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having water-

tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in

Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Connect hot- and cold-water-supply piping to hot- and cold-water, water-tempering equipment.

Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing fixtures. Comply with

requirements for hot- and cold-water piping specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water

Piping."

C. Connect steam and cold-water-supply and condensate return piping to steam and cold water-

tempering equipment. Connect output from water-tempering equipment to emergency plumbing

fixtures. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Section 15140 "Domestic

Water Piping" and comply with requirements for steam and condensate piping specified in

Section 15182 "Steam and Condensate Piping" and Section 15184 "Steam and Condensate

Piping Specialties."

D. Connect cold water and electrical power to electric heating water-tempering equipment. Comply

with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."

E. Directly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors with trapped drain outlet to sanitary

waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for waste piping specified in Section 15150

"Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

F. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to

sanitary waste or storm drainage piping.

G. Where installing piping adjacent to emergency plumbing fixtures, allow space for service and

maintenance of fixtures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on emergency plumbing fixtures and

equipment and equipment signs on water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for

identification materials specified in Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and

Equipment."


A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for

compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






proper unit operation.


equipment.

C. Emergency plumbing fixtures will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.

B. Adjust equipment temperature settings.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Commercial Water Closets


SECTION 15416 - COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Toilet seats.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIS-OF-DESIGN PRODUCTS: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

indicated or comparable product.

A. Water Closet WC-1

American Standard Madera 3351.101, wall mounted, elongated, flushometer toilet, 1.1-1.6 gpf,

white vitreous china, w/ Royal Model 111 exposed water closet flushometer flush valve, 1.1

gpf. American Standard 5905.100 seat - extra heavy duty open front less cover. Josem Model

14064 water closet carrier. Fixture shall be in compliance with ASME A112.19.2-2008.

B. Water Closet WC-2

American Standard Madera 3351.101, wall mounted, elongated, flushometer toilet, 1.1-1.6 gpf,

white vitreous china, w/ Royal model 111 exposed water closet flushometer flush valve, 1.1 gpf.

American Standard 5905.100 seat - extra heavy duty open front less cover. Josem model 14064

water closet carrier. Fixture shall be in compliance with ASME A112.19.2-2008, ANSI A117.1,

and ADA requirements.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Water-Closet Installation:

1. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for

handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water

closets.

2. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal.

3. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and

waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted

on open side of water closet.

4. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

D. Install toilet seats on water closets.

E. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 15097 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

F. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings

required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 15150 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water

closets, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.


A. Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Commercial Urinals


SECTION 15417 - COMMERCIAL URINALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Urinals.

2. Flushometer valves.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flushometer valves to include in operation and


PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Urinal U-1

American Standard Decorum high efficiency urinal system 6042.453; - 0.125 gpf, exposed top

spud urinal, white, w/3/4" universal back spud, barrier free, w/ Josam Model 17560-UR wall

carrier; American Standard manual piston-type urinal flush valve, shall be in compliance with

ASSE 1037, ANSI/ASME A112.19.2, and the Americans with Disabilities Act.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Urinal Installation:

1. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

2. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports.

3. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly,

according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

4. Install trap-seal liquid in waterless urinals.

B. Support Installation:

1. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals.

2. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals.

3. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping.

4. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.

C. Flushometer-Valve Installation:

1. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal.

2. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

3. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on

open side of compartment.

4. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.

D. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished

locations.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.

3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 15097 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

E. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to urinal color.

3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required

to match urinals.



and Vent Piping."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings,

and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Commercial Lavatories


SECTION 15421 - COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Lavatories.

2. Faucets.




A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and




a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Lavatory L-1

Kohler Bachata Model K-2609-SU-NA, under-mount bathroom sink, 20-gage stainless steel,

oval basin with overflow, with basin clamp assembly and no faucet holes; Symmons Dia model

SLW-3512, two handle widespread lavatory faucet with pop-up drain assembly in polished

chrome finish, aerator, 2.2 gpm flow rate, 1/2 inch ips supply adapters, and 20 inch braided

supply hoses; 1-1/4" x1-1/2" 17-guage cast brass, slip joint type p-trap; and Pro-Extreme

X4333,trap and pipe insulation, shall meet ANSI A112.18 and ADA standards.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.2 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated-brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Wheel handle.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2.

2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube riser.

2.3 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 by NPS 1-1/4.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated, brass or steel wall flange.

3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch-thick

stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation.

B. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people

with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with

escutcheon requirements specified in Section 15097 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

E. Seal joints between lavatories and counters and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


F. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 15085 "Plumbing Piping

Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories,

fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Commercial Sinks


SECTION 15422 - COMMERCIAL SINKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Service basins.

2. Service sinks.

3. Utility sinks.

4. Handwash sinks.

5. Sink faucets.

6. Laminar-flow, faucet-spout outlets.

7. Supply fittings.

8. Waste fittings.




A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.


A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Kitchen Sink S-1

Elkay Model ECTSRAD25226BGL - top mount sink, 18 gauge stainless steel, 25"x22"x6"

deep, single bowl, Grohe model Minta 32319G dual spray pull-down faucet, polished chrome

finish, 1.5 gpm flow, single handle operation, braided stainless steel supply hoses, 1-1/2" 17-

gage cast brass, chrome plated, slip joint p-trap; meets ANSI a112.18 and ADA standards.

B. Resin Lab Sink w/ Eyewash S-2

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Integrated resin counter and lab sink, Elkay Model LK406GN05T4 4" centerset faucet with 5"

gooseneck spout and 4" wristblade handles, with Bradley model S19-200B faucet-mount

eyewash.

C. Resin Lab Sink S-3


gooseneck spout and 4" wristblade handles.

D. Stainless Steel Lab Sink w/ Eyewash S-4

Integrated stainless steel counter and lab sink, Elkay Model LK406GN05T4 4" centerset faucet

with 5" gooseneck spout and 4" wristblade handles, with Bradley model S19-200B faucet-

mount eyewash.

E. Stainless Steel Lab Sink S-5

Integrated stainless steel counter and lab sink, Elkay Model LK406GN05T4 4" centerset faucet

with 5" gooseneck spout and 4" wristblade handles.

F. Resin Lab Sink w/ Deionization S-6


gooseneck spout and 4" wristblade handles, Elkay model LK535GN04L2 single control faucet

with 4" gooseneck and 2” lever handle connected to service deionization system.

G. Mop Basin

Fiat TSB3001 mop sink – 32L x 32W x 12D bowl, precast terrazzo basin with stainless steel

caps on all curbs, integrally cast stainless steel drain. Fiat 830AA faucet - wall mount 8" center

bucket hook, 9" spout reach, 4 arm handles, 3/4" hose thread on spout, and 3 foot rubber hose.

2.2 SUPPLY FITTINGS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply

piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange.

D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression valve with inlet

connection matching supply piping.

E. Operation: Wheel handle.

F. Risers:

1. NPS 1/2

2. Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset and straight tailpiece.

C. Trap:

1. Size: NPS 1-1/2.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 0.032-inch-

thick brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated brass or steel wall flange.

3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch-thick

stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


actual locations of piping connections before sink installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks.

C. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to

ICC/ANSI A117.1.

D. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout.

E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with sink.

Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 15111 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

F. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



G. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-

resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


H. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 15085 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping.

Use size fittings required to match fixtures.



and Vent Piping."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and

controls.



A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and

materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Commercial Showers


SECTION 15423 - COMMERCIAL SHOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Individual showers.

2. Shower faucets.

3. Grout.




A. Maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Shower SH-1

Simmons 3501-CYL-B; built-in shower system with concealed supplies and thermostatic

mixing valve, 2.5 gpm shower head.

2.2 GROUT






© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble shower components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install showers level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each shower faucet.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with shower.

Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 15111 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

2. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

D. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

E. Set shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout.



escutcheons requirements specified in Section 15097 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Seal joints between showers and floors and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant

silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements


3.2 CONNECTIONS




C. Comply with traps and soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 15150 "Sanitary

Waste and Vent Piping."

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust showers and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning showers,

fittings, and controls.



A. After completing installation of showers, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Clean showers, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods

and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of showers for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Drinking Fountains


SECTION 15426 - DRINKING FOUNTAINS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes drinking fountains and related components.


A. Product Data: For each type of drinking fountains.


A. Maintenance Data: For drinking fountains to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



A. Drinking Fountain EWC-1

Haws H1101.8HPS barrier free ADA dual wall mount fountain with push pad activation, Haws

MTGFR-LG mounting frame, and Haws HCR8 remote drinking fountain water chiller.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before fixture installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. For fixtures indicated for

children, install at height required by authorities having jurisdiction.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Drinking Fountains


B. Set pedestal drinking fountains on floor.

C. Install off-the-floor carrier supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted fixtures.

D. Install water-supply piping with shutoff valve on supply to each fixture to be connected to

domestic-water distribution piping. Use ball, gate, or globe valve. Install valves in locations

where they can be easily reached for operation. Valves are specified in Section 15111 "General-

Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

E. Install trap and waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be connected to sanitary drainage

system.


Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with


G. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone

sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in

Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

H. Adjust fixture flow regulators for proper flow and stream height.

3.3 CONNECTIONS




C. Install ball, gate, or globe shutoff valve on water supply to each fixture. Comply with valve

requirements specified in Section 15111 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 15150 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation, inspect unit. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair

damaged finish to match original finish.

B. Clean fixtures, on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures.

D. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Domestic Water Pumps


SECTION 15441 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps.

2. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.








B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


following:


2. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation.

3. Grundfos Pumps Corp.


B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless,

overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor

and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft

horizontal.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections.

3. Impeller: Plastic.

4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 240.


3. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig.


5. Inlet and Outlet Size: 4 inch NPS.

6. Pump Speed: 1750 rpm.

7. Pump Control: Thermostat.

8. Motor Horsepower: 1 hp.


a. Volts: 120.

b. Phases: Single.

c. Hertz: 60.

2.2 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated

on Drawings CP-1 or comparable product by one of the following:


2. Grundfos Pumps Corp.


B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, multi-stage, close-coupled, overhung-

impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.


1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with

NPS 2 pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 pipe

connections.

2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.

3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve. Include

water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.

4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat, and

rubber bellows and gasket.

5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.

6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft

misalignment.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly mounted to

pump casing.

E. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Capacity: 375 gpm.

2. Total Dynamic Head: 85 feet.

3. Casing Material: Cast iron.

4. Impeller Material: ASTM B 584, cast bronze or stainless steel.

5. Minimum Operating Pressure: 175 psig.


7. Inlet and Outlet Size: 6 inch.

8. Pump Control: Pressure switch.

9. Pump Speed: 1750 RPM.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15057 "Common Motor Requirements

for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Pressure Switches: Electric, adjustable for control of water-supply pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion pressure sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

3. Operation of Pump: On or off.

4. Transformer: Provide if required.

5. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac.

6. Settings: Start pump at 30 psi and stop pump at 120 psi.

B. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of 110 deg F hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.





7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F and stop pump at 115 deg F.

C. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of 140 deg F hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







7. Settings: Start pump at 105 deg F and stop pump at 115 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal.

D. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required

to support pump weight.


"Vibration Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports

as required.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 15061 "Hangers

and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

E. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

F. G. Install pressure switches in water supply piping.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."


B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or

greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the

following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.

b. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 15140

"Domestic Water Piping."

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and

throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected

piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 15111 "General-Duty

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in

Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

3. Install pressure gage and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gage and snubber

at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or

install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply

with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers specified in Section 15126 "Meters

and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

D. Connect thermostats to pumps that they control.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Electric Water Heaters


SECTION 15485 - ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, electric, storage, domestic-water heaters.

2. Commercial, light-duty, storage, electric, domestic-water heaters.

3. Thermostat-control, electric, tankless, domestic-water heaters.

4. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:



A. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to


B. Source quality-control reports.


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.






B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label

commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with

potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of electric, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Five years.

b. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL, ELECTRIC, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Electric, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:



a. American Water Heaters.

b. Bradford White Corporation.

c. Cemline Corporation.

d. Electric Heater Company (The).

e. GSW Water Heating.

f. HESco Industries, Inc.

g. Lochinvar Corporation.

h. Precision Boilers, Inc.

i. PVI Industries, LLC.

j. RECO USA.

k. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

l. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.

m. State Industries.

n. Vaughn Manufacturing Corporation.


3. Storage-Tank Construction: Non-ASME-code, steel vertical arrangement.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank and piping

connections. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and

stainless-steel flanges, and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and

copper-alloy flanges.


c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005.

c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

d. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

e. Heating Elements: Electric, screw-in or bolt-on immersion type arranged in

multiples of three.

f. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

g. Safety Controls: High-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.

h. Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-

pressure relief valves. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving

capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than

domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing

element that extends into storage tank.

5. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction.

B. Commercial, Light-Duty, Storage, Electric, Domestic-Water Heaters:



a. American Water Heaters.

b. Bradford White Corporation.

c. Electric Heater Company (The).

d. GSW Water Heating.

e. Heat Transfer Products, Inc.

f. Lochinvar Corporation.

g. Rheem Manufacturing Company.

h. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.

i. State Industries.


3. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel, vertical arrangement.

a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank

linings, including extending lining material into tappings.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.

b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.

c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.

d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.

f. Heat-Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-water

outlet.

g. Heating Elements: Two; electric, screw-in immersion type; wired for simultaneous

operation unless otherwise indicated. Limited to 12 kW total.

h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.

i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.

j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped for combination temperature-and-pressure

relief valves. Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include

pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select

relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

5. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction with legs for off-floor installation.

2.2 ELECTRIC, TANKLESS, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Thermostat-Control, Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters:



a. Bosch Water Heating.

b. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.

c. E-Tankless Water Heaters Corp.

d. Keltech, Inc.

e. Niagara Industries, Inc.

f. Rheem.

2. Standard: UL 499 for electric, tankless, (domestic-water heater) heating appliance.

3. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for

potable water, without storage capacity.

a. Connections: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.


c. Heating Element: Resistance heating system.

d. Temperature Control: Thermostat.

e. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.

f. Jacket: Aluminum or steel with enameled finish or plastic.

4. Support: Bracket for wall mounting.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include

dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than

NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

B. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2.

D. Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASSE 1003 for water. Set at 25-psig-maximum outlet pressure


E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include

relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-

water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into

storage tank.

F. Pressure Relief Valves: ASME rated and stamped. Include pressure setting less than domestic-

water heater working-pressure rating.

G. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4.

H. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.

I. Domestic-Water Heater Stands: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor

mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. Include dimension that will

support bottom of domestic-water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor.

J. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for

wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water.


A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect domestic-water heaters specified to be ASME-code

construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters to minimum of one and one-half times

pressure rating before shipment.

C. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for retesting

and reinspecting requirements and Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for requirements

for correcting the Work.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Electric, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial, electric,

domestic-water heaters on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete bases

specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters if

installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.

2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.








8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Electric, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install electric, tankless, domestic-water

heaters on wall bracket.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.




5. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

C. Install electric, domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original

design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange

units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on

domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified

in Section 15111 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

D. Install commercial, electric, domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices. Comply with

requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 15073 "Vibration and Seismic

Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use

relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater

relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward

pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Installpressure relief valves in water piping for electric, domestic-water heaters without storage.

Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water

piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

G. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or

over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for electric,

domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end

drain valves specified in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

H. Install thermometers on outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heaters. Comply with

requirements for thermometers specified in Section 15126 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing

Piping."

I. Install pressure-reducing valve with integral bypass relief valve in electric, domestic-water

booster-heater inlet piping and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping. Set

pressure-reducing valve for outlet pressure of 25 psig. Comply with requirements for pressure-

reducing valves and water hammer arresters specified in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping

Specialties."

J. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of electric, domestic-water heater storage

tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

K. Fill electric, domestic-water heaters with water.

L. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping."


B. Where installing piping adjacent to electric, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and

maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in

Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."








© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




proper operation.


equipment.

B. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for retesting

and reinspecting requirements and Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for requirements

for correcting the Work.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Scroll Water Chillers


SECTION 15629 - SCROLL WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers.


A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished

specialties, and accessories.


A. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Startup service reports.

C. Warranty.




A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 590 certification program.

B. ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 506/110, "Water

Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.6 WARRANTY


replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

period.

1. Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product

indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Carrier Corporation.

2. McQuay International.

3. Trane.

4. York International Corporation.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with base and frame,

condenser casing, compressors, compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator,

condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, electrical power, controls, and accessories.

C. Fabricate base, frame, and attachment to water chiller components strong enough to resist

movement during a seismic event when water chiller base is anchored to field support structure.

D. Cabinet:

1. Base: Galvanized-steel base extending the perimeter of water chiller. Secure frame,

compressors, and evaporator to base to provide a single-piece unit.

2. Frame: Rigid galvanized-steel frame secured to base and designed to support cabinet,

condenser, control panel, and other chiller components not directly supported from base.

3. Casing: Galvanized steel.

4. Finish: Coat base, frame, and casing with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of

withstanding a 500-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B 117.

5. Sound-reduction package consisting of the following:

a. Acoustic enclosure around compressors.

b. Reduced-speed fans with acoustic treatment.

c. Designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance.

6. Security Package: Provide security grilles with fasteners for additional protection of

compressors, evaporator, and condenser coils. Grilles shall be coated for corrosion

resistance and shall be removable for service access.

E. Compressors:

1. Description: Positive-displacement direct drive with hermetically sealed casing.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil

heater, and suction strainer.

3. Operating Speed: Nominal 3600 rpm for 60-Hz applications.

4. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling.

5. Oil Lubrication System: Automatic pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection,

filter with magnetic plug, and initial oil charge.

6. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators.

F. Compressor Motors:

1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas.

2. High-torque, two-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each

phase.

G. Compressor Motor Controllers:

1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing.

H. Refrigeration:

1. Refrigerant: R-410a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34.

2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with

refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.

3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include a thermal-expansion valve, refrigerant

charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff

valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with

moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.

4. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor

discharge line and the refrigerant liquid-line to allow the isolation and storage of the

refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser.

I. Evaporator:

1. Brazed-plate or shell-and-tube design, as indicated.

2. Shell and Tube:

a. Description: Direct-expansion, shell-and-tube design with fluid flowing through

the shell and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell.

b. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

c. Shell Material: Carbon steel.

d. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles designed to

ensure positive oil return and located at each end of the tube bundle.

e. Shell Nozzles: Fluid nozzles located along the side of the shell and terminated with

mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping.

f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin

design, expanded into tube sheets.

3. Brazed Plate:

a. Direct-expansion, single-pass, brazed-plate design.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. Type 316 stainless-steel construction.

c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

d. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling end connections for

connection to field piping.

4. Heater: Factory-installed and -wired electric heater with integral controls designed to

protect the evaporator to minus 20 deg F.

5. Remote Mounting: Designed for remote field mounting where indicated. Provide kit for

field installation.

J. Air-Cooled Condenser:

1. Plate-fin coil with integral subcooling on each circuit, rated at 450 psig.

a. Construct coils of copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum with precoated

epoxy-phenolic fins.

b. Coat coils with a baked epoxy corrosion-resistant coating after fabrication.

c. Hail Protection: Provide condenser coils with louvers, baffles, or hoods to protect

against hail damage.

2. Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades,

arranged for vertical air discharge.

3. Fan Motors: Totally enclosed nonventilating (TENV) or totally enclosed air over (TEAO)

enclosure, with permanently lubricated bearings, and having built-in overcurrent- and

thermal-overload protection.

4. Fan Guards: Steel safety guards with corrosion-resistant coating.

K. Electrical Power:

1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other

electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to water

chiller.

2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure with hinged access door with

lock and key or padlock and key.

3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram.

4. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway.

5. Field power interface shall be to NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect switch.

6. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following

disconnecting means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for

fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-

4-1.

7. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.

8. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995, or an integral component of water chiller

control microprocessor.

9. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings.

10. Provide power factor correction capacitors to correct power factor to 0.95 at full load.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



11. Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and sized with

enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity.

a. Power unit-mounted controls where indicated.

b. Power unit-mounted, ground fault interrupt (GFI) duplex receptacle.

12. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

13. Indicate the following for water chiller electrical power supply:

a. Current, phase to phase, for all three phases.

b. Voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral for all three phases.

c. Three-phase real power (kilowatts).

d. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive).

e. Power factor.

f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt hours).

g. Fault log, with time and date of each.

L. Controls:

1. Stand-alone, microprocessor based.

2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate enclosure

of matching construction.

3. Operator Interface: Keypad or pressure-sensitive touch screen. Multiple-character,

backlit, liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes. Display the following:

a. Date and time.

b. Operating or alarm status.

c. Operating hours.

d. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset.

e. Temperature and pressure of operating set points.

f. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled water.

g. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser.

h. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser.

i. No cooling load condition.

j. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status).

k. Pump status.

l. Antirecycling timer status.

m. Percent of maximum motor amperage.

n. Current-limit set point.

o. Number of compressor starts.

4. Control Functions:

a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.

b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load

limit. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on return-water

temperature.

c. Current limit and demand limit.

d. External water chiller emergency stop.

e. Antirecycling timer.

f. Automatic lead-lag switching.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Manual-Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water chiller

and require manual reset:

a. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure.

b. Low chilled-water temperature.

c. Refrigerant high pressure.

d. High or low oil pressure.

e. High oil temperature.

f. Loss of chilled-water flow.

g. Control device failure.

M. Insulation:

1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with

ASTM C 534, Type I, for tubular materials and Type II, for sheet materials.

2. Thickness: 1-1/4 inches.

3. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of water chiller components.

a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 percent

of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints.

4. Apply protective coating to exposed surfaces of insulation.

N. Accessories:

1. Factory-furnished, chilled-water flow switches for field installation.

2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each

refrigeration circuit.

3. Factory-furnished spring isolators for field installation.


A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.

B. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:

Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.

C. For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 370 procedure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install water chillers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install water chillers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




"Vibration Controls for HVAC."

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory

installed.

E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 232116 "Hydronic

Piping Specialties."Section 15179 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible

connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with

shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with

pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller

with a union, flange, or mechanical coupling.

D. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of

connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE


B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical

connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and

perform the following:

1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested.

2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.

3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.

4. Operate water chiller for run-in period.

5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.

6. Verify proper motor rotation.

7. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller

startup and shutdown.

8. Verify and record performance of chilled-water flow and low-temperature interlocks.

9. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices.

10. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units


SECTION 15725 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Variable-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.


A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Unit dimensions and weight.

2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.

3. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.

c. Fan construction and accessories.

d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Filters with performance characteristics.


A. Source quality-control reports.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and





1. Filters: Two set(s) for each air-handling unit.

2. Gaskets: Two set(s) for each access door.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-

handling units and components.

C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to

ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual

equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp.

2. Engineered Air.

3. Mammoth Inc.

4. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.2 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:

1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint.

2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets.

3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant.

4. Factory Finish for Steel and Galvanized-Steel Casings: Immediately after cleaning and

pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on enamel finish, consisting

of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type II.

2. Minimum R-value: R-13.

3. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.

C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of

same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement

shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components.

3. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and

two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to

be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.

c. Size: At least 15 inches wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height

of 60 inches.

4. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors and inspection and access panels.

b. Access Section: Doors.

c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panel.

d. Damper Section: Doors.

e. Filter Section: Inspection and access panels large enough to allow periodic

removal and installation of filters.

f. Mixing Section: Doors.

g. Humidifier Section: Doors.

D. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from

humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection.

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face.

b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

2. Formed sections.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Double-wall, galvanized-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam insulation

and moisture-tight seal.

4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on both ends of pan.

a. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 2.

5. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

6. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from

top coil.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel

supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.

2.3 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.

1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor

horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective

coating of lubricating oil.

b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's

speed range.

B. Plenum Fan Housings: Steel frame and panel; fabricated without fan scroll and volute housing.

C. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed

airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub

riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

D. Fan Shaft Bearings:

1. Prelubricated and Sealed, Ball Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with a rated life

of 200,000 hours according to ABMA 9.

E. Internal Vibration Isolation: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's standard

vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch.

F. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and


for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in electrical Sections.

5. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.

G. Variable Frequency Controllers: Refer to Section 19269 “Variable-Frequency Motor

Controllers”

2.4 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with ARI 410.

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s).

3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.

2.5 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.

2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access

plenum.

B. Disposable Panel Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.

2. Thickness: 2 inches.

3. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 8.

4. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive and antimicrobial

agent.

5. Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet side,

hinged, and with pull and retaining handles.

C. Filter Gage:

1. 3-1/2-inch-diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case.

2. Vent valves.

3. Black figures on white background.

4. Front recalibration adjustment.

5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy.

6. Range: 0- to 4.0-inch wg.

7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch aluminum

tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.6 DAMPERS

A. General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, "Laboratory

Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at 2000-

fpm face velocity through damper and 4-inch wg pressure differential.

B. Electronic Damper Operators:

1. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel

and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

2. Operator Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513

"Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action

or two-position action.

c. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil

immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring

mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of

limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of

150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.

4. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500

fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000


5. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

6. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

7. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear

release on nonspring-return actuators.

8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.

9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.

10. Temperature Rating: 40 to 104 deg F.

11. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

C. Face-and-Bypass Dampers: Opposed-blade, galvanized-steel dampers with cadmium-

plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered stainless steel sleeve bearings mounted in a single

galvanized-steel frame and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Provide

blade gaskets and edge seals, and mechanically fasten blades to operating rod.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized-steel

dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade

arrangement with cadmium-plated steel operating rods rotating in stainless-steel sleeve bearings

mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common

linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 5 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 9 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg.

E. Mixing Section: Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly located immediately downstream of mixing

section.

F. Combination Filter and Mixing Section:

1. Cabinet support members shall hold 2-inch-thick, pleated, flat, permanent or throwaway

filters.

2. Multiple-blade, air-mixer assembly shall mix air to prevent stratification, located

immediately downstream of mixing box.

2.7 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Casing:

1. Outside Casing: Galvanized steel, minimum 0.052 inch thick.

2. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, solid, minimum 0.052 inch thick.

3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, minimum 0.052 inch thick.

4. Insulation Thickness: 2 inches.

5. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections before Fans: 8-inch wg.

6. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections after Fans: 8-inch wg.

B. Supply Fan:

1. Drive: Direct.

2. Type: Steel, airfoil centrifugal.

3. Number of Fan Wheels: 1.

4. Fan Housing and Wheel Coating: Hot-dip galvanized;.

C. Exhaust Fan:

1. Drive: Direct.

2. Type: Steel, airfoil centrifugal.

3. Number of Fan Wheels: 1.

4. Fan Housing and Wheel Coating: Hot-dip galvanized;.

D. Cooling Coil, Water:

1. Piping Connections: Threaded, same end of coil.

2. Tube Material: Copper.

3. Fin Type: Plate.

4. Fin Material: Aluminum.

5. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.

6. Headers:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.

b. Provide insulated cover to conceal headers exposed outside casings.

7. Frames: Channel frame, 0.052-inchthick galvanized steel.

8. Coil Working-Pressure Ratings: 200 psig, 325 deg F.

E. Cooling Coil, Refrigerant:

1. Piping Connections: Threaded, same end of coil.

2. Tube Material: Copper.

3. Fin Type: Plate.

4. Fin Material: Aluminum.

5. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond.

6. Headers:

a. Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated.

b. Provide insulated cover to conceal headers exposed outside casings.

7. Frames: Channel frame, 0.052-inchthick galvanized steel.

8. Coil Working-Pressure Ratings: 350 psig, 325 deg F.

9. Refrigerant Type: R410A.


A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant

Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density,

rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory

Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

D. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to 450 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject

insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical

services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install air-handling units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-

Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548.13


B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and

maintenance.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace

temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean filters.

D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on

outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter

banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/4, ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to

nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install

cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 15181"Hydronic

Piping" and Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." Install shutoff valve and union or

flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil

return connection.

F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 15183 "Refrigerant

Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.

G. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in

Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,


B. Perform tests and inspections.




C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and

connections for leaks.

2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.

3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm



equipment.

D. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass

tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE



2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing

operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-

recommended lubricants.

6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.

7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.

8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain

minimum outdoor-air setting.

9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.

10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.

11. Install new, clean filters.

12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust

fan to indicated rpm.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.

3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for

air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and

air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally

to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers,

coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Split-System Air-Conditioning Units


SECTION 15738 - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components.




A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.






B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard

for Refrigeration Systems."

1.6 WARRANTY


replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. For Compressor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

b. For Parts: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

c. For Labor: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Carrier Corporation; Home Comfort and HVAC Building & Industrial Systems.

2. Trane; a business of American Standard companies.

3. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)

A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and

insulation on back of panel.

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.

3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-

expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110.

4. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to

motor.

5. Fan Motors:

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure

type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 15058 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent

lubrication.

c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.



7. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.

8. Condensate Drain Pans:

a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends)

and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.

1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with

ASHRAE 62.1.

2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

b. Single-wall, galvanized-steel sheet.

c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.

1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.

9. Air Filtration Section:

a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1) Comply with NFPA 90A.

2) Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access

doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted

out from access plenum.

b. Disposable Panel Filters:

1) Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type.

2) Thickness: 1 inch.

3) Merv according to ASHRAE 52.2: 8.

4) Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive.

5) Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on

inlet side, and hinged; with pull and retaining handles.

2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable

panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base.

Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration

isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload

devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.

a. Compressor Type: Scroll.

b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and

automatic-reset low-pressure switch.

c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.

d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid

subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110.

3. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.

4. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.

5. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 0 deg F.

6. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 15900 "HVAC

Instrumentation and Controls" and Section 15940 "Sequence of Operation."

B. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.

D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,

pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

E. Drain Hose: For condensate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units level and plumb.

B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely

fastened to building structure.

C. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in

Section 07720 "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated

fasteners.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting

base.



E. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install

tubing to allow access to unit.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.

B. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 15815 "Metal Ducts."

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-

system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are

specified in Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."







© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved








equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.


3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Metal Ducts


SECTION 15815 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Round ducts and fittings.

3. Sheet metal materials.

4. Sealants and gaskets.

5. Hangers and supports.


1. Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and

balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-

mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint

construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design

criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1.



B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top of ducts.

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration

isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.

2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.

3. Reinforcement details and spacing.

4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.

5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and

supports.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and


1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct

layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:



c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Perimeter moldings.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse

Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal

Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable

sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on

indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.



the following:

a. Lindab Inc.

b. McGill AirFlow LLC.

c. SEMCO Incorporated.

d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.

e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for

static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams,"

for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support

intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal

seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and

Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for

exposed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum

ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified

acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight

seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel.

10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch

wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods

with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts

designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

F. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

G. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.

Comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke

dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign

materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under

Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN

HOOD EXHAUST DUCT

A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and

sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.

B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals

of 12 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as indicated on Drawings.

Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom of duct.

C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and


3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct

Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class B.

6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class A.

7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal

Class C.

10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal

Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum

Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports

within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 15820 "Air

Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if

required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch

insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with

Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97

percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from

HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points

of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner

to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated

or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.

Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and

straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions

after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC."

3.9 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:


b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.



3. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:





4. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






B. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.




2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:










C. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 1-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure.






pressure.



3. Ducts Connected to Commercial Kitchen Hoods: Comply with NFPA 96.

a. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.

b. Welded seams and joints.

c. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg.

d. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations.

e. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






pressure.



D. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:











E. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:

1) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane

Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-

1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have

proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three

segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments

for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments

for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

G. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees."

Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Duct Accessories


SECTION 15820 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Manual volume dampers.

3. Control dampers.

4. Fire dampers.

5. Smoke dampers.

6. Flange connectors.

7. Turning vanes.

8. Duct-mounted access doors.

9. Flexible connectors.

10. Flexible ducts.

11. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and

smoke detectors.

2. Section 283112 "Zoned (DC-Loop) Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and smoke

detectors.



B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and


1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.

b. Manual volume damper installations.

c. Control-damper installations.

d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted

access doors.

e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch

minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS



1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

4. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

5. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

6. Nailor Industries Inc.

7. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

8. Pottorff.

9. Ruskin Company.

10. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 3-inch wg.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or

mechanically attached and mounting flange.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025-inch-thick,

roll-formed aluminum with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel.

2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.

3. Electric actuators.

4. Chain pulls.

5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel.

8. Screen Type: Insect.

9. 90-degree stops.

2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:



the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

d. McGill AirFlow LLC.

e. Nailor Industries Inc.

f. Pottorff.

g. Ruskin Company.

h. Trox USA Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



i. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers:



the following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. McGill AirFlow LLC.

d. Nailor Industries Inc.

e. Pottorff.

f. Ruskin Company.

g. Trox USA Inc.

h. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch-thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for

attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch-thick aluminum sheet.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch-thick extruded aluminum.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

C. Jackshaft:

1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on

supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in

multiple-damper assembly.

D. Damper Hardware:

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel,

and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.

3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS




2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.



5. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

6. McGill AirFlow LLC.

7. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.



10. Pottorff.

11. Ruskin Company.


13. Young Regulator Company.

B. Frames:

1. Hat shaped.

2. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

3. Mitered and welded corners.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches.

2. Opposed-blade design.

3. Galvanized-steel.

4. 0.064 inch thick single skin.

5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene.

6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel

and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Bearings:

1. Oil-impregnated bronze.

2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of

damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.6 FIRE DAMPERS




2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.





7. Pottorff.

8. Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.

9. Ruskin Company.


11. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-

thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.05 thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must

comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of

interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS







5. Pottorff.

6. Ruskin Company.

B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

D. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting

flange.

E. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

F. Leakage: Class I.

G. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.039-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall

or floor application with factory-furnished silicone calking.

I. Damper Motors: two-position action.

J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and


for HVAC Equipment."



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and

Control."

3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear

trains.

4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated.

Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or

adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating

of 150 in. x lbf.

5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed

to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal

operation at minus 40 deg F.

6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running

torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.

7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

K. Accessories:

1. Auxiliary switches for signaling fan control or position indication.

2. Momentary test switch, damper mounted.

2.8 FLANGE CONNECTORS



1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.


B. Description: Add-on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and

components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.9 TURNING VANES




2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. Elgen Manufacturing.

4. METALAIRE, Inc.

5. SEMCO Incorporated.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support

with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Double wall.

2.10 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS







5. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.




9. Pottorff.

10. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inchbutt or piano hinge and cam latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Pressure Relief Access Door:

1. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Door: Double wall with insulation fill with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure

class.

3. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative-pressure

ducts.

4. Factory set at 3.0- to 8.0-inch wg.

5. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range.

6. Hinge: Continuous piano.

7. Latches: Cam.

8. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber.

9. Insulation Fill: 1-inch-thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.11 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES




2. Flame Gard, Inc.

3. 3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.

D. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for

minimum 2000 deg F.

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.

2.12 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS




2. Duro Dyne Inc.


4. Ventfabrics, Inc.


B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick

aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.


F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof,

synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..

2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.


2.13 FLEXIBLE DUCTS



1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.



B. Noninsulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound,

spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex

adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene

vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.

2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.


4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: Nylon strap in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.14 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust

fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

3. At drain pans and seals.

4. Downstream from control dampers and equipment.

5. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream

from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

6. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.

7. Control devices requiring inspection.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



8. Elsewhere as indicated.

I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

K. Label access doors according to Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and

Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not

use flexible ducts to change directions.

N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 84 inch lengths of flexible duct

clamped or strapped in place.

O. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

P. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.

3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper

heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Air Terminal Units


SECTION 15840 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fan-powered air terminal units.

2. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.










B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and

Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PARALLEL FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS



1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company.


3. Price Industries.

4. Titus.

5. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in parallel arrangement inside unit casing

with control components inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner

complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a

maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested

according to ASTM E 84.

a. Cover liner with nonporous foil.

2. Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.

4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.

5. Fan: Forward-curved centrifugal, located at plenum air inlet.

6.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with flow-sensing ring and peripheral gasket and self-

lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg

inlet static pressure.

E. Motor:

1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15058 "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

2. Type: Permanent-split capacitor with SCR for speed adjustment.

3. Fan-Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators.

4. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

5. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron.

6. Efficiency: Premium efficient.

7. Service Factor: 1.15.

8. Motor Speed: Single speed.

a. Speed Control: Infinitely adjustable with electronic controls.


a. Horsepower: 1/8.

b. Volts: 277.

c. Phase: Single.

d. Hz: 60.

F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1 and a minimum efficiency reporting

value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Material: Polyurethane foam having 70 percent arrestance and 3 MERV.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Material: Glass fiber treated with adhesive; having 80 percent arrestance and 5 MERV.

3. Thickness: 1 inch.

G. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and

hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with primary automatic, and

secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked

terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

1. Location: Plenum air inlet.

2. Stage(s): varies

3. Access door interlocked disconnect switch.

4. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air

temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable.)

5. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.

6. Airflow switch for proof of airflow.

7. Fan interlock contacts.

8. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A).

9. Mercury contactors.

10. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).

H. Factory-Mounted and -Wired Controls: Electrical components mounted in control box with

removable cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source.

1. Control Transformer: Factory mounted for control voltage on electric and electronic

control units with terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power

source.

2. Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip. Terminal lugs to match

quantities, sizes, and materials of branch-circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in

terminal box that is sized according to NFPA 70.

3. Disconnect Switch: Factory-mounted, fuse type.

I. Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and

mounted on side of unit.

J. Electric Controls: 24-V damper actuator with wall-mounted electric thermostat and appropriate

mounting hardware.

K. Electronic Controls: Bidirectional damper operator and microprocessor-based controller with

integral airflow transducer and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with

temperature controls specified in Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and

shall have the following features:

1. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.

2. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.

3. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.

4. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 15900 "HVAC

Instrumentation and Controls."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.2 SHUTOFF, SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS



1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company.


3. Price Industries.

4. Titus.

5. Trane; a business of American Standard Companies.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a

protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, single wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 3/4-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner

complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a

maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested

according to ASTM E 84.

a. Cover liner with nonporous foil.

b. Cover liner with nonporous foil and perforated metal.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.

4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket.



D. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows

for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to

140 deg F, shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static

pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks.

E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg

inlet static pressure.

F. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion noise and

hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with primary automatic, and

secondary manual, reset thermal cutouts. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked

terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware.

1. Access door interlocked disconnect switch.

2. Downstream air temperature sensor with local connection to override discharge-air

temperature to not exceed a maximum temperature set point (adjustable.)

3. Nickel chrome 80/20 heating elements.

4. Airflow switch for proof of airflow.

5. Fan interlock contacts.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection (for coils more than 48 A).

7. Mercury contactors.

8. Magnetic contactor for each step of control (for three-phase coils).

G. Direct Digital Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in

Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."

H. Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller

and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in

Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and shall have the following features:

1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, powered open.

2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller with

electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory

calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.

b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.

c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.

d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Section 15900

"HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."

3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted, with temperature set-point adjustment and access for

connection of portable operator terminal.


A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods

with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts

designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

E. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;

compatible with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for

units with aluminum casings.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum

factory-set airflows, and ARI certification seal.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and

maintenance.

B. Install wall-mounted thermostats.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for

slabs more than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and

for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.

B. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 15815 "Metal Ducts."

C. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in

Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum

factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC

Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved








B. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE



2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer

to achieve proper performance.

3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.

4. Verify that control connections are complete.

5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.

6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles


SECTION 15855 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.

2. Louver face diffusers.

3. Linear slot diffusers.

4. Adjustable bar registers and grilles.

5. Fixed face registers and grilles.


1. Section 15820 "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,

quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:



a. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc.

b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.

c. Carnes.

d. Hart & Cooley Inc.

e. Krueger.

f. METALAIRE, Inc.

g. Nailor Industries Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



h. Price Industries.

i. Titus.

j. Tuttle & Bailey.

B. Louver Face Diffuser:





c. Carnes.

d. METALAIRE, Inc.

e. Nailor Industries Inc.

f. Price Industries.

g. Titus.

h. Tuttle & Bailey.

2.2 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Adjustable Bar Register:





c. Carnes.

d. Dayus Register & Grille Inc.

e. Hart & Cooley Inc.

f. Krueger.

g. METALAIRE, Inc.

h. Nailor Industries Inc.

i. Price Industries.

j. Titus.

k. Tuttle & Bailey.

B. Fixed Face Grille:





c. Carnes.



f. Krueger.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




i. Titus.

j. Tuttle & Bailey.

C. Linear Bar Grille:





c. Carnes.



f. Krueger.



i. Titus.

j. Tuttle & Bailey.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,

"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final

locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,

locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with

installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and

maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,

before starting air balancing.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans HVAC Instrumentation and Controls


SECTION 15900 - HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control

components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.

B. See Section 15940 "Sequence of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section.


A. Product Data: For each control device indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Schematic flow diagrams.

2. Power, signal, and control wiring diagrams.

3. Details of control panel faces.

4. Damper schedule.

5. Valve schedule.

6. DDC System Hardware: Wiring diagrams, schematic floor plans, and schematic control

diagrams.

7. Control System Software: Schematic diagrams, written descriptions, and points list.


A. Field quality-control test reports.



B. Software and firmware operational documentation.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:



manufacturers specified.


manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Alerton Inc.

2. American Auto-Matrix.

3. Andover Controls Corporation.

4. Automated Logic Corporation.

5. Carel.

6. Delta Controls Inc.

7. EDA Controls Corp.

8. Electronic Systems USA, Inc.

9. Functional Devices Inc.

10. Heat-Timer Corporation.

11. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control.

12. Impact Energy Controls Corp.

13. Invensys Building Systems.

14. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.

15. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company.

16. Luwa USA, Inc.; Textile Air Engineering.

17. McQuay International.

18. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

19. Solidyne Corp.

20. Staefa Control System Inc.; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

21. TAC Americas, INC.

22. TCS/Basys Controls.

23. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.

24. Teletrol Systems Incorporated.

25. Temco Controls Ltd. USA.

26. Tour & Andersson Control, Inc.

27. Trane; Worldwide Applied Systems Group.

28. Triangle MicroSystems, Inc.

29. Voltec, Inc.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface

equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface

equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers

operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to

control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via

dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device

depicted by point-and-click graphics.

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: PC-based microcomputer with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),

integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium 5, MHz.

3. Random-Access Memory: 512 MB.

4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1600 x 1200 pixels, 64-MB video memory, with TV

out.

5. Monitor: 20 inches, LCD color.

6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape.

7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB.

8. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB.

9. DVD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48.

10. Mouse: Three button, optical.

11. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2 kVa.

12. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 10 with high-speed Internet access.

13. Printer: Color, ink-jet type as follows:

a. Print Head: 4800 x 1200 dpi optimized color resolution.

b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 100 sheets.

c. Application Software.

B. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-

access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and

backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from

other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to

operator workstation.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions


a. Global communications.

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.

e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

C. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable,

nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or

upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions


a. Global communications.

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation.

D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect

points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.

2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.

3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or

resistance signals.

4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and

status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current

(4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually

adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,

floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit

connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current

and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.

2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes.

3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for

workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.

2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.

3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.

4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating

system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the

application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication,

and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable;

memory with bios; and 72-hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share

real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms.Perform

automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F.

2.5 ANALOG CONTROLLERS

A. Step Controllers: 6- or 10-stage type, with heavy-duty switching rated to handle loads and

operated by electric motor.

B. Electric, Outdoor-Reset Controllers: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning

action with adjustable throttling range, adjustable set point, scale range minus 10 to plus 70

deg F, and single- or double-pole contacts.

C. Electronic Controllers: Wheatstone-bridge-amplifier type, in steel enclosure with provision for

remote-resistance readjustment. Identify adjustments on controllers, including proportional band

and authority.

1. Single controllers can be integral with control motor if provided with accessible control

readjustment potentiometer.

D. Fan-Speed Controllers: Solid-state model providing field-adjustable proportional control of

motor speed from maximum to minimum of 55 percent and on-off action below minimum fan

speed. Controller shall briefly apply full voltage, when motor is started, to rapidly bring motor

up to minimum speed. Equip with filtered circuit to eliminate radio interference.

2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as

required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. BEC Controls Corporation.

b. Ebtron, Inc.

c. Heat-Timer Corporation.

d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.

e. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



f. RDF Corporation.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.

3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.

4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..

5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 72 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft..

6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion

length of 2-1/2 inches.

7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.

b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.

c. Thermometer: Exposed.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

C. RTDs and Transmitters:



b. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

c. RDF Corporation.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.

3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.

4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft..

5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 18 inches long, rigid; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required.

6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2

inches.




c. Thermometer: Exposed.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. General Eastern Instruments.

c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.

e. TCS/Basys Controls.

f. Vaisala.

2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.

3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity.




c. Thermometer: Concealed.

5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting

plate.

6. Outside-Air Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,

suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of minus 22 to plus 185 deg F.

7. Duct and Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0 to 100 percent

relative humidity.

E. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:



b. General Eastern Instruments.

c. MAMAC Systems, Inc.

d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.

e. TCS/Basys Controls.

f. Vaisala.

2. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input,

and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.

c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg.

d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.

3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service;

minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

4. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable

for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4

to 20 mA.

5. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with

suitable scale range and differential.

6. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas or liquid service; range suitable for system;

linear output 4 to 20 mA.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.7 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable

range of 0- to 5-inch wg.

B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable

pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.

C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-

core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated

motor current.

D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered

transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

E. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match

current and system output requirements.

F. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to

10-V dc, feedback signal.

G. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating,

stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in

NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.



b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.

2.8 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT


1. B. W. Technologies.

2. CEA Instruments, Inc.

3. Ebtron, Inc.

4. Gems Sensors Inc.

5. Greystone Energy Systems Inc.

6. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control.

7. INTEC Controls, Inc.

8. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.

9. MSA Canada Inc.

10. QEL/Quatrosense Environmental Limited.

11. Sauter Controls Corporation.

12. Sensidyne, Inc.

13. TSI Incorporated.

14. Vaisala.

15. Vulcain Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors;

suitable over a temperature range of 23 to 130 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with

continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.

C. Occupancy Sensor: Passive infrared, with time delay, daylight sensor lockout, sensitivity

control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for flush mounting.

2.9 THERMOSTATS


1. Erie Controls.

2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div.

3. Heat-Timer Corporation.


5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc.

6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.

B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.

2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.

3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.

4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.

5. Short-cycle protection.

6. Programming based on every day of week.

7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard

disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto.

8. Battery replacement without program loss.

9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day.

b. Actual room temperature.

c. Programmed temperature.

d. Programmed time.

e. Duration of timed override.

f. Day of week.

g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."

C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch

type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F

set-point range, and 2 deg F maximum differential.

D. Line-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: Bimetal-actuated, open contact or bellows-actuated,

enclosed, snap-switch or equivalent solid-state type, with heat anticipator; listed for electrical

rating; with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F set-point range, and 2 deg F

maximum differential.

1. Electric Heating Thermostats: Equip with off position on dial wired to break ungrounded

conductors.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Selector Switch: Integral, manual on-off-auto.

E. Remote-Bulb Thermostats: On-off or modulating type, liquid filled to compensate for changes

in ambient temperature; with copper capillary and bulb, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Bulbs in water lines with separate wells of same material as bulb.

2. Bulbs in air ducts with flanges and shields.

3. Averaging Elements: Copper tubing with either single- or multiple-unit elements,

extended to cover full width of duct or unit; adequately supported.

4. Scale settings and differential settings are clearly visible and adjustable from front of

instrument.

5. On-Off Thermostat: With precision snap switches and with electrical ratings required by

application.

6. Modulating Thermostats: Construct so complete potentiometer coil and wiper assembly is

removable for inspection or replacement without disturbing calibration of instrument.

F. Room Thermostat Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Exposed.

2. Set-Point Indication: Exposed.

3. Thermometer: Concealed.

G. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with

adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

H. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable

set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent

pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

2.10 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating

action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed

and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings

designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches,

or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of


4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of


5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and

breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at

rated torque.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential

pressure.

3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500


f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to 3000


4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators.

7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 120-V ac.

8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.

9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.

10. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.

11. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F.

12. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

2.11 CONTROL VALVES


1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div.

2. Erie Controls.

3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc.

4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation.

5. Neles-Jamesbury.

6. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division.

7. Pneuline Controls.


B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on

maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable

composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc,

flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.

a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on

top and bottom.

b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding

surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.

4. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:

a. Two Position: Line size.

b. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value

specified above.

5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics.

6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide

minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-

way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total

system (pump) head.

D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig, 150-psig maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or

ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-

replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.

1. Body Style: Wafer.

2. Disc Type: Nickel-plated ductile iron.

3. Sizing: 1-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

E. Terminal Unit Control Valves: Bronze body, bronze trim, two or three ports as indicated,

replaceable plugs and seats, and union and threaded ends.

1. Rating: Class 125 for service at 125 psig and 250 deg F operating conditions.

2. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff

head.

3. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics.

2.12 DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.

2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div.

3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.).

4. United Enertech Corp.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed-blade design; 0.108-inch-minimum thick, galvanized-steel or

0.125-inch-minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper

blades shall not be less than 0.064-inch-thick galvanized steel with maximum blade width of 8

inches and length of 48 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch-diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, with

oil-impregnated sintered bronze blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated

steel and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust

bearings at each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

3. Edge Seals, Standard Pressure Applications: Closed-cell neoprene.

4. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage Applications: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable

rubber blade seals and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less

than 10 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure of 4-inch wg when damper

is held by torque of 50 in. x lbf; when tested according to AMCA 500D.

2.13 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in Section 16717

"Communications Horizontal Cabling."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings

and room details before installation. Install devices 60 inches above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

B. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances.

2. Public areas.

3. Where indicated.

C. Install automatic dampers according to Section 15820 "Duct Accessories."

D. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor

temperatures.

E. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 15077

"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

F. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232116

"Hydronic Piping Specialties."Section 15179 "Hydronic Piping Specialties."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



G. Install refrigerant instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 15183

"Refrigerant Piping."

H. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" and

Section 15816 "Nonmetal Ducts."

I. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Section 16717 "Communications

Horizontal Cabling."

3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Section 16717 "Communications

Horizontal Cabling."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are

exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway.

3. Install concealed cable in raceway.

4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where

several cables follow a common path.

5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against

abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control

system, except local individual room control cables.

7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration

of piping and equipment.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic

duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is

in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,

and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and

to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:


proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Test calibration of controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating operation

with compatible signal generator.

4. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required.

5. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions.

6. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.

7. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations.

4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.

5. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators.

6. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.

7. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.

8. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

9. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if

applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and

approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.

d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Section 01820

"Demonstration and Training."


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sequence of Operation


SECTION 15940 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B. See Section 15900 "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control equipment and devices

and for submittal requirements.

1.2 CENTRAL REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT SEQUENCES

A. Start and Stop Chilled-Water Pump(s):

1. Input Device: Flow switch in condenser-water circuit.

2. Output Device: DDC system command to starter relay.

3. Action: Energize pump(s).

4. Display:

a. Chilled-water flow indication.

b. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off status.

c. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off indication.

B. Start and Stop Chiller(s):

1. Input Device: Flow switches in condenser-water and chilled-water circuit.

2. Output Device: Chiller terminal strip.

3. Action: Energize chiller internal control circuit.

4. Display:

a. Condenser-water flow indication.

b. Chilled-water flow indication.

c. Chiller(s) on-off status.

d. Chiller(s) on-off indication.

e. Chilled-water supply and return temperature.

f. Chilled-water temperature control-point adjustment.

C. Alternate Chiller(s):

1. Input Device: DDC system software.

2. Output Device: Chiller terminal strip.

3. Action: Operate chiller(s) on lead-lag, alternating each startup.

4. Display: Chiller(s) on-off indication.

D. Alarm Chiller(s) Start Failure:

1. Input Device: Chiller software signal.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Output Device: DDC system alarm.

3. Action: Signal alarm.

4. Display: Chiller "failure-to-start" indication.

E. Chilled-Water Level:

1. Input Device: Expansion tank liquid sensor.

2. Output Device: DDC system alarm.

3. Action: Signal alarm.

4. Display: Expansion tank low-level alarm.

F. Chilled-Water Supply Temperature:

1. Input Device: Temperature sensor in common chilled-water supply piping.

2. Output Device: Integral chiller controls.

3. Action: Maintain constant leaving chilled-water temperature.

a. Display: Chilled-water supply temperature.

G. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal:

1. DDC system graphic.

2. DDC system status, on-off.

3. Outdoor-air temperature.

4. Cooling (software) demand indication.

5. Time and time schedule.

6. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off status.

7. Chilled-water pump(s) on-off indication.

8. Chilled-water flow indication.

9. Refrigeration machine on-off indication.

10. Chilled-water supply temperature.

11. Chilled-water return temperature.

12. Chilled-water temperature control-point adjustment.

13. Chiller(s) on-off status.

14. Chiller(s) on-off indication.

15. Chiller "failure-to-start" indication.

16. Expansion tank low-level alarm.

17. Chilled-water pressure drop through chiller.

18. Chiller chilled-water supply and return temperature.

19. System capacity in tons.

1.3 AIR-HANDLING-UNIT CONTROL SEQUENCES

A. Start and Stop Supply Fan(s):

1. Enable: Freeze Protection:

a. Input Device: Duct-mounted averaging element thermostat, located before supply

fan.

b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



c. Action: Allow start if duct temperature is above 37 deg F; signal alarm if fan fails

to start as commanded.

2. Enable: High-Temperature Protection:

a. Input Device: Duct-mounted thermostat, located in return air.

b. Output Device: Hard wired through motor starter; DDC system alarm.

c. Action: Allow start if duct temperature is below 300 deg F.

3. Initiate: Occupied Time Schedule:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule.

b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter.

c. Action: Energize fan(s).

4. Initiate: Unoccupied Time Schedule:

a. Input Device: DDC system demand.

b. Output Device: Binary output to motor starter.

c. Action: Energize fan(s).

5. Unoccupied Ventilation:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule and output.

b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to motor starter.

c. Action: Cycle fan(s) during unoccupied periods.

6. Display: Supply-fan on-off indication.

B. Supply Fan(s) Variable-Volume Control:

1. Occupied Time Schedule:


b. Output Device: Binary output.

c. Action: Enable control.

2. Volume Control:

a. Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure

referenced to conditioned-space static pressure.

b. Output Device: DDC system analog output to motor speed controller. Set

variable-speed drive to minimum speed when fan is stopped.

c. Action: Maintain constant supply-duct static pressure.

3. High Pressure:

a. Input Device: Static-pressure transmitter sensing supply-duct static pressure

referenced to static pressure outside the duct.

b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to alarm panel.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



c. Action: Stop fan and signal alarm when static pressure rises above excessive-

static-pressure set point.

4. Display:

a. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication.

b. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point.

c. Supply-fan airflow rate.

d. Supply-fan speed.

5. Unoccupied Ventilation:

a. Input Device: DDC system time schedule and output.

b. Output Device: DDC system binary output to motor starter.

c. Action: Cycle fan(s) during unoccupied periods.

6. Display: Return-fan on-off indication.

C. Filters: During occupied periods, when fan is running, differential air-pressure transmitters

exist.

1. Differential Pressure:

a. Input Device: Differential-pressure switches.

b. Output Device: DDC system alarm.

c. Action: Signal alarm on low- and high-pressure conditions.

2. Display:

a. Filter air-pressure-drop indication.

D. Hydronic Cooling Coil:

1. Occupied Time Schedule:



c. Action: Enable control.

2. Discharge-Air Temperature:

a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor.

b. Output Device: Normally closed modulating control valve.

c. Action: Maintain supply-air temperature set point of 55 deg F.

3. Temperature Reset:

a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor in return air.

b. Output Device: DDC system in straight-line relationship for the following

conditions:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1) 60 deg F when return-air temperature is 70 deg F.

2) 55 deg F when return-air temperature is 75 deg F.

c. Action: Reset supply-air temperature set point of 55 deg F.

4. Unoccupied Time Schedule:



c. Action: Disable control.

5. Display:

a. Fan-discharge air-temperature indication.

b. Fan-discharge air-temperature set point.

c. Cooling-coil air-temperature indication.

d. Cooling-coil air-temperature set point.

e. Cooling-coil control-valve position.

E. Coordination of Air-Handling Unit Sequences: Ensure that preheat, mixed-air, heating-coil, and

cooling-coil controls have common inputs and do not overlap in function.

F. Operator Station Display: Indicate the following on operator workstation display terminal:

1. DDC system graphic.

2. DDC system on-off indication.

3. DDC system occupied/unoccupied mode.

4. Outdoor-air-temperature indication.

5. Supply-fan on-off indication.

6. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure indication.

7. Supply-fan-discharge static-pressure set point.

8. Supply-fan airflow rate.

9. Supply-fan speed.

10. Building static-pressure indication.

11. Building static-pressure set point.

12. Filter air-pressure-drop indication.

13. Fan-discharge air-temperature indication.

14. Fan-discharge air-temperature set point.

15. Cooling-coil air-temperature indication.

16. Cooling-coil air-temperature set point.

17. Cooling-coil control-valve position.

18. Room temperature indication.

19. Room temperature set point.

1.4 TERMINAL UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE

A. Cabinet Unit Heater, Hydronic:

1. Room Temperature:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Input Device: Electronic temperature sensor.

b. Output Device: DDC system binary output.

c. Action: Cycle fan to maintain temperature.

2. Low-Temperature Safety:

a. Input Device: Line-voltage, on-off thermostat, pipe mounted.

b. Output Device: Hard wired.

c. Action: Stop fan when condensate temperature falls below 35 deg F.

3. Display:

a. Room temperature indication.

b. Room temperature set point.

B. Cabinet Unit Heater, Electric: Room thermostat cycles fan and sequences stages of heating.

C. Unit Heater, Electric: Room thermostat cycles fan and sequences stages of heating.

1.5 VENTILATION SEQUENCES

A. Outdoor Air Supply Fan: Occupancy sensor energizes fan.

B. Exhaust Fan: Occupancy sensor cycles fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing


SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.


A. Certified TAB reports.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC NEBB

or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,

Section 5, "Instrumentation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned

and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible

and their controls are connected and functioning.

J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated

perforations.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



K. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or

mixing fluid flows.

L. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

M. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

N. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

O. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and

record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.

7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.

8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation,"

Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," Section 230719 "HVAC Piping

Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position

indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other

suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total

airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct

restrictions.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum

that houses the fan.

3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,

rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.

4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-

recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to

accommodate actual conditions.

6. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than

indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Sections for air-handling units for

adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit

performance.

7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate

the total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust

volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust

submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of

indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the

dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the

Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the

indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at minimum set-point

airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal

units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they

are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted,

adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a

position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.

Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for

the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's

recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome

terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.

4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to

make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream

from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the

same as described for constant-volume air systems.

a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave

outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and

minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for

constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure

controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is

maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record final fan-performance data.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end

of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct

variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the

general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal

valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement

pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for

differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow

and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval

from Architect and comply with requirements in Section 232123 "Hydronic

Pumps."

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump

and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until

indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in

overload conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the

system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake

horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual

amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as

designed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open

position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5

percent greater than indicated flow.

G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated

flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump

heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying

from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper

operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,

serial number, and nameplate data.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator to within specified tolerances of indicated flow

with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do

not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer.

Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments

furnished by chiller manufacturer.

3. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

4. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

5. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.

6. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data

including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.12 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.

3.13 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate

proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC

systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing

devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures

in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in

systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building

floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.14 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

3.15 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Basic Electrical Requirements


SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section is an extension of the General Requirements and certain items of a common or

administrative nature that pertain to all electrical work.

B. The work of this section consists of furnishing materials, equipment, constant competent

supervision, special tools, test equipment, technicians, and labor necessary for installation of a

complete working electrical system as indicated herein and on the Drawings.

C. The work shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Connections to service from points of termination by utility company for street lighting

systems.

2. Power distribution systems feeder and branch circuits / panels / wiring /devices / etc.

3. Ductbanks, and manholes, utility connections, track and catenary system connections and

cabling systems.

4. Raceways and fittings.

5. Grounding.


A. The electrical installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of the National

Electrical Code (NEC). Notify Construction Manager of conflicts before performance.

B. Electrical material shall be built and tested in accordance with the applicable standards of the

National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA), the American National Standards

Institute (ANSI) the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), and the Institute of

Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

C. Electrical materials shall be new and unused and shall be listed and labeled for the service

intended by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., where such labeling service is available.

D. Applicable sections of the following codes and standards shall also be followed:

1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association including NFPA-101, Life Safety Code.

2. OSHA Code of Federal Regulations (for construction practices).

3. Standard Building Code (latest edition) as adopted by the State of Louisiana.

4. Applicable state and local codes/ordinances.

5. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufacturer

6. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineers' Association

7. FM - Factory Mutual

8. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories

9. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society

10. NECA

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Include all items of labor and materials required to comply with the above referenced codes and

standards. Where quantities, sizes, or other requirements indicated on Drawings or herein

specified are in excess of the requirements of the standards and codes, the Specifications or

Drawings shall govern.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Permits: Obtain and pay for all necessary permits, inspections, connection charges, fees,

insurance, bond, licenses, and comply with all governing laws, ordinances, rules and regulations

including those of the National Fire Protection Association and all municipal, state or other

authority having jurisdiction over the work.

B. Certificates of Inspection: Upon completion and before the date of substantial completion of each

designated Phase, furnish a certificate of inspection issued by the proper authorities to the effect

that the installation is in full conformity with all local and state requirements.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Lay out the work and be responsible for its correctness. Take such measurements as may be

necessary to assure approved fitting and proper installation of work, and all other work depending

thereon.

B. Arrange work in a neat, well organized manner with exposed conduit and similar services running

parallel with primary lines of the construction, as high as possible with a minimum of 8'-0"

overhead clearance or as directed by the Construction Manager.

C. Perform all work in the best and most substantial manner by workmen skilled in the work to be

done. Provide adequate supervision at all times.

D. Cooperate with other contractors to avoid complications between the installations of the various

items of equipment. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent

move-in of large units of electrical equipment.

E. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire

electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.

F. Where the method of installation is not certain, ask for details. Lack of details, not requested,

will not be an excuse for improper installation, and any such work must be corrected.

G. Coordination Drawings: For locations where several elements of electrical or combined

mechanical and electrical work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit

into the available space, prepare coordination drawings showing the actual physical dimensions

(at accurate scale, minimum 1/4") required for the installation.

H. Prepare and submit coordination drawings prior to purchase-fabrication-installation of any of the

elements involved in the coordination.

1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications) are intended to convey the scope of work and

indicate general arrangements of equipment, fixtures and piping, and approximate sizes and

locations of equipment and outlets. Follow these documents in laying out the work, check all

Drawings to become familiar with all conditions affecting the work, and verify spaces in which

the work will be installed.

B. The contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain but not all, physical relationships

which must be established within the electrical work. Its interface with other work including

plumbing, fire protection and mechanical work, is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

The Drawings show approximate locations only of selected feeders, branch circuits, outlets, etc.,

except where specific routing or dimensions are indicated. The Construction Manager reserves

the right to make reasonable changes in locations indicated before roughing-in without additional

cost to the Owner.

C. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to indicate all of the offsets, fittings,

and accessories required. Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting

Division 16 work and shall arrange such work accordingly, furnishing fittings, bends, junction

boxes, pull boxes, access panels, and accessories required to meet such conditions.

D. These Specifications, together with the accompanying Drawings, contemplate apparatus fully

erected, and in satisfactory operating condition with the Contractor furnishing and installing

everything that may be necessary to complete the job.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS. The following paragraphs are an

extension of SECTION 013300.

B. Review of shop drawings shall in no way modify the contract or relieve the Contractor from

compliance with the contract.

C. Names of manufacturers or catalog numbers are listed in the Specification in order to establish a

standard for the type, general design and quality of the product required. Where "or approved

equal" is indicated, other products similar in design and of equal quality and complying with the

Drawings and Specifications will be considered for acceptance. See SECTION 016000 –

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.

D. Any item not specified herein, but submitted as a substitute for the specified item, shall be

submitted in accordance with SECTION 016000 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT and

accompanied by manufacturer's documentation stating/illustrating the following applicable

information in addition to the specific information requested in other sections:

1. Dimensions/weight.

2. Electrical ratings-voltage, amperage, short circuit capability, etc.

3. Construction - gauge of steel/aluminum, paint finish/application method, color, NEMA

type, etc.

4. Warranty.

5. Local manufacturer's representative or nearest stocking distributor.

6. Length of time the product has been available to the public.

7. Any deviations.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Submittals:

1. Listed below are submittals required for transmittal.

a. Lighting Fixtures

b. Lighting Controls

c. Lamps

d. Raceways

e. Pull boxes

f. Connectors

g. Fuses and disconnect kits

h. Circuit Breakers

i. Wiring Devices

j. Panelboards

k. Conductors

l. Phasing plan to replace street lights

m. Traction Power system installation

n. Packaged engine generators

o. Enclosed switched and transfer switches

p.

2. Further descriptions or information required with submittals shall be included with the

description of materials specified herein as follows:

a. Grounding Products: Include a complete grounding system diagram with

materials and ground conductor sizes.

b. Miscellaneous Electrical Controls and Control Wiring: Include control wiring

diagrams for all miscellaneous electrical controls.

3. Corrections or comments made on submittals during the review do not relieve the

Contractor from compliance with requirements of the contract documents. Submittals

will be checked for general conformance with the design concept of the project and

general compliance with information given in the contract documents. Review of the

submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for confirming and

correlating all quantities and dimensions, coordinating work with that of all other trades,

and performing work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Review of submittals shall not

permit any deviation from Drawings and Specifications. Submittals must be

accompanied by signed statement from contractor, stating that he has reviewed the

submittal and checked it for compliance.

4. Contractor shall provide products as specified if submittals for review of materials are not

received within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract.

1.7 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS

A. At all times the Contractor shall take precautions necessary to protect his apparatus from damage.

Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the Construction Manager's

satisfaction shall be sufficient cause for the rejection of the particular piece of apparatus in

question.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Visit the site before bidding to become familiar with conditions under which the work will be

performed.

B. No additional compensation will be allowed for failure to be so informed.

1.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Do all cutting, fitting, and all other work that may be required to make the several parts come

together and fit. Cutting for equipment entry shall be under other Divisions. Do not endanger

any work by cutting, digging, or otherwise, and do not cut or alter the work of any other

Divisions, except with the consent of the Construction Manager. Cutting shall be done under the

supervision of the Project Superintendent.

B. It is the responsibility of this Division to coordinate with other responsible Divisions for

required cutting and patching.

1.10 INSERTS AND THIMBLES

A. Set in place as form work progresses, all necessary inserts and thimbles as may be required.

Cutting of beams or of concrete slabs or walls will not be permitted.

B. All thimbles set in concrete shall be of standard pipe, plain ends, and shall be of proper size to

allow for freedom around piping passing through thimble.

C. Thimbles set in the walls, partitions or in chases where structural requirements will allow, shall

be of rigid galvanized steel conduit.

D. Inserts shall be nailed to form work and shall be of size to allow for installation of hangers for

the particular pipe served.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Prepare Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements in Division 1.

B. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed

conditions:

1. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent project lines.

2. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed.

3. Complete As-Built Drawings of Division 16 work shown and not shown on the contract

drawings in the new and existing facilities.

C. Equipment Manuals:

1. Before the date of substantial completion, Contractor shall furnish to the Construction

Manager three (3) bound sets of descriptive, dimensional and parts data on all major

items of electrical equipment and material including those items listed above under "Shop

Drawings:".

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Each set of this literature shall be bound in a permanent type hard cover ring binder and

shall be suitably indexed.

3. This submittal shall be accompanied by final Electrical Inspection Certificate from the

authority having jurisdiction.

1.12 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE

A. Except where longer periods of warranty are specified, guarantee all labor and materials for a

period of twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance of the particular phase of the

work. Repair all defective materials and work; replace with new materials and/or equipment,

any material and/or equipment failing to give satisfactory service.

B. During the period of guarantee, promptly correct any defects in equipment, materials or

workmanship without cost to the City of New Orleans.

C. Guarantee includes equipment capacity and performance ratings specified without excessive

noise levels. Any deficiencies in equipment specified shall be promptly corrected.

D. Contractor's warranty shall include an inspection of the system one (1) week before the end of

the one (1) year warranty period. Replace or repair any items found to be defective at this time.

1.13 TESTS AND BALANCING

A. At such times as the Construction Manager directs, conduct operating tests to demonstrate that

the electrical systems are installed and will operate properly and in accordance with the

requirements of this Specification. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Construction

Manager's representative. Furnish instruments and personnel required for such tests.

B. Perform tests to show Construction Manager that the power and lighting loads are equally divided

among phases of feeders serving each piece of equipment and each panelboard, and record the

results of such tests and turn over to the Construction Manager.

C. Any work and materials tested and found varying from the requirements of the Drawings and

Specifications shall be replaced without additional cost to the City of New Orleans.

D. This section does not relieve the Contractor from testing equipment installed under this Division

but not listed in this section. Contractor is required to test all equipment, feeders, etc., installed

under this Division.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to DIVISION 01 sections for general requirements on products, materials and equipment.

The provisions outlined below expand or modify the requirements as applicable to electrical

work. Refer to other DIVISION 26 sections for additional requirements.

B. Materials and equipment shall conform in all respects to the requirements set forth in these

Specifications and the accompanying Drawings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Provide products which are compatible with other products of the electrical work, and with other

work requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control

devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with the Construction

Manager. Determine in advance of purchase that equipment and materials proposed for

installation will fit into the confines indicated, leaving adequate clearance as required by

applicable codes, and for adjustment, repair, or replacement.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS' NAMEPLATES

A. Each major component of the equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model

number, and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of a

distributing agent will not be acceptable. NEMA Code ratings, or other data which are die-

stamped into the surface of the equipment shall be stamped in an easily visible location.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Visit the site before bidding to determine existing conditions and assume all responsibility and

bear all expenses in allowing for these conditions in the bid.

B. Obtain all necessary permits, pay all legal fees and charges, pay all utility charges, and comply

with all state and local building codes and safety laws, ordinances and regulations relating to the

building and public health and safety.

C. No work shall be concealed until approved by the local inspector and all local regulations are

adhered to.

D. Upon completion, a certificate of approval from the appropriate regulatory agency shall be

furnished to the Construction Manager.

E. Cooperate with other trades in installing work in order that there will be no conflict of space

required by conduit, piping, ducts, outlets, etc. If an interference develops, it shall be referred to

the Construction Manager for a decision as to which equipment, piping, conduit, etc, is to be

relocated. Such relocations shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.

F. Study all sections of the Specifications and Drawings. Notify Construction Manager of conflict

between Drawings and Specifications before bidding. The Construction Manager's decision will

govern.

G. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic except where dimensioned. Do not scale. Follow

manufacturer's certified shop drawings for accuracy. Consult Construction Manager in cases of

doubt or conflict. Unless noted as fixed, dimensions are based on the product of one (1)

manufacturer. Verify dimensions with certified shop Drawings of the materials actually approved

and purchased.

3.2 TEMPORARY WIRING, LIGHTING AND POWER AT THE SITE

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. Furnish and install provisions for temporary electrical service for the street lighting system as

indicated and construction light and power during the construction period conforming to the

contract documents, all local code and State labor law requirements. Temporary light and power

provisions to be included shall be as hereinafter specified and as required in SECTION 015000 -

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROL.

B. Arrange for temporary service with the Utility Company.

C. Furnish, install, and maintain all temporary service equipment as required until permanent service

is installed switch-over of temporary systems on the permanent service when latter is ready for

same.

D. Furnish, install, maintain, and switch on and off on all regular work days a complete temporary

light system, for the construction work site while under construction.

E. Provide a temporary aerial cable to operate the new street lights during the period when the

existing street light standards are removed and the new underground lighting conduit and wiring

have not been installed. Contractor shall completely remove the temporary aerial cable system

after the underground feeders are operational.

F. Provide any and/or all relocations of temporary electric facilities as necessary to clear the

permanent installations of all trades.

2.3 WIRING FOR EQUIPMENT BY OTHERS

2.4 Electrical service for all equipment furnished under this Specification and/or indicated on the

Drawings shall be roughed-in and connected under this Section. It is the responsibility of the

Contractor to obtain correct roughing-in dimensions and requirements for this equipment.

2.5 WORKMANSHIP

A. Install all materials and electrical components of the work in accordance with instructions of

manufacturer following the best modern construction practices and conforming with the Contract

Documents. Workmanship shall be first class, in both function and appearance, whether finally

concealed or exposed and shall be performed by experienced workmen skilled in the type of work.

As practicable, the lines of all components of the system shall be perpendicular or parallel. In

general, workmanship shall conform to guidelines set forth in NECA manuals.

2.6 CLEANING UP

A. Remove once per week and at the completion of the work all empty cartons, scrap wire,

raceways, rubbish, etc., accumulated on the project as a result of work performed.

B. Remove all marks, stains, fingerprints, bugs, dust and other foreign material from all electrical

components. Refinish damaged surfaces and restore original finish to the satisfaction of the

Construction Manager.

2.7 SAFETY

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to do all things necessary in the pursuit of the

installation or testing to provide safe conditions in which to work.

2.8 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or required by the Construction Manager, the following

mounting heights shall apply:

B. Toggle Switches 4'-0" CL

C. Receptacles 18" CL

D. Upon approval of the Construction Manager mounting heights may be adjusted, except where

mounting heights are dictated by code.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Grounding and Bonding


SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special

applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.

2. Ground bonding common with lightning protection system.

3. Foundation steel electrodes.




A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in

"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells.

2. Ground rods.

3. Ground rings.

4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells

ground rings based on NFPA 70B.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain

within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective

action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or

equal:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.

3. ERICO International Corporation.

4. Fushi Copperweld Inc.

5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.

6. Harger Lightning and Grounding.

7. ILSCO.

8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.

9. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.




B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless

otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section,

with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply

with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at

5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-]copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG

minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as

part of duct-bank installation.

C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On

feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,

with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two

bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the

ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS

A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be

connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator.

3.4 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole

floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary,

install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper

conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect

ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete.

Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,

cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to

ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded,

hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and

fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written

instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around the

pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with

substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install tinned-

copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment grounding

terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.

3.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment

grounding bar terminal on busway.

9. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits

supplying x-ray equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted

electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,

humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct

and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

E. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor

connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from

panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the

applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit

or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway

fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a

separate insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from

panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the

applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.

G. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate

insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with

branch-circuit conductors.

H. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned] copper, not less than No. 8 AWG.

2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.

3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.6 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and

UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system

ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical

service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode

conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless


1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,

and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are

specified in Section 02584 "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures," and shall be at least 12

inches deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.

Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush

with finished grade or floor.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.

G. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to

bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

H. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

I. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure

ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building area or item

indicated.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps

to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building's foundation.

J. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; use a

minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.

1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of

foundation.

2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor

bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building's grounding grid

or to grounding electrode external to concrete.

K. Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode (Ufer Ground): Fabricate according to NFPA 70; using

electrically conductive coated steel reinforcing bars or rods, at least 20 feet long. If reinforcing

is in multiple pieces, connect together by the usual steel tie wires or exothermic welding to

create the required length.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.








1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's


3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal[ at ground test

wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are

connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,

and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and

their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena

that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).

5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Grounding and Bonding for Communications Sytems


SECTION 16062 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Grounding conductors.

2. Grounding connectors.

3. Grounding busbars.

4. Grounding rods.

5. Grounding labeling.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BCT: Bonding conductor for telecommunications.

B. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

C. TGB: Telecommunications grounding busbar.

D. TMGB: Telecommunications main grounding busbar.



B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room signal reference grid. Include plans,

elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


A. As-Built Data: Plans showing as-built locations of grounding and bonding infrastructure,

including the following:

1. Ground rods.

2. Ground and roof rings.

3. BCT, TMGB, TGBs, and routing of their bonding conductors.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Qualification Data: For Installer, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and




a. Result of the ground-resistance test, measured at the point of BCT connection.

b. Result of the bonding-resistance test at each TGB and its nearest grounding

electrode.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of ITS

Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at

Project site.

2. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as a registered communications

distribution designerto perform the on-site inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.2 CONDUCTORS


equal:


2. Panduit Corp.

3. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Comply with UL 486A-486B.

C. Insulated Conductors: Stranded copper wire, green or green with yellow stripe insulation,

insulated for 600 V, and complying with UL 83.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Ground wire for custom-length equipment ground jumpers shall be No. 6 AWG, 19-

strand, UL-listed, Type THHN wire.

2. Cable Tray Equipment Grounding Wire: No. 6 AWG.

D. Cable Tray Grounding Jumper:

1. Not smaller than No. 6 AWG 26 kcmils and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a

wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with two holes and long barrel for two

crimps. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one-hole ferrule. Attach with

grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.

2. Not smaller than No. 10 AWG 26 kcmils and not longer than 12 inches. If jumper is a

wire, it shall have a crimped grounding lug with one hole and standard barrel for one

crimp. If jumper is a flexible braid, it shall have a one- or two-hole ferrule. Attach with

grounding screw or connector provided by cable tray manufacturer.

E. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmils, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, and 1/4 inch in

diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with two-hole

copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. Irreversible connectors listed for the purpose. Listed by an NRTL as complying with NFPA 70

for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Comply

with UL 486A-486B.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following or

equal:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

2. Chatsworth Products, Inc.


4. Panduit Corp.


D. Compression Wire Connectors: Crimp-and-compress connectors that bond to the conductor

when the connector is compressed around the conductor. Comply with UL 467.

1. Electroplated tinned copper, C and H shaped.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Signal Reference Grid Connectors: Combination of compression wire connectors, access floor

grounding clamps, bronze U-bolt grounding clamps, and copper split-bolt connectors, designed

for the purpose.

F. Busbar Connectors: Cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type, mechanical connector;

with a long barrel and two holes spaced on 5/8- or 1-inch centers for a two-bolt connection to

the busbar.

G. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.4 GROUNDING BUSBARS


equal:





3. Panduit Corp.

C. TMGB: Predrilled, wall-mounted, rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 4 inches

in cross section, length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be NRTL listed for use as

TMGB and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.

1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide a 4-inch

3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in

600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

D. TGB: Predrilled rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section,

length as indicated on Drawings. The busbar shall be for wall mounting, shall be NRTL listed as

complying with UL 467, and shall comply with J-STD-607-A.

1. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this Section.

2. Mounting Hardware: Stand-off brackets that provide at least a 2-inch

3. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall be Lexan or PVC. Comply with UL 891 for use in

600-V switchboards, impulse tested at 5000 V.

E. Rack and Cabinet Grounding Busbars: Rectangular bars of hard-drawn solid copper, accepting

conductors ranging from No. 14 to No. 2/0 AWG, NRTL listed as complying with UL 467, and

complying with J-STD-607-A. Predrilling shall be with holes for use with lugs specified in this

Section.

1. Cabinet-Mounted Busbar: Terminal block, with stainless-steel or copper-plated hardware

for attachment to the cabinet.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Rack-Mounted Horizontal Busbar: Designed for mounting in 19- or 23-inch equipment

racks. Include a copper splice bar for transitioning to an adjoining rack, and stainless-

steel or copper-plated hardware for attachment to the rack.

3. Rack-Mounted Vertical Busbar: 72 or 36 inchesstainless-steel or copper-plated hardware

for attachment to the rack.

2.5 GROUND RODS


equal:



B. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feetin diameter.

2.6 LABELING


equal:

1. Brother International Corporation.

2. HellermannTyton.

3. Panduit Corp.

>.

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label

stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal

transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a

weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the ac grounding electrode system and equipment grounding for compliance with

requirements for maximum ground-resistance level and other conditions affecting performance

of grounding and bonding of the electrical system.

B. Inspect the test results of the ac grounding system measured at the point of BCT connection.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work.

D. Proceed with connection of the BCT only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Bonding shall include the ac utility power service entrance, the communications cable entrance,

and the grounding electrode system. The bonding of these elements shall form a loop so that

each element is connected to at least two others.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

1. The bonding conductors between the TGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings

shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.

2. The bonding conductors between the TMGB and structural steel of steel-frame buildings

shall not be smaller than No. 6 AWG.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2 AWG

minimum.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

D. Conductor Support:

1. Secure grounding and bonding conductors at intervals of not less than 36 inches

E. Grounding and Bonding Conductors:

1. Install in the straightest and shortest route between the origination and termination point,

and no longer than required. The bend radius shall not be smaller than eight times the

diameter of the conductor. No one bend may exceed 90 degrees.

2. Install without splices.

3. Support at not more than 36-inch intervals.

4. Install grounding and bonding conductors in 3/4-inch PVC conduit until conduit enters a

telecommunications room. The grounding and bonding conductor pathway through a

plenum shall be in EMT. Conductors shall not be installed in EMT unless otherwise

indicated.

a. If a grounding and bonding conductor is installed in ferrous metallic conduit, bond

the conductor to the conduit using a grounding bushing that complies with

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



requirements in Section 16711 "Pathways for Communications Systems," and

bond both ends of the conduit to a TGB.

3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM

A. The BCT between the TMBG and the ac service equipment ground shall not be smaller than

No. 3/0 AWG.

3.5 GROUNDING BUSBARS

A. Indicate locations of grounding busbars on Drawings. Install busbars horizontally, on insulated

spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 12 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of

doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Bond metallic equipment in a telecommunications equipment room to the grounding busbar in

that room, using equipment grounding conductors not smaller than No. 6 AWG.

B. Stacking of conductors under a single bolt is not permitted when connecting to busbars.

C. Assemble the wire connector to the conductor, complying with manufacturer's written

instructions and as follows:

1. Use crimping tool and the die specific to the connector.

2. Pretwist the conductor.

3. Apply an antioxidant compound to all bolted and compression connections.

D. Primary Protector: Bond to the TMGB with insulated bonding conductor.

E. Interconnections: Interconnect all TGBs with the TMGB with the telecommunications backbone

conductor. If more than one TMGB is installed, interconnect TMGBs using the grounding

equalizer conductor. The telecommunications backbone conductor and grounding equalizer

conductor size shall not be less than 2 kcmils/linear foot of conductor length, up to a maximum

size of No. 3/0 AWG 168 kcmils unless otherwise indicated.

F. Telecommunications Enclosures and Equipment Racks: Bond metallic components of

enclosures to the telecommunications bonding and grounding system. Install vertically mounted

rack grounding busbar unless the enclosure and rack are manufactured with the busbar. Bond

the equipment grounding busbar to the TGB No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.

G. Structural Steel: Where the structural steel of a steel frame building is readily accessible within

the room or space, bond each TGB and TMGB to the vertical steel of the building frame.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Electrical Power Panelboards: Where an electrical panelboard for telecommunications

equipment is located in the same room or space, bond each TGB to the ground bar of the

panelboard.

I. Shielded Cable: Bond the shield of shielded cable to the TGB in communications rooms and

spaces. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2 when grounding screened,

balanced, twisted-pair cables.

J. Rack- and Cabinet-Mounted Equipment: Bond powered equipment chassis to the cabinet or

rack grounding bar. Power connection shall comply with NFPA 70; the equipment grounding

conductor in the power cord of cord- and plug-connected equipment shall be considered as a

supplement to bonding requirements in this Section.

K. Access Floors: Bond all metal parts of access floors to the TGB.

L. Equipment Room Signal Reference Grid: Provide a low-impedance path between

telecommunications cabinets, equipment racks, and the reference grid, using No. 6 AWG

bonding conductors.

1. Install the conductors in grid pattern on 4-foot centers, allowing bonding of one pedestal

from each access floor tile.

2. Bond the TGB of the equipment room to the reference grid at two or more locations.

3. Bond all conduits and piping entering the equipment room to the TGB at the perimeter of

the room.

M. Towers and Antennas:

1. Ground Ring: Buried at least 30 inches below grade and at least 24 inches from the base

of the tower or mounting.

2. Bond each tower base and metallic frame of a dish to the ground ring, buried at least 18

inches below grade.

3. Bond the ground ring and antenna grounds to the equipment room TMGB or TGB, buried

at least 30 inches below grade.

4. Bond metallic fences within 6 feet of towers and antennas to the ground ring, buried at

least 18 inches below grade.

5. Special Requirements for Roof-Mounted Towers:

a. Roof Ring: Meet requirements for the ground ring except the conductors shall

comply with requirements in Section 13100 "Lightning Protection."

b. Bond tower base footings steel, the TGB in the equipment room, and antenna

support guys to the roof ring.

c. Connect roof ring to the perimeter conductors of the lightning protection system.

6. Waveguides and Coaxial Cable:

a. Bond cable shields at the point of entry into the building to the TGB and to the

cable entrance plate, using No. 2 AWG bonding conductors.

b. Bond coaxial cable surge arrester to the ground or roof ring using bonding

conductor size recommended by surge-arrester manufacturer.

N. <Insert connections of other equipment>.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.7 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as part of

duct-bank installation.

B. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

C. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or handhole

floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4 inches extends above finished floor. If necessary,

install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper

conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect

ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive

insulating tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete.

Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

D. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,

cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to

ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, bonding

conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to manhole walls.

Connect grounding conductors to cable armor and cable shields according to written

instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

1. Label TMGB(s) with "fs-TMGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier

for the space containing the TMGB.

2. Label TGB(s) with "fs-TGB," where "fs" is the telecommunications space identifier for

the space containing the TGB.

3. Label the BCT and each telecommunications backbone conductor at its attachment point:

"WARNING! TELECOMMUNICATIONS BONDING CONDUCTOR. DO NOT

REMOVE OR DISCONNECT!"



B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's


2. Test the bonding connections of the system using an ac earth ground-resistance tester,

taking two-point bonding measurements in each telecommunications equipment room

containing a TMGB and a TGB and using the process recommended by BICSI TDMM.

Conduct tests with the facility in operation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Measure the resistance between the busbar and the nearest available grounding

electrode. The maximum acceptable value of this bonding resistance is 100

milliohms.

3. Test for ground loop currents using a digital clamp-on ammeter, with a full-scale of not

more than 10 A, displaying current in increments of 0.01 A at an accuracy of plus/minus

2.0 percent.

a. With the grounding infrastructure completed and the communications system

electronics operating, measure the current in every conductor connected to the

TMGB and in each TGB. Maximum acceptable ac current level is 1 A.

D. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground at the BCT exceeds 5 ohms, notify

Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems


SECTION 16073 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 16074 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and installation

requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and

design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of [five] <Insert

number> times the applied force.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel slotted support systems.

2. Nonmetallic slotted support systems.

B. Shop Drawings:.] Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the

following:

1. Trapeze hangers. Include Product Data for components.

2. Steel slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.

3. Nonmetallic slotted channel systems. Include Product Data for components.





A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."


1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items

are specified in Section 07720 "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field

assembly.



the following:


following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. ERICO International Corporation.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut; Atkore International.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

3. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-

4.

4. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

5. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin

channels and angles with 9/16-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1

surface.



the following:


following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited.

d. Seasafe, Inc.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for

use with those items.

4. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may

be stainless steel.

5. Rated Strength: Selected to suit applicable load criteria.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

D. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

E. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

F. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,

shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



G. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for


a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers



b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti, Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers



b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti, Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS

Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes

and plates.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less

than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted [or

other ]support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-

1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above

suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and

RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or

greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than

4 inches thick.

6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing

bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated

metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from

edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.


3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING




1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Section 09911 "Exterior Painting", Section 09912

"Interior Painting" and Section 09960 "High Performance Coatings" or other painting sections

of these specifications for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and

abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved


Criminal Evidence Processing Complex 16075-1

SECTION 16075 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Underground-line warning tape.

5. Warning labels and signs.

6. Instruction signs.

7. Equipment identification labels.

8. Miscellaneous identification products.


A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting

provisions, and graphic features of identification products.

C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in

other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's

wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes,

standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of

color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:


2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label

laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear

adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pre-tensioned,

flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway

or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pre-

tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit

diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

G. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch-wide black stripes

on 10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or

duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.

H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with

self-locking cable tie fastener.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie

for attachment to conductor or cable.

1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS


color field for each cable size.

B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:


2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:


2. Legend: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant

coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide;

compounded for outdoor use.

F. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed

identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies.

Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS


color field for each cable size.

B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant

coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick flexible label with

acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-

laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the

clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed

identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies.

Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with

self-locking cable tie fastener.

F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie



manufacturer.

2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker

recommended by printer manufacturer.

G. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with

diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

H. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2

inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by

gripping action.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1

to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil-thick flexible label with

acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-

laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such

that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with

diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pre-tensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve

with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping

action.

E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed

identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it

identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.010 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie



manufacturer.

2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black

ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl

overlay.

2.6 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE

A. Tape:

1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and

locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when

exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.

B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.

2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.

3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.

2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,

configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-

inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20

sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal



2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal



C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white

letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.

White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be

1 inch.

2.10 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6

nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.


4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,

self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.


4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.

3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.


5. Color: Black.

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application

requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or

interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing

without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and

methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with

adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band

shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in

contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested

areas.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or

cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use

multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete

envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation

and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-

inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of

raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH

VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends.

Apply to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that

is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.

3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Snap-around labels.

Install labels at [10-foot] [30-foot] maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install

labels at 30-foot maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull

box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and

system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.

2. Power.

3. UPS.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded service [feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a

minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or

taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible

unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with adhesive-

backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors

using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,

manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor

or cable designation, origin, and destination.

I. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations provide

self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor designation.

J. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

K. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the

Operation and Maintenance Manual.

L. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.

M. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of

access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless

otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in

finished spaces.

N. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

O. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with

approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

P. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red

background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used

for power transfer emergency operations.

Q. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is

provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective overlay. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-

1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with

appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of

the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated

acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

d. Switchgear.

e. Switchboards.

f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

g. Substations.

h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.

i. Motor-control centers.

j. Enclosed switches.

k. Enclosed circuit breakers.

l. Enclosed controllers.

m. Variable-speed controllers.

n. Push-button stations.

o. Power transfer equipment.

p. Contactors.

q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

r. Battery-inverter units.

s. Battery racks.

t. Power-generating units.

u. Monitoring and control equipment.

v. UPS equipment.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling


SECTION 16091 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND

CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

5. Silicone sealants.


1. Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for penetration firestopping

installed in fire-resistance-rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with

and without penetrating items.



B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, documentation including printed statement

of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For sealants, documentation indicating that

products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department

of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from

Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with

tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side

larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more

sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following or equal:



a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. CALPICO, Inc.

c. Metraflex Company (The).

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

e. Proco Products, Inc.

3. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

4. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

5. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to

match piping OD.


following or equal:



a. Presealed Systems.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,




2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall have VOC content of per Architects Civil Engineers’ requirements g/L or

less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in

Section 07920 "Joint Sealants."

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or

cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above

finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe

and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing

sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway

entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Conductors and Cables


SECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


1. Section 16124 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor

cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to

35,000 V.

2. Section 16123 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables" for control systems

communications cables and Classes 1, 2 and 3 control cables.

3. Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data

circuits.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES


equal:



1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

2. Alpha Wire.

3. Belden Inc.

4. Encore Wire Corporation.

5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

6. Southwire Incorporated.

C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

D. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THW-2

Type THHN-2-THWN-2 and Type SO.

E. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable,

Type MC and Type SO with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


equal:



1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Gardner Bender.

3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

4. Ideal Industries, Inc.

5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation.

6. NSi Industries LLC.

7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.

8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.

9. Tyco Electronics.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and

larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in conduit.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-

THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in

raceway.

F. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

G. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

I. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-

2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

J. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in

raceway or Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

K. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or

Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



L. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 16139 "Cable Trays" prior to

installing conductors and cables.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 16075 "Electrical

Identification."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07841 "Through-Penetration

Firestop Systems."





C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors feeding the following critical

equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and

larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Raceways and Boxes


SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Surface raceways.

6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Section 02584 "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for exterior ductbanks,

manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Section 16711 "Pathways for Communications Systems" for conduits, wireways, surface

pathways, innerduct, boxes, faceplate adapters, enclosures, cabinets, and handholes

serving communications systems.

3. Section 16712 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface

pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. LEED Submittals:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental

Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.

D. Samples: For wireways and surface raceways and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches

long.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their

mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.







4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


equal:


2. Allied Tube & Conduit.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

4. Electri-Flex Company.

5. O-Z/Gedney.

6. Picoma Industries.

7. Republic Conduit.

8. Robroy Industries.

9. Southwire Company.

10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

12. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.

H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

I. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel exterior applications or die cast interior applications.

b. Type: Set screw for interior applications or compression for exterior application.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

J. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


equal:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





3. Arnco Corporation.

4. CANTEX Inc.

5. CertainTeed Corporation.

6. Condux International, Inc.


8. Kraloy.

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.

11. RACO; Hubbell.


B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

D. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

E. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and

material.

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


equal:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

2. Hoffman.

3. Mono-Systems, Inc.

4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4,

or Type 12 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type for indoor applications and Flanged-and-gasketed type for

outdoor applications unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


following or equal]:

a. Mono-Systems, Inc.

b. Panduit Corp.

c. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Tele-Power Poles:


following or equal:


b. Panduit Corp.


2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as

required for complete system.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


equal:

1. Adalet.

2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

3. EGS/Appleton Electric.

4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. FSR Inc.

6. Hoffman.

7. Hubbell Incorporated.

8. Kraloy.

9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.


11. O-Z/Gedney.

12. RACO; Hubbell.


14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.


17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal for slabs on grade or sheet metal for slabs installation above grade.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

G. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.

Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and

marked for the maximum allowable weight.

H. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.

1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

I. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

J. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast

aluminum with gasketed cover.

K. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



L. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep4 inches by 2-1/8 inches by 2-1/8

inches deep (100 mm by 60 mm by 60 mm deep) size as required for conductor fill in

accordance with National Electrical Code.

M. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

N. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4 or

Type 12 with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

O. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4 or Type 12 galvanized-steel box with removable

interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard

enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a


B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a

combination of the two.


following or equal:



a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Carson Industries LLC.

c. NewBasis.

d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.

e. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc.

f. Synertech Moulded Products.

3. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.

If used with different voltages provide divider as per manufactures recommendation.

5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC.".

8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance

with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by

manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying

with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012 and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC for exterior applications.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, direct buried and/or concrete encased

as indicated on the drawings.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R and/or Type 4 as noted on

the drawings.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Auto Inspection areas.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression as noted elsewhere in these specs, steel or cast-metal

fittings as noted elsewhere in these specs. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum

raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F .

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for

hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of

changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inchesof enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-footintervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound


L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal

bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated

throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

O. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

P. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

Q. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter

or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



R. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

S. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.

Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue

are not acceptable support methods.

T. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install

in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental

temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds

100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install

fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of

flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise

transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

FF. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal

diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts

throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the

coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of

60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding

bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried

conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of

conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical

Identification."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,

as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm

lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables but short enough to preserve

adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.




Cabling."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Cable Trays for Communications Systems


SECTION 16136 - CABLE TRAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ladder cable trays.


1. Section 16139 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" for cable trays and accessories

serving electrical systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of cable tray.

1. Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans, elevations, and

sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate

components and accessories, including clamps, brackets, hanger rods, splice-plate

connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints.

1. Seismic-Restraint Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer,

licensed in the state where Project is located, who is responsible for their preparation.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

3. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported

cable trays.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Include scaled cable tray layout and relationships between components and adjacent

structural, electrical, and mechanical elements.

2. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.

3. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.

4. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or below bottom of ceiling structure.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cable trays, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01400

"Quality Requirements," to design cable tray supports and seismic bracing.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes in cable tray installed outdoors.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLE TRAYS

A. Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified as defined in NFPA 70 and marked for intended

location, application, and grounding.

1. Source Limitations: Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.

B. Sizes and Configurations: See the Cable Tray Schedule on Drawings for specific requirements

for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.

C. Structural Performance: See articles for individual cable tray types for specific values for the

following parameters:

1. Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load on the

indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested according to

NEMA VE 1.

2. Concentrated Load: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline of tray.

3. Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 LADDER CABLE TRAYS


equal:



1. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.

2. Chalfant Manufacturing Company.



5. MP Husky.


C. Description:

1. Configuration: Two I-beam side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails.

2. Rung Spacing: 9 inches o.c.

3. Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 9 inches at center of tray's width.

4. Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 7/8-inch width with radius edges.

5. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails.

6. Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable load,

with a safety factor of 1.5, plus a 200-lb concentrated load, when tested according to

NEMA VE 1.

7. Minimum Usable Load Depth: 4 inches.

8. Straight Section Lengths: 10 feetexcept where shorter lengths are required to facilitate

tray assembly.

9. Width: 12 inches18 inches 24 inches (600 mm) unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

10. Fitting Minimum Radius: 24 inches.

11. Class Designation: Comply with NEMA VE 1.

12. Splicing Assemblies: Bolted type using serrated flange locknuts.

13. Hardware and Fasteners: Steel, zinc plated according to ASTM B 633.

14. Splice Plate Capacity: Splices located within support span shall not diminish rated

loading capacity of cable tray.

2.4 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. Steel:

1. Straight Section and Fitting Side Rails and Rungs: Steel complies with the minimum

mechanical properties of ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Grade 33, Type 2.

2. Steel Tray Splice Plates: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, HSLAS, Grade 50, Class 1.

3. Fasteners: Steel complies with the minimum mechanical properties of

ASTM A 510/A 510M, Grade 1008.

4. Finish: Mill galvanized before fabrication.

a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90.

b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Finish: Electrogalvanized before fabrication.

a. Standard: Comply with ASTM B 633.

b. Hardware: Galvanized, ASTM B 633.

6. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

a. Standard: Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M, Class B2.

b. Hardware: Chromium-zinc plated, ASTM F 1136.

B. Aluminum:

1. Materials: Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for extruded components

and Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H 35.1/H 35.1M for fabricated

parts.

2. Hardware: Chromium-zinc-plated steel, ASTM F 1136.

3. Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316,

ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

C. Stainless Steel:

1. Materials: Low-carbon, passivated, stainless steel, Type 316L, ASTM F 593 and

ASTM F 594.

2. Hardware for Stainless-Steel Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel, Type 316,

ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.

2.5 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials and

finishes as cable tray.

B. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray.

C. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray

manufacturer.

2.6 WARNING SIGNS

A. Lettering: 1-1/2-inch-high, black letters on yellow background with legend "Warning! Not To

Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel."

B. Comply with requirements for fasteners in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


A. Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to NEMA VE 1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2.

B. Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support systems,

barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, crosses,

cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.

C. Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are accessible

for inspection and adjustment.

D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.

E. Join aluminum cable tray with splice plates; use four square neck-carriage bolts and locknuts.

F. Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.

G. Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of 200 lb.

Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

H. Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans on schedules and provide clearances

shown on Drawings. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the load-carrying

capacity of the tray rungs.

I. Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances furnished by

cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form as required by

application.

J. Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

K. Install center-hung supports for single-rail trays designed for 60 versus 40 percent eccentric

loading condition, with a safety factor of 3.

L. Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one cable tray

splice between supports.

M. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to equipment.

Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable trays on equipment

enclosure.

N. Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in cable tray

runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors and set gaps

according to applicable standard.

O. Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

P. Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Q. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers. Comply with requirements in Section 07841

"Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

R. Install capped metal sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed cable tray penetrations of

fire and smoke barriers.

S. Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.

T. Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications, and data

processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.

U. Install permanent covers, if used, after installing cable. Install cover clamps according to

NEMA VE 2.

V. Clamp covers on cable trays installed outdoors with heavy-duty clamps.

W. Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray installation.

3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING

A. Ground cable trays according to NFPA 70 unless additional grounding is specified. Comply

with requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Cable trays with communications cable shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for

grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

C. Cable trays with control conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates listed for

grounding purposes or with listed bonding jumpers.

D. When using epoxy- or powder-coat painted cable trays as a grounding conductor, completely

remove coating at all splice contact points or ground connector attachment. After completing

splice-to-grounding bolt attachment, repair the coated surfaces with coating materials

recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

E. Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained within with bonding conductors sized

according to NFPA 70, Article 250.122, "Size of Equipment Grounding Conductors."

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.

B. Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE 2.

Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install cable

ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

C. Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays every 18 inches.

D. Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable trays to

equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and support cables

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or between cable tray and

enclosure shall be no more than 72 inches.

E. Tie MI cables down every 36 inches where required to provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 72

inches elsewhere.

F. In existing construction, remove inactive or dead cables from cable trays.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Remove paint from all connection points before making connections. Repair paint after the

connections are completed.

B. Connect pathways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2 and NEMA FG 1.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for


2. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in

cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions, which may

cause or have caused damage.

3. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed that

permitted by NFPA 70. Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are

separated from power circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.

4. Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other equipment in the

cable tray.

5. Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and any

blockage of tray ventilation.

6. Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical

continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque

in suspect areas.

7. Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.

8. Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace

with specified hardware.

9. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding; verify that

all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray system for

continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is 1 ohm.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed cable trays and cables.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against

falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable

tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk

of damage is over.

2. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray

manufacturer.

3. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by cable

tray manufacturer.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Wiring Devices


SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Twist-locking receptacles.

3. Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units.

4. Isolated-ground receptacles.

5. Hospital-grade receptacles.

6. Tamper-resistant receptacles.

7. Weather-resistant receptacles.

8. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.

9. Solid-state fan speed controls.

10. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.

11. Communications outlets.

12. Pendant cord-connector devices.

13. Cord and plug sets.

14. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.


A. Coordination:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.



B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking

wall plates.

C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified.




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing-

label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.




1. Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.

2. Floor Service-Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one.

3. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets

installed, but no fewer than two.

4. TVSS Receptacles: One for every 10 of each type installed, but no fewer than two of

each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).

3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).

4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single

source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a



C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or

equal:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).

b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).

c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).

d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

2. Description: Single-piece, rivetless, nickel-plated, all-brass grounding system. Nickel-

plated, brass mounting strap.

B. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,

NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.


equal:

a. Cooper; IG5362RN.

b. Hubbell; IG5362.

c. Leviton; 5362-IG.

d. Pass & Seymour; IG5362.

Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the

green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from

mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent

on removable parts.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type.

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


equal:

a. Cooper; VGF20.

b. Hubbell; GFR5352L.

c. Pass & Seymour; 2095.

d. Leviton; 7590.

2.5 TVSS RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-

C-596, with integral TVSS in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground.

1. TVSS Components: Multiple metal-oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp-level rating of

400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to

IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45.

2. Active TVSS Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to

indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service."

B. Duplex TVSS Convenience Receptacles:


equal:

a. Cooper; 5362BLS.

b. Hubbell; HBL5362SA.

c. Leviton; 5380.

d. Pass & Seymour; 5362BLSP.

2. Description: Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.

C. Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles:


equal:

a. Cooper; IG5362BLS.

b. Hubbell; IG5362SA.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




d. Pass & Seymour; IG5362BLSP.

2. Description:

a. Straight blade, 125 V, 20 A; NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R.

b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting

strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on

removable parts.

2.6 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES

A. Available Wiring Devices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with NEMA FB 11

and UL 1010.


following or equal:



a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

b. EGS/Appleton Electric.

c. Killark; Division of Hubbell Inc.

2.7 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.


equal:

a. Cooper; CWL520R.

b. Hubbell; HBL2310.

c. Leviton; 2310.

d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

B. Isolated-Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


equal:

a. Cooper; IGL520R.

b. Hubbell; IG2310.


d. Pass & Seymour; IG4700.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Description:

a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.

b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting

strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on

removable parts.

2.8 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES

A. Description:

1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector.

2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596.

3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external

cable grip.

4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel

wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for

corresponding connector.

2.9 CORD AND PLUG SETS

A. Description:

1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of

equipment being connected.

2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with

green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the

equipment rating.

3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for

connection.

2.10 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


equal:

1) Single Pole:

2) Cooper; AH1221.

3) Hubbell; HBL1221.

4) Leviton; 1221-2.

5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6) Two Pole:

7) Cooper; AH1222.


9) Leviton; 1222-2.


11) Three Way:

12) Cooper; AH1223.


14) Leviton; 1223-2.


16) Four Way:

17) Cooper; AH1224.


19) Leviton; 1224-2.


21)

C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:


equal:

a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.

b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V.

c. Leviton; 1221-LH1.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.

2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


equal:

a. Cooper; AH1221L.

b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.

c. Leviton; 1221-2L.

d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.

2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.

E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for

use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




equal:

a. Cooper; 1995.

b. Hubbell; HBL1557.

c. Leviton; 1257.

d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.

F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches:

120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key

in lieu of switch handle.


equal:

a. Cooper; 1995L.

b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.

c. Leviton; 1257L.

d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.

2.11 DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES

A. Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, Subject to compliance with

requirements, provide one of the following or equal:

a. Cooper; 6252.

b. Hubbell; DR15.

c. Leviton; 16252.

d. Pass & Seymour; 26252.

e. <Insert manufacturer's name; catalog number(s)>.

B. GFCI, Feed-Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with

NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.



2. Cooper; VGF15.

a. Hubbell; GF15LA.

b. Leviton; 8599.

c. Pass & Seymour; 1594.

C. Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and

FS W-S-896.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





2. Catalog numbers in list below are for 15-A devices; revise catalog numbers to require

other configurations and ratings.

a. Cooper; 7621 (single pole), 7623 (three way).

b. Hubbell; DS115 (single pole), DS315 (three way).

c. Leviton; 5621-2 (single pole), 5623-2 (three way).

d. Pass & Seymour; 2621 (single pole), 2623 (three way).

D. Lighted Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.



2. Cooper; 7631 (single pole), 7633 (three way).

a. Hubbell; DS120IL (single pole), DS320 (three way).

b. Leviton; 5631-2 (single pole), 5633-2 (three way).

c. Pass & Seymour; 2625 (single pole), 2626 (three way).

3. Description: With neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."

E. Telephone Outlet:



2. Cooper; 3560-6.

a. Leviton; 40649.

3. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP;

TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 6. Comply with UL 1863. Number of

outlets on each device as noted on the drawings.

F. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:



a. Cooper; 3562.

b. Leviton; 40159.

2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1;

complying with Category 6. Comply with UL 1863. Number of outlets on each device as

noted on the drawings.

WALL-BOX DIMMERS

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



G. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches,

with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

H. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with

UL 1472.

I. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off

switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.

1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated

when "off."

2. Sized to meet installation and load requirements.

J. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim

potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent

dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.12 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.

2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.

4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-

resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.13 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP

cable complying with requirements in Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

2.14 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or equal:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand.

3. Square D/Schneider Electric.


5. Wiremold/Legrand.

C. Description:

1. Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multi-

channeled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-

outlet assembly.

2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.

3. Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with four simplex receptacles and space for four RJ-

45 jacks complying with requirements in Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal

Cabling."

4. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.

5. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.

6. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating

of floor.

7. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors

and a minimum of four, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in Section 16717

"Communications Horizontal Cabling."

2.15 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES


following or equal:



1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

2. Wiremold/Legrand.

C. Description:

1. Two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness.

2. Components shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a complete,

matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

D. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

E. Multioutlet Harness:

1. Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles complying

with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Receptacle Spacing: 6 inches.

3. Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, Type THHN copper, two circuit, connecting alternating

receptacles.

2.16 SERVICE POLES

A. Description:

1. Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power and voice and data communication

from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor.

2. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch-square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor

to at least 6 inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice

and data communication cabling.

3. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to

ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment.

4. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard painted finish and trim combination.

5. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a

minimum of four, four-pair, Category 3 or Category 5 voice and data communication

cables.

6. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20-A, straight-blade receptacles complying with

requirements in this Section.

7. Voice and Data Communication Outlets: Four RJ-45 jacks complying with requirements

in Section 16717 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

2.17 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless

otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

3. TVSS Devices: Blue.

4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside

of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint

unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal

screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.

9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the left.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral

blade at the top.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount

outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.

2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.

3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical

and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,

multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and

furnishings.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is

not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or

engraved machine printing with black filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers

or tags inside outlet boxes.



representative:

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.

2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.

3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.

2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable.

3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.

4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.

5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar

problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new

ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Engine Generators


SECTION 16231 – PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 Scope

A. Provide complete factory assembled generator set equipment with digital (microprocessor-based)

electronic control, Cummins Model 1000KW DQFAD with a Level 2 sound enclosure and 24 hour Sub-

base tank UL-142 or approved equal.

B. Provide factory test, startup by a supplier authorized by the manufacturer, and on-site testing of the

system.

C. The generator set manufacturer shall warrant all equipment provided under the section, so that there is

one source for warranty and product service. Technicians specially trained and certified by the

manufacturer to support the product and employed by the generator set supplier shall service the

generator sets.

D. Fuel: Diesel

E. The generator shall be mounted on a platform as shown in structural drawings.

F. The contractor is responsible for connecting generator contacts to the Building Energy Control Panel.

G. Related Sections include the following:

1. Section 263200 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate

automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 Code and Standards

A. The generator set installation and on-site testing shall confirm to the requirements of the following codes

and standards, as applicable. The generator set shall include necessary feature to meet the requirements of

these standards.

B. IEEE446-Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and

Industrial Applications.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. NFPA37- Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines

D. NFPA70- National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to

Article 700, 701, and 702.

E. NFPA110- Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for

Level 1 systems. Level 1 prototype tests requires by this standard shall have been performed on a

complete and functional unit, component level types tests will not substitute for this requirement.


A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator.

2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components

specified.

2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate

requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration

isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail

fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include

base weights.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that day tank, engine-generator set,

batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled

components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully

operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and

describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their

installation requirements.

B. Qualification Data: For installer.

C. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.

2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to

those tested on prototype unit.

3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to meet

performance criteria for sensitive loads.

4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with

specified requirements.

5. Report of sound generation.

6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.

7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance

Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include

part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.

2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each.

3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for

installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of

business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of

engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of

manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Only approved bidders shall supply equipment provided under this contract.

Equipment specifications for this project based on microprocessor-based generator sets manufactured by

Cummins Power Generation. Equipment by other suppliers that meets the requirements of this

specification are acceptable, if approved not less than 2 weeks before scheduled bid date. Alternate

suppliers must include a line-by-line compliance statement, based on this specification, with the request

for approval letter.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the

testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a

nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical

Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to

supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a

single manufacturer.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100,

by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with ASME B15.1.

G. Comply with NFPA 37.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with NFPA 99.

J. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.

K. Comply with UL 2200.

L. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

M. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise

level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine

exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.


A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental

conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: 10 to 100 deg F.

2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.

3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m).

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of steel braces for package engine generators and radiators on platform.

Anchor-bolt inserts into steel base plates with structural steel fabricators to insure proper support of the

engine-generator system.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance

by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to

check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and

supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Generator Set

A. Ratings

1. The generator shall operate at 1800 rpm and at a voltage of: 277/480 Volts AC, Three phase Delta

wound, 4-wire, 60 hertz.

2. The generator set shall provide for any combination of single-phase and three-phase loading as

long as no one terminal current exceeds the generator nameplate rating; Single-phase loads, as

large as two-thirds of the three-phase rating may be used if no other load exists on the generator.

Caution: there will be a high (stinger) leg in use at this facility.

3. The generator set shall be rated a minimum 1000kW, 1250 kVA at 1.0 PF, standby rating, based on

site conditions of: Altitude 1,200 ft., ambient temperatures up to 100 degrees F.

B. Performance

1. Voltage regulation shall be plus or minus 1.0% for any constant load between no load and rated

load for both parallel and non-parallel applications. Random voltage variation with any steady load

from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or minus 1.0%.

2. Frequency regulation shall be isochronous from steady state no load to steady state rated load.

Random frequency variation with any steady load from no load to full load shall not exceed plus or

minus 0.5%.

a. The engine-generator set shall be capable of single step load pick up of 100% nameplate kW

and power factor, less applicable derating factors, with the engine-generator set at operating

temperature

3. Motor starting capability shall be a minimum of 663 kVA. The generator set shall be capable of

sustaining a minimum of 90% of rated no load voltage with the specified kVA load at near zero

power factor applied to the generator set.

4. The alternator shall produce a clean AC voltage waveform, with not more than 5% total harmonic

distortion at full linear load, when measured from line to neutral, and with not more than 3% in any

single harmonic. Telephone influence factor shall be less than 50.

C. Construction

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. The engine-generator set shall be mounted on a heavy-duty steel base to maintain alignment

between components. The base shall incorporate a battery tray with hold-down clamps within the

rails.

2. All switches, lamps, and meters in the control system shall be oil-tight and dust-tight, and the

enclosure door shall be gasketed. There shall be no exposed points in the control (with the door

open) that operate in excess of 50 volts.

D. Connections

1. The generator set load connections shall be composed of silver or tin plated copper bus bars, drilled

to accept mechanical or compression terminations of the number and type as shown on the

drawings. Sufficient lug space shall be provided for use with cables of the number and size as

shown on the drawings.

2. Power connections to auxiliary devices shall be made at the devices, with required protection

located at a wall-mounted common distribution panel.

3. Generator set control interfaces to other system components shall be made on a common,

permanently labeled terminal block assembly.

2.2 Engine and Engine Equipment

A. The engine shall be natural gas fueled, radiator and fan cooled. Minimum displacement shall be 537cubic

inches, with a minimum 6 cylinders. The horsepower rating of the engine at it's minimum tolerance level

shall be 243 bhp or greater to drive the alternator and all connected accessories. The engine shall be 2009

EPA SI NSPS EPA Certified. Due to motor starting requirements for this project, engines with less than

537 cubic inches (8.8 liters) will not be acceptable.

B. Complete engine fuel system, including all pressure regulators, strainers, and control valves. The fuel

system shall be plumbed to the generator set skid for ease of site connections to the generator set. For dual

fuel systems, changeover from primary to secondary fuel shall be automatic.

C. An electronic governor system shall provide automatic isochronous frequency regulation. The governing

system dynamic capabilities shall be controlled as a function of engine coolant temperature to provide

fast, stable operation at varying engine operating temperature conditions. The control system shall

actively control the fuel rate and excitation as appropriate to the state of the generator set. Fuel rate shall

be regulated as a function of starting, accelerating to start disconnect speed, accelerating to rated speed,

and operating in various isochronous or parallel states.

D. Skid-mounted radiator and cooling system rated for full load operation in 104 degrees F (40 degrees C)

ambient as measured at the generator air inlet, based on 0.5 in H2O external static head. Radiator shall be

sized based on a core temperature that is 20F higher than the rated operation temperature, or prototype

tested to verify cooling performance of the engine/radiator/fan operation in a controlled environment.

Radiator shall be provided with a duct adapter flange. The equipment manufacturer shall fill the cooling

system with a 50/50-ethylene glycol/water mixture. Rotating parts shall be guarded against accidental

contact.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Electric starter(s) capable of three complete cranking cycles without overheating.

F. Positive displacement, mechanical, full pressure, lubrication oil pump.

G. Full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable spin-on canister elements and dipstick oil level indicator.

H. Replaceable dry element air cleaner with restriction indicator.

I. Flexible fuel lines.

J. Engine mounted battery charging alternator, 75-ampere minimum, and solid-state voltage regulator.

K. Coolant heater

1. Engine mounted, thermostatically controlled, coolant heater(s) for each engine. Heater voltage

shall be as shown on the project drawings. The coolant heater shall be UL499 listed and

labeled.

2. The coolant heater shall be installed on the engine with high temperature silicone hose

connections. Steel tubing shall be used for connections into the engine coolant system

wherever the length of pipe run exceeds 12 inches. The coolant heater installation shall be

specifically designed to provide proper venting of the system. The coolant heaters shall be

installed using quick disconnect couplers to isolate the heater for replacement of the heater

element. The quick disconnect/automatic sealing couplers shall allow the heater element to be

replaced without draining the engine cooling system or significant coolant loss.

3. The coolant heater shall be provided with a 24VDC thermostat, installed at the engine

thermostat housing. An AC power connection box shall be provided for a single AC power

connection to the coolant heater system.

4. The coolant heater(s) shall be sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer to warm the

engine to a minimum of 100F (40C) in a 40F ambient, in compliance with NFPA110

requirements, or the temperature required for starting and load pickup requirements of this

specification.

L. Provide vibration isolators, spring/pad type or as recommended by the manufacturer, quantity as

recommended by the generator set manufacturer. Isolators shall include seismic restraints if required

by site location.

M. Starting and Control Batteries shall be calcium/lead antimony type, 24 volt DC, sized as recommended by

the engine manufacturer, complete with battery cables and connectors.

N. Provide exhaust silencer(s) for each engine of size and type as recommended by the generator set

manufacturer and approved by the engine manufacturer. The mufflers shall be critical grade. Exhaust

system shall be installed according to the engine manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable codes

and standards.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



O. Provide a minimum 10 amp battery charger for each generator set battery bank. Generator sets

incorporating two battery banks shall be provided with two chargers connected together and operating in

parallel, with alarm output(s) connected in parallel. The charger(s) shall include the following

capabilities:

1. Chargers shall be UL 1236-BBHH listed and CSA or CUL certified for use in emergency

applications.

2. The charger shall be compliant with UL991 requirements for vibration resistance.

3. The charger shall comply with the requirements of EN61000-4-5 for voltage surge resistance;

EN50082-2 for immunity; EN61000-4-2 for ESD; EN61000-4-3 for radiated immunity;

ANSI/IEEE C62.41 category B and IN61000-4-4 for electrically fast transient; EN61000-4-6 for

conducted emissions; and FCC Part 15 Class A for radiated emissions.

4. The charger shall be capable of charging a fully discharged battery without damage to the charger.

It shall be capable of returning a fully discharged battery to fully charged condition within 24

hours. The charger shall be UL-labeled with the maximum battery amp-hour rating that can be

recharged within 24 hours.

5. The charger shall incorporate a 4-state charging algorithm, to provide trickle charge rate to restore

fully discharged batteries, a bulk charge rate to provide fastest possible recharge after normal

discharge, an absorption state to return the battery to 100 percent of charge, and a float stage to

maintain a fully charge battery and supply battery loads when the generator set is not operating. In

addition, the charger shall include an equalization timer. Charge rates shall be temperature

compensated based on the temperature directly sensed at the battery.

6. The DC output voltage regulation shall be within plus or minus 1%. The DC output ripple current

shall not exceed 1 amp at rated output current level.

7. The charger shall include the following features:

a. Two line alphanumeric display with programming keys to allow display of DC output

ammeter and voltmeters (5% accuracy or better), display alarm messages, and perform

programming;

b. LED indicating lamp(s) to indicating normal charging condition (green), equalize charge

state (amber), and fault condition (red);

c. AC input overcurrent, over voltage, and undervoltage protection;

d. DC output overcurrent protection;

e. Alarm output relay

f. Corrosion resistant aluminum enclosure

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 AC Generator

A. The AC generator shall be; synchronous, four pole, 2/3 pitch, revolving field, drip-proof construction,

single pre-lubricated sealed bearing, air cooled by a direct drive centrifugal blower fan, and directly

connected to the engine with flexible drive disc. All insulation system components shall meet NEMA

MG1 temperature limits for Class H insulation system. Actual temperature rise measured by resistance

method of the alternator shall not exceed 125 degrees Centigrade while operating at 150 kW on an

infinite bus. The alternator is oversized due to the motor starting requirements for this project.

B. The generator shall be capable of delivering rated output (kVA) at rated frequency and power factor, at

any voltage not more than 5 percent above or below rated voltage.

C. A permanent magnet generator (PMG) shall be included to provide a reliable source of excitation power

for optimum motor starting and short circuit performance. The PMG and controls shall be capable

of sustaining and regulating current supplied to a single phase or three phase fault at approximately

300% of rated current for not more than 10 seconds.

D. The subtransient reactance of the alternator shall not exceed 12 percent, based on the standby rating of

the generator set.

E. The alternator shall be capable of operation with reverse kVAR of 0.15 per unit.

F. The alternator shall have a 120 VAC, single phase, space heater.

2.4 Generator set Control.

A. The generator set shall be provided with a microprocessor-based control system that is designed to

provide automatic starting, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control system

shall also be designed to allow local monitoring and control of the generator set, and remote monitoring

and control as described in this specification.

B. The control shall be mounted on the generator set, or may be mounted in a free-standing panel next to the

generator set if adequate space and accessibility is available. The control shall be vibration isolated and

prototype tested to verify the durability of all components in the system under the vibration conditions

encountered.

1. The generator set mounted control shall include the following features and functions:

a. Control Switches

1) Mode Select Switch. The mode select switch shall initiate the following control

modes. When in the RUN or MANUAL position the generator set shall start, and

accelerate to rated speed and voltage as directed by the operator. A separate push-

button to initiate starting is acceptable. In the OFF position the generator set shall

immediately stop, bypassing all time delays. In the AUTO position the generator set

shall be ready to accept a signal from a remote device to start and accelerate to rated

speed and voltage.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2) EMERGENCY STOP switch. Switch shall be Red "mushroom-head" push-button.

Depressing the emergency stop switch shall cause the generator set to immediately

shut down, and be locked out from automatic restarting.

3) RESET switch. The RESET switch shall be used to clear a fault and allow restarting

the generator set after it has shut down for any fault condition.

4) PANEL LAMP switch. Depressing the panel lamp switch shall cause the entire panel

to be lighted with DC control power. The panel lamps shall automatically be switched

off 10 minutes after the switch is depressed, or after the switch is depressed a second

time.

b. Generator Set AC Output Metering. The generator set shall be provided with a metering set

including the following features and functions:

1) Digital metering set, 1% accuracy, to indicate generator RMS voltage and current,

frequency, output current, output KW, KW hours, and power factor. Generator output

voltage shall be available in line to line and line to neutral voltages, and shall display

all three-phase voltages (line to neutral or line to line) simultaneously.

2) Analog voltmeter, ammeter, frequency meter, power factor meter, and kilowatt (KW)

meter. Voltmeter and ammeter shall display all three phases. Meter scales shall be

color coded in the following fashion: green shall indicate normal operating condition,

amber shall indicate operation in ranges that indicate potential failure, and red shall

indicate failure impending. Metering accuracy shall be within 1% at rated output.

Both analog and digital metering are required.

3) The control system shall monitor the total load on the generator set, and maintain data

logs of total operating hours at specific load levels ranging from 0 to 110% of rated

load, in 10% increments. The control shall display hours of operation at less than 30%

load and total hours of operation at more than 90% of rated load.

4) The control system shall log total number of operating hours, total kWH, and total

control on hours, as well as total values since reset.

C. Generator Set Alarm and Status Display.

1. The generator set control shall include LED alarm and status indication lamps. The lamps shall be

high-intensity LED type. The lamp condition shall be clearly apparent under bright room lighting

conditions. Functions indicated by the lamps shall include:

a. The control shall include five configurable alarm-indicating lamps. The lamps shall be field

adjustable for any status, warning, or shutdown function monitored by the genset. They

shall also be configurable for color, and control action (status, warning, or shutdown).

b. The control shall include green lamps to indicate that the generator set is running at rated

frequency and voltage, and that a remote start signal has been received at the generator set.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



The running signal shall be based on actual sensed voltage and frequency on the output

terminals of the generator set.

c. The control shall include a flashing red lamp to indicate that the control is not in automatic

state, and red common shutdown lamp.

d. The control shall include an amber common warning indication lamp.

2. The generator set control shall indicate the existence of the warning and shutdown conditions on

the control panel. All conditions indicated below for warning shall be field-configurable for

shutdown. Conditions required to be annunciated shall include:

a. low oil pressure (warning)

b. low oil pressure (shutdown)

c. oil pressure sender failure (warning)

d. low coolant temperature (warning)

e. high coolant temperature (warning)

f. high coolant temperature (shutdown)

g. high oil temperature (warning)

h. engine temperature sender failure (warning)

i. low coolant level (warning)

j. fail to crank (shutdown)

k. fail to start/overcrank (shutdown)

l. overspeed (shutdown)

m. low DC voltage (warning)

n. high DC voltage (warning)

o. weak battery (warning)

p. low fuel-daytank (warning)

q. high AC voltage (shutdown)

r. low AC voltage (shutdown)

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



s. under frequency (shutdown)

t. over current (warning)

u. over current (shutdown)

v. short circuit (shutdown)

w. over load (warning)

x. emergency stop (shutdown)

y. (4) configurable conditions

3. Provisions shall be made for indication of four customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions.

Labeling of the customer-specified alarm or shutdown conditions shall be of the same type and

quality as the above-specified conditions. The non-automatic indicating lamp shall be red, and

shall flash to indicate that the generator set is not able to automatically respond to a command to

start from a remote location

D. Engine Status Monitoring

1. The following information shall be available from a digital status panel on the generator set

control:

a. engine oil pressure (psi or kPA)

b. engine coolant temperature (degrees F or C)

c. engine oil temperature (degrees F or C)

d. engine speed (rpm)

e. number of hours of operation (hours)

f. number of start attempts

g. battery voltage (DC volts)

2. The control system shall also incorporate a data logging and display provision to allow logging of

the last 10 warning or shutdown indications on the generator set, as well as total time of operation

at various loads, as a percent of the standby rating of the generator set.

E. Engine Control Functions.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. The control system provided shall include a cycle cranking system, which allows for user selected

crank time, rest time, and # of cycles. Initial settings shall be for 3 cranking periods of 15 seconds

each, with 15-second rest period between cranking periods.

2. The control system shall include an idle mode control, which allows the engine to run in idle mode

in the RUN position only. In this mode, the alternator excitation system shall be disabled.

3. The control system shall include an engine governor control, which functions to provide steady

state frequency regulation as noted elsewhere in this specification. The governor control shall

include adjustments for gain, damping, and a ramping function to control engine speed and limit

exhaust smoke while the unit is starting.

4. The control system shall include time delay start (adjustable 0-300 seconds) and time delay stop

(adjustable 0-600 seconds) functions.

5. The control system shall include sender failure monitoring logic for speed sensing, oil pressure,

and engine temperature which is capable of discriminating between failed sender or wiring

components, and an actual failure conditions.

F. Alternator Control Functions:

1. The generator set shall include a full wave rectified automatic digital voltage regulation system that

is matched and prototype tested by the engine manufacturer with the governing system provided.

It shall be immune from misoperation due to load-induced voltage waveform distortion and provide

a pulse width modulated output to the alternator exciter. The voltage regulation system shall be

equipped with three-phase line to neutral RMS sensing and shall control buildup of AC generator

voltage to provide a linear rise and limit overshoot. The system shall include a torque-matching

characteristic, which shall reduce output voltage in proportion to frequency below an adjustable

frequency threshold. Torque matching characteristic shall be adjustable for roll-off frequency and

rate, and be capable of being curve-matched to the engine torque curve with adjustments in the

field. The voltage regulator shall include adjustments for gain, damping, and frequency roll-off.

Adjustments shall be broad range, and made via digital raise-lower switches, with an alphanumeric

LED readout to indicate setting level. Rotary potentiometers for system adjustments are not

acceptable.

2. Controls shall be provided to monitor the output current of the generator set and initiate an alarm

(over current warning) when load current exceeds 110% of the rated current of the generator set on

any phase for more than 60 seconds. The controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set

when output current level approaches the thermal damage point of the alternator (over current

shutdown). The protective functions provided shall be in compliance to the requirements of

NFPA70 article 445. The protection for this function shall be 3rd party certified to very

performance.

3. Controls shall be provided to individually monitor all three phases of the output current for short

circuit conditions. The control/protection system shall monitor the current level and voltage. The

controls shall shut down and lock out the generator set when output current level approaches the

thermal damage point of the alternator (short circuit shutdown). The protective functions provided

shall be in compliance to the requirements of NFPA70 article 445. The protection for this function

shall be 3rd party certified to very performance.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Controls shall be provided to monitor the KW load on the generator set, and initiate an alarm

condition (over load) when total load on the generator set exceeds the generator set rating for in

excess of 5 seconds. Controls shall include a load shed control, to operate a set of dry contacts (for

use in shedding customer load devices) when the generator set is overloaded

5. An line to neutral sensing AC over/under voltage monitoring system that responds only to true

RMS voltage conditions shall be provided. The system shall initiate shutdown of the generator set

when alternator output voltage exceeds 110% of the operator-set voltage level for more than 10

seconds, or with no intentional delay when voltage exceeds 130%. Under voltage shutdown shall

occur when the output voltage of the alternator is less than 85% for more than 10 seconds.

6. The generator set control shall include a 120VAC-control space heater.

G. Other Control Functions

1. A battery monitoring system shall be provided which initiates alarms when the DC control and

starting voltage is less than 12VDC or more than 20VDC. During engine cranking (starter

engaged), the low voltage limit shall be disabled, and DC voltage shall be monitored as load is

applied to the battery, to detect impending battery failure or deteriorated battery condition.

H. Control Interfaces for Remote Monitoring:

1. The control system shall provide four programmable output relays. These relay outputs shall be

configurable for any alarm, shutdown, or status condition monitored by the control. The relays

shall be configured to indicate: (1) generator set operating at rated voltage and frequency, (2)

common warning, (3) common shutdown, (4) load shed command.

2. A fused 10 amp switched 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC

power shall be available from this circuit whenever the generator set is running.

3. A fused 10 amp 24VDC power supply circuit shall be provided for customer use. DC power shall

be available from this circuit at all times from the engine starting/control batteries.

4. The control shall be provided with a direct serial communication link for the LonWorks and

MODBUS communication network interface as described elsewhere in this specification and

shown on the drawings.

2.5 Other equipment to be provided with the generator set

A. Provide and install a 20-light LED type remote alarm annunciator with horn, located as shown on the

drawings or in a location that can be conveniently monitored by facility personnel. Contractor shall

coordinator with owner to determine appropriate location. The remote annunciator shall provide all the

audible and visual alarms called for by NFPA Standard 110 for level 1 systems for the local generator

control panel. Spare lamps shall be provided to allow future addition of other alarm and status functions

to the annunciator. Provisions for labeling of the annunciator in a fashion consistent with the specified

functions shall be provided. Alarm silence and lamp test switch(es) shall be provided. LED lamps shall

be replaceable, and indicating lamp color shall be capable of changes needed for specific application

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



requirements. Alarm horn shall be switchable for all annunciation points. Alarm horn (when switched

on) shall sound for first fault, and all subsequent faults, regardless of whether first fault has been cleared,

in compliance with NFPA110 3-5.6.2. The interconnecting wiring between the annunciator and other

system components shall be monitored and failure of the interconnection between components shall be

displayed on the annunciator panel.

B. The annunciator shall include the following alarm labels, audible annunciation features, and lamp colors:

Condition Lamp Color Audible Alarm

Normal Power (to Loads) Green No

Genset Supplying Load Amber No

Genset Running Green No

Not in Auto Red (Flashing) Yes

High Battery Voltage Red Yes

Low Battery Voltage Red Yes

Charger AC Failure Red Yes

Fail to Start Red Yes

Low Engine Temperature Amber Yes

Pre-High Engine Temperature Amber Yes

High Engine Temperature Red Yes

Pre-Low Oil Pressure Amber Yes

Low Oil Pressure Red Yes

Overspeed Red Yes

Low Coolant Level Amber Yes

Low Fuel Pressure Amber Yes

Network OK Green Yes

(4) Spares Configurable Configurable

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



Low battery voltage lamp shall also be lighted for low cranking voltage or weak battery alarm.

C. The generator set shall be provided with a mounted main line circuit breaker, sized to carry the rated

output current of the generator set. The circuit breaker shall incorporate an electronic trip unit that

operates to protect the alternator under all overcurrent conditions, or a thermal-magnetic trip with other

overcurrent protection devices that positively protect the alternator under overcurrent conditions. The

supplier shall submit time overcurrent characteristic curves and thermal damage curve for the alternator,

demonstrating the effectiveness of the protection provided.

D. Sound Attenuated Outdoor Weather-Protective Enclosure

1. The generator set shall be provided with an outdoor enclosure. Enclosure shall withstand a

minimum of 150mph wind. The package shall comply with the requirements of the National

Electrical Code for all wiring materials and component spacing. The total assembly of generator

set and enclosure shall be designed to be lifted into place using spreader bars. Housing shall

provide ample airflow for generator set operation at rated load in an ambient temperature of 104F.

The housing shall have hinged access doors as required to maintain easy access for all operating

and service functions. All doors shall be lockable, and include retainers to hold the door open

during service. Enclosure roof shall be cambered to prevent rainwater accumulation. Openings

shall be screened to limit access of rodents into the enclosure. All electrical power and control

interconnections shall be made within the perimeter of the enclosure. The enclosure shall have a

sound level for the generator set of 74 dba, while operating at full rated load, at any location 7

meters from the generator set in a free field environment. Insulation in the enclosure shall be made

with non-hydroscopic materials.

2. All sheet metal shall be primed for corrosion protection and finish painted with the manufacturers

standard color using a powder coat paint process, or equal meeting the performance requirements

specified below. All surfaces of all metal parts shall be primed and painted.

3. Enclosure shall be constructed of minimum 12 gauge steel for framework and 14 gauge steel for

panels. All hardware and hinges shall be stainless steel. If generator set is mounted on an open

floor structure (platform), a floor must be included with the generator set.

4. A factory-mounted, critical grad exhaust silencer shall be installed inside of the enclosure. Exhaust

connections to the generator set shall be through seamless flexible connections.

5. The enclosure shall include the following maintenance provisions:

a. Flexible coolant and lubricating oil drain lines, that extend to the exterior of the enclosures,

with internal drain valves

b. External radiator fill provision

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements

for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections

before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions

and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for

periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements

for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Retain first

subparagraph below for projects in seismic areas. Indicate seismic-control device type and minimum

deflection in supported equipment schedule on Drawings.

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in this section.

D. Install remote radiator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) on

concrete base on grade.

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be

factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of

piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow

service and maintenance.

C. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and remote radiator with flexible

connectors.

D. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

F. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

G. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 16075 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test

reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and

adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in

writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in

testing.


1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical

inspection (except those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems"

specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those

specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging

and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both

conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load

test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging

conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each

element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust,

and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg (120 kPa).

Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated

load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria.

8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage

and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that

performance is as specified.

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100

percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation,

including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations on the property

line, and compare measured levels with required values.

E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and

adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for

examination on request.

G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation

and unit operation.

I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are

met.

L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation

resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component

indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



M. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,

perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access

panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date

of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial

action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Static Uninterruptible Power Supply


SECTION 16264 - STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Three-phase, on-line, double-conversion, static-type, UPS units with the following

features:

a. Surge suppression.

b. Input harmonics reduction.

c. Rectifier-charger.

d. Inverter.

e. Static bypass transfer switch.

f. Battery and battery disconnect device.

g. Internal maintenance bypass/isolation switch.

h. Output isolation transformer.

i. Remote UPS monitoring provisions.

j. Battery monitoring.

k. Remote monitoring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

C. LED: Light-emitting diode.

D. PC: Personal computer.

E. THD: Total harmonic distortion.

F. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.


A. Seismic Performance: UPS shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined

according to ASCE/SEI 7.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified[ and the unit will be fully

operational after the seismic event]."


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on features, components, ratings,

and performance.

B. Shop Drawings: For UPS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other

work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, components, and location

and identification of each field connection. Show access, workspace, and clearance

requirements; details of control panels; and battery arrangement.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified power quality specialist.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For UPS equipment, from manufacturer.







C. Manufacturer Certificates: For each product, from manufacturer.

D. Factory Test Reports: Comply with specified requirements.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Performance Test Reports: Indicate test results compared with specified performance

requirements, and provide justification and resolution of differences if values do not agree.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For UPS units to include in emergency, operation, and


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.

2. Cabinet Ventilation Filters: One complete set(s).


A. Power Quality Specialist Qualifications: A registered professional electrical engineer or

engineering technician, currently certified by the National Institute for Certification in

Engineering Technologies, NICET Level 4, minimum, experienced in performance testing UPS

installations and in performing power quality surveys similar to that required in "Performance

Testing" Article.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


D. UL Compliance: Listed and labeled under UL 1778 by an NRTL.

E. NFPA Compliance: Mark UPS components as suitable for installation in computer rooms

according to NFPA 75.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Battery Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair

or replace UPS system storage batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

1. Warranted Cycle Life for Valve-Regulated, Lead-Calcium Batteries: Equal to or greater

than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding

to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F:

Discharge Rate Discharge Duration Discharge End

Voltage

Cycle Life

8 hours 8 hours 1.67 6 cycles

30 minutes 30 minutes 1.67 20 cycles

15 minutes 45 seconds 1.67 120 cycles

2. Warranted Cycle Life for Premium Valve-Regulated, Lead-calcium Batteries: Equal to or

greater than that represented in manufacturer's published table, including figures

corresponding to the following, based on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




Voltage

Cycle Life


30 minutes 30 minutes 1.67 125 cycles

15 minutes 1.5 minutes 1.67 750 cycles

3. Warranted Cycle Life for Flooded Batteries: Equal to or greater than that represented in

manufacturer's published table, including figures corresponding to the following, based

on annual average battery temperature of 77 deg F:


Voltage

Cycle Life


1 hour 1 hour 1.75 80 cycles

15 minutes 45 seconds 1.67 2700 cycles

B. Special UPS Warranties: Specified form in which manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or

replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within special warranty period.

1. Special Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Automatic operation includes the following:

1. Normal Conditions: Load is supplied with power flowing from the normal power input

terminals, through the rectifier-charger and inverter, with the battery connected in parallel

with the rectifier-charger output.

2. Abnormal Supply Conditions: If normal supply deviates from specified and adjustable

voltage, voltage waveform, or frequency limits, the battery supplies energy to maintain

constant, regulated inverter power output to the load without switching or disturbance.

3. If normal power fails, energy supplied by the battery through the inverter continues

supply-regulated power to the load without switching or disturbance.

4. When power is restored at the normal supply terminals of the system, controls

automatically synchronize the inverter with the external source before transferring the

load. The rectifier-charger then supplies power to the load through the inverter and

simultaneously recharges the battery.

5. If the battery becomes discharged and normal supply is available, the rectifier-charger

charges the battery. On reaching full charge, the rectifier-charger automatically shifts to

float-charge mode.

6. If any element of the UPS system fails and power is available at the normal supply

terminals of the system, the static bypass transfer switch switches the load to the normal

ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

7. If a fault occurs in the system supplied by the UPS, and current flows in excess of the

overload rating of the UPS system, the static bypass transfer switch operates to bypass

the fault current to the normal ac supply circuit for fault clearing.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



8. When the fault has cleared, the static bypass transfer switch returns the load to the UPS

system.

9. If the battery is disconnected, the UPS continues to supply power to the load with no

degradation of its regulation of voltage and frequency of the output bus.

B. Manual operation includes the following:

1. Turning the inverter off causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load

directly to the normal ac supply circuit without disturbance or interruption.

2. Turning the inverter on causes the static bypass transfer switch to transfer the load to the

inverter.

C. Maintenance Bypass/Isolation Switch Operation: Switch is interlocked so it cannot be operated

unless the static bypass transfer switch is in the bypass mode. Device provides manual selection

among the three conditions in subparagraphs below without interrupting supply to the load

during switching:

1. Full Isolation: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. Normal UPS ac input circuit, static

bypass transfer switch, and UPS load terminals are completely disconnected from

external circuits.

2. Maintenance Bypass: Load is supplied, bypassing the UPS. UPS ac supply terminals are

energized to permit operational checking, but system load terminals are isolated from the

load.

3. Normal: Normal UPS ac supply terminals are energized and the load is supplied through

either the static bypass transfer switch and the UPS rectifier-charger and inverter, or the

battery and the inverter.

D. Environmental Conditions: The UPS shall be capable of operating continuously in the following

environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating

capability, except battery performance.

1. Ambient Temperature for Electronic Components: 32 to 104 deg F.

2. Ambient Temperature for Battery: 41 to 95 deg F.

3. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, noncondensing.

4. Altitude: Sea level to 4000 feet.


A. The UPS shall perform as specified in this article while supplying rated full-load current,

composed of any combination of linear and nonlinear load, up to 100 percent nonlinear load

with a load crest factor of 3.0, under the following conditions or combinations of the following

conditions:

1. Inverter is switched to battery source.

2. Steady-state ac input voltage deviates up to plus or minus 10 percent from nominal

voltage.

3. Steady-state input frequency deviates up to plus or minus 5 percent from nominal

frequency.

4. THD of input voltage is 15 percent or more with a minimum crest factor of 3.0, and the

largest single harmonic component is a minimum of 5 percent of the fundamental value.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Load is 30 percent unbalanced continuously.

B. Minimum Duration of Supply: If battery is sole energy source supplying rated full UPS load

current at 80 percent power factor, duration of supply is 15 minutes.

C. Input Voltage Tolerance: System steady-state and transient output performance remains within

specified tolerances when steady-state ac input voltage varies plus 10, minus 15 percent from

nominal voltage.

D. Overall UPS Efficiency: Shall be determined with the owners representative prior to

installation. (Equal to or greater than 80 percent at 100 percent load, <Insert number> percent at

75 percent load, and <Insert number> percent at 50 percent load.)

E. Maximum Acoustical Noise: 50 "A" weighting, emanating from any UPS component under any

condition of normal operation, measured 10 foot from nearest surface of component enclosure.

F. Maximum Energizing Inrush Current: Six times the full-load current.

G. Maximum AC Output-Voltage Regulation for Loads up to 50 Percent Unbalanced: Plus or

minus 2 percent over the full range of battery voltage.

H. Output Frequency: 60 Hz, plus or minus 0.5 percent over the full range of input voltage, load,

and battery voltage.

I. Limitation of harmonic distortion of input current to the UPS shall be as follows:

1. Description: Either a tuned harmonic filter or an arrangement of rectifier-charger circuits

shall limit THD to 5 percent, maximum, at rated full UPS load current, for power sources

with X/R ratio between 2 and 30.

2. Description: THD is limited to a maximum of 32 percent, at rated full UPS load current,

for power sources with X/R ratio between 2 and 30.

J. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 5 percent rms total and 3 percent

rms for any single harmonic, for 100 percent rated nonlinear load current with a load crest

factor of 3.0.

K. Maximum Harmonic Content of Output-Voltage Waveform: 5 percent rms total and 3 percent

rms for any single harmonic, for rated full load with THD up to 50 percent, with a load crest

factor of 3.0.

L. Minimum Overload Capacity of UPS at Rated Voltage: 125 percent of rated full load for 10

minutes, and 150 percent for 30 seconds in all operating modes.

M. Maximum Output-Voltage Transient Excursions from Rated Value: For the following

instantaneous load changes, stated as percentages of rated full UPS load, voltage shall remain

within stated percentages of rated value and recover to, and remain within, plus or minus 2

percent of that value within 100 ms:

1. 50 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent.

2. 100 Percent: Plus or minus 5 percent.

3. Loss of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Restoration of AC Input Power: Plus or minus 1 percent.

N. Input Power Factor: A minimum of 0.85 lagging when supply voltage and current are at

nominal rated values and the UPS is supplying rated full-load current.

O. EMI Emissions: Comply with FCC Rules and Regulations and with 47 CFR 15 for Class A

equipment.

2.3 UPS SYSTEMS





1. Eaton Corporation.

2. Liebert Corporation.

3. MGE UPS SYSTEMS.

4. Mitsubishi Electric Automation, Inc.

5. Toshiba Corporation; Industrial Systems.

C. Electronic Equipment: Solid-state devices using hermetically sealed, semiconductor elements.

Devices include rectifier-charger, inverter, static bypass transfer switch, and system controls.

D. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Control Assemblies: Mount on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.

F. Surge Suppression: Protect internal UPS components from surges that enter at each ac power

input connection including main disconnect switch, static bypass transfer switch, and

maintenance bypass/isolation switch. Protect rectifier-charger, inverter, controls, and output

components.

1. Use factory-installed surge suppressors tested according to IEEE C62.41.1 and

IEEE C62.41.2, Category B.

2. Additional Surge Protection: Protect internal UPS components from low-frequency, high-

energy voltage surges described in IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2. Design the

circuits connecting with external power sources and select circuit elements, conductors,

conventional surge suppressors, and rectifier components and controls so input

assemblies will have adequate mechanical strength and thermal and current-carrying

capacity to withstand stresses imposed by 40-Hz, 180 percent voltage surges described in

IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2.

G. Maintainability Features: Mount rectifier-charger and inverter sections and the static bypass

transfer switch on modular plug-ins, readily accessible for maintenance.

H. Capacity Upgrade Capability: Arrange wiring, controls, and modular component plug-in

provisions to permit future 25 percent increase in UPS capacity.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



I. Seismic-Restraint Design: UPS assemblies, subassemblies, and components (and fastenings and

supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and fabricated to

withstand static and seismic forces.

J. UPS Cabinet Ventilation: Redundant fans or blowers draw in ambient air near the bottom of

cabinet and discharge it near the top rear.

K. Output Circuit Neutral Bus, Conductor, and Terminal Ampacity: Rated phase current times a

multiple of 1.73, minimum.

2.4 RECTIFIER-CHARGER

A. Capacity: Adequate to supply the inverter during rated full output load conditions and

simultaneously recharge the battery from fully discharged condition to 95 percent of full charge

within 10 times the rated discharge time for duration of supply under battery power at full load.

B. Output Ripple: Limited by output filtration to less than 0.5 percent of rated current, peak to

peak.

C. Control Circuits: Immune to frequency variations within rated frequency ranges of normal and

emergency power sources.

1. Response Time: Field adjustable for maximum compatibility with local generator-set

power source.

D. Battery Float-Charging Conditions: Comply with battery manufacturer's written instructions for

battery terminal voltage and charging current required for maximum battery life.

2.5 INVERTER

A. Description: Pulse-width modulated, with sinusoidal output.

B. Description: Pulse-width modulated, with sinusoidal output. Include a bypass phase

synchronization window adjustment to optimize compatibility with local engine-generator-set

power source.

2.6 STATIC BYPASS TRANSFER SWITCH

A. Description: Solid-state switching device providing uninterrupted transfer. A contactor or

electrically operated circuit breaker automatically provides electrical isolation for the switch.

B. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at the rated full UPS load current, minimum.

2.7 BATTERY

A. Description: Valve-regulated, recombinant, lead-calcium units, factory assembled in an isolated

compartment of UPS cabinet, complete with battery disconnect switch.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Arrange for drawout removal of battery assembly from cabinet for testing and inspecting.

B. Description: Valve-regulated, premium, heavy-duty, recombinant, lead-calcium units; factory

assembled in an isolated compartment or in a separate matching cabinet, complete with battery

disconnect switch.

1. Arrange for drawout removal of battery assembly from cabinet for testing and inspecting.

C. Description: Flooded, lead-calcium, heavy-duty industrial units in styrene acrylonitrile

containers mounted on three-tier, acid-resistant, painted steel racks. Assembly includes battery

disconnect switch, intercell connectors, hydrometer syringe, and thermometer with specific

gravity-correction scales.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]

E. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated


1. C&D Technologies, Inc.


3. EnerSys.

4. Panasonic Corporation of North America; Panasonic Industrial Company.

F. Seismic-Restraint Design: Battery racks, cabinets, assemblies, subassemblies, and components

(and fastenings and supports, mounting, and anchorage devices for them) shall be designed and

fabricated to withstand static and seismic forces.

2.8 CONTROLS AND INDICATIONS

A. Description: Group displays, indications, and basic system controls on a common control panel

on front of UPS enclosure.

B. Minimum displays, indicating devices, and controls include those in lists below. Provide

sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and wiring required to support listed items. Alarms

include audible signals and visual displays.

C. Indications: Plain-language messages on a digital LCD or LED.

1. Quantitative indications shall include the following:

a. Input voltage, each phase, line to line.

b. Input current, each phase, line to line.

c. Bypass input voltage, each phase, line to line.

d. Bypass input frequency.

e. System output voltage, each phase, line to line.

f. System output current, each phase.

g. System output frequency.

h. DC bus voltage.

i. Battery current and direction (charge/discharge).

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



j. Elapsed time discharging battery.

2. Basic status condition indications shall include the following:

a. Normal operation.

b. Load-on bypass.

c. Load-on battery.

d. Inverter off.

e. Alarm condition.

3. Alarm indications shall include the following:

a. Bypass ac input overvoltage or undervoltage.

b. Bypass ac input overfrequency or underfrequency.

c. Bypass ac input and inverter out of synchronization.

d. Bypass ac input wrong-phase rotation.

e. Bypass ac input single-phase condition.

f. Bypass ac input filter fuse blown.

g. Internal frequency standard in use.

h. Battery system alarm.

i. Control power failure.

j. Fan failure.

k. UPS overload.

l. Battery-charging control faulty.

m. Input overvoltage or undervoltage.

n. Input transformer overtemperature.

o. Input circuit breaker tripped.

p. Input wrong-phase rotation.

q. Input single-phase condition.

r. Approaching end of battery operation.

s. Battery undervoltage shutdown.

t. Maximum battery voltage.

u. Inverter fuse blown.

v. Inverter transformer overtemperature.

w. Inverter overtemperature.

x. Static bypass transfer switch overtemperature.

y. Inverter power supply fault.

z. Inverter transistors out of saturation.

aa. Identification of faulty inverter section/leg.

bb. Inverter output overvoltage or undervoltage.

cc. UPS overload shutdown.

dd. Inverter current sensor fault.

ee. Inverter output contactor open.

ff. Inverter current limit.

4. Controls shall include the following:

a. Inverter on-off.

b. UPS start.

c. Battery test.

d. Alarm silence/reset.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



e. Output-voltage adjustment.

D. Dry-form "C" contacts shall be available for remote indication of the following conditions:

1. UPS on battery.

2. UPS on-line.

3. UPS load-on bypass.

4. UPS in alarm condition.

5. UPS off (maintenance bypass closed).

E. Emergency Power Off Switch: Capable of local operation and operation by means of activation

by external dry contacts.

2.9 MAINTENANCE BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCH

A. Description: Manually operated switch or arrangement of switching devices with mechanically

actuated contact mechanism arranged to route the flow of power to the load around the rectifier-

charger, inverter, and static bypass transfer switch.

1. Switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent interrupting power to

the load when switching to bypass mode.

2. Switch shall electrically isolate other UPS components to permit safe servicing.

B. Comply with NEMA PB 2 and UL 891.

C. Switch Rating: Continuous duty at rated full UPS load current.

D. Mounting Provisions: Internal to system cabinet.

E. Key interlock requires unlocking maintenance bypass/isolation switch before switching from

normal position with key that is released only when the UPS is bypassed by the static bypass

transfer switch. Lock is designed specifically for mechanical and electrical component

interlocking.

2.10 OUTPUT ISOLATION TRANSFORMER

A. Description: Shielded unit with low forward transfer impedance up to 3 kHz, minimum. Include

the following features:

1. Comply with applicable portions of UL 1561, including requirements for nonlinear load

current-handling capability for a K-factor of approximately 13.

2. Output Impedance at Fundamental Frequency: Between 3 and 4 percent.

3. Regulation: 5 percent, maximum, at rated nonlinear load current.

4. Full-Load Efficiency at Rated Nonlinear Load Current: 96 percent, minimum.

5. Electrostatic Shielding of Windings: Independent for each winding.

6. Coil Leads: Physically arranged for minimum interlead capacitance.

7. Shield Grounding Terminal: Separately mounted; labeled "Shield Ground."

8. Capacitive Coupling between Primary and Secondary: 33 picofarads, maximum, over a

frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.11 OUTPUT DISTRIBUTION SECTION

A. Panelboards: Comply with Section 16442 "Panelboards" except provide assembly integral to

UPS cabinet.

2.12 MONITORING BY REMOTE STATUS AND ALARM PANEL

A. Description: Labeled LEDs on panel faceplate indicate five basic status conditions. Audible

signal indicates alarm conditions. Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without

altering visual indication.

1. Cabinet and Faceplate: Surface or flush mounted to suit mounting conditions indicated.

2.13 MONITORING BY REMOTE COMPUTER

A. Description: Communication module in unit control panel provides capability for remote

monitoring of status, parameters, and alarms specified in "Controls and Indications" Article.

The remote computer and the connecting signal wiring are not included in this Section. Include

the following features:

1. Connectors and network interface units or modems for data transmission via RS-232 link.

2. Software designed for control and monitoring of UPS functions and to provide on-screen

explanations, interpretations, diagnosis, action guidance, and instructions for use of

monitoring indications and development of meaningful reports. Permit storage and

analysis of power-line transient records. Designs for Windows applications, software, and

computer are not included in this Section.

3. Software and Hardware: Compatible with that specified in Section 16215 "Electrical

Power Monitoring and Control."

2.14 BASIC BATTERY MONITORING


products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:



1. Albercorp.

2. BTECH, Inc.


C. Battery Ground-Fault Detector: Initiates alarm when resistance to ground of positive or negative

bus of battery is less than 5000 ohms.

D. Battery compartment smoke/high-temperature detector initiates an alarm when smoke or a

temperature greater than 75 deg C occurs within the compartment.

E. Annunciation of Alarms: At UPS control panel.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.15 ADDITIONAL BATTERY MONITORING

A. Monitoring features and components shall include the following:

1. Factory-wired sensing leads to cell and battery terminals and cell temperature sensors.

2. Connections for data transmission via RS-232 link, network interface and modem and

external signal wiring to computer. External signal wiring and computer are not specified

in this Section.

3. PC-based software designed to store and analyze battery data. Software compiles reports

on individual-cell parameters and total battery performance trends, and provides data for

scheduling and prioritizing battery maintenance.

B. Performance: Automatically measures and electronically records the following parameters on a

routine schedule and during battery discharge events. During discharge events, records

measurements timed to nearest second; includes measurements of the following parameters:

1. Total battery voltage and ambient temperature.

2. Individual-cell voltage, impedance, and temperature. During battery-discharging events

such as utility outages, measures battery and cell voltages timed to nearest second.

3. Individual-cell electrolyte levels.

2.16 BATTERY-CYCLE WARRANTY MONITORING

A. Description: Electronic device, acceptable to battery manufacturer as a basis for warranty

action, for monitoring of charge-discharge cycle history of batteries covered by cycle-life

warranties.

B. Performance: Automatically measures and records each discharge event, classifies it according

to duration category, and totals discharges according to warranty criteria, displaying remaining

warranted battery life on front panel display.

C. Additional monitoring functions and features shall include the following:

1. Measuring and Recording: Total voltage at battery terminals; initiates alarm for

excursions outside the proper float-voltage level.

2. Monitors: Ambient temperature at battery; initiates alarm if temperature deviates from

normally acceptable range.

3. Keypad on Device Front Panel: Provides access to monitored data using front panel

display.

4. Alarm Contacts: Arranged to initiate abnormal battery voltage or temperature.

5. Memory: Stores recorded data in nonvolatile electronic memory.

6. RS-232 Port: Permits downloading of data to a portable PC.

7. Modem: Makes measurements and recorded data accessible to a remote PC via telephone

line. Computer is not specified in this Section.


A. Factory test complete UPS system before shipment. Use actual batteries that are part of final

installation. Include the following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Test and demonstration of all functions, controls, indicators, sensors, and protective

devices.

2. Full-load test.

3. Transient-load response test.

4. Overload test.

5. Power failure test.

B. Observation of Test: Give 14 days' advance notice of tests and provide opportunity for Owner's

representative to observe tests at Owner's choice.

C. Report test results. Include the following data:

1. Description of input source and output loads used. Describe actions required to simulate

source load variation and various operating conditions and malfunctions.

2. List of indications, parameter values, and system responses considered satisfactory for

each test action. Include tabulation of actual observations during test.

3. List of instruments and equipment used in factory tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

conditions affecting performance of the UPS.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install UPS on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete

base specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete.








B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written

instructions and NFPA 70.

C. Connections: Interconnect system components. Make connections to supply and load circuits

according to manufacturer's wiring diagrams unless otherwise indicated.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.3 GROUNDING

A. Separately Derived Systems: If not part of a listed power supply for a data-processing room,

comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding electrodes and for bonding to

metallic piping near isolation transformer.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and wiring according to Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify each battery cell individually.

3.5 BATTERY EQUALIZATION

A. Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record

individual-cell voltages.










1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Inspect interiors of enclosures, including the following:

a. Integrity of mechanical and electrical connections.

b. Component type and labeling verification.

c. Ratings of installed components.

3. Inspect batteries and chargers according to requirements in NETA Acceptance Testing

Specifications.

4. Test manual and automatic operational features and system protective and alarm

functions.

5. Test communication of status and alarms to remote monitoring equipment.

6. Load the system using a variable-load bank to simulate kilovolt amperes, kilowatts, and

power factor of loads for unit's rating. Use instruments calibrated within the previous six

months according to NIST standards.

a. Simulate malfunctions to verify protective device operation.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. Test duration of supply on emergency, low-battery voltage shutdown, and transfers

and restoration due to normal source failure.

c. Test harmonic content of input and output current less than 25, 50, and 100 percent

of rated loads.

d. Test output voltage under specified transient-load conditions.

e. Test efficiency at 50, 75, and 100 percent of rated loads.

f. Test remote status and alarm panel functions.

g. Test battery-monitoring system functions.

E. Seismic-restraint tests and inspections shall include the following:

1. Inspect type, size, quantity, arrangement, and proper installation of mounting or

anchorage devices.

2. Test mounting and anchorage devices according to requirements in Section 16074


F. The UPS system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Record of Tests and Inspections: Maintain and submit documentation of tests and inspections,

including references to manufacturers' written instructions and other test and inspection criteria.

Include results of tests, inspections, and retests.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. Engage the services of a qualified power quality specialist to perform tests and activities

indicated for each UPS system.

B. Monitoring and Testing Schedule: Perform monitoring and testing in four 10-day periods, each

in a different season of the year.

1. Schedule monitoring and testing activity with Owner, through Architect, with at least 14

days' advance notice.

2. Schedule monitoring and testing after Substantial Completion, when the UPS is

supplying power to its intended load.

C. Monitoring and Testing Instruments: Three-phase, recording, power monitors. Instruments shall

provide continuous simultaneous monitoring of electrical parameters at UPS input terminals and

at input terminals of loads served by the UPS. Instruments shall monitor, measure, and graph

voltage current and frequency simultaneously and provide full-graphic recordings of the values

of those parameters before and during power-line disturbances that cause the values to deviate

from normal beyond the adjustable threshold values. Instruments shall be capable of recording

either on paper or on magnetic media and have a minimum accuracy of plus or minus 2 percent

for electrical parameters. Parameters to be monitored include the following:

1. Current: Each phase and neutral and grounding conductors.

2. Voltage: Phase to phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to ground.

3. Frequency transients.

4. Voltage swells and sags.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Voltage Impulses: Phase to phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral to

ground.

6. High-frequency noise.

7. Radio-frequency interference.

8. THD of the above currents and voltages.

9. Harmonic content of currents and voltages above.

D. Monitoring and Testing Procedures for Each Test Period:

1. Exploratory Period: For the first two days[ of the first scheduled monitoring and testing

period], make recordings at various circuit locations and with various parameter-

threshold and sampling-interval settings. Make these measurements with the objective of

identifying optimum UPS, power system, load, and instrumentation setup conditions for

subsequent test and monitoring operations.

2. Remainder of Test Period: Perform continuous monitoring of at least two circuit locations

selected on the basis of data obtained during exploratory period.

a. Set thresholds and sampling intervals for recording data at values selected to

optimize data on performance of the UPS for values indicated, and to highlight the

need to adjust, repair, or modify the UPS, distribution system, or load component

that may influence its performance or that may require better power quality.

b. Perform load and UPS power source switching and operate the UPS on generator

power during portions of test period according to directions of Owner's power

quality specialist.

c. Operate the UPS and its loads in each mode of operation permitted by UPS

controls and by the power distribution system design.

d. Using loads and devices available as part of the facility's installed systems and

equipment, create and simulate unusual operating conditions, including outages,

voltage swells and sags, and voltage, current, and frequency transients. Maintain

normal operating loads in operation on system to maximum extent possible during

tests.

e. Using temporarily connected resistive/inductive load banks, create and simulate

unusual operating conditions, including outages, voltage swells and sags, and

voltage, current, and frequency transients. Maintain normal operating loads in

operation on system to maximum extent possible during tests.

f. Make adjustments and repairs to UPS, distribution, and load equipment to correct

deficiencies disclosed by monitoring and testing and repeat appropriate monitoring

and testing to verify success of corrective action.

E. Coordination with Specified UPS Monitoring Functions: Obtain printouts of built-in monitoring

functions specified for the UPS and its components in this Section that are simultaneously

recorded with portable instruments in this article.

1. Provide the temporary use of an appropriate PC and printer equipped with required

connections and software for recording and printing if such units are not available on-site.

2. Coordinate printouts with recordings for monitoring performed according to this article,

and resolve and report any anomalies in and discrepancies between the two sets of

records.

F. Monitoring and Testing Assistance by Contractor:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Open UPS and electrical distribution and load equipment and wiring enclosures to make

monitoring and testing points accessible for temporary monitoring probe and sensor

placement and removal as requested.

2. Observe monitoring and testing operations; ensure that UPS and distribution and load

equipment warranties are not compromised.

3. Perform switching and control of various UPS units, electrical distribution systems, and

load components as directed by power quality specialist. Specialist shall design this

portion of monitoring and testing operations to expose the UPS to various operating

environments, conditions, and events while response is observed, electrical parameters

are monitored, and system and equipment deficiencies are identified.

4. Make repairs and adjustments to the UPS and to electrical distribution system and load

components, and retest and repeat monitoring as needed to verify validity of results and

correction of deficiencies.

5. Engage the services of the UPS manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative

periodically during performance testing operations for repairs, adjustments, and

consultations.

G. Documentation: Record test point and sensor locations, instrument settings, and circuit and load

conditions for each monitoring summary and power disturbance recording. Coordinate

simultaneous recordings made on UPS input and load circuits.

H. Analysis of Recorded Data and Report: Review and analyze test observations and recorded data

and submit a detailed written report. Include the following in each report:

1. Description of corrective actions performed during monitoring and survey work and their

results.

2. Recommendations for further action to provide optimum performance by the UPS and

appropriate power quality for non-UPS loads. Include a statement of priority ranking and

a cost estimate for each recommendation that involves system or equipment revisions.

3. Copies of monitoring summary graphics and graphics illustrating harmonic content of

significant voltages and currents.

4. Copies of graphics of power disturbance recordings that illustrate findings, conclusions,

and recommendations.

5. Recommendations for operating, adjusting, or revising UPS controls.

6. Recommendation for alterations to the UPS installation.

7. Recommendations for adjusting or revising generator-set or automatic transfer switch

installations or their controls.

8. Recommendations for power distribution system revisions.

9. Recommendations for adjusting or revising electrical loads, their connections, or

controls.

I. Interim and Final Reports: Provide an interim report at the end of each test period and a final

comprehensive report at the end of final test and analysis period.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Power Circuits


SECTION 16289 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and

control equipment.


1. Section 16441 "Switchboards" for factory-installed SPDs.

2. Section 16442 "Panelboards" for factory-installed SPDs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-

voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values

for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model

numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.



B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials

or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Comply with UL 1449.

D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.

2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE AND TRANSFER SWITCH SUPPRESSOR


following:



1. ABB France.

2. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).


4. Emerson Electric Co.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. GE Zenith Controls.

6. LEA International; Protection Technology Group.

7. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

8. PowerLogics, Inc.

9. Schneider Electric Industries SAS.

10. Siemens Industry, Inc.

C. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1.

D. SPDs: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as

complying with UL 1449, Type 1

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:

a. Integral disconnect switch.

b. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal

suppressor components.

c. Indicator light display for protection status.

d. Form-C contacts rated at 2 A and 24-V acone normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on

failure of any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device.

Coordinate with building power monitoring and control system.

e. Surge counter.

E. Comply with UL 1283.

F. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase

shall not be less than 480 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the

ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase,

four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

3. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

H. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA.

I. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.3 PANEL SUPPRESSORS





1. ABB France.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT).


4. Emerson Electric Co.

5. GE Zenith Controls.

6. LEA International; Protection Technology Group.

7. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

8. PowerLogics, Inc.

9. Schneider Electric Industries SAS.

10. Siemens Industry, Inc.

C. SPDs: Comply with UL 1449, Type 1.

1. Include LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

2. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal suppressor

components.

3. Include Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally

closed, for remote monitoring of protection status. Contacts shall reverse on failure of

any surge diversion module or on opening of any current-limiting device. Coordinate

with building power monitoring and control system.

D. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase

shall not be less than 100 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the

ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

E. Comply with UL 1283.

F. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V , three-phase,

four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

4. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

G. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120-V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall not

exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 700 V.

2. Line to Ground: 700 V.

3. Neutral to Ground: 700 V.

4. Line to Line: 1200 V.

H. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA.

I. Inominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2.5 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 16120 "Conductors and

Cables."

B. Class 2 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 18

AWG, complying with Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cables: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 14

AWG, complying with Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight

as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not

splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed

manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.

E. Wiring:

1. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

2. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."



representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.

2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs

installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them

immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION


operate and maintain SPDs.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers


SECTION 16410 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Receptacle switches.

4. Shunt trip switches.

5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

6. Molded-case switches.

7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of





A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data

on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.



A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.








1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

Section 01782 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.




testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from

single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by




A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed

interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances

for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES





1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

C. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, with cartridge fuse interiors to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle

with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with

capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved







C. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept two padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

E. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

F. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch: 600-V ac, 30, 60, 100 A; UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses;

lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed

position.

G. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Nonfusible Switch: 600-V ac, 30, 60, 100 A; UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks;

interlocked with cover in closed position.

H. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent

inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than

specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully

inserted into the receptacle.

2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES





1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.

2. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

3. Littelfuse, Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA

interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

D. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse

block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed

position.

E. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and

secondary fuses, 120VAC with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt

trip, connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

F. Accessories:

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.

2. Oiltight red ON pilot light.

3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.

4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and

closed.

5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.

6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 24-V dc coil voltage.

7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,

to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R .

3. Wash-Down] Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7<Insert type>.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless


B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 16074 "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.









D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:



2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and

circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to

portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial

Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide

calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as


B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Transfer Switches


SECTION 16415 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.

2. Remote annunciation systems


1. Section 13921 "Electric-Drive, Centrifugal Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer switches

for fire pumps.

2. Section 13926 "Electric-Drive, Vertical-Turbine Fire Pumps" for automatic transfer

switches for fire pumps.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum

clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material

lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation

switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined

transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."







A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and

Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and

emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of

notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing

Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches remote annunciators and remote

annunciator and control panels through one source from a single manufacturer.



E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


G. Comply with NFPA 99.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities


after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify Construction Manage no fewer than two] days in advance of proposed

interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Construction Manager's

written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops

during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources

energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically

disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical

operator during manual operation.

E. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates

in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

F. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator

and control panel.

G. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1,

UL 489, and UL 869A.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and

characteristics:

1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation.

2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power

sources not exceeding 100 ms.

3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors

confirming both sources are present and acceptable.

a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator.

b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2

sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus

5 percent maximum voltage difference.

4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.

I. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two

sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference

between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15

electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is

initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of

nominal voltage.

J. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors

before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer.

Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch.

Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and

settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling motor-control circuit inrush and seal currents

are rated for actual currents to be encountered.

K. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position

arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional,

time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds

minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both

transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live.

L. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground

voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of

nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory

set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer

and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one

second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup

voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at

90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal.

Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and

factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained

undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure.

6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source

Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency

Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts

for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer

switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of

normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and

normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote

engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory

set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls

after retransfer of load to normal source.

13. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine

generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers

and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset

intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30

minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-

minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without

load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.

c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.

2.3 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: Include the following functions for indicated transfer switches:

1. Indication of sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of

transfer-switch controls.

2. Indication of switch position.

3. Indication of switch in test mode.

4. Indication of failure of digital communication link.

5. Key-switch or user-code access to control functions of panel.

6. Control of switch-test initiation.

7. Control of switch operation in either direction.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



8. Control of time-delay bypass for transfer to normal source.

B. Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or communication link shall not

affect functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure of communication link,

automatic transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained operation.

Automatic transfer-switch sensing, controlling, or operating function shall not depend on

remote panel for proper operation.

C. Remote Annunciation and Control Panel: Solid-state components. Include the following

features:

1. Controls and indicating lights grouped together for each transfer switch.

2. Label each indicating light control group. Indicate transfer switch it controls, location of

switch, and load it serves.

3. Digital Communication Capability: Matched to that of transfer switches supervised.

4. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure

proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for

compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with

NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according

to seismic-restraint details. See Section 16074 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more

than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless

otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases

according to Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Identify components according to Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

E. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and

communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase

raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."






representative:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for




3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-

resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and

procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified

minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features.

c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for

each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.

c. Verify time-delay settings.

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.

e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations.

f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other

poles.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer

time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-

down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power

delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

D. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for




3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-

resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and

procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified

minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features.

c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for

each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source.

c. Verify time-delay settings.

d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.

e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations.

f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other

poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer

time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-

down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power

delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

E. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured

insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested

component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

H. Prepare test and inspection reports.

I. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and

connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial


3.4 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer

to Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Enclosed Controllers


SECTION 16420 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage manual.

2. Full-voltage magnetic.

3. Reduced-voltage magnetic.

4. Reduced-voltage solid state.

5. Multispeed.

B. Related Section:

1. Section 16269 "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac,

adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable torque loads

in ranges up to 200 hp.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on

features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections,

details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details.

b. Factory-installed devices.

c. Nameplate legends.

d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.

e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in

combination controllers.




B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.








D. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and

arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

E. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have

been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload

protection suit actual motors to be protected.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and


1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings.

3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays.

4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-

voltage solid-state controllers.

1.8 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS



1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed.

5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.




testing.



C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand

seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent

condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive

substances, and physical damage.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather,

dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable

materials from inside controllers; install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per

controller.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities


after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Construction Manager's

written permission.


1.12 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including

conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and

required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with

concrete.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general

purpose, Class A.

B. Motor-Starting Switches: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button action; marked to

show whether unit is off or on.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved








a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.

d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

3. Configuration: Non-reversing or Reversing.

4. Surface mounting.

5. Red pilot light.

6. Additional Nameplates: FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing switches.

C. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button

action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.











3. Configuration: Non reversing.

4. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected motor;

external reset push button; bimetallic type.


6. Red pilot light.

D. Integral Horsepower Manual Controllers: "Quick-make, quick-break" toggle or push-button

action; marked to show whether unit is off, on, or tripped.









© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





3. Configuration: Nonreversing Reversing.

4. Overload Relays: Inverse-time-current characteristics; NEMA ICS 2, Class 10 tripping

characteristics; heaters and sensors in each phase, matched to nameplate full-load current

of actual protected motor and having appropriate adjustment for duty cycle; external reset

push button; bimetallic type.


6. Red pilot light.

7. Additional Nameplates: FORWARD and REVERSE for reversing controllers

8. N.O. & N.C. auxiliary contact.

E. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers


limited to, the following]








3. Configuration: Nonreversing Reversing.

4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type.

a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating,

manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

5. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to

allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

6. Control Circuits: 24 or 120 V ac, as required by the mechanical equipment supplied;

obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses power supply as noted

on the mechanical equipment, with control power source of sufficient capacity to

operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: as required by mechanical equipment VA.

7. Melting Alloy Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 20 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

8. Bimetallic Overload Relays:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Inverse-time-current characteristic.

b. Class 10 tripping characteristic.

c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.

d. Ambient compensated.

e. Automatic resetting.

9. Solid-State Overload Relay:

a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.

b. Sensors in each phase.

c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor against

voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.

d. Class II ground-fault protection, with start and run delays to prevent nuisance trip

on starting.

e. Analog communication module.

10. N.C. & N.O., isolated overload alarm contact.

11. External overload reset push button.

F. Combination Magnetic Controller: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic controller,

OCPD, and disconnecting means.





indicated on Drawingsor comparable product by one of the following:






3. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads

to accommodate Class R indicated fuses.

b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed

position.

4. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch.


position.

c. Auxiliary Contacts: N.O./N.C., arranged to activate before switch blades open.

6. MCP Disconnecting Means:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply

with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-

mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor

amperes.


position.

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.

d. N.C. & N.O. alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.

e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)

rating to 100 kA.

7. Fusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, fusible switch with clips or bolt pads

to accommodate Class R fuses.


position.


8. Nonfusible Disconnecting Means:

a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, horsepower-rated, nonfusible switch.


position.


9. MCP Disconnecting Means:

a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply

with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-

mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor

amperes.


position.

c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle.

d. [N.C.] [N.O.] alarm contact that operates only when MCP has tripped.

e. Current-limiting module to increase controller short-circuit current (withstand)

rating to 100 kA.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed

location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.

3. Wash-Down Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

Type 12.

6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: Type 7.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in

controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty, oiltight type.

a. Push Buttons: Covered types; maintained or momentary as indicated.

b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated.

c. Selector Switches: Rotary] type.

2. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours resettable.

3. Meters: Panel type, 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale and plus or

minus two percent accuracy. Where indicated, provide selector switches with an off

position.

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing

circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable

undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

E. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in Type 7

& Type 9 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity

and temperature swings.

F. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in Type 4X enclosures

installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature

swings.

G. Sun shields installed on fronts, sides, and tops of enclosures installed outdoors and subject to

direct and extended sun exposure.

H. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.

I. Spare control wiring terminal blocks, quantity as indicated unwired.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet,

moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height

unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-

steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying

with Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on 4-inch nominal-thickness concrete

base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete.”








C. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Section 16074 "Seismic Controls for

Electrical Systems."

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

E. Install fuses in each fusible-switch enclosed controller.

F. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in

Section 16491 "Fuses."

G. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load

amperes after motors have been installed.

H. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven

equipment.

I. Install power factor correction capacitors. Connect to the [line] [load] side of overload relays. If

connected to the load side of overload relays, adjust overload heater sizes to accommodate the

reduced motor full-load currents.

J. Comply with NECA 1.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for

identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.

3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in

Section 16123 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.

C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices

that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic

positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-

temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.










1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting

motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction

Managerbefore starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.

6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.



8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare

reports:


after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed

controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable

scanner.


each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial

Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide

calibration record for device.

9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed

controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,

remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay

pickup and trip ranges.

B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected to

the load side of the overload relays.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable

instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load ampere

ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown between starts. If

tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping.

Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium

Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor,

notify Construction Manager before increasing settings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to

Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Panelboards


SECTION 16442 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

3. Load centers.

4. Electronic-grade panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device,

transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions

and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings,

and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed

devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;

include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074

"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:







C. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation

and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and

accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.



E. Comply with NEMA PB 1.



A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary

HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions

at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.

2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed

interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's

written permission.


1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-


concrete.

1.12 WARRANTY


replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in

Section 16074 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

c. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive

Liquids: NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match

box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after

cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish

consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

c. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective

devices and other components.

7. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in metal frame with transparent

protective cover.

C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum.

2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

3. Isolated Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit isolated ground conductors; insulated

from box.

4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads.

5. Split Bus: Vertical buses divided into individual vertical sections.

E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.

3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.

4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.

5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at

same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity

neutral bus.

F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load

centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

G. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances

required for future installation of devices.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or

remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type

of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit

rating by an NRTL.

I. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 1.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS



following:







C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

E. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only as noted on the drawings.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Bolt-on circuit breakers.

G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device

requires mechanical release for removal.

H. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.

I. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller,

with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and

secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



following:


on Drawings > or comparable product by one of the following:





C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing

adjacent units.

F. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, mechanically held, general-purpose controller,

with same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.

1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and

secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.

2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.

G. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

H. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box

equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.

2.5 ELECTRONIC-GRADE PANELBOARDS



following:



1. Current Technology; a subsidiary of Danahar Corporation.



4. Liebert Corporation.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; with factory-installed, integral TVSS; labeled by an NRTL for

compliance with UL 67 after installing TVSS.

D. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

E. Main Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on thermal-magnetic circuit breakers.

G. Buses:

1. Copper phase and neutral buses; 200 percent capacity neutral bus and lugs.

2. Copper equipment and isolated ground buses.

2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:







C. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to

meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable

magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-

replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings

less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault

protection (30-mA trip).

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-

V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity

discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent

of rated voltage.

f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without

intentional time delay.

g. Auxiliary Contacts: [One SPDT switch] [Two SPDT switches] with "a" and "b"

contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in

reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

h. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit

breaker trips.

i. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key

shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

j. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking

ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.

k. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a

single unit.

l. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in

on or off position.

m. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on

position.

D. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 16491

"Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.

3. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with

switch handle operation.

2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and

switchboard class relays.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have

been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply

with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For panelboards, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and

anchor into structural concrete floor.



4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.

5. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 16074 "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed

panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space

designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor

space or below slab not on grade.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing

load balancing.

K. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads]

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer

or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a

nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical

Identification."










1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.







3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front

panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.


each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record

for device.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as


B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.

2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings

before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is

not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Low-Voltage Transformers


SECTION 16461 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with

capacities up to 1000 kVA:

1. Distribution transformers.

2. Buck-boost transformers.


A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum

clearances, installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of

transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required


connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transformers,

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 16074 "Seismic

Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:



a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Source quality-control test reports.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing

Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single

manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."


A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is

not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control

of temperature and humidity.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Cast anchor-


concrete.

B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer

provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Acme Electric Corporation.

2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.

3. Controlled Power Company.

4. Eaton Electrical Sector; Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products.

5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company.

6. General Electric Company.

7. Hammond Co.

8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.

9. Micron Industries Corp.

10. Myers Power Products, Inc.


12. Sola/Hevi-Duty.

13. Square D Co./Groupe Schneider NA; Schneider Electric.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.

B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.

C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

2. Coil Material: Copper.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Provide transformers that are constructed to withstand seismic forces specified in Section 16074


C. Cores: One leg per phase.

D. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated, NEMA 250, Type 3R.

1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.

F. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray.

G. Taps for Transformers Smaller Than 3 kVA: None.

H. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: Two 5 percent taps below rated voltage.

I. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent

taps below normal full capacity.

J. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of

115 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.

K. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:

1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.

2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.

L. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated shall comply with UL 1561

requirements for nonsinusoidal load current-handling capability to the degree defined by

designated K-factor.

1. Unit shall not overheat when carrying full-load current with harmonic distortion

corresponding to designated K-factor.

2. Indicate value of K-factor on transformer nameplate.

M. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper

electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and

output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.

3. Shield Effectiveness:

a. Capacitance between Primary and Secondary Windings: Not to exceed 33

picofarads over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHz.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



b. Common-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 120 dBA at 0.5 to 1.5 kHz;

minimum of minus 65 dBA at 1.5 to 100 kHz.

c. Normal-Mode Noise Attenuation: Minimum of minus 52 dBA at 1.5 to 10 kHz.

N. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.

O. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.

P. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Minimum of 3 dBA less than NEMA ST 20 standard sound

levels when factory tested according to IEEE C57.12.91.

Q. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to

IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:

1. 9 kVA and Less: 45 dBA

2. 30 to 50 kVA: 65 dBA

3. 51 to 150 kVA: 70 dBA

4. 151 to 300 kVA: 75 dBA

5. 301 to 500 kVA: 75 dBA

6. 501 to 750 kVA: 75 dBA

7. 751 to 1000 kVA: 75 dBA

2.4 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS

A. Description: Self-cooled, two-winding dry type, rated for continuous duty and with wiring

terminals suitable for connection as autotransformer. Transformers shall comply with

NEMA ST 1 and shall be listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561.

B. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.

1. Finish Color: ANSI 49 gray.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,

mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in

Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for

each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where

transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and

Bonding" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of

transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by

transformer manufacturer.

1. Brace wall-mounting transformers as specified in Section 16074 "Seismic Controls for

Electrical Systems."

B. Construct concrete bases and anchor floor-mounting transformers according to manufacturer's

written instructions, and requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare

test reports.


and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report

results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved









E. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.

F. Infrared Scanning: Two months after Substantial Completion, perform an infrared scan of

transformer connections.

1. Use an infrared-scanning device designed to measure temperature or detect significant

deviations from normal values. Provide documentation of device calibration.

2. Perform 2 follow-up infrared scans of transformers, one at 4 months and the other at 11

months after Substantial Completion.

3. Prepare a certified report identifying transformer checked and describing results of

scanning. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and scanning

observations after remedial action.

G. Test Labeling: On completion of satisfactory testing of each unit, attach a dated and signed

"Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy

period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.

Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower

than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap

settings as test results.

B. Connect buck-boost transformers to provide nameplate voltage of equipment being served, plus

or minus 5 percent, at secondary terminals.

C. Output Settings Report: Prepare a written report recording output voltages and tap settings.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Fuses


SECTION 16491 - FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches, and enclosed

controllers].

2. Spare-fuse cabinets.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material,

dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include

the following for each fuse type indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to

accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings.

a. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating,

local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating.

b. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment

calculations are based.

2. Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, and ratings.

3. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

4. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.

5. Coordination charts and tables and related data.

6. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01782 "Operation and


1. Ambient temperature adjustment information.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.

3. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) and current-limitation curves

(instantaneous peak let-through current) for each type and rating of fuse.

4. Coordination charts and tables and related data.




1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

two of each size and type.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source

from single manufacturer.



C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.


A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more

than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size

and with system short-circuit current levels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.

2. Edison Fuse, Inc.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.

4. Littelfuse, Inc.

2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES

A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with

circuit voltages.

2.3 PLUG FUSES

A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.

2.4 PLUG-FUSE ADAPTERS

A. Characteristics: Adapters for using Type S, rejection-base plug fuses in Edison-base fuseholders

or sockets; ampere ratings matching fuse ratings; irremovable once installed.

2.5 SPARE-FUSE CABINET

A. Characteristics: Wall-mounted steel unit with full-length, recessed piano-hinged door and key-

coded cam lock and pull.

1. Size: Adequate for storage of spare fuses specified with 15] percent spare capacity

minimum.

2. Finish: Gray, baked enamel.

3. Identification: "SPARE FUSES" in 1-1/2-inch-high letters on exterior of door.

4. Fuse Pullers: For each size of fuse, where applicable and available, from fuse

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically

damaged.

B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features.

C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes

and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.

D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to

fuse ratings.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS

A. Cartridge Fuses:

1. Service Entrance: Class L, time.

2. Feeders: Class L, time delay.

3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay.

5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without

removing fuse.

B. Install plug-fuse adapters in Edison-base fuseholders and sockets. Ensure that adapters are

irremovable once installed.

C. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075

"Electrical Identification" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each

fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Interior Lighting


SECTION 16511 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.

2. Emergency lighting units.

3. Exit signs.

4. Lighting fixture supports.

5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.


1. Section 13847 "Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 13848 "Relay-Based

Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-voltage control

wiring or data communication circuits.

2. Section 16140 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

3. Section 16145 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including

time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and

contactors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include

data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.

2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.

3. Ballast, including BF.

4. Energy-efficiency data.

5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Furnish data

required in "Action Submittals" Article in Section 15855 "Diffusers, Registers, and

Grilles."

6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level

and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in

Section 15855 "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.

8. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture

type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to

those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining

fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a

manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National

Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting

Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.



connection.


C. Samples: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each

Sample shall include the following:

1. Lamps and ballasts, installed.

2. Cords and plugs.

3. Pendant support system.

D. Installation instructions.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the

items involved:

1. Lighting fixtures.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the

plane of the luminaires.

4. Ceiling-mounted projectors.

5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.

6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets.

b. Speakers.

c. Sprinklers.

d. Smoke and fire detectors.

e. Occupancy sensors.

f. Access panels.

7. Perimeter moldings.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from

manufacturer.


E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,


1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.




1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish

at least one of each type.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency

lighting unit.

4. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

5. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program

for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing

& Calculation Guides.



D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for

indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

F. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power

and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.

2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at

time of Substantial Completion.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other

construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-

suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace

components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified

warranty period.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for

the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign

Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for

first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

3. Warranty Period for LED Lighting Sources and driver units: Five years from date of

Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for

the remaining five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or

equal.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENT

2.3 PRODUCTS

A. Operating Nominal Voltage: 277 V ac.

B. Luminaire Types:

1. Cylinder.

2. Downlight.

3. Highbay, linear.

4. Linear, industrial.

5. Lowbay.

6. Parking garage.

7. Recessed linear.

8. Strip light.

9. Surface mount, linear.

10. Surface mount, nonlinear.

11. Suspended, linear.

12. Suspended, nonlinear.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Lighting Diffusers: as noted on drawings.

B. Housings:

1. As noted on drawings.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Factory-applied labels: Labels shall include the following lamp characteristics:


D. Fixture Support Components:


E. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

F. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to

NEMA LE 5A.

G. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to

NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

H. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

I. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

J. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent

warping and sagging.

K. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position.

L. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to

yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.

b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

M. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.

Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from

normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact

fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for

HID luminaires.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact


e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.

f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

N. Electromagnetic-Interference Filters: Factory installed to suppress conducted electromagnetic

interference as required by MIL-STD-461E. Fabricate lighting fixtures with one filter on each

ballast indicated to require a filter.

O. Air-Handling Fluorescent Fixtures: For use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat

extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser-boot assembly specified in Section 15855 "Diffusers,

Registers, and Grilles."

1. Air-Supply Units: Slots in one or both side trims join with air-diffuser-boot assemblies.

2. Heat-Removal Units: Air path leads through lamp cavity.

3. Combination Heat-Removal and Air-Supply Unit: Heat is removed through lamp cavity

at both ends of the fixture door with air supply same as for air-supply units.

4. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume.

5. Static Fixture: Air-supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active

units.

2.5 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.

2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.

3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated.

4. Sound Rating: Class A.

5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.

6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.

7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.

8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.

9. BF: 0.88 or higher.

10. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.

11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall

be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5, T8, T5HO, T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with

ANSI C82.11 and the following:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.

D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P,

and having automatic-reset thermal protection.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.

E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and

bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in

the field.

F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F

starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with

indicated lamp types.

G. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-

factor electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of

approximately 30 percent.

H. Ballasts for Low Electromagnetic-Interference Environments: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1,

Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for consumer

equipment.

I. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system

and lamp type indicated.

4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

J. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output

of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.

a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.

b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.

3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and

lamp type indicated.

K. Ballasts for Tri-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output

of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.


b. Low-Level Operation: 30 and 50 percent of rated lamp lumens.

2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific tri-level control system

and lamp type indicated.

2.6 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with

ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for

full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.

2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.




6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.


8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.

9. Power Factor: 0.98, except fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-

factor electronic ballasts or higher.

10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

2.7 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting

fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of

1100 lumens each. Connect switched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit

to fixture ballast.

2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously.

3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power

and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay.

6. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates

coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit

triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of

either proper or failed emergency response.

7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated

by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more

fluorescent lamps, remote mounted from lighting fixture. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Connect unswitched

circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp in a remote fixture continuously.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type.

5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.








2.8 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.

Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts.

3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.

4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.

5. Low-Noise Ballasts: Manufacturers' standard epoxy-encapsulated models designed to

minimize audible fixture noise.

B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise

indicated:

1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single-lamp ballasts.

2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F.

3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.





8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.

9. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on

electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.

10. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.

11. Bi-Level Dimming Ballast: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the

light output of the associated fixture between high- and low-level and off.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




b. Low-Level Operation: 35 percent of rated lamp lumens.

c. Compatibility: Certified by ballast manufacturer for use with specific bi-level

control system and lamp type indicated. Certified by lamp manufacturer that

ballast operating modes are free from negative effect on lamp life and color-

rendering capability.

12. Continuous Dimming Ballast: Dimming range shall be from 100 to 35 percent of rated

lamp lumens without flicker.

a. Ballast Input Watts: Reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal at lowest

dimming setting.

C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter.

Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-

case temperature of 90 deg C.

1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory

installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to

150 W.

2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.

2.9 QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER

A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer.

Comply with UL 1598.

B. Standby (Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the

fixture is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages.

C. Connections: Designed for a single branch -circuit connection.

D. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp strikes.

E. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately

60 percent light output.

2.10 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility,

luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Fluorescent, two for each fixture, 20,000 hours of rated lamp

life.

2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.

3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.

b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,

relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and

floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal

power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle

charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit

initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared

receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply,

providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is

annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

4. Master/Remote Sign Configurations:

a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and

provide additional capacity in LED power supply battery for power connection to

remote unit.

b. Remote Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, except

omit power supply, battery, and test features. Arrange to receive full power

requirements from master unit. Connect for testing concurrently with master unit

as a unified system.

2.11 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units complying with

UL 924.

1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.

2. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.

3. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to

80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery

when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay

disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on

charger.

4. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and

demonstrates unit operability.

5. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;

bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

6. Wire Guard: Heavy-chrome-plated wire guard protects lamp heads or fixtures.

7. Integral Time-Delay Relay: Holds unit on for fixed interval of 15 minutes when power is

restored after an outage.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved








2.12 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens

(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours


B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens

(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000

hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens

(minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3000 K, and average rated life of 20,000

hours unless otherwise indicated.

D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches,

5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 4100 K, and average

rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average

rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming

ballasts unless otherwise indicated.

1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).



4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).




2.13 HID LAMPS

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), color temperature 1900 K,

and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.

1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamps: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and,

when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure,

lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.

B. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

C. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.

E. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41, CRI 0, and color temperature 1800 K.

2.14 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and

angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish

same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single

fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, [12 gage] <Insert size>.

E. Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless

steel, 12 gage.

F. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

G. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with

threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

2.15 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed

lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.

B. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps,

and sockets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires

for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary.

When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble,

clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that

recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance

between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.

1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension

devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each

fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or

center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch

metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting

fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor

of 3.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.

2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.

3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for

suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to

building structure.

F. Air-Handling Lighting Fixtures: Install with dampers closed and ready for adjustment.

G. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 "Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply

with requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements

in NFPA 101.

C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by

Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least

100 hours at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.

Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

Some of this work may be required after dark.

1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Exterior Lighting


SECTION 16521 - EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.

2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.

3. Poles and accessories.

4. Luminaire lowering devices.


1. Section 16511 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior

surfaces of buildings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color-rendering index.

C. HID: High-intensity discharge.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.

G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.

1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION

A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and

supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

B. Live Load: Single load of 500 lbf, distributed as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Ice Load: Load of 3 lbf/sq. ft., applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M Ice Load Map.

D. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated

and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 49.2 feet in height is 150

mphvalue from AASHTO LTS-4-M for this Project .

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.

b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years.

c. Velocity Conversion Factors: [1.0] <Insert value from Table 3-2>.

2. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles 50 feet high or less is 140 mph

AASHTO LTS-4-M for this Project.

a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.

b. Minimum Design Life: 25 years.

c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.


A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting

unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected

area, and verification of indicated parameters.

2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.

3. Details of installation and construction.

4. Luminaire materials.

5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with

indicated lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data shall be

certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining

luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

6. Photoelectric relays.

7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.

8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data.

9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.

10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for

components involved.

11. Anchor bolts for poles.

12. Manufactured pole foundations.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





connection.

2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.

3. Design calculations, certified by a qualified professional engineer, indicating strength of

screw foundations and soil conditions on which they are based.


C. Samples: For products designated for sample submission in the Exterior Lighting Device

Schedule. Each Sample shall include lamps and ballasts.


A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that

products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load

imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be

based on design calculations by a professional engineer.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.


D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.




1. Lamps: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

2. Glass and Plastic Lenses, Covers, and Other Optical Parts: One for every 100 of each

type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.

3. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each

type.

4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'

laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program

for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent

agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.



D. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."



A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.

B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.

Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.

C. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole

surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below

ground line.

D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before

pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.

E. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For

poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.

1.11 WARRANTY


replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,

perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty

period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or

unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.

1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in

finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but

not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or

equal.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES

2.3 PRODUCTS

LED Fixtures

A. CRI of minimum 80. CCT of 3000 K.

B. L70 lamp life of 50,000 hours.

C. Operating Voltage: 277 V ac.

D. In-line Fusing: Separate in-line fuse for each luminaire.

E. Luminaire Certification: ENERGY STAR

F. LED Luminaire Types:

1. Area and site.

2. Bollard.

3. Border.

4. Canopy.

5. Decorative post top.

6. Roadway

G. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet

locations by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to

NEMA LE 5A.

2. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5

and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

3. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.

H. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light

distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.

I. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

J. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and

support to prevent warping and sagging.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



K. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform

in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.

L. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under

operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to

prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during

relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or

replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.

M. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.

N. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and

UV radiation.

O. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light

distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.

P. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.

2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.

3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.

Q. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and

cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.

R. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested

luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support

materials.

S. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual

for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating

finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to

remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind

welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,

from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast

Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of

primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.

b. Color: Match Architect's sample of manufacturer's standard color.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

T. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes

Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and

designating finishes.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff

complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear

coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally

colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with

AAMA 611.

a. Color:Dark bronze.

U. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.

Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from

normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type.

b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple),

base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent

luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for

HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact


e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.

f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2. .

2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS

A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:

1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic or electromagnetic type rated for 0 deg F

starting and operating temperature with indicated lamp types.

2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with

indicated lamp types.

B. Ballast Characteristics:

1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.

2. Sound Rating: Class A (Class A except Class B for T12/HO ballasts).

3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than [10] [20] percent.

4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,

Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection.

5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2,

Category A or better.

C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast

provided at temperatures 0 deg F and higher.

2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS

A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction

of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.


3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.

4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current

ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.

B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz

lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System

automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light

output.

C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable

of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an

average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.

1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory

installed within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to

150 W.

a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac.

b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac rms.


2.6 HID LAMPS

A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature

1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.

1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and,

when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure,

lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.

B. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.43.

C. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000

K.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



D. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.

E. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and CCT color temperature

4000 K.

2.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.

1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,

permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural

Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.

2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of

luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be

used in pole selection strength analysis.

B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting

requirements. Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support

components.

1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.

2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.

D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured

by stainless-steel captive screws. Provide on all poles.

E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place

Concrete."

F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural

steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to

ASTM A 123/A 123M; and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and

strength required to support pole, luminaire, and accessories.

G. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M.

2.8 STEEL POLES

A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig;

one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, tapered; Round, straight; Square, tapered; and Square, straight.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

B. Steel Mast Arms: Davit type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and finish

same as pole.

C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.

1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted

adapter, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts.

2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.

3. Match pole material and finish.

D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and

securely fastened to pole top.

E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on

opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.

F. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at

midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable

support grip.

G. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in

Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding

conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

H. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable

and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.

I. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that

of pole.

J. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

K. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

L. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and

Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to

remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind

welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,

from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast

Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal

corrosion protection.

3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of

primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations or as selected by Architect

from manufacturer's full range.

2.9 ALUMINUM POLES

A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-

T6 with access handhole in pole wall.

B. Poles: ASTM B 209, 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhole in pole wall.

1. Shape: Round, tapered; Round, straight; Square, tapered; and Square, straight.

2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway

support.

C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and

securely fastened to pole top.

D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in

Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding," listed for attaching grounding and bonding

conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.

E. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter

fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.

1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.

2. Finish: Same as pole.

F. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

G. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and

Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the

Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff

complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.

3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear

coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;

Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally

colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with

AAMA 611.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.10 POLE ACCESSORIES

A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Section 16140

"Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type.

1. Recessed, 12 inches above finished grade.

2. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass, weatherproof in use, cover,

that when mounted results in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.

3. With cord opening.

4. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements.

B. Minimum 1800-W transformer, protected by replaceable fuses, mounted behind access cover.

C. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and

nuts. Finish same as pole.

D. Transformer Type Base: Same material and color as pole. Coordinate dimensions to suit pole's

base flange and accept indicated accessories.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.

1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the

application and approved by manufacturer.

C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming

D. Retain "Alignment" Paragraph below if luminaire alignment for desired light distribution

depends on alignment of pole.

E. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires

and their mounting provisions on the pole.

F. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and

underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:

1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.

2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.

3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.

G. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by

pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in

Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level

recommended by pole manufacturer.

1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and

approved by manufacturer.

2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete

grout firmly packed to fill space.

3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated.

4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch-diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange

to drain condensation from interior of pole.

I. Embedded Poles with Tamped Earth Backfill: Set poles to depth below finished grade indicated

on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.

1. Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers in the full depth of hole.

2. Backfill in 6-inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is

equal to or greater than that of undisturbed earth.

J. Embedded Poles with Concrete Backfill: Set poles in augered holes to depth below finished

grade indicated on Drawings, but not less than one-sixth of pole height.

1. Make holes 6 inches in diameter larger than pole diameter.

2. Fill augered hole around pole with air-entrained concrete having a minimum compressive

strength of 3000 psi at 28 days, and finish in a dome above finished grade.

3. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch-diameter pipe to make a drain hole through concrete dome.

Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.

4. Cure concrete a minimum of 72 hours before performing work on pole.

K. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch-

wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab.

Fill unpaved ring with [pea gravel] <Insert material> to a level 1 inch below top of concrete

slab.

L. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).

3.2 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION

A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.

B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location.

Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and

rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03300

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES

A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.

Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,

installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.4 CORROSION PREVENTION

A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a

dissimilar metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.

B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes." In concrete foundations,

wrap conduit with 0.010-inch-thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent

overlap.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 16060 "Grounding and

Bonding."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding

system.

B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 16060 "Grounding and

Bonding."

1. Install grounding electrode for each pole.

2. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.

3. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.


A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires

and energizing circuits with normal power source.

1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.

C. Illumination Tests:

1. Measure light intensities at night. Use photometers with calibration referenced to NIST

standards. Comply with the following IESNA testing guide(s):

a. IESNA LM-5, "Photometric Measurements of Area and Sports Lighting

Installations."

b. IESNA LM-50, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Lighting Installations."

c. IESNA LM-52, "Photometric Measurements of Roadway Sign Installations."

d. IESNA LM-64, "Photometric Measurements of Parking Areas."

e. IESNA LM-72, "Directional Positioning of Photometric Data."

D. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and

interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate

compliance with standards.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Pathways for Communications Systems


SECTION 16711 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits and fittings.

2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.

3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings.

4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters.

6. Surface pathways.

7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Section 02584 "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for exterior ductbanks,

manholes, and underground utility construction.

2. Section 16130 "Raceways and Boxes" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways, boxes,

enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.

3. Section 16712 "Pathways for Electronic Safety and Security" for conduits, surface

pathways, innerduct, boxes, and faceplate adapters serving electronic safety and security.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.


A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. LEED Submittals:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of

Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental

Chambers."

C. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, equipment racks

and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.





3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and

their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which

certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following]

[provide products by one of the following or equal:



3. Alpha Wire Company.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. O-Z/Gedney.

7. Picoma Industries.

8. Republic Conduit.


10. Southwire Company.


12. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

13. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. General Requirements for Metal Conduits and Fittings:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and application.

2. Comply with TIA-569-B.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel, for outdoor application or die cast for indoor applications.

b. Type: Setscrew for indoor or compression for outdoor applications.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL-467, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

H. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS


equal:





© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. CANTEX Inc.

6. CertainTeed Corporation.

7. Condux International, Inc.


9. Kraloy.



12. RACO; Hubbell.


B. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Conduits and Fittings:




C. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

D. Fittings for RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following]

[provide products by one of the following or equal:



3. Endot Industries Inc.

4. IPEX.


B. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for riser installation





2.4 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




2. Hoffman.


4. Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4, or

Type 12 unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a



C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

F. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down

straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete

system.

2.5 SURFACE PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:




B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.

Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.


following or equal:


b. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.

c. Panduit Corp.

d. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Tele-Power Poles:


following or equal:


b. Panduit Corp.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish.

3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,

mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as

required for complete system.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


equal:

1. Adalet.

2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.

3. EGS/Appleton Electric.

4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

5. Hoffman.


7. Milbank Manufacturing Co.

8. Molex; Woodhead Brand.


10. O-Z/Gedney.

11. Quazite:Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

12. RACO; Hubbell.


14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.


17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:


2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet

locations.

C. Sheet-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, [ferrous alloy] [aluminum],

Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

F. Metal Floor Boxes:

1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.

2. Type: Fully adjustable.

3. Shape: Rectangular.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in


application.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep or 4-11/16 inches by 2-1/8

inches by 2-1/8 inches deep >.

J. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4, or

Type 12 as applicable for the application with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless


1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1, Type 3R, Type 4, or Type 12 as applicable for the application,

galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside

and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING

A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:

1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as

defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.

2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a



B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and

aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a

combination of the two.


following] [provide products by one of the following or equal:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





a. Armorcast Products Company.

b. Carson Industries LLC.

c. NewBasis.

d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc; Christy Concrete Products.

e. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc; Hubbell Power Systems.

f. Synertech Moulded Products.

3. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.

4. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with [open] [closed] [integral closed] bottom


5. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural

load rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location.

6. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

7. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS.".

8. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts

for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.

9. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks

and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES

A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for compliance

with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products supplied.

1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.

2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing

agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by

manufacturer.

3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying

with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: EMT.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Schedule 40, direct buried and/or concrete encased as

indicated on the drawings.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4.

B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Pathway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms.

d. Vehicle Inspection Areas.

e. Platforms in Exterior Areas.

f. Roof Mounted Equipment.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC

6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: EMT.

7. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-

type, communications-cable pathway EMT.

8. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or

Communications Cable: Plenum-type, communications-cable pathway EMT.

9. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless steel

in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1 inch.

D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use setscrew for indoor applications or compression for outdoor installations. Use

steel for outdoor applications or cast-metal for indoor fittings. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.10.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F .

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where

requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum

pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific

occupancies and number of floors.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 16073 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for

hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within

12 inches of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab

support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.

2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of [1 inch] [2 inches] <Insert dimension> of

concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound


L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes

or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.

N. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll

cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lbtensile strength. Leave at least 12 inchesof slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside pathways in use.

R. Surface Pathways:

1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated

on Drawings.

2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight pathway section.

Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue

are not acceptable support methods.

S. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and

nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:

1. 3/4-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet.

2. 1-Inch Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet.

3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway

unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes

or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these

requirements.

T. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

U. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

pathways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.

W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install

in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental

temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds

100 feet.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install

fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

bottom of box unless otherwise indicated.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

BB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

CC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

DD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench

bottom as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal

diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork."

3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to

provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12

inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete

backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Section 02300 "Earthwork."

4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building

entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts

throughout length of elbow.

5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and

at building entrances through floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the

coupling.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits

penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60

inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding

bushings on terminations at equipment.

6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried

conduits, but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of

conduit.

7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical

Identification."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with

connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from

1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of

other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes with bottom below frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below grade at Project

site> below grade.

E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators,

as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated. Select arm

lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short enough to preserve

adequate working clearances in enclosure.

F. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut

wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings

to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PENETRATIONS


with requirements in Section 16092 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways

and Cabling."

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Communications Horizontal Cabling


SECTION 16717 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. UTP cabling.

2. 62.5/125-micrometer, optical fiber cabling.

3. Coaxial cable.

4. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies.

5. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects.

6. Telecommunications outlet/connectors.

7. Cabling system identification products.

8. Cable management system.


1. Section 16716 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling

associated with system panels and devices.

2. Section 16718 "Conductors and Cables for Electronic Safety and Security" for voice and

data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from

building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.

C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection

or cross-connection.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several

telecommunications outlet/connectors.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



H. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet

cable terminates.

I. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

J. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.


A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's

telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at

each work area.



1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD.

b. Minimum bending radius.

c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and

format selected by Owner.

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the

cabling and asset identification system of the software.

3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts.

4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

a. Cross-connects.

b. Patch panels.

c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and

physical relationship between the installed components.

C. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size

and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical features.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field

inspector.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



B. Source quality-control reports.



A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.









1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type.

2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type.

3. Device Plates: 10 of each type.

4. Multiuser Telecommunications Outlet Assemblies: 10 of each type.


A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and Cabling Administration

Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by

an RCDD.

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered

Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at

Project site.

3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to

supervise on-site testing.


A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Test optical fiber cables to determine the continuity of the strand end to end. Use optical

fiber flashlight or optical loss test set.

2. Test optical fiber cables while on reels. Use an optical time domain reflectometer to

verify the cable length and locate cable defects, splices, and connector; including the loss

value of each. Retain test data and include the record in maintenance data.

3. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between

the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the

communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a

"permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors

be installed for each work area.

2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point

between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector.

3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.

4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft., and includes the components that extend from the

telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length

does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the

horizontal cross-connect.


A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.



D. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements

in Section 06100 "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels.

2.4 UTP CABLE


equal:



1. ADC.

2. Belden Inc.

3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company.

4. CommScope, Inc.

5. Draka Cableteq USA.

6. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc.

7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc.

8. Superior Essex Inc.

9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.

10. 3M Communication Markets Division.

11. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.

C. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blue

thermoplastic jacket.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG; or MPP, CMP, MPR,

CMR, MP, or MPG.

b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR; or MPP, CMP, or MPR, complying

with UL 1666.

d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX; or MPP, CMP, MPR, CMR, MP,

MPG, CM, or CMG.

e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG; or MPP or MPR.

f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR or MPP, complying with UL 1666.

2.5 UTP CABLE HARDWARE


equal:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





1. ADC.

2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc.

3. Belden Inc.

4. Dynacom Inc.

5. Hubbell Premise Wiring.

6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division.

7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc.

8. Panduit Corp.

9. Siemon Co. (The).


C. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC

type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with

connecting hardware of same category or higher.

D. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables

terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs

and jacks where indicated.

E. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and

permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

F. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at

each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables,

plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

G. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with

integral IDC-type terminals.

H. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch] lengths; terminated with eight-position

modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure

Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging.

2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

2.6 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE


equal:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Belden Inc.


3. CommScope, Inc.

4. Corning Cable Systems.

5. CSI Technologies Inc.

6. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc.

8. Superior Essex Inc.

9. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand.

10. 3M Communication Markets Division.


C. Description: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical

fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.

2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA-492AAAB for detailed specifications.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN or OFNG, or OFNR, OFNP.

b. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

c. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR or OFNP, complying with UL 1666.

d. General Purpose, Conductive: Type OFC or OFCG; or OFNG, OFN, OFCR,

OFNR, OFCP, or OFNP.

e. Plenum Rated, Conductive: Type OFCP or OFNP, complying with NFPA 262.

f. Riser Rated, Conductive: Type OFCR; or OFNR, OFCP, or OFNP, complying

with UL 1666.

5. Conductive cable shall be aluminum armored type.

6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

D. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer cable.

2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to

exceed 40 inches.

2.7 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE


equal:



1. ADC.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




3. Belden Inc.


5. Corning Cable Systems.

6. CSI Technologies Inc.

7. Dynacom Inc.




C. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable

connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,

plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

D. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.

E. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications

of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC connectors. Insertion loss not more than

0.75 dB.

3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.8 COAXIAL CABLE


equal:




2. Belden Inc.

3. Coleman Cable, Inc.

4. CommScope, Inc.

5. Draka Cableteq USA.

C. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for

broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm

nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

D. RG-11/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 14 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor.

2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

3. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 60 percent aluminum

braid.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



4. Jacketed with sunlight-resistant, black PVC or PE.

5. Suitable for outdoor installations in ambient temperatures ranging from minus 40 to plus

85 deg C.

E. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATVR.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, silver-plated, copper-covered steel conductor.

2. Gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

3. Triple shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 95 percent aluminum

braid; covered by aluminum foil with grounding strip.

4. Color-coded PVC jacket.

F. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid.

3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE.

4. Suitable for indoor installations.

G. RG59/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum polyester tape and 40 percent aluminum

braid.

3. PVC jacket.

H. RG59/U (Plenum Rated): NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. No. 20 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; foam fluorinated ethylene propylene

insulation.

2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 65 percent aluminum braid.

3. Copolymer jacket.

I. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment"

and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV, or CATVP or CATVR.

2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262.

3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR; or CATVP, CATVR, or CATV, complying with

UL 1666.

4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.

2.9 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE


equal:



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions.

2. Leviton Commercial Networks Division.


C. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.10 CONSOLIDATION POINTS


equal:




2. Belden Inc.


4. Dynacom Inc.



7. Ortronics, Inc.; a subsidiary of Legrand Group.

8. Panduit Corp.


C. Description: Consolidation points shall comply with requirements for cable connecting

hardware.


2. Number of Connectors per Field:

a. On for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

b. One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus 25 percent spare

positions.

3. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling Wall Desk or Furniture as applicable.

4. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863.

5. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with

UL 2043.

2.11 MULTIUSER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)


equal:



1. Belden Inc.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





5. Ortronics, Inc.; a subsidiary of Legrand Group.

6. Panduit Corp.


C. Description: MUTOAs shall meet the requirements for cable connecting hardware.


2. Number of Connectors per Field:

a. One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

b. One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus 25 percent spare

positions.

3. Mounting: Recessed in ceiling Wall Desk or Furniture as applicable.

4. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863.

5. Label shall include maximum length of work area cords, based on TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

6. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with

UL 2043.

2.12 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply

with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single or multigang faceplate.

1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 16140 "Wiring

Devices."

2. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel complying with requirements in Section 16140 "Wiring

Devices."

3. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and

coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

4. Legend: Factory labeled by silk-screening or engraving for stainless steel faceplates.

5. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

6. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.13 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 16060 "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding

conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.14 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks,

laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

2.15 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM


equal:



1. iTRACS Corporation, Inc.

2. TelSoft Solutions.

C. Description: Computer-based cable management system, with integrated database capabilities.

D. Document physical characteristics by recording the network, TIA/EIA details, and connections

between equipment and cable.

E. Information shall be presented in database view, schematic plans, or technical drawings.

1. AutoCAD drawing software shall be used as drawing and schematic plans software.

F. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices:

1. Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer.

2. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

E. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the

frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose

frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by

communications service provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Install cables in pathways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and

counters and except in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where

unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal pathways and cables except in unfinished

spaces.

1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings.

2. Comply with requirements in Section 16711 "Pathways for Communications Systems."

3. Comply with requirements in Section 16136 "Cable Trays for Communications

Systems."

B. Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without

exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii.

2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES


B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices."

3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated.

4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point.

5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to

telecommunications outlet/connectors:

a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or

for direct connection to workstation equipment.

b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet from communications

equipment room.

6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations

only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches

and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and

terminals.

8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent

bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling

Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps

shall not be used for heating.

12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end

of cable.

13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull

tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:


2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation:


2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces

with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings

by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart.

3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other

potentially damaging items.

F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors:

1. Install plenum-rated cable only.

2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas.

3. Coil cable 6 feet long not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point.

G. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation:

1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install

corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture.

2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.

H. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



I. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and

data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines

and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.

b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches.



4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall

be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.



5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection"

Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall

allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable

electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG

equipment grounding conductor.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Section 16075 "Electrical Identification."

1. Administration Class: 1.

2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards,

connections, covers, and labels.

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration

Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric

designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects

with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as-

built conditions.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 09912 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For

fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for

Class 2 level of administration[, including optional identification requirements of this standard].

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List

incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with

rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules

for Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point

labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets,

backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions,

horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and

pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish

electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a

cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at

device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within

panel or cabinet.

3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at

intervals not exceeding 15 feet.

4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify

each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-

mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as

shown.

b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label

each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware.

Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling,

use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work

area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that

contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.






representative:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification

markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for

compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for

compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and

patch panels.

3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.

4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent

faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection

blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-

B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in

"Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy

specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords

and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link

test configuration.

5. Optical Fiber Cable Tests:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-

B.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment

manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Horizontal and multimode backbone link measurements: Test at 850 or 1300

nm in 1 direction according to TIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference

Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB.

Attenuation test results shall be less than that calculated according to

equation in TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

6. UTP Performance Tests:

a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to

TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

1) Wire map.

2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements).

3) Insertion loss.

4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.

5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss.

6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT).

7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT).

8) Return loss.

9) Propagation delay.

10) Delay skew.

7. Optical Fiber Cable Performance Tests: Perform optical fiber end-to-end link tests

according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.3.

8. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Section 16785 "Master Antenna

Television System."

9. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems

after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are

installed.

a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect

to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen

and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long

distance, and digital subscription line telephone call.

b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network

installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface

device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection

to the network.

D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report

that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to

the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for [two]

<Insert number> years.

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program

software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion.

Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised

licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow

Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in

cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different

workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and

revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets. Include training in

cabling administration software.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved

City of New Orleans Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System


SECTION 16721 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit.

2. Manual fire-alarm boxes.

3. System smoke detectors.

4. Nonsystem smoke detectors.

5. Heat detectors.

6. Notification appliances.

7. Magnetic door holders.

8. Remote annunciator.

9. Addressable interface device.

10. Digital alarm communicator transmitter.


1. SECTION 280513 "CONDUCTORS AND CABLES FOR ELECTRONIC SAFETY

AND SECURITY" for cables and conductors for fire-alarm systems.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including furnished options and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system.

1. Comply with recommendations and requirements in the "Documentation" section of the

"Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

3. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and locations. Indicate conductor

sizes, indicate termination locations and requirements, and distinguish between factory

and field wiring.

4. Detail assembly and support requirements.

5. Include voltage drop calculations for notification-appliance circuits.

6. Include battery-size calculations.

7. Include input/output matrix.

8. Include statement from manufacturer that all equipment and components have been tested

as a system and meet all requirements in this Specification and in NFPA 72.

9. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector.

10. Verify that each duct detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature,

and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

11. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,

drawn to scale; coordinate location of duct smoke detectors and access to them.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes,

detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators.

b. Show field wiring required for HVAC unit shutdown on alarm.

c. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

12. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable

device. Show size and route of cable and conduits and point-to-point wiring diagrams.

C. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them

to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.

b. NICET-certified, fire-alarm technician; Level IV minimum.

c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For notification appliances and smoke and heat detectors, in

addition to submittals listed above, indicate compliance with performance requirements and

design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer


1. Drawings showing the location of each notification appliance and smoke and heat

detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing

conditions of the device.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of

detection, complying with NFPA 72. Calculate spacing and intensities for strobe signals

and sound-pressure levels for audible appliances.

3. Indicate audible appliances required to produce square wave signal per NFPA 72.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer.


D. Sample warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in SECTION 017200 "PROJECT RECORD DOCS,"

include the following and deliver copies to authorities having jurisdiction:

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



a. Comply with the "Records" section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"

chapter in NFPA 72.

b. Provide "Fire Alarm and Emergency Communications System Record of

Completion Documents" according to the "Completion Documents" Article in the

"Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72.

c. Complete wiring diagrams showing connections between all devices and

equipment.

d. Riser diagram.

e. Record copy of site-specific software.

f. Provide "Inspection and Testing Form" according to the "Inspection, Testing and

Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72, and include the following:

1) Equipment tested.

2) Frequency of testing of installed components.

3) Frequency of inspection of installed components.

4) Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.

5) Manufacturer's user training manuals.

g. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.

h. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit and each

annunciator unit.







A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation

of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm

Level IV technician.

C. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by an NRTL (nationally

recognized testing laboratory).

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

E. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 in the form of a placard by an

FM Global-approved alarm company.

F. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by State Fire Marshalls Office

for the State of Louisiana.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire-alarm system equipment and

components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Extent: All equipment and components not covered in the Maintenance Service

Agreement.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Components shall be compatible

with, and operate as an extension of, existing system. Provide system manufacturer's

certification that all components provided have been tested as, and will operate as, a system.

B. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission and

horn/strobe evacuation.

C. Automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors.

D. All components provided shall be listed for use with the selected system.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:

1. Manual stations.

2. Heat detectors.

3. Smoke detectors.

4. Duct smoke detectors.

5. Carbon monoxide detectors.

6. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.

7. Fire-extinguishing system operation.

8. Fire standpipe system.

9. Dry system pressure flow switch.

10. <Insert alarm-initiating devices and systems>.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.

2. Identify alarm and specific initiating device at fire-alarm control unit.

3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.

4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.

6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.

7. Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.

8. Activate preaction system.

9. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.

10. Activate elevator power shunt trip.

11. Activate emergency lighting control.

12. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

13. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Valve supervisory switch.

2. High- or low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe or pre-action sprinkler system.

3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

4. Loss of communication with any panel on the network.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.

2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices.

3. Loss of communication with any addressable sensor, input module, relay, control

module, or remote annunciator.

4. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.

5. Ground or a single break in internal circuits of fire-alarm control unit.

6. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.

7. Break in standby battery circuitry.

8. Failure of battery charging.

9. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

E. System Supervisory Signal Actions:

1. Initiate notification appliances.

2. Identify specific device initiating the event at fire-alarm control unit and remote

annunciators.

3. After a time delay of 200 seconds, transmit a trouble or supervisory signal to the remote

alarm receiving station.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of




© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



2.4 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide or comparable

product by one of the following:


2. Faraday.



5. GAMEWELL.




9. Notifier.


11. Silent Knight.


C. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with

electronic modules, complying with UL 864.

2. Addressable Initiation Device Circuits: The FACP shall indicate which communication

zones have been silenced and shall provide selective silencing of alarm notification

appliance by building communication zone.

3. Addressable Control Circuits for Operation of Notification Appliances and Mechanical

Equipment: The FACP shall be listed for releasing service.

D. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at



and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 80 characters, minimum.


commands.

E. Initiating-Device, Notification-Appliance, and Signaling-Line Circuits:

1. Pathway Class Designations: NFPA 72, Class B.

2. Pathway Survivability: Level 1.

F. Notification-Appliance Circuit:

1. Audible appliances shall sound in a three-pulse temporal pattern, as defined in NFPA 72.

2. Where notification appliances provide signals to sleeping areas, the alarm signal shall be

a 520-Hz square wave with an intensity 15 dB above the average ambient sound level or

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



5 dB above the maximum sound level, or at least 75 dBA, whichever is greater, measured

at the pillow.

3. Visual alarm appliances shall flash in synchronization where multiple appliances are in

the same field of view, as defined in NFPA 72.

G. Elevator Recall:

1. Elevator recall shall be initiated only by one of the following alarm-initiating devices:

a. Elevator lobby detectors except the lobby detector on the designated floor.

b. Smoke detector in elevator machine room.

c. Smoke detectors in elevator hoistway.

2. Elevator controller shall be programmed to move the cars to the alternate recall floor if

lobby detectors located on the designated recall floors are activated.

3. Water-flow alarm connected to sprinkler in an elevator shaft and elevator machine room

shall shut down elevators associated with the location without time delay.

a. Water-flow switch associated with the sprinkler in the elevator pit may have a

delay to allow elevators to move to the designated floor.

H. Door Controls: Door hold-open devices that are controlled by smoke detectors at doors in

smoke-barrier walls shall be connected to fire-alarm system.

I. Remote Smoke-Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Controls shall select specific addressable

smoke detectors for adjustment, display their current status and sensitivity settings, and change

those settings. Allow controls to be used to program repetitive, time-scheduled, and automated

changes in sensitivity of specific detector groups. Record sensitivity adjustments and

sensitivity-adjustment schedule changes in system memory.

J. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Station: Automatically transmit alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station.

K. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating

devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory and digital alarm

communicator transmitters shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-

supply module rating.

L. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and

automatic transfer switch.

2.5 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES



following:

1. AMSECO - A Potter Brand.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




3. Cooper Wheelock.

4. Faraday.




8. GAMEWELL.




12. Notifier.


14. Silent Knight.


16. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38.

1. Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type; with integral addressable

module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to

fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.6 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS



following:


2. Faraday.



5. GAMEWELL.






11. Notifier.


13. Silent Knight.


15. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.

2. Detectors shall be two-wire type.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved






twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for


5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to



on status.

7. Remote Control: Unless otherwise indicated, detectors shall be digital-addressable type,

individually monitored at fire-alarm control unit for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm

condition.

a. Rate-of-rise temperature characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be selectable at fire-alarm control unit for 15 or 20 deg F per minute.

b. Fixed-temperature sensing characteristic of combination smoke- and heat-detection

units shall be independent of rate-of-rise sensing and shall be settable at fire-alarm

control unit to operate at 135 or 155 deg F.

c. Multiple levels of detection sensitivity for each sensor.

d. Sensitivity levels based on time of day.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:





a. Primary status.

b. Device type.




D. Ionization Smoke Detector:





a. Primary status.

b. Device type.




E. Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.



© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved





a. Primary status.

b. Device type.




3. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with

the supplied detector for smoke detection in HVAC system ducts.

4. Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.



6. Relay Fan Shutdown: Fully programmable relay rated to interrupt fan motor-control

circuit.

2.7 CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS

A. General: Carbon monoxide detector listed for connection to fire-alarm system.


2. Testable by introducing test carbon monoxide into the sensing cell.

3. Detector shall provide alarm contacts and trouble contacts.

4. Detector shall send trouble alarm when nearing end-of-life, power supply problems, or

internal faults.


6. Locate, mount, and wire according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Provide means for addressable connection to fire-alarm system.

8. Test button simulates an alarm condition.

2.8 NONSYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Nonsystem Smoke Detectors:

1. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall be listed as compatible with the fire-alarm equipment

installed or shall have a contact closure interface listed for the connected load.

2. Nonsystem smoke detectors shall meet the monitoring for integrity requirements in

NFPA 72.

B. Single-Station Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 217; suitable for NFPA 101, residential occupancies; operating at 120-

V ac.

2. Auxiliary Relays: One Form C, rated at 0.5 A.

3. Audible Notification Appliance: Piezoelectric sounder rated at 90 dBA at 10 feet

according to UL 464.

4. Visible Notification Appliance: 177-cd strobe.

5. Heat sensor, 135 deg F combination rate-of-rise and fixed temperature.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



6. Test Switch: Push to test; simulates smoke at rated obscuration.

7. Tandem Connection: Allow tandem connection of number of indicated detectors; alarm

on one detector shall actuate notification on all connected detectors.

8. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in

a plug-in module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for


9. Self-Restoring: Detectors shall not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to



on status.

C. Single-Station Duct Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268A; operating at 120-V ac.

2. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver.

a. Detector Sensitivity: Smoke obscuration between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot when

tested according to UL 268A.


twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. The fixed base shall be designed for

mounting directly to air duct. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to

building wiring.

a. Weatherproof Duct Housing Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X; listed for use with

the supplied detector.



5. Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit.

2.9 HEAT DETECTORS



following:


2. Faraday.


4. GAMEWELL.






10. Notifier.


12. Silent Knight.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



14. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

1. Temperature sensors shall test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

C. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature or a rate of rise.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.



D. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature.

1. Mounting: Twist-lock base interchangeable with smoke-detector bases.



2.10 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES



following:

1. Cooper Wheelock.









10. System Sensor.

B. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification-appliance signal

circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated, and with screw terminals for

system connections.

C. Chimes: Vibrating type.

D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating

mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights complying with UL 1971, with clear or

nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is

engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens.

1. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.

2. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.

3. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.

4. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.

2.11 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS

A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with

matching doorplate.

1. Electromagnets: Require no more than 3 W to develop 25-lbf holding force.

2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted unless otherwise indicated.

3. Rating: 24-V ac or dc.

4. Rating: 120-V ac.

B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.

2.12 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

A. Description: Annunciator functions shall match those of fire-alarm control unit for alarm,

supervisory, and trouble indications. Manual switching functions shall match those of fire-alarm

control unit, including acknowledging, silencing, resetting, and testing.

1. Mounting: Surface cabinet, NEMA 250, Type 1.

B. Display Type and Functional Performance: Alphanumeric display and LED indicating lights

shall match those of fire-alarm control unit. Provide controls to acknowledge, silence, reset, and

test functions for alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals.

2.13 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE

A. General:

1. Include address-setting means on the module.

2. Store an internal identifying code for control panel use to identify the module type.


B. Monitor Module: Microelectronic module providing a system address for alarm-initiating

devices for wired applications with normally open contacts.

C. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to elevator controller to initiate elevator

recall and to circuit-breaker shunt trip for power shutdown.


© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




field wiring.

D. Control Module:

1. Operate notification devices.

2. Operate solenoids for use in sprinkler service.

2.14 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and

shall comply with UL 632.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-

alarm control unit and automatically capture two telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for

a remote central station. When contact is made with central station(s), signals shall be

transmitted. If service on either line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall

initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the

remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report

telephone service restoration to the central station. If service is lost on both telephone lines,

transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the

following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available.

2. Programming device.

3. LED display.

4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication.

5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device.

2. Address of the supervisory signal.

3. Address of the trouble-initiating device.

4. Loss of ac supply.

5. Loss of power.

6. Low battery.

7. Abnormal test signal.

8. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 101, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for

installation and testing of fire-alarm equipment. Install all electrical wiring to comply with

requirements in NFPA 70 including, but not limited to, Article 760, "Fire Alarm Systems."

B. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before

making changes or connections.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor.

D. Install wall-mounted equipment, with tops of cabinets not more than 78 inches above the

finished floor.

E. Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes:

1. Install manual fire-alarm box in the normal path of egress within 60 inches of the exit

doorway.

2. Mount manual fire-alarm box on a background of a contrasting color.

3. The operable part of manual fire-alarm box shall be between 42 inches and 48 inches

above floor level. All devices shall be mounted at the same height unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing: Comply with NFPA 72.

G. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they

extend the full width of duct. Tubes more than 36 inches long shall be supported at both ends.

H. Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

Do not install smoke detectors in sprinklered elevator shafts.

I. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a

dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the

alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

J. Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install in a visible location near each smoke detector,

sprinkler water-flow switch, and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal

viewing position.

K. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells

and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind

a grille. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

L. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least

6 inches below the ceiling. Install all devices at the same height unless otherwise indicated.

M. Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



3.2 PATHWAYS

A. Pathways above recessed ceilings and in nonaccessible locations may be routed exposed.

1. Exposed pathways located less than 96 inches above the floor shall be installed in EMT.

B. Pathways shall be installed in EMT.

C. Exposed EMT shall be painted red enamel.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in

smoke partitions, comply with requirements in SECTION 087100 "DOOR HARDWARE."

Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.

1. Verify that hardware and devices are listed for use with installed fire-alarm system before

making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and

systems. Install the interface device less than 36 inches from the device controlled. Make an

addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system

being controlled.

1. Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated HVAC duct systems.

2. Magnetically held-open doors.

3. Electronically locked doors and access gates.

4. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.

5. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.

6. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.

7. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.

8. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.

9. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt-trip breaker.

10. Supervisory connections at fire-extinguisher locations.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground

wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.

B. Ground shielded cables at the control panel location only. Insulate shield at device location.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved




A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect, electrical engineer and authorities having

jurisdiction Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-

authorized service representative:

1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed record Drawings and system

documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,

Preparation" table in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter.

b. Comply with the "Visual Inspection Frequencies" table in the "Inspection" section

of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" chapter in NFPA 72; retain the

"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with the "Test Methods" table in the "Testing" section of the


3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2

requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's


5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of

Completion" in the "Documentation" section of the "Fundamentals" chapter in NFPA 72

and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" section of the "Inspection,


B. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or

replaced devices and appliances.

C. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly,

quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

F. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm

system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms

developed for initial tests and inspections.


A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall include

software support for two years.

© 2018 CDM Smith 6459-93709

All Rights Reserved



C. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version. Install and

program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial

Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system and new or revised licenses for

using software.

1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule access to system and to

upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.
